The COVID-19 RT-PCR Test: How To Mislead All Humanity - Using A “Test” To Lock Down Society + Former Pfizer Science Officer Reveals Great COVID-19 Scam December 31 2020 | From: GlobalResearch / Zerohedge / Mercola / Mercola / Various
It is time for everyone to come out of this negative trance, this collective hysteria, because famine, poverty, massive unemployment will kill, mow down many more people than SARS-CoV-2!
Introduction: using a technique to lock down society. [References may be found within the source articles]
All current propaganda on the COVID-19 pandemic is based on an assumption that is considered obvious, true and no longer questioned:
Positive RT-PCR test means being sick with COVID. This assumption is misleading.
Very few people, including doctors, understand how a PCR test works.
RT-PCR means Real Time-Polymerase Chain Reaction.
In French, it means: Réaction de Polymérisation en Chaîne en Temps Réel.
In medicine, we use this tool mainly to diagnose a viral infection. Starting from a clinical situation with the presence or absence of particular symptoms in a patient, we consider different diagnoses based on tests.
In the case of certain infections, particularly viral infections, we use the RT-PCR technique to confirm a diagnostic hypothesis suggested by a clinical picture.
We do not routinely perform RT-PCR on any patient who is overheated, coughing or has an inflammatory syndrome!
From Sky News Australia: Encouraging This Made it To Air
It is a laboratory, molecular biology technique of gene amplification because it looks for gene traces (DNA or RNA) by amplifying them.
In addition to medicine, other fields of application are genetics, research, industry and forensics.
The technique is carried out in a specialized laboratory, it cannot be done in any laboratory, even a hospital. This entails a certain cost, and a delay sometimes of several days between the sample and the result.
Today, since the emergence of the new disease called COVID-19 (COrona VIrus Disease-2019), the RT-PCR diagnostic technique is used to define positive cases, confirmed as SARS-CoV-2 (coronavirus responsible for the new acute respiratory distress syndrome called COVID-19).
These positive cases are assimilated to COVID-19 cases, some of whom are hospitalized or even admitted to intensive care units.
Official postulate of our managers: positive RT-PCR cases = COVID-19 patients. [1]
This is the starting postulate, the premise of all official propaganda, which justifies all restrictive government measures: isolation, confinement, quarantine, mandatory masks, color codes by country and travel bans, tracking, social distances in companies, stores and even, even more importantly, in schools [2].
This misuse of RT-PCR technique is used as a relentless and intentional strategy by some governments, supported by scientific safety councils and by the dominant media, to justify excessive measures such as the violation of a large number of constitutional rights, the destruction of the economy with the bankruptcy of entire active sectors of society, the degradation of living conditions for a large number of ordinary citizens, under the pretext of a pandemic based on a number of positive RT-PCR tests, and not on a real number of patients.
Technical aspects: to better understand and not be manipulated
The PCR technique was developed by chemist Kary B. Mullis in 1986. Kary Mullis was awarded the Nobel Prize in Chemistry in 1993.
Although this is disputed [3], Kary Mullis himself is said to have criticized the interest of PCR as a diagnostic tool for an infection, especially a viral one.
He stated that if PCR was a good tool for research, it was a very bad tool in medicine, in the clinic [4].
Mullis was referring to the AIDS virus (HIV retrovirus or HIV) [5], before the COVID-19 pandemic, but this opinion on the limitation of the technique in viral infections [6], by its creator, cannot be dismissed out of hand; it must be taken into account!
As the analysis can be performed in real time, continuously, it becomes RT (Real-Time) – PCR, even more efficient.
It can be done from any molecule, including those of the living, the nucleic acids that make up the genes:
DNA (deoxyribonucleic acid)
RNA (Ribonucleic Acid)
Viruses are not considered as “living” beings, they are packets of information (DNA or RNA) forming a genome.
It is by an amplification technique (multiplication) that the molecule sought is highlighted and this point is very important.
RT-PCR is an amplification technique [7].
If there is DNA or RNA of the desired element in a sample, it is not identifiable as such.
This DNA or RNA must be amplified (multiplied) a certain number of times, sometimes a very large number of times, before it can be detected.
From a minute trace, up to billions of copies of a specific sample can be obtained, but this does not mean that there is all that amount in the organism being tested.
Urgent Warning for Humanity: Everbody Must See This Critical Documentary About the COVID-19 Vaccine:
Download the video, so you can upload it everywhere: Facebook, Youtube, Bitchute, etc.
In the case of COVID-19, the element sought by RT-PCR is SARS-CoV-2, an RNA virus [8].
There are DNA viruses such as Herpes and Varicella viruses. The most well known RNA viruses, in addition to coronaviruses, are Influenza, Measles, EBOLA, ZIKA viruses.
In the case of SARS-CoV-2, RNA virus, an additional specific step is required, a transcription of RNA into DNA by means of an enzyme, Reverse Transcriptase.
This step precedes the amplification phase.
It is not the whole virus that is identified, but sequences of its viral genome.
This does not mean that this gene sequence, a fragment of the virus, is not specific to the virus being sought, but it is an important nuance nonetheless:
RT-PCR does not reveal any virus, but only parts, specific gene sequences of the virus.
At the beginning of the year, the SARS-CoV-2 genome was sequenced.
It consists of about 30,000 base pairs. The nucleic acid (DNA-RNA), the component of the genes, is a sequence of bases. In comparison, the human genome has more than 3 billion base pairs.
Teams are continuously monitoring the evolution of the SARS-CoV-2 viral genome as it evolves [9-10-11], through the mutations it undergoes. Today, there are many variants [12].
By taking a few specific genes from the SARS-CoV-2 genome, it is possible to initiate RT-PCR on a sample from the respiratory tract.
For COVID-19 disease, which has a nasopharyngeal (nose) and oropharyngeal (mouth) entry point, the sample should be taken from the upper respiratory tract as deeply as possible in order to avoid contamination by saliva in particular.
All the people tested said that it is very painful [13].
The Gold Standard (preferred site for sampling) is the nasopharyngeal (nasal) approach, the most painful route.
If there is a contraindication to the nasal approach, or preferably to the individual being tested, depending on the official organs, the oropharyngeal approach (through the mouth) is also acceptable. The test may trigger a nausea/vomiting reflex in the individual being tested.
Normally, for the result of an RT-PCR test to be considered reliable, amplification from3 different genes (primers) of the virus under investigation is required.
“The primers are single-stranded DNA sequences specific to the virus. They guarantee the specificity of the amplification reaction." [14]
“The first test developed at La Charité in Berlin by Dr. Victor Corman and his associates in January 2020 allows to highlight the RNA sequences present in 3 genes of the virus called E, RdRp and N.
To know if the sequences of these genes are present in the RNA samples collected, it is necessary to amplify the sequences of these 3 genes in order to obtain a signal sufficient for their detection and quantification." [15].
The essential notion of Cycle Time or Cycle Threshold or Ct positivity threshold [16].
An RT-PCR test is negative (no traces of the desired element) or positive (presence of traces of the desired element).
However, even if the desired element is present in a minute, negligible quantity, the principle of RT-PCR is to be able to finally highlight it by continuing the amplification cycles as much as necessary.
RT-PCR can push up to 60 amplification cycles, or even more!
Here is how it works:
Cycle 1: target x 2 (2 copies)
Cycle 2: target x 4 (4 copies)
Cycle 3: target x 8 (8 copies)
Cycle 4: target x 16 (16 copies)
Cycle 5; target x 32 (32 copies)
Etcetera - exponentially up to 40 to 60 cycles!
When we say that the Ct (Cycle Time or Cycle Threshold or RT-PCR positivity threshold) is equal to 40, it means that the laboratory has used 40 amplification cycles, i.e. obtained 240 copies.
This is what underlies the sensitivity of the RT-PCR assay.
While it is true that in medicine we like to have high specificity and sensitivity of the tests to avoid false positives and false negatives, in the case of COVID-19 disease, this hypersensitivity of the RT-PCR test caused by the number of amplification cycles used has backfired.
This over-sensitivity of the RT-PCR test is deleterious and misleading!
It detaches us from the medical reality which must remain based on the real clinical state of the person: is the person ill, does he or she have symptoms?
That is the most important thing!
As I said at the beginning of the article, in medicine we always start from the person: we examine him/her, we collect his/her symptoms (complaints-anamnesis) and objective clinical signs (examination) and on the basis of a clinical reflection in which scientific knowledge and experience intervene, we make diagnostic hypotheses.
Only then do we prescribe the most appropriate tests, based on this clinical reflection.
We constantly compare the test results with the patient’s clinical condition (symptoms and signs), which takes precedence over everything else when it comes to our decisions and treatments.
Today, our governments, supported by their scientific safety advice, are making us do the opposite and put the test first, followed by a clinical reflection necessarily influenced by this prior test, whose weaknesses we have just seen, particularly its hypersensitivity.
Apart from very special cases such as genetic screening for certain categories of populations (age groups, sex) and certain cancers or family genetic diseases, we always work in this direction: from the person (symptoms, signs) to the appropriate tests, never the other way around.
This is the conclusion of an article in the Swiss Medical Journal (RMS) published in 2007, written by doctors Katia Jaton and Gilbert Greub microbiologists from the University of Lausanne:
“To interpret the result of a PCR, it is essential that clinicians and microbiologists share their experiences, so that the analytical and clinical levels of interpretation can be combined.”
It would be indefensible to give everyone an electrocardiogram to screen everyone who might have a heart attack one day.
On the other hand, in certain clinical contexts or on the basis of specific evocative symptoms, there, yes, an electrocardiogram can be beneficial.
Back to RT-PCR and Ct (Cycle Time or Cycle Threshold).
In the case of an infectious disease, especially a viral one, the notion of contagiousness is another important element.
Since some scientific circles consider that an asymptomatic person can transmit the virus, they believe it is important to test for the presence of virus, even if the person is asymptomatic, thus extending the indication of RT-PCR to everyone.
Are RT-PCR tests good tests for contagiousness? [17]
This question brings us back to the notion of viral load and therefore Ct.
The relationship between contagiousness and viral load is disputed by some people [18] and no formal proof, to date, allows us to make a decision.
However, common sense gives obvious credence to the notion that the more virus a person has inside him or her, especially in the upper airways (oropharynx and nasopharynx), with symptoms such as coughing and sneezing, the higher the risk of contagiousness, proportional to the viral load and the importance of the person’s symptoms.
This is called common sense, and although modern medicine has benefited greatly from the contribution of science through statistics and Evidence-Based Medicine (EBM), it is still based primarily on common sense, experience and empiricism.
No test measures the amount of virus in the sample!
RT-PCR is qualitative: positive (presence of the virus) or negative (absence of the virus).
This notion of quantity, therefore of viral load, can be estimated indirectly by the number of amplification cycles (Ct) used to highlight the virus sought.
The lower the Ct used to detect the virus fragment, the higher the viral load is considered to be (high).
The higher the Ct used to detect the virus fragment, the lower the viral load is considered to be (low).
Thus, the French National Reference Centre (CNR), in the acute phase of the pandemic, estimated that the peak of viral shedding occurred at the onset of symptoms, with an amount of virus corresponding to approximately 108 (100 million) copies of SARS-CoV-2 viral RNA on average (French COVID-19 cohort data) with a variable duration of shedding in the upper airways (from 5 days to more than 5 weeks) [19].
This number of 108 (100 million) copies/μl corresponds to a very low Ct.
A Ct of 32 corresponds to 10-15 copies/μl.
A Ct of 35 corresponds to about 1 copy/μl.
Above Ct 35, it becomes impossible to isolate a complete virus sequence and culture it!
In France and in most countries, Ct levels above 35, even 40, are still used even today!
The French Society of Microbiology (SFM) issued an opinion on September 25, 2020 in which it does not recommend quantitative results, and it recommends to make positive up to a Ct of 37 for a single gene [20]!
With 1 copy/μl of a sample (Ct 35), without cough, without symptoms, one can understand why all these doctors and scientists say that a positive RT-PCR test means nothing, nothing at all in terms of medicine and clinic!
Positive RT-PCR tests, without any mention of Ct or its relation to the presence or absence of symptoms, are used as is by our governments as the exclusive argument to apply and justify their policy of severity, austerity, isolation and aggression of our freedoms, with the impossibility to travel, to meet, to live normally!
There is no medical justification for these decisions, for these governmental choices!
In an article published on the website of the New York Times (NYT) on Saturday, August 29, American experts from Harvard University are surprised that RT-PCR tests as practiced can serve as tests of contagiousness, even more so as evidence of pandemic progression in the case of SARS-CoV-2 infection [21].
According to them, the threshold (Ct) considered results in positive diagnoses in people who do not represent any risk of transmitting the virus!
The binary “yes/no” answer is not enough, according to this epidemiologist from the Harvard University School of Public Health.
“It’s the amount of virus that should dictate the course of action for each patient tested.”
The amount of virus (viral load); but also and above all the clinical state, symptomatic or not of the person!
This calls into question the use of the binary result of this RT-PCR test to determine whether a person is contagious and must follow strict isolation measures.
According to them: “We are going to put tens of thousands of people in confinement, in isolation, for nothing." [22]. And inflict suffering, anguish, economic and psychological dramas by the thousands!
Most RT-PCR tests set the Ct at 40, according to the NYT. Some set it at 37.
“Tests with such high thresholds (Ct) may not only detect live virus but also gene fragments, remnants of an old infection that do not represent any particular danger,” the experts said.
A virologist at the University of California admits that an RT-PCR test with a Ct greater than 35 is too sensitive. “A more reasonable threshold would be between 30 and 35,” she adds.
Almost no laboratory specifies the Ct (number of amplification cycles performed) or the number of copies of viral RNA per sample μl.
Here is an example of a laboratory result (approved by Sciensano, the Belgian national reference center) in an RT-PCR negative patient:
In the NYT, experts compiled three datasets with officials from the states of Massachusetts, New York and Nevada that mention them.
Conclusion?
“Up to 90% of the people who tested positive did not carry a virus.”
The Wadworth Center, a New York State laboratory, analyzed the results of its July tests at the request of the NYT: 794 positive tests with a Ct of 40.
“With a Ct threshold of 35, approximately half of these PCR tests would no longer be considered positive,” said the NYT.
“And about 70% would no longer be considered positive with a Ct of 30! “
In Massachusetts, between 85 and 90% of people who tested positive in July with a Ct of 40 would have been considered negative with a Ct of 30, adds the NYT. And yet, all these people had to isolate themselves, with all the dramatic psychological and economic consequences, while they were not sick and probably not contagious at all.
In France, the Centre National de Référence (CNR), the French Society of Microbiology (SFM) continue to push Ct to 37 and recommend to laboratories to use only one gene of the virus as a primer.
I remind you that from Ct 32 onwards, it becomes very difficult to culture the virus or to extract a complete sequence, which shows the completely artificial nature of this positivity of the test, with such high Ct levels, above 30.
Similar results were reported by researchers from the UK Public Health Agency in an article published on August 13 in Eurosurveillance: “The probability of culturing the virus drops to 8% in samples with Ct levels above 35.” [23]
In addition, currently, the National Reference Center in France only evaluates the sensitivity of commercially available reagent kits, not their specificity: serious doubts persist about the possibility of cross-reactivity with viruses other than SARS-CoV-2, such as other benign cold coronaviruses. [20]
It is potentially the same situation in other countries, including Belgium.
Similarly, mutations in the virus may have invalidated certain primers (genes) used to detect SARS-CoV-2: the manufacturers give no guarantees on this, and if the AFP fast-checking journalists tell you otherwise, test their good faith by asking for these guarantees, these proofs.
If they have nothing to hide and if what I say is false, this guarantee will be provided to you and will prove their good faith.
1. We must demand that the RT-PCR results be returned mentioning the Ct used because beyond Ct 30, a positive RT-PCR test means nothing.
2.
We must listen to the scientists and doctors, specialists, virologists who recommend the use of adapted Ct, lower, at 30. An alternative is to obtain the number of copies of viral RNA/μl or /ml sample. [23]
3.
We need to go back to the patient, to the person, to his or her clinical condition (presence or absence of symptoms) and from there to judge the appropriateness of testing and the best way to interpret the result.
Until there is a better rationale for PCR screening, with a known and appropriate Ct threshold, an asymptomatic person should not be tested in any way.
Even a symptomatic person should not automatically be tested, as long as they can place themselves in isolation for 7 days.
Let’s stop this debauchery of RT-PCR testing at too high Ct levels and return to clinical, quality medicine.
Once we understand how RT-PCR testing works, it becomes impossible to let the current government routine screening strategy, inexplicably supported by the virologists in the safety councils, continue.
My hope is that, finally, properly informed, more and more people will demand that this strategy be stopped, because it is all of us, enlightened, guided by real benevolence and common sense, who must decide our collective and individual destinies.
No one else should do it for us, especially when we realize that those who decide are no longer reasonable or rational.
The RT-PCR test is a laboratory diagnostic technique that is not well suited to clinical medicine.
It is a binary, qualitative diagnostic technique that confirms (positive test) or not (negative test) the presence of an element in the medium being analyzed. In the case of SARS-CoV-2, the element is a fragment of the viral genome, not the virus itself.
In medicine, even in an epidemic or pandemic situation, it is dangerous to place tests, examinations, techniques above clinical evaluation (symptoms, signs). It is the opposite that guarantees quality medicine.
The main limitation (weakness) of the RT-PCR test, in the current pandemic situation, is its extreme sensitivity (false positive) if a suitable threshold of positivity (Ct) is not chosen. Today, experts recommend using a maximum Ct threshold of 30.
This Ct threshold must be informed with the positive RT-PCR result so that the physician knows how to interpret this positive result, especially in an asymptomatic person, in order to avoid unnecessary isolation, quarantine, psychological trauma.
In addition to mentioning the Ct used, laboratories must continue to ensure the specificity of their detection kits for SARS-CoV-2, taking into account its most recent mutations, and must continue to use three genes from the viral genome being studied as primers or, if not, mention it.
Is the obstinacy of governments to use the current disastrous strategy, systematic screening by RT-PCR, due to ignorance?
Is it due to stupidity?
To a kind of cognitive trap trapping their ego?
In any case, we should be able to question them, and if among the readers of this article there are still honest journalists, or naive politicians, or people who have the possibility to question our rulers, then do so, using these clear and scientific arguments.
It is all the more incomprehensible that our rulers have surrounded themselves with some of the most experienced specialists in these matters.
If I have been able to gather this information myself, shared, I remind you, by competent people above all suspicion of conspiracy, such as Hélène Banoun, Pierre Sonigo, Jean-François Toussaint, Christophe De Brouwer, whose intelligence, intellectual honesty and legitimacy cannot be questioned, then the Belgian, French and Quebec scientific advisors, etc., know all this as well.
So? What’s going on? Why continue in this distorted direction, obstinately making mistakes?
Sue Grey & Del Bigtree: December 8 2020
Del Bigtree of Highwire and NZ lawyer and Outdoors Party co-leader Sue Grey, talking about Covid, vaccination, natural ways to enhance immunity, risk management, the Great Barington Declaration, NZs Covid Plan B, human rights, captured science, capture media, people power. Del shares his advice to NZ Prime Minister Jacinda Ardern.
It is not insignificant to reimpose confinements, curfews, quarantines, reduced social bubbles, to shake up again our shaky economies, to plunge entire families into precariousness, to sow so much fear and anxiety generating a real state of post-traumatic stress worldwide, to reduce access to care for other pathologies that nevertheless reduce life expectancy much more than COVID-19! [24]
Is there intent to harm?
Is there an intention to use the alibi of a pandemic to move humanity towards an outcome it would otherwise never have accepted? In any case, not like that!
Would this hypothesis, which modern censors will hasten to label “conspiracy”, be the most valid explanation for all this?
Indeed, if we draw a straight line from the present events, if they are maintained, we could find ourselves once again confined with hundreds, thousands of human beings forced to remain inactive, which, for the professions of catering, entertainment, sales, fairgrounds, itinerants, canvassers, risks being catastrophic with bankruptcies, unemployment, depression, suicides by the hundreds of thousands. [25-26-27-28]
The impact on education, on our children, on teaching, on medicine with long planned care, operations, treatments to be cancelled, postponed, will be profound and destructive.
“We risk a looming food crisis if action is not taken quickly.” [29].
It is time for everyone to come out of this negative trance, this collective hysteria, because famine, poverty, massive unemployment will kill, mow down many more people than SARS-CoV-2!
Does all this make sense in the face of a disease that is declining, over-diagnosed and misinterpreted by this misuse of overly sensitively calibrated PCR tests?
For many, the continuous wearing of the mask seems to have become a new norm.
Even if it is constantly downplayed by some health professionals and fact-checking journalists, other doctors warn of the harmful consequences, both medical and psychological, of this hygienic obsession which, maintained permanently, is in fact an abnormality!
What a hindrance to social relations, which are the true foundation of a physically and psychologically healthy humanity!
Some dare to find all this normal, or a lesser price to pay in the face of the pandemic of positive PCR tests.
Isolation, distancing, masking of the face, impoverishment of emotional communication, fear of touching and kissing even within families, communities, between relatives… Spontaneous gestures of daily life hindered and replaced by mechanical and controlled gestures …
Terrified children, kept in permanent fear and guilt…
All this will have a deep, lasting and negative impact on human organisms, in their physical, mental, emotional and representation of the world and society.
This is not normal!
We cannot let our rulers, for whatever reason, organize our collective suicide any longer.
- Dr Pascal Sacré is a physician specialized in critical care, author and renowned public health analyst, Charleroi, Belgium. He is a Research Associate of the entre for Research on Globalization (CRG)
If you are generally aware, the PCR test is used to amplify small amount of genetic material so as to recognize patterns of DNA by “cycling.” (Also, for RNA virus, the RNA is converted to DNA in order to be detected, it’s just the way the test works)
This is how we have been able to recognize the genomes in Egyptian mummies and Wooly Mammoths. It works because if you amplify and cycle enough times to “grow” legitimate DNA fragments, you get something with with a fair amount of specificity.
What is becoming more and more apparent is that the PCR test was not designed as a diagnostic tool for infection, and really cannot function as one without having a huge amount of false positives, period.
When it comes to COVID, the presence of viral particles picked up by the PCR technique does not and has not been quantitatively linked to an active “symptomatic” infection.
It simply cannot be so, because infection threshold as a result of viral load is different for each patient. It turns out, if you “cycle” over around 25 times, the false positivity of COVID infection starts getting very high.
I and others have explained in blogs how people can be exposed to virus, and mount a simple innate immune response and never know any differently.
When you test these people with very low viral loads, who are not sick, you can find the viral RNA code that is used to “diagnose” if you cycle enough times. The last I read, Labcorp cycles at least 40 times to detect viral genome fragments.
The PCR test was never intended for diagnosis of infection but as a qualitative test for presence of parts of a virus genome. I know there has been some confusion circulating the net about what the inventor Kary Mullis had said about that.
But we walk daily with people who have any number of parts of killer virus or bacterial genomes which one could pick up with a PCR test if one had the specific test for it. Would we claim that that individual was an infected patient? No!
So given all that, PeakProsperity's Chris Martenson explains below, in great details, the answer to the most important question you should ask if you or a loved one gets a positive PCR test result.
“What’s the Cycle Threshold (CT) value for that test?”
Sounds wonky but it’s actually really important to understand. A low CT value means someone is loaded with virus. A high value, oppositely, means less of a viral load.
Beyond a certain level the load is insufficient to either infect someone else or be of any clinical or epidemiological relevance whatsoever.
The problem? Governments all over the country and world are basing their decisions on CT values that are very high. Too high.
Former Pfizer Science Officer Reveals Great COVID-19 Scam
There are currently no excess deaths while cases increase. Data show many deaths - primarily people aged 45 to 65, with equal distribution between the sexes - are mainly due to heart disease, stroke and cancer, which suggests they are excess deaths caused by lack of routine medical care due to the pandemic restrictions.
The PCR test is not a valid diagnostic tool and should not be done on the scale we’re now doing it. The high rate of false positives is only fodder for needless fearmongering.
Virtually no one who is asymptomatic has the live virus, but when you run the test at a cycle threshold over 30, meaning you amplify the viral RNA more than 30 times, you end up with a positive test even if the virus is inactive and noninfectious.
According to Michael Yeadon, Ph.D., a former vice-president and chief scientific adviser of the drug company Pfizer, very few people will need the COVID-19 vaccine as the mortality rate is so low and the illness is clearly not causing excess deaths.
In the video above, British journalist Anna Brees interviews Michael Yeadon, Ph.D., a former vice-president and chief scientific adviser of the drug company Pfizer and founder and CEO of the biotech company Ziarco, now owned by Novartis.
In it, he discusses several concerns, including his belief that widespread PCR testing is creating the false idea that the pandemic is resurging, as the total mortality rate is completely normal.
He also discusses his concerns about COVID-19 vaccine mandates.
Risk Reduction: Real Risk Vs. Relative Risk Explained: It's 0.8% NOT 95% Effective
Currently, rising "cases," meaning positive tests, are again being used as the justification to impose more severe restrictions, including lockdowns and mandatory mask wearing, when in fact positive tests have nothing to do with the actual spread of illness.
According to Yeadon, the U.K. has now tested an estimated 30 million people, or close to half of the population.
"A large number of those tests have been recent," Yeadon says, noting that the definition of a "coronavirus death" in the U.K. is anyone who dies, from any cause, within 28 days of a positive COVID-19 test.
"You cannot have a lethal pandemic stalking the land and not have excess deaths."
- Michael Yeadon, Ph.D.
So, what we're seeing now is a natural death rate - about 1,700 people die each day in the U.K. in any given year, Yeadon says - but many of these deaths are now falsely attributed to COVID-19.
"I'm calling out the statistics, and even the claim that there is an ongoing pandemic, as false," he says.
He challenges anyone who doesn't believe him to seek out any database on total mortality. If you do that, you will find that the daily death count is "absolutely bang-on normal," Yeadon says.
For some months, the death count is actually slightly lower than the average norm over the past five years. And, he adds, "You cannot have a lethal pandemic stalking the land and not have excess deaths."
Lack of Routine Medical Care Is Causing Uptick in Deaths
The slight uptick in deaths that are now being reported simply aren't directly due to COVID-19, he insists.
Data show these deaths - primarily people aged 45 to 65, with equal distribution between the sexes - are mainly from heart disease, stroke and cancer, which suggests they are excess deaths caused by inaccessibility of routine medical care as people are either afraid or discouraged from going to the hospital.
These deaths may be characterized as being COVID related, but that's only because they have been falsely lumped into that category due to false positives being recorded within 28 days of death.
Again, people are being tested very regularly, and the rate of false positives is extremely high.
All hospital patients are also tested upon admission, so when they die - regardless of the cause - they're likely to have a false positive on their record, which then lumps them into the death tally for COVID-19.
“The longer you stay in hospital, the more likely you are to die, obviously," Yeadon says. "You would be released if you were well and improving. So… long-stay patients are both more likely to die statistically, and much more likely to be tested so often that they'll have a false positive test.
That is what I think is happening… It's a convenience for someone playing some macabre game, because I don't think it's an error anymore…
I've spoken to people in [public health] and they're embarrassed that they're not even being allowed to characterize and publish the information you would need to know to work out how useful the test is. That's not being done.."
Yeadon also says he's "sick and tired"of people claiming that immunity against SARS-CoV-2 may wane after a short time, leaving you vulnerable to reinfection.
If you've been ill with COVID-19 and recover, you will have antibodies against the virus, and you will be immune, he says.
He understands that journalists may get this wrong, or may be given incorrect information, but if a scientist says this,"they are lying to you," he says.
Yeadon categorically denies the premise that you can recover from COVID-19 and later get reinfected and experience severe illness again.
According to Yeadon, there are only two ways by which COVID-19 would not provide lasting immunity. The first would be if it destroys your immune system. The HIV virus, for example, which causes AIDS, disarms your immune system, causing permanent impairment. Hence you do not become immune to the HIV virus.
Coronaviruses do not do that.
The second way is if the virus mutates, which is common among influenza viruses. If the virus mutates, your immune system may not fully recognize it and will have to mount a defense again, thereby creating another set of antibodies. However, coronaviruses are genetically stable, Yeadon says.
(For transparency, there have been reports of SARS-CoV-2 mutating,1 so it's not impossible that some people might get reinfected with a slightly mutated version of the virus that might make them sick again.)
As noted by Yeadon, people are now changing the laws of immunology, which simply shouldn't happen. This should not be a political issue, but somehow it is being treated as one. He claims to have no ideas at all as to why these false narratives are being created, and why scientific truth that contradicts the mainstream narrative is being censored.
Others, however, have become more outspoken about this issue, pointing out how the pandemic is being used as a convenient excuse and justification for redistribution of wealth and the technocratic takeover of the whole world under the banner of a Great Reset to a "more equitable" social order and greener commerce.
It's being used to usher in social changes that simply could never be introduced without some sort of calamity, be it war or a biological threat, because they involve a radical limitation of personal freedoms and the elimination of privacy.
Those in charge of pandemic response measures also refuse to take into account the price of these measures.
When making public health decisions, you need to calculate the cost in terms of lives saved and the price in dollars and cents of saving those people, against the cost of not implementing the measure in question.
This is not being done. The question is why is such an illogical stance being taken?
Dr. Sam Bailey: What Is A Covid-19 Case? Dr. Sam starts from scratch and explains what is a Covid-19 case and unravels the web.
Toward the end of the interview, Yeadon addresses the issue of COVID-19 vaccination. Many are nervous about it becoming mandatory, and rightfully so.
Vaccine passports are already being rolled out, and all the indicators point to vaccination becoming a requirement for travel, perhaps even within national borders.
Having spent his career in the pharmaceutical industry, Yeadon fully supports vaccination, believing they prevent large numbers of deaths.
However, when it comes to SARS-CoV-2, he believes the vaccine will only benefit the elderly. For those over 80, a vaccine might give them a few more months of life.
"Nobody else needs this [vaccine]," he says.
“You don't vaccinate a population because 1 in 1 million might have a bad outcome [from the infection]."
He also strongly believes the vaccine must be voluntary:
“It's an appalling … public platform to suggest that the only way we get our lives back is to mass vaccinate the population. Something very smelly is going on. It's simply not appropriate. I don't even think it would work."
In an open letter to the British health minister, Yeadon wrote: 2
“I have read the consultation document. I've rarely been as shocked and upset. All vaccines against the SARS-COV-2 virus are by definition novel. No candidate vaccine has been in development for more than a few months.
If any such vaccine is approved for use under any circumstances that are not EXPLICITLY experimental, I believe that recipients are being misled to a criminal extent.
This is because there are precisely zero human volunteers for whom there could possibly be more than a few months past-dose safety information. My concern does not arise because I have negative views about vaccines (I don't).
Instead, it's the very principle that politicians seem ready to waive that new medical interventions at this, incomplete state of development, should not be made available to subjects on anything other than an explicitly experimental basis. That's my concern.
And the reason for that concern is that it is not known what the safety profile will be, six months or a year or longer after dosing. You have literally no data on this and neither does anyone else.
It isn't that I'm saying that unacceptable adverse effects will emerge after longer intervals after dosing.
No: it is that you have no idea what will happen yet, despite this, you'll be creating the impression that you do…
I don't trust you. You've not been straightforward and have behaved appallingly throughout this crisis.
You're still doing it now, misleading about infection risk from young children.
Why should I believe you in relation to experimental vaccines?"
In his interview with Brees, Yeadon suggests medical professionals, especially those who are members of a professional society, who disagree with further pandemic measures - based on the medical facts - write an open letter to the government, urging them to speak to and heed the recommendations from independent experts.
Arm yourself with mortality statistics and the facts on PCR testing, so you can explain how and why this pandemic simply isn't a pandemic anymore.
First and foremost, there are no excess deaths.
The same number of people have died this year that, on average, have died in previous years. This simply wouldn't be the case if we had a lethal pandemic.
Second, the PCR test is not a valid diagnostic tool and should not be done on the scale we're now doing it.
The high rate of false positives is only fodder for needless fearmongering.
“People should demand to know what [the false positive] rate is," Yeadon says.
Additionally, "testing people who are well - it's just a madcap thing," he says.
Virtually no one who is asymptomatic has the live virus, but when you run the test at a cycle threshold over 30, meaning you amplify the viral RNA more than 30 times, you end up with a positive test even if the virus is inactive and noninfectious.
“Let's get back to the facts," Yeadon says.
"There are no excess deaths. But that's not what you hear from the BBC now, is it? I'm never going to trust the BBC again, by the way. I've watched BBC for 41 years. [They're] never coming back into my ears, because they've lied in my face all year … There's a fraud going on …
You're walking into voluntary house arrest when there are no excess deaths. Why are you doing that? Seriously? … I'm fearful, because it doesn't make any sense and there are no benign outcomes."
It's easy to get so confused that you can no longer think straight these days. As explained by Dr. Peter Breggin, featured in "Psychiatrist Blows the Whistle on Pandemic Fearmongering," when you add uncertainty to fear you end up with anxiety, a state in which you can no longer think logically.
If this applies to you, I urge you to turn off mainstream media news and turn to independent experts, such as Yeadon. Do the research. Read through the science. Reorient yourself to the facts and turn off the propaganda. Next, join a group so that you can have support.
A number of groups have formed around the world that are now rising up against mask mandates, mandatory vaccinations and lockdowns.
A few examples of such groups include:
Us for Them, a group campaigning for reopening schools and protecting children's rights in the U.K.
The COVID Recovery Group (CRG), founded by 50 conservative British MPs to fight lockdown restrictions3
In the U.S., a team of attorneys, doctors, business owners and parents started the Freedom to Breathe Agency, which is fighting to protect freedom and liberty
Additional sources of information and groups fighting for truth and transparency that are worth checking out include:
The Great Barrington Declaration,4 which calls for an end to lockdowns. As of November 18, 2020, it had been signed by 34,973 medical practitioners, 12,070 medical and public health scientists, and 634,838 concerned citizens5
Robert F. Kennedy Jr.'s The Defender, a new newsletter that publishes "banned" news
The German COVID-19 Extra-Parliamentary Inquiry Committee (ACU2020.org), which is launching an international class-action lawsuit against a long list of authorities over the global pandemic response
In Spain, more than 600 doctors have formed Doctors for the Truth (Medicos por la verdad)
In the U.S., doctors have formed a group called America's Frontline Doctors, which is fighting to make hydroxychloroquine available across the nation
Psychiatrist Blows The Whistle On Pandemic Fearmongering
There’s an entire school of research within public health on how to frighten people, known as “fear appeal”. Fear appeal is based on the premise that to successfully implement a public health measure, you must first highlight a threat.
And, to work, the threat must be made personal, so that people fear for their personal safety.
Examples during the COVID-19 pandemic include not leaving your house, wearing a mask, staying 6 feet apart, closing certain businesses and keeping children home from school.
In the future, we can expect to be told we must get vaccinated and digitally tracked before we can resume life as normal.
By adding confusion to the mix, you can bring an individual from fear to anxiety - a state of confusion in which you can no longer think logically. In this state, you are more easily manipulated.
Melbourne teenager is choked unconscious and thrown to the floor like a rag doll by hotel security, for not wearing a mask. #TheNewNormalpic.twitter.com/cZFdDmUvhG
Eventually, when the fear and anxiety are great enough, desperation sets in, at which point people are willing to do just about anything to get relief.
Dr. Peter Breggin, a psychiatrist, has written more than a dozen bestselling books on psychiatry and the drug industry.
He's frequently referred to as "the conscience of psychiatry" because he was able to successfully reform the psychiatric profession, abolishing lobotomies and other harmful experimental psychosurgeries.
This past year, he's homed in on COVID-19 and the fears around it, which is the topic of this interview.
He also started researching the history of Dr. Anthony Fauci, who has been the face of the White House Coronavirus Task Force, learning more than he bargained for in the process.
“He just looked like this kindly gentleman, until I started to listen to what he was saying and to look into what he was doing," Breggin says. "In early April, [my wife] Ginger brought this scientific article to me and said, 'Honey, this looks like it's impossible, it's fake or something.'
It was a 2015 article by a big team from North Carolina [led by] Ralph Baric,1 He's the final author on it and the power behind it, although the lead author is Vineet D. Menachery.2 This article is talking about making a coronavirus that's going to be a new epidemic agent. They're talking about it. They've actually accomplished it - and it's a SARS coronavirus.
It's a virus that will infect the lungs that comes from bats … And they're checking it out and they find that it will infect human lung epithelium. They give it to mice and the older mice are getting very sick and ones that are compromised die.
It sounds … [like] the precursor of SARS-CoV-2. They even tried, by the way, to make a vaccine for it and they couldn't. And I'm thinking, 'My God, what's going on here?'
And then I look down the line of all these authors. There are [two] Chinese names there … and they list themselves as being from the Wuhan Institute of Virology.
And then I look who's funding it. Well, China is funding it.
And Fauci is funding it from the National Institute of Allergy and Infectious Diseases. I'm thinking to myself, 'My God, we're giving the Chinese a biomedical weapon' … [The two Chinese authors] turn out to be two of the very, very top Chinese people in this, what is essentially a military lab.
The Wuhan Institute, nothing like that is anything but military in China.."
Dr. Francis Boyle Darpa's Biowarfare Weapon Vaccine Will Kill People
Bioweapons policy expert Dr. Francis Boyle joins The Alex Jones Show to break down the past experience with similar bioweapon vaccines that killed recipients, and how they are repeating the same mistake with the Covid vaccine.
What Is Fauci's Role in the Bio-Assault on the World?
Breggin claims he was able to share the information with someone close to President Trump, and three days after sharing this finding, the president canceled the U.S.-Chinese research collaboration that was working on coronavirus gain-of-function research.
However, Fauci quickly took hold of the American research efforts and in October 2020 injected additional funding.
Some of that funding will surely still end up in China, Breggin says, by way of the EcoHealth Alliance, which for years has subcontracted research work to the Wuhan Institute.
Fauci also gave additional money to the University of Texas. Breggin explains:
“In Galveston, there is a Level 4 biosafety lab that can work with the most dangerous viruses. So, I decided to look into this. It's not great magic to it, you have to use some search engines like DuckDuckGo. I [searched for] 'China' and 'the Galveston Institute,' and I got … a press release ... bragging about their relationships with the Wuhan Institute, working on viruses.
So, no wonder he's sending them money. I start digging deeper and I come across a letter from the education department to the University of Texas, saying they've not been forthcoming about their connections to China and the Communist Party (CCP), and in particular from the institute in Galveston.
So, I'm looking at this network of connections with China. They list them all. We have a blog out about that too now. And I realized there's nothing stopping Fauci. Absolutely nothing is stopping him. He is going to carry on his assault on the world. And Fauci knew that the Wuhan Institute was unsafe."
Breggin delves into some of the backstory that helps explain what's been happening.
In 2014, then-President Obama called for a moratorium on gain-of-function research [making harmless viruses virulent] in the U.S. He did not, however, mention collaborations with the CCP. To get around Obama's moratorium, Fauci outsourced the gain-of-function research to the Wuhan Institute.
Based on the evidence, which Breggin details in a recent report featured in "Fauci's Treacherous Ties to China and Globalists," Fauci appears to play an important role in the global takeover by technocrats.
Technocracy is an economic system in which the world is ruled not by democratically elected politicians but by technocrats - a conglomerate of ultra-wealthy elites, scientists and technicians whose aim is to rule the global population and the allocation of resources through the use of technology.
Breggin was asked to be the medical legal expert in a lawsuit to put a stop to the never-ending emergency edict by the governor of Ohio. In his medical legal brief,3 Breggin detailed why shutdowns aren't working, and the harm they inflict on the population.
This lawsuit has also stirred up other anti-lockdown projects around the U.S. You can find more information about all of this on Breggin.com.
It's important to recognize that the primary tool that enables local and state leaders to implement unconstitutional mandates such as universal mask wearing, business shut-downs and draconian stay-at-home orders is fear.
Unless people are terrified, they won't agree to such freedom-robbing edicts. This is a well-known fact, and as noted by Breggin, there's an entire school of research within public health on how to frighten people, known as "fear appeal."
“What an odd name: Fear appeal. It's a euphemism for scaring people to death. That's how you 'appeal' to them. And it's a very long standing [field of research].
The particular article [Ginger and I] studied together made several points. It said, first, you have to not only create something or have something that people are afraid of in order to get your public health measures imposed, but you have to make it personal to them, you have to make them afraid personally.
Then you have to give them something immediate to do to begin cooperating with the plans that you have. We have many examples of that.
Things to immediately do [are]: Don't leave the house; wear a mask; stay 6 feet apart; start closing down businesses and so on. Don't let your kids go to school and on and on…
That got me into looking more deeply at the whole question of public health. And public health, sad to say, is essentially a totalitarian model.
It does not raise issues of collateral damage, it doesn't raise issues of the Bill of Rights, the constitution, of liberty, the right to people to die with their boots on, the American tradition of individuals and their own communities making decisions.
There is no such concept. It starts with the assumption that what public health officials think is true and must be applied regardless of the context. And we see this with this globalism.
It doesn't matter whether you're working in Africa or in Communist China, North Vietnam or America, these are the principles, they're about politics above everything.
It's quite astounding. So, [public health] became something that was perfectly usable by the most extreme totalitarianism…
At the top is extraordinarily wealthy and powerful people and organizations.
I see it as a kind of a cooperative but competing group that welcomed Communist China, which shows how little these people - like Fauci and the World Bank and our governments in the Western world - worry about anything except wealth and power.
Once they invited Communist China into this circle, China became a big, big player along these world predators and let each other be.
Until Trump came along, no major figure stood up and said, 'No, no, we're going to go back to the [way things were]."
Dr. Wakefield: A Stark Warning About What an MRNA so Called 'Vaccine' Will Actually do: Genetic Engineering
Fear is undoubtedly one of the most powerful motivating emotions for individuals, and the single most powerful intervention capable of controlling an entire population.
It's certainly hard to miss that fear has been used to control the masses during the COVID-19 pandemic.
“By adding confusion to the mix, you can bring an individual from fear to anxiety, a state of confusion in which you cannot think straight anymore."
Governments now have access to incredibly sophisticated technologies, including artificial intelligence and machine learning, which is being used for all it's worth to push this fear propaganda.
The end goal is to push us into a state of helplessness, so that they can come in and "rescue" us. For decades, Breggin has studied learned helplessness and its remedies.
“When we're born, we're fundamentally helpless. All we can do to be taken care of is to express pain, we can cry, we can wiggle, we can express suffering. But we have no ability to take control of the environment other than by hopefully attracting our caregivers that cuddle us or look for a thorn in the side or whatever.
And that remains an aspect of humanity. That never leaves us. All of us can at some point be made to feel helpless again. And when we feel helpless, we become like the infant. We feel we have to be saved, basically.
We look to other people, we look to drugs, alcohol, we look to authoritarian religions, we look to leaders of all kinds."
As explained by Breggin, by adding confusion to the mix, you can bring an individual from fear to anxiety, a state of confusion in which you cannot think straight anymore.
One of the characteristics of a panic attack or an anxiety attack is the loss of the ability to think. You become helpless and confused.
Eventually, desperation sets in, at which point people are willing to do just about anything to get relief.
“So this, folks, is a web of fear," Breggin says.
"It's all about scaring us, confusing us, making us helpless. I recently wrote a chapter that I may or may not put it in the book about my 85 years of looking at fear, because I was alive during World War II.
I went down to the beach when I was 4 or 5 years old and would find remnants of our sailors' life rafts where they sunk right off the water's edge.
We were afraid of bombs called blockbusters, we hid under the tables and chairs and whatever we could find in school desks for fear of blockbusters. I went through the horrors of the polio [epidemic]. My closest friend died of polio two days after I was wrestling with him. I know fear, I know epidemics … the Vietnam War … 9/11.
And never until Fauci… have I seen leaders say 'Be afraid.'
I couldn't believe it when they found a comment made in private by Trump that he wanted to reassure and not scare the people. That was his supposed villainousness - not wanting to scare people.
That's what Roosevelt did, that's what every single person has done in great moments of crisis - they have said 'Let us not be afraid,' because we all know that a country that is unafraid and is doing as much of its normal activity as possible, is the strongest possible country.
That's an actual public health principle - that we function best when we are living a normal life, unafraid, and we have ideals and goals like American liberty and freedom to strive for."
So, just what happens in your body when you experience fear? Importantly, it "quite literally scrambles our brains," Breggin says.
The good news is you have the power to control your mind and to calm down. The bad news is you don't think you have any control over your mind.
“Anxiety overwhelms us, it makes us stupid, it makes us desperately want somebody to take over. But what we need is somebody who says you don't have anything to fear, the anxiety won't kill you; [someone who] will calm you down and tell you everything's going to be fine, you don't have to be helpless.
But we are getting the exact opposite message from Biden and Fauci… The pharmaceutical industry and the very wealthy need this fear because they're making a fortune on this fear… getting all their drugs and vaccines ready."
The Antidotes to Corruption Are Reason, Love and Liberty
Realizing the depth of the scientific corruption was part of why Breggin and his wife, Ginger, decided to take on this whole new field of investigation.
“We knew we had the research expertise and the scientific expertise. And I've got so many published books and scientific articles that I don't think anybody can doubt I'm a researcher and a scientist," he says.
"It was so mind-blowing to see the degree of corruption. I actually imagined standing in front of God, explaining why I didn't do anything. That didn't fly very well. I think the best antidote to looking at all this corruption is, first of all, to know this world has always been a corrupt place…
So, we need to learn to keep our own free will intact, and to love. We need reason and love. We can reason, we can love and respect the liberty of other people. Those are my three key words in life: Reason, love and liberty… You want to overcome your helplessness, [and you] do that with reason."
Educating and supporting others are other strategies that can be helpful. Investigate things for yourself, and then share what you've learned with others.
The way out of helplessness is to be of service to others, to contribute in some way. As noted by Breggin:
“We need to buckle up at this point and really see ourselves as an example of succeeding in the face of all this, and to spread it however far and wide we can… We weren't promised an easy life.
There's just no place that I know of that is a mammoth promise of an easy life. Life is difficult. Right now, I think the single most important thing is not the virus, it's saving freedom in America. [Read: The West]
One of the things I want to say to the progressive folks - and for a good chunk of my life, I was a very strong progressive - most of you are idealists, most of you would like to see the improvement of mankind. But that is not what's going on in the world right now …
It is not about being a conservative, it is not about being a progressive. We are dealing with international predators that are just as happy to work with Iran, or North Korea, or North Vietnam or China.
They are only interested in wealth and power. They have no real deep commitment to progressivism or capitalism. And… they haven't got the slightest interest in free enterprise. Bill Gates is not a figure of free enterprise.
You got to get this straight. These people are not for liberty. This entire powerful international movement that I'm calling predatory globalists are motivated by wealth and power. They have reached the pinnacles of power, which are always corrupting.
Bill Gates has three people on his board of trustees: Himself, his wife and Warren Buffett —- the No. 2 and No. 4 wealthiest people in the world. This is power beyond imagination.
They are not wedded to anything except power and wealth. Wealth is a way to [power] and they're using technocrats to do this."
I agree with Breggin that the most important thing right now is to recognize that what we're facing is an acute challenge to our society, our culture, that must be faced head-on.
We need to aid our fellow human beings as best as we can with information, knowledge, that the conventional mainstream media is not telling them.
In fact, mainstream media are a significant part of the problem, because they're being used as a tool to implement the technocrats' agenda.
For this reason, it has become imperative to seek out other channels of information, most of which are becoming progressively more censored and harder to find.
To stay on top of Breggin's investigations, be sure to sign up for newsletter alerts on his website, breggin.com. He also has a radio and TV show that airs once a week. On his website, you'll also find links to Breggin's report4 on Fauci's CCP connections, titled "Dr. Fauci's COVID-19 Treachery," and his legal report,5 "COVID-19 & Public Health Totalitarianism: Untoward Effects on Individuals, Institutions and Society."
Also see Dr. Breggin's YouTube Channel with many videos about COVID-19, including the September 2020 video, "US and China Collaborated to Make a Deadly Virus," with 56,600 views.6
Loneliness - The Dilemma Of The Awakening Mind
December 30 2020 | From: WakingTimes Today I wish to address to you a certain brand of loneliness. It is perhaps the most debilitating form of the condition. The state is sometimes referred to as “isolation” or the sense of being disconnected, apart, abandoned or simply “different” from everyone else you know.
This situation is compounded when friends, coworkers and even family members begin seeing you differently.
They’re not so much intrigued by your positive changes but rather disappointed by your shift in attitude and may even be concerned for your mental stability. These otherwise well-meaning souls are occasionally characterized as the “sleeping” and you may very well be part of the “awakening.”
The Awakening Mind
I say “awakening” because the experience appears to be very dynamic and fluid by nature. I’m not sure I would recognize or even fully appreciated an “awake” mind for they are far and few between us. But for those who are experiencing various stages of wakening, you are as visible to me as I am to you.
Generally speaking, the awakening mind radiates at a much different and “higher” vibration than most other people. Since this “vibration” wants to resonate harmonically with similar or complimentary energies, it can (and often does) resonate with like-minded people.
It can, however, just as easily create discord with those who resonate at a much lower vibration. Just imagine striking a non-complimentary note on separate pianos, especially with one out of tune. That’s the discord I’m referring to, except in this case, the resonance resides within the psychic and spiritual realms.
I speak in terms of “higher” and “lower” vibrations without truly qualifying what is meant by that. First off, there is no state superior to another. Like changing stations on a radio dial YOU choose the station you need (or want) to be on. Most people are tuned to what I consider to be a limited awareness.
This does not make them any less sublime or capable as Humans. This is merely the channel they are “tuned” to and as such they are acclimated with that world.
This vibrational density is impressive in its own right for it has the power to generate fantastic illusions so convincing that even the conscious mind can fully buy into it.
This ability to manifest a false paradigm and to believe it to be true requires considerable power. But you, my dear reader, may have peeked behind the proverbial projector screen and have seen an assembly of gears and levers and perhaps even a portly, unassuming little man attending them with due diligence.
The awakening mind - now that’s a different story. The higher vibration of this mind-body state allows a more commanding view. Like stepping up a ladder, you can look down and see (though not really live) the dynamics of the lower vibrations.
Each step up the ladder requires tremendous courage, an open and curious mind and a high degree of “functional” intelligence. Those steps command effort -much more effort than what most are willing to exert. Sleepers may go so far as to observe or even stumble over this hypothetical “ladder” and still not recognize what it is or how they may benefit from it.
People on the lower rungs of the ladder rarely look up. They choose to frequently look “down” which may give them a false sense of superiority or dominion over their world.
They are especially prone to the hypnotic suggestion television creates and may even go so far as to “act out” various fictional characters or their favorite professional athlete. The lower state is easily entertained- and anything or anyone who challenges their status quo will be dismissed as an outsider, a misfit or a threat.
The Slide and Adrenalin
I have alluded to a ladder- but now I would like for you to imagine a slide. Going “up” the slide takes some effort. You must go up the steps, higher and higher until you reach the top.
One may then position themselves in such a manner so to enjoy the ride downward. This downward “thrill” is brief but exhilarating. The slide provides a good physical example of going from a higher state to a lower state and the ensuing thrill from moving in this downward fashion.
There are also many examples of the slide analogy within the spiritual realm. Turn on any news station and you will soon be bombarded with “energy dropping” stories that create a sort of “rush” – a rush that, curiously enough, is habit forming. These news sources often report stories of tragedy and high drama.
So severe are these stories they actually can cause the body to produce an adrenalin related “rush” or high. Once again we find ourselves “sliding” down that imaginary slide and into a lower vibrational state.
The “mainstream” news networks have created legions of adrenalin junkies. The “sleepers” are their primary target.
During the course of their day, the sleepers gradually build their energy level back up. But soon they find themselves back on that hypothetical slide and are sent swooshing down once again into a lower energy state.
It’s a vicious, repeating cycle that keeps the sleepers fast asleep and drunk happy on adrenalin.
Many readers of Rattleberry Pie have stayed on top of the ladder long enough to take in the view. They’ve recognized that the view is more exhilarating than the fall.
They saw many things up there - things that would be hard to describe to those below.
The awakening mind continues to build “steps” higher and higher, and soon they are peeking above the clouds. Now they look down from this lofty position and see the tiny dot that was their slide.
They are amazed by how that relatively insignificant slide inspired them to move higher. Sliding down from this cloud level height is really no longer an option, at least not in the traditional sense.
Here is yet another dilemma of the awakening mind. Once you have experienced the process of awakening there really is no going back. The one (down) side is the higher you get, the more rarefied the air becomes.
Loneliness can settle in. The awakening mind is an exceptionally vibrant mind that requires considerable stimulation and camaraderie. But it’s lonely up there. Indeed.
Final Thought
The awakening experience is truly a gift. It’s is not for the weak or the meek. It takes much strength and courage to achieve these higher levels of enlightenment.
Those who are awakening come in all sizes and shapes – many are the so-called Indigo’s, the Crystal’s, or essentially any Human that realizes their personal power and potential and that there is much more to this world than they’ve been told.
One may ponder if those in the process of awakening have a moral obligation to try and wake the sleepers. From my own observation and experience I would advise against this. Simply let them sleep. The best way to reach them is over time. Be gentle and incremental in your approach.
This is the same technique the “powers that be” have used on you - that was until you saw a little “string” that connected to other strings that held the tapestry of the matrix in place.
So be an example. Radiate with love and truth. Project health, exuberance and happiness. Be aware without being angry (easier said than done).
The sleepers must see the higher steps of the ladder as being worth the effort. They may someday abandon the rush of the fall for the beauty of the view.
Just by virtue of being aware you are already contributing in a vast and energetic way to those around you. They “sense” your vibration and may try to resonate with you some day. You have been given “eyes to see” and “ears to hear” so you have been blessed.
Yes, until others begin to see as you do the loneliness - the isolation can feel very real at times.
Let me remind you that you are not alone. We feel you out there - we are grateful for your presence and we love you so very, very much.
Who Is QAnon? An Introduction To The QAnon Phenomenon #QAnon #GreatAwakening
December 29 2020 | From: NeonRevolt / Various You’ve just heard the term “QAnon” – maybe from a friend, from a relative, a post on social media, maybe a billboard on the roadside – heck, by the time you’re reading this, the Mainstream media might even be talking about this mysterious individual only know to as “QAnon.”
But regardless of where you first heard the name, you want to know more.
And I wish I could help you. I really do. But the problem is, if I just come out and say it… it’s probably going to be really hard to believe anything I have to say, even if you are politically aligned with me.
Why? Because the information Q presents requires such a dramatic paradigm shift, such a radical realignment of any and all presuppositions you had about the state of the world, because it requires such a prerequisite level of knowledge to truly understand, it is often easier to just dismiss it outright and avoid any pesky cognitive dissonance that would otherwise emerge altogether.
See, I myself – as well as my long-time readers – have had the benefit of having eight whole months to digest the 1600+ posts that Q has given us over that same period. The sheer size and scope and depth of the information is hard to process in a day, let alone eight months. If I just come out and say it, you probably won’t believe me.
Not that my goal is to have you believe me. No, no, no – don’t misunderstand me here. My goal in writing this is not to convince anyone.
Knowing what I know, I believe there will come a point when no matter what you currently believe, you will be forced by certain events to accept everything I’m about to explain.
Just a quick preface before we begin. Part of the reason I wrote this was because, well, we’re all expecting the internet to go down at a certain point as part of the take down of the Cabal.
This article is designed to be something of a lifeline, and it may just be something you’ll want to print out and share with friends, or those who are new to QAnon and looking for more information.
My goal here is to bring you up to a somewhat serviceable level of knowledge to help you understand what’s happening during what will undoubtedly be a volatile, confusing time.
And already, I can hear some readers getting frustrated with me. “Just come out and say it! Give us the goods!”
Alright. Alright, fine. But don’t be surprised if you feel a bit incredulous after reading this:
The world has long been held hostage by a group of power-brokers I have collectively labelled “The Cabal.” They sit in seats of power around the world, making sure they control governments, wars, money flow, and even the lives of individuals like you and me.
They see us as disposable pawns, a sort of natural resource they can spend at will, and this Cabal seeks to grow and expand its power every single day through all sorts of subversive action, be it class strife, fomenting economic instability, or sending us to die in foreign lands under the guise of patriotism and duty.
The Cabal is not entirely monolithic, but features many different branches. Despite this, they work together and their goals are much the same: the destruction of the West by any and all means, and the creation of a global mega-state.
A large portion of The Cabal are members of a Secret Society that is little more than a Neo-Babylonian Death Cult, and the higher you advance in the cult, the more mutual blackmail is required of you.
You see, the higher ranking members want the ability to destroy the lower ranking members at any time should they step out of line and attempt to challenge the authority of the higher ranking members.
This is achieved through several means, but recording individuals in honeypots, pedophilic acts, and participation in human sacrifice are the primary ways in which this is achieved.
That’s not to say this is done against the will of the individuals being blackmailed. Often, they are willing participants in all this, and enjoy performing these kinds of evil deeds.
Such is the face of depravity.
Hillary and Obama are two such members of this Cabal, and though they were high ranking, they are not top dogs (and certainly not since HRC’s failed presidential run in 2016).
That day cost them so much power and influence they didn’t even know what to do. Remember – Hillary didn’t even give a concession speech that night. That was because they never expected her to lose.
Together, as we’ve since learned from the Q drops, they were plotting the complete destruction of the USA (and Russia). And I don’t mean that in some esoteric sense of empires collapsing, balkanizing, and coalescing into new states across time, like the murmurations of flocks of birds across the sky.
No, I quite literally mean nuclear war, mass drought, disease, and food shortages. I’m talking roving death squads in the streets. The goal was to wipe out two of the biggest threats to the Cabal by making them fight each other, and rule over a fragmented, atomized, neo-Fascist global mega-state, made up of whatever was left over (mostly Europe, the Middle East, Africa, parts of Asia, South America, and Australia).
Remember when I said don’t be surprised if you feel incredulous when reading this?
And yet this is exactly what we’ve learned over the past 8 months (as of this writing) by listening to Q. This, in particular, is something he’s called the 16 Year Plan to Destroy America.
And when you start reading the Q drops, you come to understand that this was exactly the Cabal’s plan for years, going back decades.
Obama was a Manchurian President, groomed from his youth as a subversive agent of the Muslim Brotherhood, and Hillary; she is a literal practicing witch, who once had three “dining” rooms named after her on Epstein’s Pedophile Island – the same island where, until recently, stood a sacrificial temple to Babylonian fertility gods like Ba’al and Minerva.
And I call them “dining” rooms because… they weren’t eating anything you’d find in a normal supermarket. No, these people are pedovores, and they are profoundly sick and twisted.
Hey – I tried to warn you this was going to be a hard redpill to swallow. What happens when you read Q is you quickly learn that almost everything you think you know about the world is wrong. It’s more than just wrong. It’s a deliberate lie, made to perpetuate the power of this Cabal.
And again – I’m not particularly interested in trying to convince you here – because at a certain point, undeniable proofs will make their way to the public – such as the photo of Obama holding an AK-47, while dressed in full Muslim garb, and shooting what Q calls “red, white, and blue” (but which is probably a person, and not just a flag – though that last bit is just speculation on my part, and it very well may end up being something like a flag).
Furthermore, Q lays out very clearly how all these scandals – like Uranium 1, like the Iran Deal, like the Paris Accord, like the North Korea situation – all tie into this plan to this 16 year plan, and once you truly grasp what he is saying, you come to understand the sheer level of subversion and evil that has been hidden from Americans for many decades – and conversely, how great things can yet still become once this evil is purged from our lands.
There’s so much to Q, it’s hard to sum up in any one essay. In fact, you would need a book to do it all justice (and that’s exactly what I’m attempting to write, at the moment, believe it or not).
But maybe I’m getting ahead of myself here. Maybe I need to back this train up for a moment and answer some rudimentary questions as best I can, as someone who was been watching, studying and interacting with this whole QAnon phenomenon since the beginning.
So let’s start with the most elementary question of them all:
Who is Q?
QAnon, often called just “Q,” is someone with Q-Level security clearance and a history of Military Intelligence working within the Trump administration to disseminate information to the American people directly.
As for the specific identity of Q – no one really knows for sure (save for a few people in the actual Trump administration).
And while I just kind of implied that Q is an individual, in fact, it’s clear that Q works with a team of individuals in the intelligence community, and there may be more than one person on that team posting as Q.
Where Does Q Post?
Q originally posted on an imageboard known as 4chan, starting back in October of 2017, notably on the /pol/ board (aka, Politically Incorrect).
/pol/ was a major hub of operations during the Trump campaign, disseminating Trump memes at high velocity, and directly influencing the election in very tangible ways. There was even an occasion when Trump himself came online and spoke to the Anons there (oh, that was a glorious day).
(And while I may be spoiling part of my book here, I’ll be cutting up a larger infographic to make this flow a bit better for this article – because you absolutely need to see this).
So Anon notes a Trump retweet of a Pepe Account:
Someone claiming to be Trump comes in and says:
Anon asks for proof:
Click on the image above to view a larger version in a new window
And proof was delivered:
And basically NO ONE in the MSM covered ANY of this. This is far from the only example of this kind of thing happening, but the important thing to remember is that this was happening DURING the election, and unless you were THERE, on the boards, you didn’t have any clue this kind of communication was happening.
So why did Q select this platform?
Because it was one of the last mediums of truly free-speech online. Much like the Newsgroups of a bygone internet age, 4chan was a rowdy, unruly bastion of free speech organized by topic of interest.
Often referred to as the “underbelly of the internet” (usually by those who don’t understand the culture), anyone could come here and say exactly what they wanted – unlike on regulated, policed, and sanitized platforms like Facebook, Twitter, etc.
If some mouthbreathing goon working in a spare storage a closet at Twitter doesn’t like your tweet for whatever reason, he can take it down, disable your account, and effectively silence you. And make no mistake, that kind of censorship was, and still is, rampant across these controlled platforms. It’s even happened to yours truly.
Not so on the chans. ANYONE can post and speak their mind whenever they want. Because of this, you tend to get a crowd of people who not only have a thick skin, but have a certain kind of intellectual rigor not found among the general public.
Everyone who posts on a chan is Anonymous (unless they choose to identify themselves), and therefore, when going back and forth in conversation, users will refer to other users as “Anons.”
Because Q signed all his posts “Q,” he became QAnon.
After an initial wave of posts, and increasing curiosity from the community, opposing forces started to disrupt Q’s threads. Shilling increased dramatically, and it took such a turn that eventually, it came out that all the moderators of the /pol/ board had been compromised by the Deep State, and that the platform itself was no longer suitable for Q to post any more drops.
Working quickly, Q and his team migrated to 8chan, which, as you can imagine by the name, is very similar to 4chan in terms layout and functionality.
See, these kinds of imageboards run on very similar software stacks, so it’s relatively easy to start your own “chan” website and build something very similar. 4chan and 8chan are the largest of the chans.
Followers of Q quickly got their own boards, Q adopted a “tripcode,” which is a way of preserving and verifying his identity, and (barring some moderator drama and other minor technical speedbumps) the movement kicked into high gear from here.
(A final word of caution about the chans: While you can go there and seek out the relevant Q boards for yourself, I wouldn’t recommend it if you’re brand new to all this.
On top of them being purposefully hard to use (in order to keep the “normies” out) you might end up seeing things you might otherwise not wish to see.
Remember how I said these platforms are free-speech forums? That means that literally anyone can post just about anything – and that means bad actors, too, attempting to derail researchers with all manner of pornography, gore, shilling, etc.
If you’re not seasoned and somewhat desensitized to internet culture, you probably walk away feeling a bit sick. Best to leave it to the weaponized autists, who can filter this kind of stuff with ease, and seek out information on other sites – which, we’ll get to in a bit).
How Does Q Communicate?
I’m assuming that, if you’re reading this, you’ve seen at least a few of Q’s posts – even if you didn’t fully understand what they mean. And that’s fine; for our purposes right now, all you really need is a bare minimum of exposure to Q. (And even if you don’t have that, don’t worry – that’s coming later in the article).
If Q is who he says he is (Military Intelligence – which, for those who don’t know, is an intelligence agency akin to the FBI, or CIA, only not corrupt) this implies he has access to a ton of intel beyond what the average American citizen has. This intel is of course classified, and therefore subject to all kinds of National Security laws.
However, this does not stop the average person from being able to make connections on their own; connections which mirror what that intel has to say.
This leads to a Socratic style of posting, where Q will often present two (or more) seemingly separate topics, and challenge us to see if we can establish a relationship between the two, to “connect,” as he often says.
This allows him to side-step these laws, and create a sort of crowd-sourced narrative that is, at the very least, closer to the truth than anything being reported by the MSM.
We’ll take a relatively recent post (as of this writing) and easy-to-understand Qdrop, as an example (and one which my regular readers will no doubt recognize).
Here, Q posts one of #POTUS’s recent tweets, and adds his own lines below:
These questions lead to certain, inevitable conclusions such as: Imran Awan squealed on all his criminal buddies during this case, in order to defend himself.
However, because many of the details used in his defense were previously classified, this created a situation known as graymail – whereby previously classified intel has now entered the public record by way of criminal defense.
Because of this situation, Q comes back the next post and links to part of the legal code known as CIPA.
This shows us that agencies, when confronted with the reality of graymail, may then use that as legal grounds to basically declassify whatever they want.
Furthermore, it was then uncovered that the plea deal stuck by Awan does not apply to other attorneys – attorneys such as Huber – implying that there is no way Awan is getting away with his crimes.
So you can see, there’s a consistent logic to the kinds of things Q posts, and a definite purpose in the direction he’s leading. This is just one example, and a relatively easy one to understand at that, but we’re going to be seeing many more of these later in the article.
Furthermore, because Q is posting publicly, it attracts the attention of bad actors and so-called “black hats;” people both within the intelligence community and deep state that do not have our best interest in mind.
They have an array of technology at their hands which has been used to try and disrupt Q’s communication lines (as well as to try and trace him), and they are perpetually kept on the defensive by trying to understand these drops and counteract whatever they think is coming.
Unfortunately, this has sometimes manifested as attacks on Americas at large, such as when the train carrying all the Congressional GOP members to a retreat struck a garbage truck:
That was not a mere accident. The area was blocked off to cross traffic, and the truck was only spotted thanks to a drone flying in front of the train, which gave the train enough time to slow down and avoid a catastrophic collision.
Furthermore, as you get deeper and deeper into the drops, you begin to recognize patterns, repeat phrases, certain abbreviations; essentially what you might call “layers of meaning.” Sometimes, it’s a barb at black hats, such as when Q calls the CIA, the “C_A.” Why does he do that? Because they’re missing intelligence. Pretty funny if you ask me.
You’ll see “markers” in Q’s post such as “Alice & Wonderland.” Markers are repeat phrases Q uses to either hint at a hidden meaning, or reinforce an idea in relation to what he’s presenting.
So, with the Alice & Wonderland marker, Q was referring to himself as Alice, and Saudi Arabia, later, as “the bloody wonderland.” This was during the time when Trump went to Saudi Arabia, met all the leaders there, and brokered an absolute ton of strategic deals, topped off with a sword dance.
Additionally, you may see things like “5:5” which typically means “loud and clear” in terms of radio terminology, but it’s also a reference to “the clock” which is another concept Q has introduced to us in relation to “the plan.” (Can you see why Q can be difficult to understand, let alone explain?).
What you need to know to understand that whole last paragraph is that, as part of Military Intelligence, Q is but one part of a larger plan to restore America to greatness.
Actually, Q is part of what you might call plan A. Remember how I said Q was Military Intelligence?
Well, while we mere mortals may only be hearing of some of this intel for the first time, Military Intelligence has known all this for quite a while. Remember everything I told you above about the 16 year plan to destroy America?
Obama’s subversive actions as part of the Muslim Brotherhood?
The loyal Generals of US Military Intelligence knew all this as far back as 2013, and debated engaging in a military coup against Obama. They knew who all the good guys really were, and who all the bad guys really were, and they thought for a moment that it might be wise to just cut off the head of the snake, impose martial law for a time, and let God sort ’em out, so to speak.
But they chose otherwise. They chose to counteract what damage he was doing, when and where they could, move their people into position, and wait. Wait for what?
Why, the 2016 election, of course! They quickly formulated a plan, and it needed a few things. It needed to be an honest election (or, honest enough). Soros controls the bulk of the voting machines through shell companies. He needed to be cut off.
They also needed a candidate that could not only run, but win. They needed a patriot, and someone relatively clean. Enter: Citizen Trump. That’s right, he was asked to run.
Had all this failed, there is no doubt in my mind that we would have seen a full-blown military coup during the Hillary years.
And this is partially why Q is always telling us to “trust the plan,” and that all these different variables have been accounted for – to such an extent that they actually have a timeline laid out, with key events set in stone (the deadline being 11/11 for this plan to really wrap up – which, no coincidence, is the day of the scheduled Military Parade.
With that in mind, you can actually lay out Q’s posts (and the timestamps of those posts) on a chart – which lines up with a clock.
And what letter of the alphabet does a clock look like when both hands are on the 5’s? That’s right, it looks like a Q!
And I haven’t even talked about how some of his drops actually end up looking like chess pieces when you center-align them: Yeah. Layers upon layers of meaning going on here.
But don’t worry if some of that flew over your head right now. My goal isn’t to get you bogged down in all the minutiae that we’ve come to understand over the past many months.
By all means, it’s worth seeking out more information on your own – especially if you want to get a handle on the actual state of reality around the world – but it’s beyond the scope of this article today.
I’ve got a ton of articles you can go through, here, on the site, but will be listing a bunch of other great resources momentarily.
What is Q’s Goal?
Q’s goal, simply stated, is to create a crowd-sourced parallel construction for the general public to see and understand.
Q works with the NSA, and the NSA has, for a while now, sucked down every digital communication form conceivable. In other words, they already know who all the bad actors and criminals are. They already have all the evidence. The problem is… none of it is usable. Why? Because of a legal doctrine known as the “fruit of the poisonous tree.”
At its most basic: evidence has to be obtained through legal channels in order for it to be admissible in court. This kind of bulk data collection isn’t admissible.
Now, make no mistake, the good guys really do have all the admissible evidence they need to put these crooks away for good. Lately, Q has taken to reminding us that “We have the server” over and over – a phrase which must put the fear of God in the hearts of the Cabal.
No one is getting away here.
The real problem Q faces is getting the general public on-board as well. It requires a complete narrative switch, and in order to do that, in order to usher in “The #GreatAwakening,” you have to systematically take down every single support structure those who profit off the Cabal’s narrative have put into place over the course of decades.
We’re talking politicians, we’re talking the media, we’re talking overseas banking, we’re talking pharma, we’re talking criminal organizations, we’re talking human trafficking, we’re talking about CIA operated nations and military bases – we’re talking about a systematic purge of evildoers from the face of the earth.
Think about it from President Trump’s perspective: if Hillary and Obama and so many others really are the criminals Q says they are, and you already have all the evidence you need… what would stop you from acting on it?
Put simply: you need to get the public on-board. And you need to do it in a way that’s publicly accessible to all, and undeniable. You need to shake the great bulk of the American population awake, and disabuse them of any lingering vestiges of the narrative that’s been fed to them by The Cabal for years, and years, and years.
You have to understand: the Cabal’s goal has always been death, destruction, division, chaos, and control. If Trump was to just send in the military to arrest these criminals, there would be immediate chaos – only furthering the Cabal’s goals.
Riots, looting, insurrection – even possible civil war – make no mistake, that’s the stranglehold the Cabal has had over the minds of so many Americans. How else do you get hordes of men and women to dress up as genitalia and march against Trump?
It’s total demoralization. It’s absolute brainwashing. And it needs to be reversed (at least among a certain percentage of the population: a “tipping point” if you will) before the real work can begin.
So yes, you’re going to see (and are already starting to see) bad actors purged from every area of government and media imaginable. You’re also going to see an increasing number of legal decisions eroding the Cabal’s power structure. For instance:
Trump has been at work chipping away at Planned Parenthood’s funding through different avenues. Planned Parenthood is subsidized by the American taxpayer, charges for their “services” on top of that, as as a result, donates double-digit millions to Cabal-affiliated politicians year after year.
Trump is working on starving the beast. You can also look at the Supreme Court’s recent ruling that allows government workers to opt-out of their related Union dues. Government unions function in a similar fashion to Planned Parenthood, by supporting Cabal-affiliated politicians with all manner of donations and networks of support.
With one ruling, the Supreme Court just gutted their “legal” money-laundering schemes. And this is very good news for us in both cases, because it’s not you and I these politicians are helping, but themselves and the monied pals.
On top of this all, keep in mind that you can’t just have these criminals facing charges in DC, where they have all their buddies in the court system; not with everything as it is now. No, you have to set up separate Military Tribunals far away from DC, and go to extraordinary lengths to ensure these trails go off without a hitch.
Even then – if you drain the swamp, successfully prosecute, and sentence all of these Cabal members… you still need somewhere to lock them all up (at least the ones you’re not sentencing to death).
You can see how many layers, pieces, and players are involved in this, and why Q always tells us to “trust the plan.”
But the good news is the good guys are winning. Justice is coming to America, and there will be a great restoration for ALL of us as these evildoers are removed from positions of power and influence, and even from the face of the earth.
The anons on the boards, the very first ones to bear witness to Q, are here to help you along as the vanguard of the Great Awakening. This is the role Q himself has given us.
It’s why I started this blog, which is now filled with hundreds of valuable articles. It’s why I wrote this very essay: to help you and others heal and understand and help bring peace and prosperity back to the nation.
Just as I have done my best to help you understand, it will soon be your job to help others understand, and I hope you’ll come to see this article as a valuable resource for that valiant and most valuable undertaking.
Q Resources?
Before we get into some actual Q posts, I want to take a moment to give you links to some very useful QAnon resources.
No, I won’t be linking to the boards today. Why?
Because we’ve been specifically asked by the board owner that no one link to the board. Don’t worry though, I’m going to give you a plethora of amazing resources that will bring you up to speed and keep you current with all that is happening.
First, I would be remiss if I didn’t mention qanon.pub
QAnon.pub is a Q aggregator which gathers and archives all of Q’s posts in real-time, as they happen. You can browse, as of this writing, all 1681 of Q’s posts, going back to the very beginning on that website.
You’ll also find links to thread archives on every post, as well as “Answers” on some of these posts, where Anons have had some of their own decodes added to help make sense of some of the more cryptic-sounding posts.
Second, I have to link to the absolutely outstanding QMap PDF by @IAMBECAUSEWEARE, with the most current version (as of this writing) available for download here.
The PDF is an indispensable resource spanning over 1000 pages now, going into great depth about all of Q’s posts. I consider it mandatory reading if you’re really looking to understand QAnon.
Fourthly, you can’t ignore the work of the great patriots over at [the now banned]GreatAwakening. Anything notable that happens on the boards gets mirrored there almost instantly. It’s a treasure-trove of valuable information with some great personalities hard at work, every day.
Lastly, I’ll direct your attention to qproofs.com. Looking for hard evidence of Q’s veracity? You’ll find it here, in easy-to-understand graphical form.
And now, without further adieu, we’ll get into some of the most important posts Q has ever made.
The Top 15 Q Posts
Odd number, 15, I know. However, given that there are almost 1700 QAnon drops now, you can imagine that it was very hard for me to pick just 15 as “the best,” let alone stick to a number like “top 10.” So, for our purposes, we’re getting a top 15. Maybe someone would have picked other drops, but in my mind you can’t go wrong with these drops.
Really understand though, all of Q’s posts are valuable and worth your time. However, not all are equally valuable for someone coming to Q completely fresh. I picked these drops to help you begin to understand the scale and scope of what’s really been happening in this silent war.
Again, I’m not writing to convince you as to the truthfulness of Q. I’m also not writing this to give a line-by-line decode of all these posts. Those already exist elsewhere (with many of my own on this site) and are easily accessible with a little search engine ingenuity.
I’m writing this under the assumption that there will come a point in time when the truthfulness of Q will be undeniable to the general public. These drops are listed here to help the general public find their moorings as their world is about to be flipped upside-down.
And with that in mind, let’s get into it, starting… where else? At the very beginning, with Q’s first two posts:
If you’re not familiar with the way the chans work, the bottom portion of the drop above was the bit written by Q. The part written about Hillary being arrested between 7:45-8:30 was written by someone else with no real knowledge of what was going on.
This line has been mistakenly reported by many in the media as evidence that Q is a mere conspiracy theory, who has made wrong predictions like this from the get-go.
Not so. Those so-called “journalists” were just idiots who didn’t know how to read a chan thread.
But if you’re reading Q’s bit now, note… he specifies a date for National Guard activation: 10/30… but he never specified a year in his drop. This has lead many anons to believe he was indeed talking about October 30th of 2018, not 2017.
On to drop 2:
Q, in drop number 2, is introducing us to, not only himself, not only to some foundational concepts, but the way he will continue to reason with Anons over the coming months. There’s his trademark Socratic style; his way of leading us with questions to the answers he wants us to see.
There are the abbreviations (in this case, AW = Anthony Weiner, who, for the record is in a federal prison, as opposed to a state prison, so as to prevent him from being assassinated by black hats).
And there are the double-meanings (in this case, Huma not only means Huma Abedin, Hillary’s assistant, but is a cue to anons to begin researching HUMA – the Harvard University Muslim Alumni group – and investigating any associations with the Muslim Brotherhood).
What we will come to learn from this and other drops in the coming months is that the entire Intelligence Apparatus of the US has been corrupted, save for Military Intelligence and the NSA.
Furthermore, we will learn that it was the Military who asked Trump to run his Presidential campaign, it was the Military who helped secure the 2016 election from election fraud, thus securing Trump’s incredible, odds-defying victory, and we will learn that because he is the President, Trump has access to every last bit of classified intelligence the NSA has at their disposal.
Perhaps, most importantly, we learn that the Republican and Democrat career politicians (members of The Cabal) never thought they would lose, leaving them wide open and unprepared for the Storm that was about to come their way.
Q really starts to really lay out the reality of the situation here, first by invoking SCI[F]. Scif stands for Sensitive Compartmented Information Facility, and it’s basically a secure room for viewing sensitive and classified information.
You’ll recall HRC had one built in her NY home – the same one which conveniently had a fire break out in it not that long ago. Through later drops, we would later learn that Hillary was selling access to the SCIF to foreign governments.
This is also the first instance of Q’s “killbox,” aka – whatever is between the brackets. In this case, it’s [F]. It is my personal belief that, in this case, Q was telling us that Hillary’s SCIF had been targeted and wasn’t as secure as she would have otherwise liked to believe – though this has yet to be verified by Q or anyone else.
We also get introduced to a few patriots who had previously made the news – Admiral Rogers, who informed Trump that the Obama administration was actively spying on him, and Gen. Flynn, who plead guilty to a crime he didn’t commit, in order to get a ton of evidence entered into the public record as part of his testimony.
You’ll see his charges dropped soon, and he’ll be rejoining the Trump Administration shortly thereafter.
And here, we start to see the workings of the Cabal – how Soros funds operations like AntiFa to engage in domestic terrorism, and how they sow the seeds of division.
As it’s most basic, if the American people are divided among themselves, they’re not fighting globalists like Soros.
Q’s intention is to awaken Americans to that fact (and many others), and get us focused on our real enemies.
I chose this drop because it highlights very effectively the divisive tactics of the Cabal.
They target one group, and reinforce a demoralizing victimhood narrative through the media (as part of Operation Mockingbird) in order to not only gain votes, but to create an underclass that is effectively enslaved and helpless without Government assistance.
There’s a reason why black neighborhoods have suffered so much, and it lies largely at the feet of the Cabal and Poverty Pimps like Maxine Waters (though she is far from the only one).
Furthermore, you have Q here openly acknowledging the existence of a “pedo network” within Hollywood. Every day we learn more about that, through things like the NXIVM story, and through drops on sites like crazydaysandnights.net.
Q hints now at the level of intel to which he has direct access. The only person with more access would be someone like #POTUS himself.
He also implies that he knows everything about the true nature of the Uranium 1 scandal; the ultimate goal of which was to destroy America and Russia in a nuclear holocaust, by funneling nuclear materials to an Iranian base, operated by the CIA (yes, the same one that was exposed and destroyed by POTUS in Syria not that long ago).
We will soon come to understand this criminal plot as “The 16 Year Plan” to Destroy America, and it was brought to us by none other than Hillary Clinton, Barack Hussein Obama, and their many cabal underlings.
If you didn’t believe Q before, you had best start now.
If you truly want to understand nations like North Korea and Iran, you have to first understand that the CIA is not your friend and that these are CIA-operated nations used to hold the rest of the world hostage.
Until very recently, Kim Jong-Un was a slave to the Cabal in North Korea, like his father before him.
We would learn in a later Q drop that North Korea has nuclear capabilities since 2004, and that this is where Eric Schmidt, of Google, would go to set up a private Gmail server for Obama and Hillary and the Deep State, so they could communicate using Gmail drafts.
Why would they communicate using Gmail drafts? To try and avoid detection by the likes of the NSA.
At least… that’s what they tried. It didn’t work, and POTUS ended up bringing home the Cabal’s Gmail server as part of his North Korea deal.
With this drop, you start to see the rats scurrying.
The Podestas are in panic mode, and Obama has been trying to find a new handler (his previous was Valerie Jarrett), as well as trying to pre-empt/follow-up Trump’s overseas visits to reassure Cabal members overseas, and help retain their loyalty.
Q begins to especially highlight Saudi Arabia as a cornerstone of the Cabal, what with all it’s oil money, and its past history of terrorism.
Q even implies here that 9/11 truly was an inside job, with members of the bin Laden family being cleared to fly out of the US on 9/11, as well as Bush II being awfully chummy with the Saudis.
MS-13 are stormtroopers for the Cabal, and the worst kind at that. They are absolute animals, as Trump says; exceedingly violent and reprehensible. And they were brought here to carry out hits and intimidation for The Cabal.
Beyond that, Q discloses that the investigation into Hillary’s e-mails would have lead directly back to Obama, because he was using a private alias on their private server as well, so he OK’d stopping the investigation – in order to save his own treacherous hide.
As for the markers at the end – Snow White refers to the seven supercomputers run by the CIA, and Godfather III, in all likelihood, refers to the Vatican’s direct involvement in child trafficking, given this quote from the film:
“The only wealth in this world is children; more than all the money, power on earth, you are my treasure.”
– Michael Corleone
Again, we’re really only scratching the surface of these drops, so if you’re feeling a bit disoriented at this point, I would first take a break from reading before coming back to this, and second, highly encourage you to look at all of the Q drops at a later date.
My goal here is to give you the 40,000 foot view and help you make sense of what might otherwise feel like very crazy and troubling times.
Remember when I talked about the Neo-Babylonian Death Cult all the way back in the beginning of this article?
I wasn’t joking.
Q gets into the money-masters here, and how they fund their insidious operations. +++ is the House of Saud, ++ are the Rothschilds, and + is Soros.
But to get back to the drop at hand, Q is confirming “conspiracy theorists'” ideas about The Cabal – how they are all members of this cult which engages in human sacrifice, pedophilia, human trafficking, and even the cannibalism of children.
I challenge any of you to go back and re-read some of Trump’s older tweets – especially the ones about Barack Obama’s birth certificate and name change. (Oh yes, Q addresses that and promises that one day soon, a picture of Obama will be released where he’s wearing full Muslim garb, and aiming an AK at someone.
Heck, by the time this article finds you, such a picture may have already been released). But the point is… Trump knows, and has known for a very long time.
Just as there are black hats perpetrating evil deeds on the world, so too, white hats have been fighting the good fight – and if you go back through Trump’s history, it becomes clear that he’s been in this fight for a very long time.
This post was… almost like a flowchart, with each line finding causation in the previous. So, if you start out and read it all in plain language, SR (Seth Rich), and he gave the DNC files to WL (Wikileaks). Word gets out, and Obama hired DNI for damage control.
James Clapper was DNI’s director, and he goes to John Brennan, the CIA’s (Clowns in America, as Q often calls them) director.
They formulate the basis for the Russian Collusion hoax together, to cover the DNC’s behinds, and hire Google and Crowdstrike to perpetuate this lie, that the DNC was hacked by “Russians.”
A hit is then asked for by the DNC (who was chaired at the time by Debbie Wasserman-Schultz). 187 is California Penal Code for murder, and then Q tells us that the two MS-13 gang members who were hired for the hit get taken out themselves as part of the cleanup.
The FBI and DOJ assist with the cover-up. “Insurance” is a reference to Peter Strzok’s texts, where he said:
“I want to believe the path you threw out for consideration in Andy’s office - that there’s no way he gets elected - but I’m afraid we can’t take that risk. It’s like an insurance policy in the unlikely event you die before you’re 40..”
Q then gives us an image of a pyramid with the top knocked off. Again, this is a reference to “the cult” (think “eye of providence)” but also a deliberate note that they’ve lost power and control.
To try and regain control, all these Democrats go into overdrive, and eventually come up with the “Russian Dossier” which tries to link Trump to “Russian Hackers” in order to kill two birds with one stone.
They go through the Five Eyes members, and end up working with Christopher Steele of MI6.
They produce this phony dossier, with Steele’s primary points of contact being John Podesta and Eric Holder (and a few others). Meanwhile, Obama uses this phony dossier as “evidence” to justify spying on Citizen Trump’s presidential campaign.
John McCain then leaks the dossier to Buzzfeed in an attempt to shape the public narrative.
Astounding, right?
And they all almost got away with it.
This is an incredibly important post. Why? Because at the end of the day, what Q is teaching us is how to stand up for ourselves again.
The reason the Cabal wants population control, and advances wars, disease, plague, famine, etc is because… they are few. In terms of sheer numbers, we truly do have the power. These spiritual vampires hide in darkness, but they are relatively few and weak.
It’s a numbers game. All it takes to defeat them is making sure everyone is not only aware of their crimes, but actively demanding justice while working to rebuild the country.
I think the reason some people have a resistance to #MAGA is that superficially… it might look a bit selfish, but the truth is, it’s totally communal.
It’s about strengthening your families, your communities, your neighborhoods, your towns and cities, and shaking off the shackles of these self-appointed overlords who consider us little more than sheep, just another resource to be spent for their own advancement.
And now… for the biggie:
This is the “16 Year Plan” I was telling you about before.
There is so much here, but the fundamental thrust of it all is that every single action taken by Obama was taken to deliberately weaken and divide the American people.
And he was making major progress on that front, make no mistake.
And Q lays it all out here, from leaking classified military assets, to removing Generals from power, to weakening the NSA with the Snowden leaks, to targeting Conservative groups with the IRS, to opening the border and allowing the likes of MS-13 to filter in, in droves, to killing NASA, to funding Uranium 1, and even calling for the assassination of Justice Antonin Scalia.
And that was just phase one. Hillary was supposed to be phase 2.
But remember… “They never thought she would lose.”
Hillary was to oversee the utter collapse and starvation of the US economy, while simultaneously disarming the population AND opening the borders. She’d stack the Supreme Court with her picks, have the constitution rewritten, remove the electoral college, and censor news outlets that didn’t fall in line.
And this was all before the nukes they had funded and had manufactured started falling. That was going to be blamed on Russia, too, remember – which would have the “nice” little side-effect of starting WWIII, and obliterating the last two nations on earth who had any hope of independently resisting the influence of the Cabal.
When Q says Pure EVIL he means it.
There’s not much I need to add to this. Q is speaking very plainly in this drop.
But did you catch that at the end? 60% must remain private for humanity’s sake.
The evil we’ve uncovered – even with all the talk of human sacrifice and worse – is just scratching the surface.
Just rest assured that many good individuals have risked so much to put these people away for good.
And finally… we’ve reached my number 1 pick:
I’m not going to lie: the last few decades have been hard. Really hard. I’ve felt it, and I know you’ve felt it, too.
The last few decades, but especially the Obama have years have felt like a constant erosive force against the spirit of America; a sort of weakening, a collective deadening of our souls.
That was deliberate.
The excellent news is that the highest heights we will achieve during the Great Restoration of America will be so much greater than the lowest depths those small-souled men and women of The Cabal tried to drag us down into.
The criminals who attempted to murder and destroy us will face justice, and We the People will send the worst among them to meet their maker, where they won’t be able to hide in darkness, where they won’t have any backroom connections to bail them out, and where they will have to answer for all the lives they ruined.
When Q says “The choice has always been yours” he is telling us that we don’t have to go along with the decline; that we can reject it from the very depths of our souls, and that if we strive for it, a new day will dawn over this nation, and we will be greater than ever before.
The possibilities, the hope for the future – it’s all there for us like never before, with Our Father in Heaven smiling down upon us.
GOOD is about to TRIUMPH over evil in a major way, and it will be like nothing we have ever experienced before.
The Dystopian Western World December 28 2020 | From: PaulCraigRoberts / Various
The West is living the worst of Orwell’s 1984 and Raspail’s Camp of the Saints. As the second decade of the 21st century comes to an end, democracy and free speech no longer exist in the Western World. In all its respects, Western civilization no longer exists.
In the United States, which poses as the model for democracy, a presidential election has just been stolen in full view of everyone.
There is expert testimony by qualified experts about how the voting machines and software were used to bias the vote count for Biden.
There are hundreds of signed affidvits of eyewitnesses who saw the fraudulent use of mail-in ballots to boost Biden’s vote count.
We know for facts that dead people were voted, illegal aliens were voted, out of state residents were voted, and some precincts had more votes cast than there are registered voters and even residents in the precincts.
Despite the abundance of evidence, except for members of state legislatures in some of the swing states, no one is acquainted with the evidence.
The presstitutes speak with one voice and deny that any evidence exists. So do the Democrat election officials in the Democrat-controlled counties in the swing states where the presidential election was stolen.
The courts have refused to even look at the evidence.
The presstitutes misrepresent the courts’ refusals to examine the evidence as the judiciary’s ruling against the validity of the evidence despite the fact that no court has looked at the evidence.
The level of hostility of Biden supporters toward those who protest the electoral fraud is extraordinary. Biden supporters threaten Trump supporters with loss of employment and with arrest and prosecution.
Tucker Carlson on Fox News reviews the extraordinary situation here.
Radicalized blacks, unaware that they are being used by the Establishment, see the stolen election as their chance to rule and to displace white people. That the winner is the Establishment is beyond their grasp.
It is obvious that if the evidence of election theft were bogus, the media would seize the opportunity to discredit President Trump and his supporters’ claims of electoral fraud by investigating the evidence for that purpose.
The Supreme Court knows that that the evidence is real. Being an Establishment institution, the Court does not want to damage America’s reputation by ruling that the election was stolen.
Moreover, the Supreme Court Justices know that the American Establishment and its presstitutes would not accept a decision that the election was stolen.
The Supreme Court understands that the Establishment intends to rid government of a non-establishment president who is hostile to the Establishment’s agendas, which include globalism, destruction of the American middle class, war, more profit and power for the ruling class, and fewer civil liberties for the governed class.
The American Establishment includes the Republican Party.
In order to protect its agendas - war and US hegemony, the concentration of income and wealth, the elimination of the middle class which gave stability to the country and limited the ability of the Establishment to exercise complete control, and the overthrow of the First Amendment and our other civil liberties which limited the Establishment’s ability to control all explanations - the Establishment is willing to pay the price of the destruction of public confidence in American institutions.
The Establishment assumes that it can use the ensuing conflict to its advantage. The country will be further split apart and less able to unite against the Establishment’s self-serving agendas.
Conservatives blame the presstitutes for the Russiagate hoax that for three years kept Trump from his agenda and the subsequent attempt to impeach Trump over false charges that he bribed the Ukrainian president.
In actual fact, these efforts to destroy an elected president of the United States were orchestrated by the CIA and FBI.
It was CIA director John Brennan who alleged Trump was a traitor in league with the Russians, and it was FBI director James Comey who contrived false indictments and false prosecutions of General Flynn, Michael Cohn, Paul Manafort and Roger Stone hoping to extract in exchange for leniency false testimony against Trump.
It is difficult for patriotic conservatives to get their mind around the fact that the CIA and FBI, which they think protect Americans against Russian and Chinese communists and Muslim terrorists, are in fact internal enemies of the people of the United States.
Except for a few Internet websites unknown to the majority of the people in the Western world, the only information people in the West receive is controlled explanations that serve the agendas of the Establishment.
Consider Covid, for example. All experts who are critical of lockdowns, mask mandates, the suppression of effective treatments and the focus on vaccines, and who are skeptical of the seriousness of the pandemic are censored by the print and TV media and by Facebook, Twitter, and Youtube.
And by experts I do not mean doctors and nurses brainwashed in their training by Big Pharma - who are skeptical of the agenda of public health authorities than experts who support lockdowns and vaccines.
The presstitutes serving Fauci portray the dissenting experts’ views as “conspiracy theory.” But clearly Dr. Kamran Abbasi, executive editor of the British Medical Journal and editor of the Journal of the Royal Society of Medicine, is not a conspiracy theorist.
As I recently reported, he has this to say:
"Science is being suppressed for political and financial gain. Covid-19 has unleashed state corruption on a grand scale, and it is harmful to public health. Politicians and industry are responsible for this opportunistic embezzlement.
So too are scientists and health experts. The pandemic has revealed how the medical-political complex can be manipulated in an emergency - a time when it is even more important to safeguard science.
“The UK’s pandemic response relies too heavily on scientists and other government appointees with worrying competing interests, including shareholdings in companies that manufacture covid-19 diagnostic tests, treatments, and vaccines.
Government appointees are able to ignore or cherry pick science - another form of misuse - and indulge in anti-competitive practices that favour their own products and those of friends and associates.”
Yet in place of such expert informed opinion, Western peoples only hear the ignorant propaganda from the bought-and-paid for whores on CNN, NPR, MSNBC, New York Times, Washington Post, and the rest of the paid liars.
There can be no democracy, no accountability, when people only have conrolled explanations that serve the ruling agendas.
The disrespect for free inquiry, the only known basis for the discovery of truth, is so powerful today throughout the Western world that even in the West’s most famous universities - Oxford and Cambridge - censorship is entrenched.
Any student, especially a privileged “person of color” can brand any scientific fact, any historical fact, any expressed view or opinion to be “offensive.”
Those found to be the most offensive are white people whose statues and memorials are being taken down at both Oxford and Cambridge.
The founder of the famous Oxford University Rhodes Scholarships himself has been erased.
Cambridge University’s white academics and administrators have accepted a person of color as their political commissar to control their lectures, choice of words, and reading lists in order to ensure that no truth can emerge that might be declared by some ignorant student “offensive.”
Of course, white students cannot complain that it is offensive to denigrate the white creators of British accomplishments as racists.
The use of political commissars to control what can be spoken was the way Stalin controlled Russia. This Stalinist practice has now been institutionalized throughout the Western world in schools, universities, media, corporations, and government.
Oxford University, in an act of contrition, has proudly announced that admission to Oxford will no longer be based on the outmoded and racist concept of merit.
Oxford University declared that the university is reserving 25 percent of its annual admissions to those unqualified to be at Oxford.
How are those unqualified to be at Oxford to succeed in graduating?
According to Oxford, before they begin on their degree studies they will be given up to two years in remedial preparation so that they become qualified to attempt receiving a degree.
In other words, they will be coached through the process. Such an act of contrition cannot possibly be permitted to fail.
In other words, Oxford has abandoned merit and is discriminating against those students who displayed merit (and their parents who fostered merit) in favor of those who did not.
Twenty-five percent of those qualified to be at Oxford will not be permitted to be there in order that those not qualified to be there can be. This is what “affirmative action” amounts to.
Cambridge has abandoned academic freedom and subjected the knowledge of its distinguished faculty to censorship in subservience to the idea that truth can hurt feelings and be offensive.
A university that values feelings more than truth is not a place where learning can take place.
In the event you think I am exaggerating the direness of the situation, here is an emeritus professor at the Uniersity of Kent in Canterbury explaining the factual situation:
The situation is so bad that even the professor himself is trapped in his opponents’ use of language. He refers to the truths under attack as the “dissident views.”
In the Western World the policing and censorship of thought and expression has now been institutionalized.
As the native-born white inhabitants of these countries have no right or privilege to censor the attacks on them, they are set-up for second class citizenship leading eventually to extermination.
Their civilization will proceed them in extermination. Indeed, it is already gone. White people are people without a culture and without a country.
The Bullshit Philosophy Of Positive Thinking
December 27 2020 | From: TheUnboundedSpirit Are you tired of hearing people tell you to just "stay positive" when life kicks you in the teeth and all you want is to cry? Are you fed up with reading self-help books that promise to help resolve your life problems, when in reality all they advice you is to "keep a positive mindset" and do nothing more?
If so, I'm sure my new article will resonate with you. It's titled "The Bullshit Philosophy of Positive Thinking" - and for a good reason. I wrote it because, like you, I'm done with all the bullshit the self-help industry is trying to sell us and so many people fall for.
My aim behind writing this is to dispel the myth of "positive thinking", and to show how we can effectively deal with our problems, not by negating them - as the philosophy of positive thinking urges us to do - but by accepting them.
“Just think positively and all your problems will vanish into thin air. Don’t care about taking action to create the life you want – just sit where you are and visualize with positive intent that everything’s going to be alright.”
This is the philosophy that many self-help coaches, authors and so-called spiritual teachers are preaching. It has been named “positive thinking” and is selling pretty well, considering that the positive thinking industry is a multi-billion dollar industry.
But what if I told you that it’s total bullshit?
You might be thinking: “What the hell, Sofo, have you gone crazy? Your entire blog is about how to overcome suffering and live a better life – in other words, about how to let go of the negative and experience the positive – and now you are telling me that positive thinking is bullshit?”
Yes, that’s exactly what I’m telling you. But before you’re too quick to judge, let me explain myself.
Shutting Your Eyes Won’t Make Your Problems Disappear
If you look at life without the filters of ideology, you will see that it contains both positive and negative realities: There’s pleasure and pain, love and hate, peace and war, and so on and so forth.
According to the philosophy of positive thinking, however, we shouldn’t think about the negative side of life, and, in fact, we should pretend that it doesn’t even exist. This way, we are told, we won’t be affected by it.
Not only that; if we don’t think about it and instead focus on the positive side, the negative will go away just like that.
“Don’t worry about the starving children in Africa. Just pray for them and they will be alright.”
“Don’t worry about rising sea levels, environmental pollution, and biodiversity loss. Just keep a positive mindset and our planet will recover from all the damage that has been inflicted on it.”
“Don’t worry about your job that you hate or your relationships that are messed up. Just visualize that you’re already living the life of your dreams and you will soon find the ideal partner and the perfect career.”
Needless to say, positive thinking won’t do a damn thing about all the above. The African children will keep on dying in millions from starvation, our planet will keep on being harmed, and your life will keep on sucking.
In fact, things will get even worse. By not paying our problems any attention and actually doing something to resolve them, with time they are bound to become more and more complicated and hence increasingly affect us and the world we live in.
“Look, here’s the little trick I use that makes all my problems disappear.” - Master Positive Thinker
To give you an analogy, positive thinking is like being in a house that’s on fire, while trying to convince yourself that everything’s OK, believing that this way the fire is going to disappear. Of course, the fire will keep on burning and growing wilder until it eventually consumes the entire house and yourself along with it.
That’s why I call positive thinking a bullshit philosophy: Not only doesn’t it work, it’s counterproductive too – that is, it creates the exact opposite results of what it seeks. The question, then, is why do so many people buy into it?
The Appeal of Positive Thinking
Somewhere I read the following profound words:
“Do not be afraid to accept ugly truths, and never be afraid to reject beautiful lies.”
Unfortunately, the wide majority of us (and by “us” I mean “humans”) don’t hesitate for a moment to accept lies that are beautiful and reject truths that are ugly.
That’s because ugly truths remind us of serious life problems that we need to resolve, and to do so we need to go through a lot of hardship and pain. And who likes to experience hardship and pain?
So we tend to avoid facing our problems. And what’s the best way to do so? To not look at them at all, in a desperate effort to fool ourselves that they don’t exist.
It’s no wonder, therefore, that so many people buy into the (bullshit) philosophy of positive thinking. They want to hear beautiful lies that will make them feel that everything’s alright, and hence that they needn’t stress about anything.
And since we are living in a world where money is the ruling force, of course there are going to be some cunning individuals who are willing to sell positive thinking and exploit others’ insecurities for their financial gain.
Personally, through my writing I like to state the truth as it is, even if it’s at times terribly ugly. I know that many of you - my readers - might be put off by it, but I also know that this is the only way to face our problems and deal with them, on a personal and a collective level.
So if you’re a long-time fan of The Unbounded Spirit, I’d like to take a moment to praise you for being such a badass reader and a committed seeker of truth.
From Positive Thinking to Realistic, Action-Based Thinking
Imagine you are chronically ill, suffering from a painful, debilitating disease. You can pretend all you want that your disease isn’t serious, and have faith that you’ll soon recover to good health, without doing anything to treat your condition. However, in reality this will do nothing to help you heal - your disease will keep on being there, and chances are that it will be worsening as you age.
Now imagine that you, instead, decided to let a doctor have a look at you and tell you what is the underlying cause of your disease and how to treat it. The doctor might inform you that the treatment involves some pain - it could be that you need surgery or to take a heavy dose of medication with possible side effects.
But you know that, no matter the extra pain you may undergo during the treatment, in the end it will be worth it. That’s because afterwards you’ll be relieved of the chronic pain caused by your disease, while the additional pain caused by the treatment will only be temporary. So you decide to treat your disease, and get back to being healthy.
Like in the above example, if we wish to overcome our life problems, then we need to do something about them. By that I don’t mean to merely repeat positive affirmations in our minds and wish that all is going to be perfectly fine.
Rather, I mean to stand up from our chairs, roll up our sleeves and take concrete action. But first we need to accept our problems, instead of denying them, as the philosophy of positive thinking urges us to do.
We need to look at them in the eye, examine why they are there, and search for ways to effectively deal with them.
Of course, this can be quite a tough thing to do. To admit that something is wrong with our lives is a bitter pill to swallow. And to change it might require painstakingly hard work.
But, whether we like it or not, there’s no other way to go about it.
Either we work our problems out and suffer for a short while, or we ignore them and suffer for as long as we’re alive.
New Mind-Blowing Experiment Confirms That Reality Doesn’t Exist If You Are Not Looking At It
December 26 2020 | From: TheMindUnleashed According to a well-known theory in quantum physics, a particle’s behavior changes depending on whether there is an observer or not. It basically suggests that reality is a kind of illusion and exists only when we are looking at it.
Numerous quantum experiments were conducted in the past and showed that this indeed might be the case.
Now, physicists at the Australian National University have found further evidence for the illusory nature of reality. They recreated the John Wheeler’s delayed-choice experiment and confirmed that reality doesn’t exist until it is measured, at least on the atomic scale.
Thought-Provoking Findings
Some particles, such as photons or electrons, can behave both as particles and as waves. Here comes a question of what exactly makes a photon or an electron act either as a particle or a wave. This is what Wheeler’s experiment asks: at what point does an object ‘decide’?
The results of the Australian scientists’ experiment, which were published in the journal Nature Physics, show that this choice is determined by the way the object is measured, which is in accordance with what quantum theory predicts.
“It proves that measurement is everything. At the quantum level, reality does not exist if you are not looking at it,” said lead researcher Dr. Andrew Truscott in a press release.
The original version of John Wheeler’s experiment proposed in 1978 involved light beams being bounced by mirrors. However, it was difficult to implement it and get any conclusive results due to the level of technological progress back then. Now, it became possible to successfully recreate the experiment by using helium atoms scattered by laser light.
Dr. Truscott’s team forced a hundred of helium atoms into a state of matter called Bose-Einstein condensate. After this, they ejected all the atoms until there was only one left.
Then, the researchers used a pair of laser beams to create a grating pattern, which would scatter an atom passing through it just like a solid grating scatters light. Thus, the atom would either act as a particle and pass through one arm or act as a wave and pass through both arms.
Thanks to a random number generator, a second grating was then randomly added in order to recombine the paths. This was done only after the atom had already passed the first grate.
As a result, the addition of the second grating caused interference in the measurement, showing that the atom had traveled both paths, thus behaving like a wave. At the same time, when the second grating was not added, there was no interference and the atom appeared to have traveled only one path.
The Results and Their Interpretation
As the second grating was added only after the atom had passed through the first one, it would be reasonable to suggest that the atom hadn’t yet ‘decided’ whether it was a particle or a wave before the second measurement.
According to Dr. Truscott, there may be two possible interpretations of these results. Either the atom ‘decided’ how to behave based on the measurement or a future measurement affected the photon’s past.
“The atoms did not travel from A to B. It was only when they were measured at the end of the journey that their wave-like or particle-like behavior was brought into existence,” he said.
Thus, this experiment adds to the validity of the quantum theory and provides new evidence to the idea that reality doesn’t exist without an observer. Perhaps further research in the field of quantum physics and more thought-provoking evidence like this will completely change our understanding of reality one day.
“If quantum mechanics hasn’t profoundly shocked you, you haven’t understood it yet.”
- Niels Bohr
David Wilcock is a researcher, writer, author and lecturer who has generated an enormous amount of material on this subject and many related ones. Discover more at: DivineCosmos
The Occult Symbolism Of The Vatican’s 2020 Nativity Scene December 25 2020 | From: VigilantCitizen / Various
The Vatican’s 2020 Nativity scene is a bizarre collection of ugly pieces that include an astronaut and an executioner wearing a horned mask.
An ominous-looking angel looks down at the crowd while Jesus remains covered in red cloth for a while (not sure why). Behind the figures is a neon light that is probably meant to look like mountains on the horizon. However, at first glance, it looks like lightning striking the Nativity scene.
Furthermore, the entire thing is replete with occult symbolism. Here’s a look at this puzzling display.
On December 11th, the Vatican unveiled its 2020 Nativity scene in St-Peter’s Square. And, once the red drape covering the scene was removed, the crowd discovered a towering, brutalist, and totem-like Angel Gabriel staring back at them, along with an astronaut and a masked executioner (yes, those guys who kill people who are sentenced to death).
Let’s say that the applause following the unveiling was “polite”. Here are some pictures of the Nativity scene.
An astronaut and a masked executioner are also included in the Nativity scene
In a press release, a Vatican City Governorate announced that the manger “aims to be a sign of hope and faith for the whole world especially in this difficult time due to the COVID-19 health emergency.”
But this thing did not bring “hope and faith” at all. In fact, nearly all observers absolutely hated it.
It is almost as if the Vatican created – on purpose – something that is so ugly that it causes devout Christians to hate piece depicting the birth of Jesus. Satanists wouldn’t have done better.
Weaponized Ugliness
Titled “Monumental Nativity”, this Nativity scene was originally created between 1965 and 1975 by students and teachers from the FA Grue Art School in Castelli, Italy. The original work contained over 50 pieces, but only a few were selected for the Vatican’s Nativity scene and they chose an executioner wearing a horned mask.
“Monumental Nativity” is said to be a tribute to the world-renowned ceramic works of the Abruzzo region while giving a post-modern twist to the classic Nativity scene.
Speaking with a local newspaper, Italian art historian Andrea Cionci asked if it was a “nightmare or a masterpiece”.
"Forget the sweet face of the Madonna, the tender, luminous incarnation of the Child Jesus, the paternal sweetness of St. Joseph and the devout wonder of the shepherds. For the first time in the middle of Bernini’s colonnade, the Vatican has erected a brutally postmodern work dating back to the sixties.
In the choice of this crib, all the themes of Francis’ pontificate are recognized: Above all, heavy modernism and a drastic break with Tradition.
The figures resemble the masks of the ancient and ferocious Samnites, ancestors of the Abruzzese, who had a pantheistic, animist, fetishist, magical religion, a bit like the Andean fertility goddess Pachamama.
Castelli’s “Nativity scene” is an outdated work and the product of a strongly ideological art school. The work offers an image of Castelli’s ceramics that most certainly does not correspond to reality, given that this admirable art is famous for its formal elegance and exquisite, delicate decorative inspiration that are completely absent here.
The references to the Greek, Egyptian and Sumerian sculptures of the characters suggest the liberal historical-critical method of interpreting Scripture. Liberal biblical scholars have hypothesized various aspects of the Bible as adaptations of pagan cultures rather than the result of divine revelation.”
Although “ugliness” is subjective, this Nativity scene nearly goes out of its way to be as unpleasant to the eye as possible which, in turn, is unpleasant to the soul. The least one can say is that this scene is anti-devotional. I mean, who would actually pray to this thing? You just can’t. And that’s kind of the goal of the twisted minds behind this thing.
Furthermore, beyond its overall ugliness, the Nativity scene also contains many symbols and historical references that convey a rather blatant message: This is actually an anti-Nativity scene.
Anti-Nativity
Usually, the center focus of Nativity scenes is baby Jesus. However, in this thing, Baby Jesus is basically a random toddler, just standing there, looking like a giant cork.
Worship me
The center focus of this piece is not Jesus but rather the angel Gabriel. He is surrounded by a massive aureola while Jesus is still standing there looking like a giant cork. Furthermore, the angel towers over everything atop a rib ribbed pillar. The overall shape of this pillar is highly reminiscent of an important symbol in Ancient Egypt: The Djed pillar.
On the right: A djed pillar dedicated to the goddess Hathor
The djed is a common symbol in Ancient Egypt and is believed to represent the god Osiris, more specifically his spine. While this symbol probably bears an esoteric meaning relating to the chakras (which are said to be based on the spine), the djed is also phallic in nature and associated with fertility rites. In fact, the “raising of the djed” was an important ceremony in Ancient Egypt.
"The raising of the djed ceremony is meant to represent Osiris’ triumph over Set. During the ceremony, the pharaoh uses ropes to raise a pillar, with the assistance of priests.
This coincided with the time of year when the agricultural year began and fields were sown. This was just one part of a 17-day holiday of festivals dedicated to Osiris.
Overall, the raising the djed ceremony represented both the resurrection of Osiris, and the strength and stability of the monarch.”
– Ancient Origins, The sacred symbol of the Djed pillar
Did the Vatican deceptively make its believers witness a “raising of the djed” ceremony? One thing is for sure, the Egyptian influence of this Nativity scene blends well with what’s immediately behind it.
Right behind the Nativity scene is St. Peter’s obelisk (which is originally from Egypt)
The general layout of the Vatican is Egyptian magic in plain sight. The phallic obelisk (representing Osiris and the male principle) faces the womb-like dome of the St. Peter’s Basilica (representing Isis and the female principle).
The same exact layout can be found in various power centers of the world, including Washington DC.
In Washington DC, an obelisk (the Washington monument) faces the dome of the U.S. Capitol
In Egyptian magic, the union of male and female principles (Osiris and Isis) produces a “star child” (Horus). In esoteric terms, that star child is potent magical energy.
The hieroglyph representing Sirius – the most important star in occult symbolism (read my article about it here) is made of three elements of the Egyptian trinity: An obelisk, a dome, and a star
So the Vatican has an obelisk and a dome. Where’s the star that completes this trinity? It’s there, but we have to look from above.
St. Peter’s obelisk sits right in the middle of an eight-pointed star, also known as the star of Ishtar
In ancient times, executioners carried out the death sentences of legally condemned persons by chopping their heads off.
In some cases, they wore grotesque masks with macabre and menacing traits to further terrify the prisoners while depersonalizing them as an individual. In short, that’s a bizarre figure to place next to a newborn baby Jesus, especially considering the fact that Jesus himself was ultimately sentenced to death.
According to Religion News Service, the executioner is there to represent the Vatican’s opposition to the death penalty. That’s a pretty weak argument that barely makes any sense.
I mean, I’m pretty sure that the Vatican is also against crystal meth. Should they also add a meth dealer to the Nativity scene as well?
In a scene that is literally called “Nativity”, this horned figure represents death. It is the antithesis of a “Nativity”. I don’t think that Satanists would have done a better job desecrating a scene representing the birth of Jesus.
In Conclusion
In a way, this year’s Nativity scene is a sad reflection of the year 2020. It is a collection of expressionless and socially-distanced figures who do not interact with each other while standing under the neon glow of phone and computer screens.
It also reflects how the occult elite reared its ugly head this year, poisoning every aspect of our lives with its toxic agenda.
Through a display that is thoroughly anti-Christian, the elite sought to prove that its toxic ideology is also embedded in the Vatican.
While “Monumental Nativity” was created decades ago, it was selected for this year’s 2020 Nativity scene for a specific reason: It contains specific symbols while conveying a specific energy.
Like everything else that happened this year, this scene is about showcasing the control of the elite and the demoralization of the masses.
Welcome To The Elite Apocalypse
December 24 2020 | From: PrepareForChange / Various They keep telling us we are about to be destroyed. At least that’s the persistent mainstream narrative. That our demise is imminent. But is it? Is it OUR demise? Think: Mirror.
Think, everything we’ve been told for a very long time is, in reality, the opposite. From last year’s declassified JFK & MLK files to the truth about the Comey and company exploits we’re just now finding out about, we’re learning that the FBI is not a law enforcement agency, it’s a lawless nationwide crime syndicate.
Charity organizations aren’t helping the poor, turns out they’re multinational illegal slush funds, created and used by politicians and celebrities we once looked up to, protected and often aided by our very own CIA.
And, as if all that weren’t bad enough, the utmost trust we are expected to place in things such as our secret FISA courts, and our clergy has been tragically abused and completely forsaken.
And yet somehow, it’s us whose demise is afoot. Funny, right? I didn’t hurt anyone, but the hundreds of priests in Pennsylvania certainly did. I didn’t attempt a coup or commit treason, but James Comey and John Brennan may well have.
But somehow they keep frantically warning us about the certain coming collapse of everything in our world.
UFOs reportedly being spotted on the daily at this point. Cholera and other ‘mystery illnesses’ crisscrossing the globe on flights (always into western countries of course!). The deep state even reenlisted their old buddy Vanilla Ice for the day!
At the same time as record numbers of CEOs have stepped down and politicians resigned or not seeking reelection, all in the prime of their careers. But that’s all a coincidence, I’m sure it’s really us things are looking so grim for, not them
It’s true, when we go on social media or turn on the news, everyday some new freak out is happening. Like a roving pack of 3 year olds at nap time, everyday is literally the shrieking shrilling end of the world all over again.
But then, when we go about our daily lives, when we look around our cities and towns, when we go to the gym and have coffee with our friends, the chaos we’re being told about isn’t actually occurring. In fact our lives and main streets continue to improve. It is the darndest thing!
Chaos is actually happening in Silicon Valley and on Madison Avenue though. It’s happening in the board rooms of Facebook, Twitter, Google and CBS, in the offices of the CEOs of the movie studios and media conglomerates and NFL teams.
From the implosion of slave-labor Nike to the sudden stepping down of Chicago mayor Rahm Emanuel, it’s their whole world that’s in fact falling apart. We’re seeing every agenda and every lie a mile away, the roaches have been spotted, and they are running for cover.
One Dead John McCain, 2.5 Million Dead Iraqis
How can the life of one plutocratic treasonous war monger be worth so much fanfare and media attention and the lives of millions of other humans he aided in mercilessly taking on the other side of the globe not be worth the same? It’s not. That’s a lie.
Those are the kind of lies that built a bloodline dystopian world. The days of those lies are over.
The war with North Korea has been cancelled. There’s not gonna be any fire or fury. In fact I think we’re gonna be BFFs with Kim Jong Un, just like Rodman and it’s gonna be so fy!
Oh and that nuclear holocaust between us and Russia, the one the deep state has been pushing so hard for, looks more and more unlikely. And though silly war hawk Nikki Haley keeps beating the drum, US forces keep clearing out of Syria.
We don’t want kings anymore. We don’t want your low consciousness warrior sports, or your Hollywood propaganda. We don’t want to worship athletes or movie stars or politicians, and we certainly don’t want to send our precious sons daughters husbands and wives to fight your senseless wars of conquest.
But the 1% elites who benefit from all this don’t like our newfound attitudes and higher consciousness one single bit.
The erosion of their world is now in rapid decline. So they’re doing what psychopaths do, they’re projecting. They’re gas lighting us like mad. It’s their hair that’s on fire and they’re throwing water on us!
They’re doubling down when reasonable people would walk away, setting new records for athlete’s salaries despite the lowest ratings projections EVER for the coming season. They keep upping the budgets more and more and continuing to leverage the farm on one tentpole action movie after another, despite that like 4 people are going to see them.
This is due to a very special kind of malignant narcissism for which there is no cure.
What the once ruling elite refuse to admit is that their lies have all worn off. We see their all-seeing eye, and we know what it means.
Don’t expect them to admit defeat at any point. Narcissists will never do that. Narcissists get dragged off to jail, clawing out their eyes, and proclaiming their innocence.
Frankly, that’s what makes all this so much fun! I love to watch them dig deeper and deeper lies almost as much as I love to watch them mercilessly turning on one another.
The high point for me last week was when Harvey Weinstein called Asia Argento a hypocrite! That level of gaul and sheer remorselessness isn’t something any of us can even fathom! It takes the whole pot/kettle thing to uncharted new levels.
But I’d have to say the award for the most laughable display of petulant elite gas lighting for this week goes to the Nazi pedo Pope and his audacious call for ‘silence’ in the wake of truths that have taken centuries, perhaps millennia to surface.
That was pretty spectacular. Combine that with his reflexive jaw-dropping pivot from child rape to climate change and Francis is by far the dickhead of the week.
Don’t worry about the Holy see. He loses in the end, the Nazi pedo pope and his sinister henchmen all get theirs, in case you’re wondering. The church will fall away (cause we don’t want it anymore) just as a new renaissance of spirituality, and divine connection comes rising out of us.
We aren’t going to stop being spiritual beings, we’re just going to stop thinking our connection with God has to run through a bunch of men in silly robes taking our money and secretly diddling children.
Lately I’ve been visualizing the trillions amassed by the Vatican criminal enterprise divided out over the millions of victims of abuse worldwide.
It’s not in your own back yard where you’ll see real signs of the end of the world, it’s in their gilded world where the invisible rug has been suddenly swiped away.
Think Hunger Games in reverse. The reaping is no longer out of the poor and destitute, now the reaping has come for John McCain, and it’s coming for Les Moonves, Harvey Weinstein, and Pope Francis, among others.
Just this week we found out the wicked reign of Anna Wintour, the Prada devil herself, is coming to an end. There’s a story there. And I have no doubt we’ll find out what it is.
Speaking of mirror and apocalypse and end times, I have a theory.
You know how in the book of Revelations it says there are these 144,000 ‘chosen angels’ who will be whisked off the earth and spared the tribulation the rest will have to suffer?
Well what if between the Council of 300 and The Trilateral Commission, The Trillium Complex, Bilderberg, Bohemian Grove, The Royals, The Vatican, and war mongers like John McCain, there are 144,000 miserable dark elites covering the Earth like tarantulas.
What if it is their exit (by one means or another) that will liberate humanity and this planet from the dark satanic wickedness and soullessness that has plagued our world for centuries.
Maybe the top of the pyramid coming off was always the destiny they knew was coming.
Maybe the apocalypse was always about their fall, so they tried to make it about ours.
Think mirror. Think projection.
What Now?
I’m pretty sure we’re controlling this whole thing with our consciousness so first and foremost, just chill.
Have fun. Spend time in nature. Meditate. Relax. Make love. Enjoy life. Create art. Make things. Cultivate your passions.
Be fearless. Enjoy and connect with your friends and family. Above all don’t be fearful, don’t stress, we have each other, and together we can handle anything.
Right now I’m paying attention to declassified and unredacted documents, whistleblowers, and all manner of real disclosures, new advances in technology and censorship-free social media, decentralizing power structures, things that benefit humanity, peace and prosperity, and populism, the rising of The People worldwide.
Keep a particularly close eye on what’s happening with Julian Assange, Syria, Iran and the continued stabilization in the Korean Peninsula.
Don’t pay any attention to “news” of plagues, epidemics, rampant STDs, honestly don’t argue with people about ANYTHING at this point.
Time to heal the wounds inflicted on our relationships by the Soros social experiment that has become our mainstream political landscape.
Trump Goes One-on-One With Hannity at Las Vegas Rally
With family friends and neighbors, YOU be the bigger person. It’s time to put all differences aside and come together.
Ignore the paid agitators and race baiters, ignore “news” about sex robots, AI replacing you, deep state/fake alien disclosures, and anyone trying to scare, bait or go out of its way to trigger you, like child drag queens for example (this tactic is increasing on FB a lot). Ignore it.
It’s being done intentionally to try to keep you agitated, in your head, arguing, divided and unproductive.
The distractions and diversions will intensify, ignoring them will save you tremendous amounts of energy.
The bizarre and strange occurrences will also intensify, things are gonna continue to get weird as the hunters become the hunted.
Renowned Doctor Slams Medical Education & Says We Have “An Epidemic Of Misinformed Doctors”
December 23 2020 | From: AustralianNationalReview / TheLancet Dr. Asseem Malhotra is known as one of the most influential cardiologists in Britain and a world-leading expert in the prevention, diagnosis and treatment of heart disease.
Currently, he is leading a huge campaign against excess sugar consumption. What also makes him unique is something he recently admitted took him decades to figure out: that our entire medical system, one of the main ‘protectors’ of the human race, is completely corrupt.
He also stated that honest doctors can no longer practice honest medicine, and that there is also a growing epidemic of patients who are being harmed.
There is no denying that to some extent, medicine and doctors have done a lot of good and saved a lot of lives. However, an over-reliance on doctors for our health and well-being has spawned a serious problem, one that should be in the spotlight and immediately fixed.
The Need To Think For Ourselves
We all have to realize that society has been manufactured in a way where we simply give up our own mind to someone else, who has been given theirs by someone else. We lack the ability to think for ourselves because, from birth, we are programmed to think a certain way by somebody else.
This is something important for us to change, and by ‘us’ I not only mean patients; it should be a priority for all who practice medicine. And there are signs that it has started changing.
Why? Because there is a shift in consciousness taking place.
People within all societal systems (health, financial, education, government, etc.) are waking up, and starting to investigate what they have been taught.
Rather than simply believing the promotional literature, more are pursuing self-education (which Dr. Malhotra stressed was the only real form of education).
Malhotra pointed out seven ‘sins’ that contribute to the lack of knowledge that not just doctors but everyone has, including patients, regarding modern day ‘medicine.’
He made these comments at a recent European Parliament meeting:
He’s not the only one to speak up about this issue. In fact, it seems that those who represent doctors have been speaking out about this for a long time.
Dr. Marcia Angell, a physician and longtime Editor-in-Chief of the New England Medical Journal (NEMJ), considered one of the most prestigious peer-reviewed medical journals in the world, has said that;
"It is simply no longer possible to believe much of the clinical research that is published, or to rely on the judgment of trusted physicians or authoritative medical guidelines. I take no pleasure in this conclusion, which I reached slowly and reluctantly over my two decades as an editor of The New England Journal of Medicine.”
Then there is Dr. Richard Horton, the current Editor-in-Chief of another prestigious peer-reviewed medical journal, TheLancet, who says,“The case against science is straightforward: much of the scientific literature, perhaps half, may simply be untrue.”
What is Medicine’s 5 Sigma? [Full Article]
“A lot of what is published is incorrect.” I’m not allowed to say who made this remark because we were asked
to observe Chatham House rules.
We were also asked not to take photographs of slides. Those who worked for government agencies pleaded that their comments especially remain unquoted, since the forthcoming UK election meant they were living in “purdah” - a chilling state where severe restrictions on freedom of speech are placed on anyone on the government’s payroll.
Why the paranoid concern for secrecy and non-attribution?
Because this symposium - on the reproducibility and reliability of biomedical research, held at the Wellcome Trust in London last week - touched on one of the most sensitive issues in science today: the idea that something has gone fundamentally wrong with one of our greatest human creations.
The case against science is straightforward: much of the scientific literature, perhaps half, may simply be untrue.
Afflicted by studies with small sample sizes, tiny effects, invalid exploratory analyses, and flagrant confl icts of interest, together with an obsession for pursuing fashionable trends of dubious importance, science has taken a turn towards darkness.
As one participant put it, “poor methods get results”. The Academy of Medical Sciences, Medical Research Council, and Biotechnology and Biological Sciences Research Council have now put their reputational weight behind an investigation into these questionable research practices.
The apparent endemicity of bad research behaviour is alarming. In their quest for telling a compelling story, scientists too often sculpt data to fit their preferred theory of the world. Or they retrofit hypotheses to fit their data.
Journal editors deserve their fair share of criticism too. We aid and abet the worst behaviours. Our acquiescence to the impact factor fuels an unhealthy competition to win a place in a select few journals. Our love of “significance” pollutes the literature with many a statistical fairy-tale. We reject important confirmations.
Journals are not the only miscreants. Universities are in a perpetual struggle for money and talent, endpoints that foster reductive metrics, such as high-impact publication.
National assessment procedures, such as the Research Excellence Framework, incentivise bad practices. And individual scientists, including their most senior leaders, do little to alter a research culture that occasionally veers close to misconduct.
Can Bad Scientific Practices be Fixed?
Part of the problem is that no-one is incentivised to be right. Instead, scientists are incentivised to be productive and innovative. Would a Hippocratic Oath for science help?
Certainly don’t add more layers of research red-tape. Instead of changing incentives, perhaps one could remove incentives altogether. Or insist on replicability statements in grant applications and research papers.
Or emphasise collaboration, not competition. Or insist on preregistration of protocols. Or reward better pre and post publication peer review.
Or improve research training and mentorship. Or implement the recommendations from our Series on increasing research value, published last year.
One of the most convincing proposals came from outside the biomedical community. Tony Weidberg is a Professor of Particle Physics at Oxford. Following several high-profi le errors, the particle physics community now invests great eff ort into intensive checking and re-checking of data prior to publication.
By filtering results through independent working groups, physicists are encouraged to criticise. Good criticism is rewarded. The goal is a reliable result, and the incentives for scientists are aligned around this goal. Weidberg worried we set the bar for results in biomedicine far too low.
In particle physics, signifi cance is set at 5 sigma - a p value of 3 × 10 to the power of 7 or 1 in 3·5 million (if the result is not true, this is the probability that the data would have been as extreme as they are).
The conclusion of the symposium was that something must be done. Indeed, all seemed to agree that it was within our power to do that something.
But as to precisely what to do or how to do it, there were no firm answers. Those who have the power to act seem to think somebody else should act fi rst. And every positive action (eg, funding well-powered replications) has a counterargument (science will become less creative).
The good news is that science is beginning to take some of its worst failings very seriously. The bad news is that nobody is ready to take the first step to clean up the system.
Year Zero 22 December 2020 | From: ConsentFactory / Various
2020 was GloboCap Year Zero. The year when the global capitalist ruling classes did away with the illusion of democracy and reminded everyone who is actually in charge, and exactly what happens when anyone challenges them.
In the relatively short span of the last ten months, societies throughout the world have been transformed beyond recognition.
Where we can go, when we can go there, how long we are allowed to spend there, how many friends we are allowed to meet there, whether and when we can spend time with our families, what we are allowed to say to each other, who we can have sex with, where we have to stand, how we are allowed to eat and drink, etc.
The list goes on and on.
The authorities have assumed control of the most intimate aspects of our daily lives.
We are being managed like inmates in a prison, told when to eat, sleep, exercise, granted privileges for good behavior, punished for the slightest infractions of an ever-changing set of arbitrary rules, forced to wear identical, demeaning uniforms (albeit only on our faces), and otherwise relentlessly bullied, abused, and humiliated to keep us compliant.
None of which is accidental, or has anything to do with any actual virus, or any other type of public health threat.
Yes, before some of you go ballistic, I do believe there is an actual virus, which a number of people have actually died from, or which at least has contributed to their deaths...
Butthere is absolutely no evidence whatsoever of any authentic public health threat that remotely justifies the totalitarian emergency measures we are being subjected to or the damage that is being done to society.
Whatever you believe about the so-called “pandemic,” it really is as simple as that. Even if one accepts the official “science,” you do not transform the entire planet into a pathologized-totalitarian nightmare in response to a health threat of this nature.
The notion is quite literally insane.
GloboCap is not insane, however. They know exactly what they are doing… which is teaching us a lesson, a lesson about power.
A lesson about who has it and who doesn’t. For students of history it’s a familiar lesson, a standard in the repertoire of empires, not to mention the repertoire of penal institutions.
The name of the lesson is “Look What We Can Do to You Any Time We Fucking Want.” The point of the lesson is self-explanatory.
The USA taught the world this lesson when it nuked Hiroshima and Nagasaki. GloboCap (and the US military) taught it again when they invaded Iraq and destabilized the entire Greater Middle East.
It is regularly taught in penitentiaries when the prisoners start to get a little too unruly and remember that they outnumber the guards. That’s where the “lockdown” concept originated. It isn’t medical terminology. It is penal institution terminology.
As we have been experiencing throughout 2020, the global capitalist ruling classes have no qualms about teaching us this lesson. It’s just that they would rather not to have to unless it’s absolutely necessary.
They would prefer that we believe we are living in “democracies,” governed by the “rule of law,” where everyone is “free,” and so on.
It’s much more efficient and much less dangerous than having to repeatedly remind us that they can take away our “democratic rights” in a heartbeat, unleash armed goon squads to enforce their edicts, and otherwise control us with sheer brute force.
People who have spent time in prison, or who have lived in openly totalitarian societies, are familiar with being ruled by brute force. Most Westerners are not, so it has come as a shock.
The majority of them still can’t process it. They cannot see what is staring them in the face.
They cannot see it because they can’t afford to see it. If they did, it would completely short-circuit their brains.
They would suffer massive psychotic breakdowns, and become entirely unable to function, so their psyches will not allow them to see it.
Others, who see it, can’t quite accept the simplicity of it (i.e., the lesson being taught), so they are proposing assorted complicated theories about what it is and who is behind it … the Great Reset, China, the Illuminati, Transhumanism, Satanism, Communism, whatever.
Some of these theories are at least partially accurate.
The point of the lesson is that GloboCap - the entire global-capitalist system acting as a single global entity - can, virtually any time it wants, suspend the Simulation of Democracy, and crack down on us with despotic force.
It can:
a. Declare a “global pandemic” or some other type of “global emergency,”
b. Cancel our so-called “rights,”
c. Have the corporate media bombard us with lies and propaganda for months
d. Have the Internet companies censor any and all forms of dissent and evidence challenging said propaganda
e. Implement all kinds of new intrusive “safety” and “security” measures, including but not limited to the physical violation of our bodies
...and so on.
I think you get the picture. (The violation of our bodies is important, which is why they love “cavity searches” in prison, and why the torture-happy troops at Abu Ghraib were obsessed with sexually violating their victims.)
And the “pandemic” is only one part of the lesson.
The other part is being forced to watch (or permitted to watch, depending on your perspective) as GloboCap makes an example of Trump, as they made examples of Corbyn and Sanders, as they made examples of Saddam and Gaddafi, and other “uncooperative” foreign leaders, as they will make an example of any political figurehead that challenges their power.
It does not matter to GloboCap that such political figureheads pose no real threat. The people who rally around them do. Nor does it make the slightest difference whether these figureheads or the folks who support them identify as “left” or “right.”
GloboCap could not possibly care less. The figureheads are just the teaching materials in the lesson that they are teaching us.
And now, here we are, at the end of the lesson… not the end of the War on Populism, just the end of this critical Trumpian part of it.
If the usurper were to be been driven out of office [which is NOT going to happen], the War on Populism would be folded back into the War on Terror, or the War on Extremism, or whatever GloboCap decided to call it… the name hardly matters.
It is all the same war.
Whatever they would call it, this is GloboCap Year Zero.
It is time for reeducation, my friends. It is time for cultural revolution. No, not communist cultural revolution… global capitalist cultural revolution.
"They" wish it was time to flush the aberration of the last four years down the memory hole, to implement global “New Normal” Gleichschaltung, to make sure that this never happens again.
Oh, yes,[in "their" mind] things are about to get “normal.” Extremely “normal.” Suffocatingly “normal.”
Unimaginably oppressively “normal.” And I’m not just talking about the “Coronavirus measures.” This has been in the works for the last four years.
Remember, back in 2016, when everyone was so concerned about “normality,” and how Trump was “not normal,” and must never be “normalized?” Well, here we are.
This is it. This is the part where GloboCap restores “normality,” a “new normality,” a pathologized-totalitarian “normality,” a “normality” which tolerates no dissent and demands complete ideological conformity.
From now on, when the GloboCap Intelligence Community and their mouthpieces in the corporate media tell you something happened, that thing will have happened, exactly as they say it happened, regardless of whether it actually happened, and anyone who says it didn’t will be labeled an “extremist,” a “conspiracy theorist,” a “denier,” or some other meaningless epithet.
Such un-persons would be dealt with ruthlessly.
They would be censored, deplatformed, demonetized, decertified, rendered unemployable, banned from traveling, socially ostracized, hospitalized, imprisoned, or otherwise erased from “normal” society.
You would do what you are told. You would not ask questions. You would believe whatever they told you to believe. You would believe it, not because it makes any sense, but simply because you have been ordered to believe it.
They aren’t trying to trick or deceive anybody. They know their lies don’t make any sense. And they know that you know they don’t make any sense.
They want you to know it. That is the point.
They want you to know they are lying to you, manipulating you, openly mocking you, and that they can say and do anything they want to you, and you will go along with it, no matter how insane.
If they order you to take a fucking vaccine, you will not ask what is in the vaccine, or start whining about the “potential side effects.” You would shut up and take the fucking vaccine.
It isn’t an invitation to debate. It is a GloboCap-verified fact-checked fact.
You would stand (or kneel) in your designated, color-coded, social-distancing box and repeat this verified fact-checked fact, over and over, like a fucking parrot, or they would discover some new mutant variant of virus and put you back in fucking “lockdown.”
They would do this until you get your mind right, or you can live the rest of your life on Zoom, or tweeting content that no one but the Internet censors will ever see into the digital void in your fucking pajamas. The choice is yours… it’s is all up to you!
Or … I don’t know, this is just a crazy idea, you could turn off the fucking corporate media, do a little fucking research on your own, grow a backbone and some fucking guts, and join the rest of us “dangerous extremists” who are trying to fight back against the New Normal.
Yes, it will cost you, but you won’t have to torture your kids on airplanes, and you don’t even have to “deny” the virus!
That’s it… my last column of 2020. Happy totalitarian holidays!
What Do Smart Meters And Vaccinations Have In Common? + Another Vaccine Dump
December 21 2020 | From: NaturalBlaze / Various Jerry Day of Freedom Taker.com has produced an exceptional new video wherein he explains in detail what Smart Meters and Vaccinations have in common.
It’s called “Conditional Acceptance,” a term and a legal tactic whereby you can refuse anyone who pressures you to sign either an “opt-out” agreement for a Smart Meter or demands you to accept a vaccination.
Opt-out contracts are ones big corporations give you when you refuse corporate offers. Jerry explains what he calls “highway robbery” in this video.
Listen carefully to what Jerry explains, plus take notes, because his logic may be one that you can utilize under “Right of Contract.” Jerry says;
“Always remember that you have Right of Contract. That is the legal term used to describe the fact that on any contract or agreement your signature must be fully voluntary and not coerced in any way. If you’re pressured into signing or agreeing, your signature and agreement technically have no authority or effect."
And legally, there is no contract or agreement if you can show there was coercion or pressure causing you to sign that contract. So your Right of Contract means that you – and only you – may decide whether you sign something or not. And you may not be penalized in any way for refusing to sign anything.”
“They [utilities and governments] are criminally violating utility customers – and they know it. So when they refuse to insure the damage, their equipment will cause to you, you have every right to refuse that equipment.
“If the equipment they are installing was really not harmful and did not violate your rights, the insurance would cost almost nothing. But electronic utility meters are known to be hazardous and harmful – so much so that no insurance company will provide insurance for any price [more about insurance here], because they know that advanced utility metering is a ticking time bomb of damages and litigation. Vaccinations represent a very similar situation to utility metering.”
Listen intently to what Jerry says about “Conditional Acceptance” because that’s the bargaining chip in the ‘song and dance’ you will have to engage in to protect yourself and your family from AMI Smart Meter RFs/EMFs, dirty electricity they produce , plus possible fire loss to your home from Smart Meters proclivity to malfunction.
The same logic regarding “Right of Contract” and “Conditional Acceptance” applies with regard to vaccinations. Jerry delves into vaccinations like you may not have heard before.
Homeowners insurance and health insurance do not cover you for losses from AMI Smart Meters or injured health from receiving a vaccine! The unfair fact about bullying and harassment from utilities and the medical profession has to be understood fully for what it is: You are liable for all damages unless you are prepared not to be left helpless and demand your legal rights by taking Jerry’s advice into consideration.
After listening to the above video, please be certain to check out thedownloadable documents A-2 and A-4 regarding Smart Meters. There’s also a Vaccination Notice Jerry talks about. All are offered as templates at www.FreedomTaker.com.
Related Articles
Yes, they just keep coming - the evidence is in the order of a flood of biblical proportions for this with the eyes to see:
Shocking Research Confirms Vaccines Are Contaminated With Monsanto's RoundUp Herbicide
Folks, I have written about the problems with vaccines in previous blog posts. Now, a new serious contamination problem with our vaccines has been identified.
Researcher Anthony Samsel has published five peer-reviewed articles on the herbicide Glyphosate (the active ingredient in Roundup). A yet-to-be published sixth paper found various commonly-used vaccines contaminated with the herbicide glyphosate.
Yes, you read that correctly: Our vaccines are contaminated with an herbicide that the World Health Organization characterized as"probably carcinogenic to humans."
How can this happen? That answer is easy.
Many vaccines contain animal byproducts such as gelatin, bovine casein, bovine serum, bovine calf serum, or chicken egg protein. The animals from which these products come from are fed grains sprayed with glyphosate.
It does not take a rocket scientist to come to the conclusion that these animals, fed glyphosate in their diet, would contain glyphosate in their byproducts.
Samsel sent a letter to Congress that stated:
“I have run numerous groups of vaccines and identified several vectors of contamination. These include the excipient gelatins, egg protein and or similar substrates used to grow vaccines.
I have found gelatins and egg proteins contaminated with Glyphosate-based herbicides from animals fed a glyphosate contaminated diet.
This contamination carries into thousands of consumer products i.e. vitamins, protein powders, wine, beer and other consumables which use gelatins as part of the product or in fining and processing."
In other words, our do-nothing Congress, so far, has failed to respond. In his letter to Congress, Samsel also stated that Glyphosate is a synthetic amino acid. It bioaccumulates and is found in all tissue types, particularly the bone and marrow of animals fed a diet contaminated with Glyphosate residues.
You can see Dr. Samsel talk about his research by clicking here.
The following vaccines were found to be contaminated with the herbicide glyphosate:
1. MMR
2. Varicella (chicken pox)
3. Zostavax (shingles)
4. Proquad (MMR, rubella, varicella)
5. Fluzone Quad (flu vaccine)
6. Hepatitis B (B Energix-B)
Multiple vaccines from different manufactures were found to be contaminated. Folks, this is a big deal. Injecting a vaccine contaminated with a known herbicide that is "probably carcinogenic to humans" should be prohibited. We need a Congressional investigation into our vaccines.
We keep hearing the mantra that vaccines are safe. Injecting a vaccine containing an herbicide is safe? Give me a break!
It is time to call your political representatives and tell them to investigate this matter. I can assure you that it is not safe to inject a known neurotoxin such as mercury or aluminum. Nor is it safe to inject a known carcinogen such as formaldehyde.
Guess what? It is not safe to inject an herbicide that is a probable human carcinogen.
Follow Dr. Brownstein's blog for more great articles by clicking here.
Anthony Samsel on Vaccines contaminated with Glyphosate
Scientists Anthony Samsel and Stephanie Seneff have just gotten the fifth peer reviewed paper on Glyphosate published. Its named "Glyphosate pathways to modern diseases V: Amino acid analogue of glycine in diverse proteins".
In this regard Tony Mitra interviewed Anthony Samsel, to cover the newly emerging scientific findings on Glyphosate and how it can and does hurt creatures including humans.
In the course of the interview, Anthony Samsel mentioned the issues being covered in their next paper, the 6th one. This covers a number of vaccines that use animal byproducts such as egg protein and gelatine. He suspected these products might be contaminated with Glyphosate, if the vaccine makers were using factory farmed animals fed with Glyphosate laced GMO feed.
To verify, he got a large number of vaccines that do use egg proteins and gelatine and got them analyzed in multiple labs. The results confirmed his doubt. The vaccines themselves are largely contaminated with Glyphosate and pose serious hazard to those that are and will be vaccinated using these products.
Peter Navarro Releases 36-Page Report Alleging Election Fraud 'More Than Sufficient' To Swing Victory To Trump + DNI John Ratcliffe Says There Was Foreign Interference In November Elections: Report December 20 2020 | From: WashingtonExaminer / TheEpochTimes / Various
Director of the Office of Trade and Manufacturing Policy Peter Navarro published a lengthy report Thursday outlining several examples of voting irregularities that are “more than sufficient” to swing the outcome of the election in President Trump’s favor.
“Assesses the fairness and integrity of the 2020 Presidential Election by examining six dimensions of alleged election irregularities across six key battleground states” and concludes that “patterns of election irregularities ... are so consistent across the six battleground states that they suggest a coordinated strategy to, if not steal the election, strategically game the election process in such a way as to ... unfairly tilt the playing field in favor of the Biden-Harris ticket.”
The six dimensions of voting irregularities in the report include: outright voter fraud, ballot mishandling, contestable process fouls, equal protection clause violations, voting machine irregularities, and significant statistical anomalies.
All six of those voting issues were present in at least two key states, according to the report, and a total of six battleground states experienced multiple examples of the other dimensions.
"Evidence used to conduct this assessment includes more than 50 lawsuits and judicial rulings, thousands of affidavits and declarations, testimony in a variety of state venues, published analyses by think tanks and legal centers, videos and photos, public comments, and extensive press coverage,” the report claims.
Additionally, the report cites affidavits alleging the exploitation of the elderly and the infirm by “effectively hijacking their identities and votes” and accuses Democrats of using the coronavirus pandemic to relax voter ID requirements to the point that ballot harvesting and fraud could slip by unnoticed.
The report outlined incidents in the key states of Wisconsin and Pennsylvania, where ballots allegedly were illegally harvested and dumped into drop boxes.
The election was marred with examples of dead people voting, according to the report.
"In Pennsylvania, for example, a statistical analysis conducted by the Trump Campaign matching voter rolls to public obituaries found what appears to be over 8,000 confirmed dead voters successfully casting mail-in ballots,” the report claims.
Tucker Carlson slammed the leftist media recently for ‘rigging’ the election by letting Joe Biden hide throughout the entire campaign without asking any meaningful questions about his policies or intentions.
Declaring it as possibly “the single most dishonest thing that has ever happened in American politics,” Tucker charged that the media, driven by its hatred for President Trump, enabled Biden to go an entire year without answering basic questions.
“What does Joe Biden believe? What are his plans for our country?” Carlson asked, adding “we still don’t know the answers to those most basic questions” because “Biden made it through an entire presidential campaign, most of the year, without telling us.”
“A partisan press corps let him get away with it,” Carlson urged.
“If you’re looking for election rigging, there you go. Tens of millions of people voted for a candidate who wasn’t real. They voted for a ghost with a whitened smile,” Carlson continued.
“They had no idea who this man was. They had no idea who they were voting for, or what he might do if he got elected. But at the urging of the media, they voted for him anyway. And so now the rest of us get to find out what they voted for,” he lamented.
Carlson then suggested that a Biden’s administration will resemble “the HR department at a large left-wing multinational, heaps of woke authoritarian social policy mixed with a corporatist economic agenda,”
“The rest of us will get stern lectures about our moral failings – those never end – while a small group of highly connected people will get even richer,” Tucker warned.
Carlson added that it will be akin to “Jeff Bezos and the Google guys [taking] over the entire U.S. government” despite the fact that “effectively they [already] have.”
Carlson then reeled off a list of corporate lobbyists and globalists that Biden is hiring, painting a grim picture for America over the next four years, should Biden wiggle his way into the White House.
"In Georgia - underscoring the critical role any given category of election irregularities might play in determining the outcome - the estimated number of alleged deceased individuals casting votes almost exactly equals the Biden victory margin."
The report concludes:
"The ballots in question because of the identified election irregularities are more than sufficient to swing the outcome in favor of President Trump should even a relatively small portion of these ballots be ruled illegal.”
Navarro, who worked on the report in a private capacity, is scheduled to hold a news conference at 1 p.m. Eastern Time on Thursday to discuss the findings.
Trump has launched legal battles across the country since the November election, which has been called for President-elect Joe Biden by all major news networks and certified by the Electoral College, and as recently as this week stated that it’s “too soon to give up.”
Dozens of legal challenges across the country, however, have been lost, and the Supreme Court has declined to hear cases from both Texas and Pennsylvania challenging the election, which Trump’s supporters have decried as a politically motivated ducking.
Several Republicans, including Senate Majority Leader Mitch McConnell, have broken with the president and conceded that Biden is the winner of the election. McConnell congratulated Biden on Wednesday, declaring that “the Electoral College has spoken.”
Additionally, Biden slammed claims of voter fraud this week, saying, "Thankfully, a unanimous Supreme Court immediately and completely rejected" efforts to overturn the election.
DNI John Ratcliffe Says There Was Foreign Interference In November Elections: Report
Director of National Intelligence John Ratcliffe confirmed that there was foreign interference in the 2020 election, according to CBS correspondent Catherine Herridge.
“Well DNI Ratcliffe leads the 17 intelligence agencies and he has access to the most highly classified information that is held by the US government.
And he told CBS News that there was foreign interference by China, Iran, and Russia in November of this year and he is anticipating a public report on those findings in January,” Herridge said on Dec. 3.
Ratcliffe’s office did not immediately respond to The Epoch Times’ request for confirmation of the report. Ratcliffe’s statement contradicts others made by national security officials.
Christopher Krebs, the recently-fired top cybersecurity official during the presidential election, testified before the Senate’s Homeland Security and Governmental Affairs Committee on Wednesday.
“While elections are sometimes messy, this was a secure election,” Krebs said.
On a Nov. 27 “60 minutes” interview, Krebs was asked what he thought of the Trump legal team’s allegations that votes were tabulated in foreign countries and were manipulated.
“So, all votes in the United States of America are counted in the United States of America,” Krebs said. “I don’t understand this claim. All votes in the United States of America are counted in the United States of America. Period.”
Adding, “So, again, there’s no evidence that any machine that I’m aware of, has been manipulated by a foreign power. Period.”
Sidney Powell a former federal prosecutor who has been seen working alongside President Donald Trump’s legal team pushing election challenges, filed a letter with the Supreme Court on Dec. 13 to notify them of two batches of recently obtained evidence about Dominion Voting Systems voting equipment.
Her letter outlines new affidavits from two forensic experts who allege that international interference took place in the 2020 election and that Dominion systems were connected to foreign systems around the globe.
Powell said that two military intelligence analysts have signed sworn affidavits stating that the SSL certificates from dominionvoting.com were used multiple times from Canada, Serbia, and the United States.
Meanwhile, the office of the Director of National Intelligence (ODNI) confirmed that their upcoming report includes information about “relevant” foreign threats from the recent election.
"The IC has received relevant reporting since the election and a number of agencies have not finished coordinating on the product,”said Amanda Schoch, a spokeswoman for the office, adding that Ratcliffe remains committed to an expeditious release of the report.
ODNI announced late Wednesday that the Intelligence Community (IC) has notified Ratcliffe that they will not meet the Dec. 18 deadline set by President Trump’s executive order to submit the report on foreign threats during the November election as “agencies have not finished coordinating on the product.”
“This afternoon the DNI was notified by career intelligence officials that the Intelligence Community (IC) will not meet the Dec. 18 deadline, set by executive order and Congress to submit the IC’s classified assessment on foreign threats to the 2020 U.S. elections,” said Schoch.
Dec. 18 marks 45 days after the Nov. 3 general election, when, according to Trump’s executive order from 2018, the DNI was expected to deliver a report regarding “to the maximum extent ascertainable” whether any interference attempts took place, and the nature of such interference, methods used, and who was involved and authorized such efforts.
Listen Up Truth-Seekers: We’re On The Same Team
December 19 2020 | From: WakingTimes The justice-seeking community are a funny bunch. We’ve all got our differences, including the various ‘beliefs’ we have, but ultimately we’re on the same team. You’d think we would be acting like it too, but unfortunately we’re not.
It’s clear that the divide and conquer strategy is in full swing, even among the truth and freedom movements. What’s the D&C strategy I can hear some of you ask?
It’s when the powers-that-think-they’re-the-overlords use informational tactics to divide the people so they fight one another, instead of collectively facing the real issues.
And god dammit they’ve been successful.
There’s covert powers who are in control? I would suggest we engage some simple logic with this one. To start, money rules the world. better put, they can digitally punch numbers into a computer and POOF, currency is created.
Now these banksters control the central banks and therefore control the governments. Enter the two-party tyranny system we call democrSo, who owns the money? The banksters of course.
Their scam is so brilliant that they can create money out of thin air, oracy. Both sides work for the same financial interests, which are not just limited to the banking industry, but the energy, pharmaceutical and media corporations too, among many others.
Essentially, we are ruled via a highly integrated corporatocracy, regardless if you understand it, or believe it to be true.
This control-system is a sick beast. It’s out of alignment with natural law, which essentially means that it disrespects the golden rule. In layman’s terms, this universal law is to do no harm, respect each others shit, honor your contracts; that sort of thing.
Because the matrix of control aims to impose their centralized global dictatorship on all of us, including the disgraceful methods they’re choosing to achieve it, they’ve broken this divine contract. Therefore, their so-called ‘power’ is undermined by their own actions.
They essentially make themselves obsolete.
But we cannot keep our heads in the sand and do nothing; we still have to deal with this layer of truth in one way or another. After all, no great organizational change occurred by riding unicorns and staring at pretty fucking rainbows.
Simply, we have both a material and energetic responsibility to face this cancer of an order and replace it with something truly made out of justice and honor.
What then, should we replace it with? Well, this is one of the million dollar questions.
Some people are fundamentalist anarchists who want zero government. Now I might be off target, but at least hear me out and then disagree with me if you wish.
Personally I find that proposition unrealistic, especially until every person in every country is at some stage of enlightenment where they won’t try to monopolize, tyrannize, subjugate or apply an array of other tactics of suppression, coercion and control.
In other words my view is that we ned to utilize the current operational system, at least in the transitional phase, because groups of people still exist who will fuck others over given the chance. So it makes more sense for ‘the people’ to ethically take control of the governmental system and transform it into one that honors the golden rule, at least initially.
Now I might be wrong about this, and I’m perfectly okay with that. And that’s my point; we can disagree about exactly where we go from here, but we still need to mobilize a voluntary team otherwise we’re all likely to be royally fucked.
I also see the inherent value of a money-less society because money itself is an evidence-based tool of scarcity, and therefore enslavement. It also naturally breeds excessive competition, inequality and greed. This approach could be achieved via some form of abundance-based economy, but I do realize this futurist design is unrealistic, at least in the short term.
But once again, I don’t have all the answers. No one does. I would suggest that most of us don’t want to be ruled, and therefore we’re all anarchists in the pure sense of the word, and that’s the first principle we can unite on. But how we transition to a ruler-less world is yet to be determined.
So, given we need to integrate to undermine the mechanisms of the control-system, where are we at?
Unfortunately, the alternative media is in tatters. We’ve recently had a couple of big names surrounded by big controversy, causing further division. Many people are violently arguing about the shape of our reality.
The conspiracy rabbit hole and it’s multiple tunnels of truth and untruth have left many people poorly focused, as well as the truth-seekers significantly divided. The competing views on Trump has also resulted in more infighting.
In addition, many people think they have their shit sorted and are ‘enlightened’, but few appear to remember they’ve continuously changed their minds and behaviors since birth. Even if they have a good idea of what the fuck is going on, many fail to realize that this ride of ‘waking up’ is a journey, not a destination.
For example, there’s a couple of quotes which have been shared tens of millions of times, which say something like ‘be the change’ and ‘I’m wise so I change myself’, but they’ve been disgraced by all those who don’t bother to truly live by them.
The hypocrisy and inaction among the truth-seekers is painfully obvious.
Yet, we’re all hypocrites to one degree or another. We’re all going to evolve our beliefs in some way too. If we truly accept that we all have our weaknesses and contradictions, and that we’ve got philosophical and behavioral refinements that we’re yet to undertake, then it makes it very easy to accept one another as comrades.
And it’s absolutely necessary at this point too. The concerning reality is that the entire freedom movement is in danger of becoming a running joke, not just to the outsider curtain hangers, but internally as well.
That’s one of the reasons why we really need to start fresh. If we begin by accepting that none of us 100% know what has, is and should be, then we will create a level playing field where we all have an opportunity to volunteer as equals on the team of truth and freedom.
If so, we will actually have a strong shot at finally unifying, which is the only bloody way we’re going to get anything seriously done.
Of course we’re already moving in a general direction, and there’s many agreements already subtly made. For example, it’s fairly clear there are certain concepts and primary targets that have manifested as a pattern within the independent media and the progressive mindsets. What follows, therefore, is a simple merger strategy that’s based on a few core values, and a few core systemic areas.
So let’s see how this resonates. In terms of values, do you personally agree with the following?
1. We value love over hate.
2. We value truth over lies.
3. We value freedom over enslavement.
4. We value happiness over suffering.
5. We value honor over disrespect.
6. We value cooperation over competition.
7. We value family and community over money.
8. We value health over business.
9. We value peace over war.
10 We value justice over injustice.
Sound fair? I’m going to assume that’s a yes, because otherwise you need some serious self-healing. Sorry (not sorry) to be so blunt, but your-self and your fellow-man are not your enemy.
In addition, if we agree on these values, they must be applied in every area of discourse. Of course there are areas where competition for example has its place, such as sport, but there is still cooperation first and foremost otherwise the game wouldn’t even be played.
So if these values can stand the test of time, that also means they will naturally dissolve any so-called rules and laws that contradict them.
In terms of the systemic issues, let’s see if we can at least agree on the Four M’s as our primary targets for change, which are Money, Medicine, Media and Management:
1. Money should be a sovereign public utility, not hijacked by private stakeholders and converted into a transnational banking cartel.
2. Medicine (including food) should be as natural as possible, as well as be inexpensively available to all who need it, not monopolized by the multinational giants and perverted into the toxin-rich, addictive and unnatural substances we have today.
3. Media should be based on truth, authentic journalism and what’s best for the people, not propagandized to create minions of the failing system.
4. Management of our society should be designed by and for the people, not by and for the corporate and oligarchical structures.
Is that fair too? Does the whole lot sit well with you? Let’s bloody well hope so.
So in saying all this, and of the thousands of people who read it, what will actually change to unite the world’s justice-seeking communities?
To be straightforward and realistic, most likely fuck all. In truth, I actually could care less if it’s this proposal either; if a group would like to design a basic unification strategy that we can agree on, please do so. No matter how it happens, it just needs to happen, and that’s the most important thing.
However, we really do need to show some solidarity, so this has been created as an opportunity for the fragmented independent media to stand together on some core values and systemic focal points.
We’re all in the position to share this information through our networks too, so if you more or less agree with this strategy for unification then there is nothing stopping you from doing so.
In addition, the recent issues arising from two key voices in the independent media has further shown that we shouldn’t be rallying around individuals, but instead be binding around some very simple and key agreements.
If so, we could use them as a framework for publicly debating how they relate to the behavior of governments, corporations, oligarchs and the system itself.
By continuously saturating our agreements and discussions into the collective consciousness, more and more people – working both inside and outside of the system – will be emancipated from the delusions they’ve been programmed to have.
After all, people are just people, and most of them deep down want the best for their fellow-man.
It would then continue as an education process for everybody who needs it, based on any agreements made. And as Max Igan suggests in the below interview, we could also organize a global day of protest to show unification around our quest for truth and freedom.
In any case, I primarily wrote this as an energetic injection because I know that somewhere lurking just beyond the veil, the many movements for truth and freedom have an innate capacity to put their differences to the side and come together as a peaceful force to radically transform our world into one of honor and justice.
Could this happen soon? Who knows; we’ve all been pleasantly surprised before.
For further information regarding where we’re at, and where we’re going, watch this new interview with the infamous Max Igan.
Modern Life Is Killing Our Children: UK Cancer Rate In Young People Up 40% In 16 Years + 12 Things A Cancer Doctor Should Never Say
December 18 2020 | From: TheTelegraph / TheTruthAboutCancer / Various
Modern life is killing children with the number of youngsters diagnosed with cancer rising 40 per cent in the past 16 years because of air pollution, pesticides, poor diets and radiation, scientists have warned. These two articles include a massive dump on cancer topics both causes and solutions.
New analysis of government statistics by researchers at the charity Children with Cancer UK found that there are now 1,300 more cancer cases a year compared with 1998, the first time all data sets were published.
Note: As this first article is from the controlled mainstream it makes ridiculous statements like the causes of cancer not being known. Interspresed are links to various other articles and resources.
The rise is most apparent in teenagers and young adults aged between 15 and 24, where the incident rate has risen from around 10 cases in 100,000 to nearly 16.
Researchers say that although some of the rise can be explained by improvements in cancer diagnoses and more screening, the majority is probably caused by environmental factors.
Dr Denis Henshaw, Professor of Human Radiation Effects at Bristol University, the scientific adviser for Children with Cancer UK, said air pollution was by far the biggest culprit, accounting for around 40 per cent of the rise, but other elements of modern lifestyles are also to blame.
Among these are obesity, pesticides and solvents inhaled during pregnancy, circadian rhythm disruption through too much bright light at night, radiation from x-rays and CT scans, smoking during and after pregnancy, magnetic fields from power lines, gadgets in homes, and potentially, radiation from mobile phones.
Children are surrounded by electrical fields, warn scientists
"When you look at cancers such as childhood leukaemia there is no doubt that environmental factors are playing a big role,” said Dr Henshaw. “We were shocked to see the figures, and it’s modern lifestyle I’m afraid."
“Many items on the list of environmental causes are now known to be carcinogenic, such as air pollution and pesticides and solvents. There has been good research to suggest a mother's diet can damage DNA in cord blood. Light at night we know is very disruptive for the body, which is why shift workers have such bad health.
Burnt barbecues, the electric fields of power lines, the electricity supply in your home. Hairdryers. It’s all of these things coming together, and it seems to be teenagers and young people that are most affected.
What’s worrying is it is very hard to avoid a lot of these things. How can you avoid air pollution? It sometimes feels like we are fighting a losing battle.”
Diagnoses of colon cancer among children and young people has risen 200 per cent since 1998, while thyroid cancer has doubled. Ovarian and cervical cancers have also risen by 70 per cent and 50 per cent respectively.
The charity estimates that the rise in cases now costs the NHS an extra £130 million a year compared with 16 years ago.
But experts believe many cancers could be prevented with lifestyle changes such as allowing children to attend nursery to boost their immune system, not painting children’s rooms with oil-based paints, avoiding night shift work and processed meats in pregnancy.
The figures were released ahead of the Children with Cancer UK conference which took place in London.
Other cancer experts said they had also noticed a rise in cancer diagnoses but warned it was too early to draw firm conclusions on the causes.
Nicola Smith, Cancer Research UK’s senior health information officer, said: [Bollocks mainly]
“Any rise in childhood cancers is worrying but it’s important to remember that less than one per cent of cancer cases in the UK occur in children.
It’s not yet clear exactly what causes cancer in childhood and research has not shown a link with environmental factors like air pollution and diet during pregnancy.
There are some factors which can increase the risk of childhood cancer like inherited genetic conditions and exposure to radiation – but these are usually not avoidable and no one should feel blamed for a child getting cancer.
Evidence has shown that there are lots of things adults can do to reduce cancer risk and it’s always a good idea to set up healthy habits as a family, like eating healthily, being active and enjoying the sun safely.”
Kate Lee, chief executive of children’s cancer charity CLIC Sargent, said that a child cancer diagnosis places a huge emotional and financial burden on the whole family.
"Over the last year CLIC Sargent provided support for more than 7,100 families, more than ever before, but we know that we can still only reach two out of three of those children and young people diagnosed with cancer,” she added.
“As more young cancer patients are diagnosed every year, we know each of those families will need support and are working hard to one day be able to provide those services for every young patient.”
Despite the increase, around 80 per cent of child cancer patients now survive for at least five years. But the aggressive treatments they have as children can have a major impact on their future health, even if they survive.
Tomorrow, Children with Cancer UK launches a five-point plan calling on the Government and the science and medical community to ensure that all children diagnosed with cancer in the UK have access to precision medicine by 2020.
We can all agree that proper communication skills are essential for the best cancer care. While some patients appreciate a direct approach, others need a bit of hand-holding. Some cancer doctors have good “bedside” manners, displaying genuine empathy for their patients. Others can be considered bullies in white coats. But it all comes down to this… what a cancer doctor says or doesn’t say can make all the difference in your outcome.
Doctors frequently take an overly dominant role. Proactive patients are often treated with sarcasm or arrogance. The patient who comes armed with research might be told “I see you have spent some time on Google. I think it is best if you let me diagnose you and tell you the treatment that is most suitable for you.”
As a cancer strategist I hear of all kinds of terrible comments made by oncologists to their patients. Even those patients who intend to comply with the recommendations of their oncologist hear words that should never be spoken. Often times I am sure that these comments are not meant to be callous, but are just spoken in ignorance.
Here are 12 things you should never hear from your cancer doctor. Be on the lookout for doctors who say any of these. It could be a sign that they need an attitude adjustment… and that you need a new doctor:
#1. I’m afraid I have bad news. If you didn’t already suspect you had a problem to deal with, you would not be sitting in the doctor’s office. This statement brings on fear. Doctors do this so that you will comply with their orders. Skip the drama doc.
#2. You have three months to live. It is rarely helpful to have a doctor pretend he has a crystal ball. While from experience they might have an idea how long the average patient lives given a particular diagnosis, we are all individuals and YOU ARE NOT AVERAGE. Despite what the doctor says, there is always hope. There is always a way to extend life or even reverse the dis-ease.
Just like “bad news,” a prognosis brings on fear and the need to comply - albeit in a different way. Studies show that people are told they have three months to live dutifully fulfill that directive from their doctor. Even worse, a poor prognosis takes away the will to live and ability to think outside the box and to change the direction of the dis-ease.
There are innumerable remissions of advanced and late stage cancers. There are countless stories of patients who were offered little chance of survival or a cure, yet who are here years later to tell their tale. A quick perusal through the articles on The Truth About Cancer website will bring you valuable information on surviving the odds.
Hope gives us the opportunity to do what we must do to heal from cancer. Even in the face of the most advanced of cancers, there is usually room for some words of encouragement and support. This can make all the difference in the patient’s attitude towards their disease and their treatment. While there is hope, there is life.
#3. If you don’t do “X” you will die. For some bizarre reason, cancer doctors think they know everything. Yes, I know that they went to medical school, but there was competent and effective medicine well before Big Pharma taught these doctors. Know that there are many, many options when it comes to managing cancer - don’t let your doctor bully you. In fact, you might point out to your doctor that you are more likely to die if you follow one of the standard protocols instead of opting for a less toxic treatment plan.
#4. You have no choice. Sorry, doctor, yes, you do. They might also say you have no other options. While it is always a good idea to get a second, third, or even fourth opinion, be sure to get at least one from an alternative or holistic doctor.
The award-wnning documentary The Idiot Cycle (2009) about the companies involved in producing toxic chemicals, cancer treatments and genetically modified crops
Otherwise, you are still limiting your options and overlooking key lifelines to survival.
#5. Calm Down. Given the situation at hand, it is understandable that a patient might be upset. Telling a patient they need to calm down or speaking to him or her in a dominant tone of voice clearly shows a lack of empathy and offers no chance of a partnership.
#6. This treatment will not harm you. Be sure you are clear on what “harm” means to your cancer doctor. Chemotherapy, radiation, hormone therapies, and even surgery harm the body and increase your risk of more cancer. Be aware of the life-threatening and quality of life-threatening side effects, and do not believe that they are always “worth it.” Studies and case studies have not provided evidence of efficacy.
#7. Here are the statistics. You are a person, not a statistic. You have your own unique set of circumstances; your own history. Statistics are helpful for doctors who use a checklist to make treatment recommendations. As an empowered person who is committed to make lifestyle changes that can affect your health and outcome, statistics do not apply.
Further, statistics are typically skewed in favor of treatment recommendations. For example, a patient might hear that by taking hormone therapy they will reduce their risk of recurrence by almost 50%. Sounds great, right? However in actuality, it may be the case that the risk without the therapy was only 2% and with the drugs 1%. That 50% reduction doesn’t really mean much, does it?
Or in the case of chemotherapy, a patient might hear that the therapy will decrease risk by 30%. But if the risk of dying was only 10% to begin with, the survival benefit on an absolute basis is only 3%. Considering the downsides of these therapies, one must extrapolate the true benefit and compare this to the possible harm they deliver.
#8. This treatment will cure you. This is a bold statement for sure. If your doctor is not addressing the cause of your cancer, the treatment is not a cure. Cancer is complicated, but most often the root cause can be determined and resolved. Only then can any treatment be considered “curative.”
I have never met anyone who was Tamoxifen- or chemotherapy-deficient, for example, so there is no reason to believe that taking either will resolve the reason for your cancer.
#9. You are wasting your time with nutritional supplements. While there is no one magic bullet, no one cure for cancer, lifestyle factors such as taking supplements can make a difference. There is too much evidence on how nutritional factors influence genetic expression for anyone to ignore the power of food and supplements.
What we eat makes a powerful difference. A mostly plant based, whole foods diet and taking nutritional supplements can have a substantial impact. That said, in these days of nutrient-depleted soil conditions and over-farming, food just does not have the nutrient content of years past. Plus, busy lives do not always allow for “perfect” meals. Hence, supplements are a necessary part of an anticancer protocol.
#10. Cancer Just Happens: It’s a Matter of bad luck. This is so ridiculous I just had to include it. Cancer develops for a reason. It is a signal, a cry for help that tells us something or many things are not right within the body. Overexposure to toxins, the genetic inability to manage toxins, and the entire issue of unresolved emotional traumas are some of the biggest triggers of cancer.
Although nutritional deficiencies are not likely the cause of one’s cancer, they do allow it to develop and grow.
Don’t accept that blanket statement from your doctor. Whether they are saying this out of ignorance or for your emotional protection, it is not helpful when it comes to your healing and survival.
#11. Alternative doctors are quacks. What mainstream cancer doctors consider to be “alternative” was once medicine. Sadly, modern medicine focuses on drug therapies and fails to acknowledge the reasons that cancer has become rampant. We are not sick because we have cancer… we have cancer because we are sick. If we do not correct what created the dis-ease, we cannot cure it. Alternative doctors consider the whole person. They believe that making a person well is just as important or even more important than targeting the symptoms of cancer (such as a tumor).
While every alternative treatment works for someone, not every treatment works for everyone. Part of this is, again, because we all have our own unique circumstances for having cancer. Be sure you work with a qualified practitioner and coach to optimize the healing of your body and your cancer.
And last but not least…
#12. Estrogen causes breast cancer. This is simply not accurate. Estrogen has 400 essential functions in a woman’s body. While estrogen dominance and hormonal imbalance can allow breast cancer to develop and grow, estrogen does not cause breast cancer. More precisely, estrogen can turn on cancer genes, but only if not opposed by progesterone. So blaming estrogen for cancer is a bit like saying that matches cause fires. You have to light the match, right?
Progesterone acts as an antagonist to estrogen. While estrogen is associated with breast and other cancers, progesterone has anti-cancer effects.
When the opposing force of progesterone is increased, the toxic effect of estrogen is decreased. So while estrogen can turn on cancer genes, progesterone turns on genes that can prevent breast cancer from occurring. Instead of blocking or eliminating estrogen, you may want to concentrate on increasing progesterone so the fire is not ignited by the match.
A note on receptors: when activated by progesterone, the progesterone receptors attach themselves to the estrogen receptors. Once this happens, the estrogen receptors stop turning on genes that promote the growth of the cancer cells. Instead, they turn on genes that promote the death of cancer cells (known as apoptosis) and the growth of healthy, normal cells.
Hormone receptors are dependent on iodine, which increases the sensitivity of the receptor to the hormone it was designed. So rather than block your receptors, it would be prudent to ensure you have sufficient iodine in your diet so that the receptors can work most efficiently.
To Sell You Happiness, They First Make You Feel Like Shit
December 17 2020 | From: TheUnboundedSpirit
Each and every day we’re bombarded with hundreds, if not thousands of images that are trying to convince us that we’re not good enough as we are.
You guessed right, I’m talking about advertisements.
The advertising industry has one and only mission: to persuade us into buying stuff with the promise that it’ll bring us happiness. But how exactly does it achieve that?
By first making us feel like shit.
“Look, this shiny, attractive and popular actress is sporting this swimsuit and by purchasing it you’ll feel sexy and successful like her.”
“Look, this handsome and confident businessman is driving this luxurious car and all the babes are begging to sleep with him like crazy. Get it and within moments you’ll get laid with more beautiful women that you could have ever imagined.”
The message implied in advertisements is simple: As you are, you suck, and you need to be different to not suck. Here, get this product and you won’t suck anymore.
Once they convince us that we suck, we do as they tell us, because who in the world wants to be a sucker?
No one.
You might be thinking: That’s bullshit! I’m not affected by those stupid ads.
Well, almost everyone I know says the same. I admit, I used to think like that too. But the truth is that we’re all affected, although in most cases we aren’t even aware of it.
Ponder on this: why would companies invest most of their money on advertising, if it wasn’t effective?
Advertising is all about persuasion, and those who are good at it see tremendous financial gains. But for persuasion to work at its best, it needs to happen subconsciously - that is, it needs to bypass conscious reasoning and take place on an emotional level. That’s precisely why we don’t know that it’s influencing us.
Let me offer you an example. When you are exposed to a Coca Cola ad again and again, at some point you become so accustomed to it that you unconsciously associate it with certain positive psychological states (such as love and joy), and so next time you go out to buy a drink, you grab the Coke can without wondering why.
You buy it just because you were persuaded to, while you’re under the impression that you did solely out of our own conscious decision.
‘Yes Girl’ – 1946 Cardboard Coca Cola Poster by Haddon Sundblom
I could go off on a tangent about the different tactics the advertising industry is using to manipulate us, but the point is that, as all big marketers know, great advertising is sneaky and its basic objective is to lower your self-esteem (with its ultimate objective being, of course, to sell you some crap in the name of happiness).
Starving for Connection
If you’re feeling shitty, there might be a good reason to blame it on advertising. Yet the advertising industry itself is nothing but a natural outgrowth of our profoundly sick society, where deception and competition are an everyday reality.
Indeed, advertising would barely be as effective in a society where people were honest and worked together for the common good. In fact, in such a society advertising as we know it wouldn’t exist at all.
Because of the competitive world we were brought up in and have to endure on a daily basis, most of us feel disconnected from our fellow humans. Of course, when others are constantly trying to maximize their personal gain at your expense, how can you feel a loving connection to them?
You can’t. Rather, you feel threatened by their presence. To protect yourself from them, you build big walls around you. And for a while, you feel safe and secure.
But eventually you experience the painful consequences: loneliness, anxiety, depression.
As every psychologist knows, humans are highly social beings - that is, we all have an inherent need to connect and share with others.
Connection is crucial to our emotional health, and when we don’t find it, we suffer.
No wonder in our disconnected society what we deep down crave more than anything else is to open our hearts and connect with other people. We want to feel a sense of belonging to community. We want to feel loved and accepted. We want to feel heard and understood.
Human disconnection is deeply affecting our psyche
Here’s why: The more problems you have, the easier you can be emotionally manipulated and financially exploited.
“Do you feel lonely? Don’t worry. Just pay $2000 for this escort and you’ll be in the company of an affectionate being.”
“Do you feel that your life is lacking adventure? This can easily be fixed. Buy these pair of Jordan sneakers for just $199 and you’ll feel like a basketball superstar.”
“Do you feel worried over the meaninglessness of your life? Let us help you. Get this cheap yet immensely effective pill and your mind will be relieved of distressing thoughts in just a matter of seconds.”
We may not be aware of it, but the main reason we keep on buying stuff is to find connection to those things we’ve lost and we emotionally starve for. The cunning ones in the marketing business know this very well, and are trying to exploit our insecurities through deceitful advertising just so they can empty our pockets and fill in theirs.
By purchasing this or that product, they make us believe that we’ll feel satisfied and content. Yet no matter how many products we manage to acquire, we always end up feeling sad and unfulfilled.
Shopping can never emotionally satisfy us because it provides us only with substitutes of what we’re longing for. And although it can at times bring us a temporary feeling of completeness and euphoria, that is soon followed by disappointment and a sense of inner emptiness.
Acquiring a fancy car may help attract a lot of eyes on you, and for a while this could make you feel like you’re the most important person in the world. You might start thinking that people appreciate you and would love to be in your presence, which in turn might bring you some egotistic gratification.
Yet this won’t be enough to satisfy your psychological need to genuinely connect and intimately bond with people who actually embrace you for who you are and not merely for what you have.
Getting a 14-day return ticket to some exotic part of the world and staying there in a 5-star hotel that provides you with all the luxury you desire can help you to forget the painful reality of everyday life, and might even make you feel like your life is filled with adventure and joy.
Yet before you realize it you’ll be forced to get back from your happy holidays and face the harsh truth that was there awaiting you all along.
Obtaining clothes from expensive fashion brands in an effort to feel beautiful and special might work as long as you’re in the company of individuals who praise you solely based on your appearance.
But when you are on your own or in the presence of people who don’t care about your looks, status and wealth, you won’t help it but feel that old familiar voice creeping in your mind again, whispering that you’re ugly and unworthy of love.
What some call “retail therapy” is actually a symptom of psychological dis-ease
Substitutes offer nothing more than a quick fix - they work for a short while, but eventually they always let us down. Hence, to fill in our emotional void and find lasting contentment, we need to stop foolishly running after things that bring us a fleeting sense of joy, and instead pursue those ones that can truly enrich our lives in the long run.
We need to stop collecting material possessions, and instead collect memories from mind-expanding and heart-touching experiences.
We need to stop showing off how much stuff we own, and instead openly express our truest thoughts and feelings. We need to stop amassing financial wealth, and instead realize our inner yet long-forgotten wealth.
We need to stop searching for the next thing to force us out of our chronic boredom and stress, and instead create a life that’s worth waking up to.
Changing the System
For all the above to happen, it is important that we realize what truly matters to our well-being and act accordingly. However, personal behavioral change alone isn’t enough.
No matter how strong our individual efforts to live meaningfully, purposefully and peacefully are, the external pressures of our competitive, materialistic and consumption-driven society will most likely cancel them out.
Therefore, if we want to see a lasting change happening for the benefit of ourselves and future generations, we need to focus our attention on transforming the very foundation of our socioeconomic system that is at the root of most problems our civilization is currently faced with.
I’ll try to explain what I mean with an example. A few paragraphs above, I wrote: “The cunning ones in the marketing business [ … ] are trying to exploit our insecurities through deceitful advertising just so they can empty our pockets and fill in theirs.”
This might sound as if the professional marketers are some kind of evil people who don’t give a damn about others and care only about their own financial gain.
The truth, however, is that they are people like you and me - people who somehow need to “earn a living” or else starve and live on the street.
They might actually be quite loving and compassionate, but at the same time they need some kind of a job, and because of the market’s immense competition, it’s extremely difficult - if not impossible - to find/create one they like and which aligns with their values.
They do what they got to do to increase their competitive advantage and keep on surviving in a harsh and unforgiving system, and in most cases that requires cunningness and deceit.
You see, our economic system is a scarcity-based system, since money isn’t enough to go around (if you didn’t know, money is created as interest-bearing debt, which means that there’s always more debt than money in existence).
Therefore, we all feel compelled to compete with one another in order to stay in a position of financial security and power, and that feeds the selfish and acquisitive part of our nature.
Yet the reality is that we’re living on a planet of abundance where all people’s needs could be easily met, if only we realized that our monetary system is obsolete, and worked together using our technical know-how to equitably distribute resources, instead of toiling day in and day out so as to outsmart others.
Once we stop fighting against each other and join our efforts in order to turn our world into a more beautiful place for all to enjoy, we’ll begin to feel connected again as well as to carry out work that is meaningful.
Then we will experience such an emotional satisfaction that we won’t be drawn to the momentary pleasure derived from shopping anymore; rather, we’ll be able to direct our attention on those things that actually matter to our happiness and build our lives around them.
Is The Globalist "Reset" Failing? The Elites May Have Overplayed Their Hand December 16 2020 | From: Zerohedge / Various
One aspect of narcopaths (narcissistic sociopaths) that is important to remember is that they live in their own little world in which their desires and bizarre dysfunctions are normalized.
They believe themselves superior to most people because they are predatory, and don’t suffer from annoying hang-ups like empathy and conscience. They generally tend to believe they have pulled the wool over everyone’s eyes the majority of the time. They think that you are a submissive idiot, and that when they bark an order, you will simply jump to attention because you “believe”.
Almost every aspect of the globalists and their behavior indicates they are a club or cult of narcopaths.
Their obsessive need to control as well as to corrupt and destroy in order to get what they want is not an extension of mere greed, it is a deep-seated aspect of who they are as beings. It is a defining mechanism at the core of their character.
They are real world monsters, like vampires attempting to blend into an unsuspecting population.
In their arrogance, then tend to expect they can drain the public dry at will without being resisted or exposed. The problem is, as soon as they start to feed and destroy they draw attention to themselves.
Eventually, they will attract the suspicions of the public, along with some vampire hunters. Unless they find a way to hide a stake through the heart is inevitable.
I have been writing about the threats of globalism and the “reset” for many years now, and I have noted for some time two separate quandaries; one affecting the liberty movement and the other affecting the globalists:
1.First, criminals tend to brag about their crimes when they think that it’s too late for anyone to do anything about them.
I predicted the globalists would be very open in revealing their agenda the moment they believed themselves “untouchable”.
For the freedom loving public this suggests that in 2020 going into 2021 that the elites must think there is nothing that can be done to stop the machine; they are so blatant in their calls for the global “reset”, a cashless society, totalitarian lockdowns and a surveillance state that no one in their right mind can claim these notions are “conspiracy theory” anymore.
The fact is, the “conspiracy theorists” were RIGHT ALL ALONG, and now there is nothing anyone can say about it.
2.Second, I have also argued in the past that the globalist push for a “new world order” is a double edged sword that could very well end up annihilating them.
As they attempt to initiate their reset agenda, they become more and more exposed; they can no longer lurk in the safety of the shadows and there is no going back once the process is started.
Once the globalists become widely known, they must either swiftly take control through engineered chaos and collapse, or face retribution that could eliminate a cabal that took them centuries to build.
Vampires must make the rest of the world a dark place before leaving the shadows, or they risk dying in the light of day
There are two schools of thought in the liberty movement; one suggesting that the globalist agenda is fixed and unstoppable and that the best anyone can do is survive.
The second suggests that the reset can be stopped and the globalists can be brought to justice. I stand in both camps.
There are aspects of the reset that are indeed fixed and that cannot be undone.
For example, numerous national economies including the US are in the midst of a stagflationary collapse and there is nothing that can be done to reverse it. Perhaps a decade ago we could have changed course, but now it is too late.
The pain can be reduced if people quickly end their dependency on the system and create localized trade networks of their own, but the economy as we know it right now is dead and it is not coming back anytime soon.
I do not see this, though, as a win for the elites. Crashing the economy is one thing, rebuilding it into the collectivist dystopia they desperately want is another.
I am seeing some encouraging signs these days that the globalist reset is NOT a sure thing, and those that know my work know I have never been one for misplaced optimism. Specifically, the exploitation of the pandemic response as a means to ram through numerous draconian restrictions does not seem to be going exactly as the elites planned.
I have to look back at Event 201 to really gauge the state of the game, because what the elites planned and what has happened do not completely match up.
For those not familiar, Event 201 was a type of “war game” held by globalists from the World Economic Forum and the Bill and Melinda Gates Foundation.
The scenario? A pandemic outbreak of a coronavirus which would spread like wildfire and kill a predicted 65 million people. The simulation was held only a couple of months before the real thing happened at the start of 2020.
In the year since the outbreak, the globalists have attempted to enforce nearly every plan that was outlined during Event 201, including using social media to censor or restrict any news or information outside of the establishment approved narrative (Yes, narrative control was discussed at the event in great detail).
Klaus Schwab of the World Economic Forum has consistently and excitedly applauded the pandemic crisis as a “perfect opportunity” to institute the “reset” that the globalists have been talking about for years.
Unfortunately for them, the virus has not been anywhere near as deadly as they appear to have hoped.
With a death rate of well below 1% for anyone outside of a nursing home with preexisting conditions, the establishment has now been forced to pump up infection numbers as a means to terrorize the populace because the death numbers are not enough to convince people to willingly hand over their freedoms.
The Infection Fatality Rate (IFR) for Covid 19 not counting nursing home deaths with preexisting conditions is only 0.26% of those infected.
There is a propaganda meme being passed around these days that tries to exaggerate the danger of death from Covid, and it goes a little something like this:
"Covid has killed more people that the Vietnam War and the Gulf Wars combined in a single year, therefore your freedoms are forfeit…”
This is an idiotic talking point but luckily no one is buying it.
Over 40% of Covid deaths are people that are already sick and on the verge of dying anyway(And no, refusing to wear masks is not the same as endorsing “death panels”, because a death panel is about socialists refusing treatment to people at risk because of their age.
No one is suggesting that old people be refused treatment, and they always have the option of staying under quarantine if they fear they will become infected. They are already retired and receiving social security, perhaps if we are going to stimulate then the bailout money should go to those most at risk so that the rest of us can continue on with normal life?)
Dr Shiva - The Elite Have Enslaved Us In Their Illusion, It’s Time To Back The Country
Hundreds of thousands of people die every year from diseases and illnesses including the flu, common colds and pneumonia, yet, the prospect of abandoning the Bill of Rights, submitting to economic shutdowns and wearing a muzzle on our faces wherever we go was never brought up before.
Why should we ask 99.7% of Americans or the world to accept medical tyranny just to make .26% of the population feel safe?
People who question the mandates are called “selfish”, but even if I was one of the people susceptible to the virus, I would NEVER demand that 99% of the population bow to totalitarianism at the off chance that I might live a little while longer. Now THAT would be selfish.
Though Big Tech has sought to suppress or censor studies that run contrary to the mainstream narrative, this has only led more people to question the motivations of governments pushing the mandates.
After all, the mainstream media keeps saying that we should “listen to the science”, but they ignore or censor the science.
So, if the pandemic response is not based in science, then it must only be about control.
Many Westerners are not as stupid as the elites think. They see the inconsistencies in the rhetoric and the data and they are increasingly prone to refuse to comply.
This might be why the establishment is suddenly rushing out at least two Covid vaccines in the span of half a year; they have to get the vaccine phase of the Reset underway before too many people jump from the panic bandwagon.
The vaccine rush and the claims of effectiveness of 94% to 95% from Pfizer and Moderna are suspect. The average effectiveness of most vaccines is around 50% or less, and these are vaccines with hundreds of trials and years of usage.
Somehow, Pfizer and Moderna were both able to produce a vaccine for a SARS type virus when multiple governments tried for over a decade to produce vaccines for SARS in China and were unsuccessful, and they were able to achieve 95% effectiveness?
Many people are not buying the vaccine story, and this is perhaps why the elites are jumping headlong into vaccination so fast. Consider this fact:
Here I think we have our explanation for the vaccination bonanza. The elites know that a third of Americans (and probably Europeans) will not take the vaccine regardless of any propaganda they dish out.
They also know that 60% of Americans are unlikely to take the vaccine unless they can show an effectiveness rate of at least 75%.
Neither Moderna nor Pfizer have actually produced any evidence that their vaccines are capable of prevented severe illness or death from Covid, so, their effectiveness rate is based on “projections” of success according to their minimal trials.
Meaning, the effectiveness rate of 95% is completely arbitrary.
Why did they go with such a high number instead of a more realistic 50% to 60%? Because the polls say they need an epic effectiveness rate in order to convince Americans to take the vaccine. I think it is really as simple as that.
Americans are skeptical of the vaccines for a number of reasons. The reality that they are minimally tested and rushed out in less than a year is one reason .
The fact that the government and the media have been caught censoring or lying about Covid data is another reason.
People just don’t trust the elites, and who can blame them?
Who would trust a cabal of psychopaths to inject them with an unknown viral cocktail? Maybe their intentions are not so pure?
Maybe this is what Bill Gates meant when he stated in his Ted Talk that “vaccines and reproductive services” could help contribute to a reduction of the Earth’s population of 10% to 15% as a means to “stop global warming."
Why would Bill Gates mention vaccines in the same breath as “reproductive services” in reference to population reduction?
Aren’t vaccines supposed to help people live longer?
Well, the Pfizer VP’s warning about the Covid vaccine is ringing bells for me. Maybe the Covid vaccine won’t make you sick, or kill you.
Maybe you will live a long life free of coronavirus, but you’ll find out a few years after taking the vaccine that you won’t ever be able to have kids.
Watch the movie ‘Children Of Men’ to get a sense of what the future might be like if the globalists get their way.
In the meantime, the elites are trying with everything they have to convince the public that they must abandon notions of civil liberties in the name of survival and “the greater good”.
They are already talking about how things will never go back to normal, and the changes being made today will stay in place for many years to come.
Governments are in the media right now claiming the vaccines “will not be mandatory”. This is a lie.
At the same time they are putting mandates in place to require you to prove you are vaccinated in order to go to public places and even to go to work. Basically, you take the vaccine or you die from poverty. This is not a choice.
But, I see millions of Americans standing in opposition to this agenda. I see sheriffs and police across the country refusing to enforce the agenda, even in hard-left states like California.
I see protests in lockdown states like Michigan, California and New York. I see mass protests in Europe. I see the Reset scheme being exposed and the truth breaking into the mainstream.
I see something rising to the surface, and I smell that gunpowder scent of rebellion, and I like it.
I’m not pessimistic about the future. I know a crash is coming. I know a fight is coming. But right now what I see is a fight that can and will be won by those that respect the principles of freedom.
This Is How Your ‘Aura’ Affects Your Health & Those Around You + Magnetic Fields Of The Human Body And Their Functions & 13 Signs You Are Experiencing A Spiritual Awakening August 27 2018 | From: CollectiveEvolution / SitsShow / TheUnboundedSpirit
An ‘aura’ field can be defined as a luminous glow or radiation that surrounds a person’s body, almost like a halo. Ancient depictions of religious and spiritual figures often feature this aura, but today, modern science is discovering that we are all, in fact, surrounded by this type of field, and it can actually affect the way we feel.
We know that energy cannot be seen with the naked human eye, which is why attempts to measure invisible phenomena scientifically are often greeted with harsh criticism, but thanks to the groundbreaking work of dedicated scientists from all over the world, the concept of non-material science is starting to become accepted in the mainstream.
This refers to the idea that the physical material reality we perceive with our senses isn’t the only reality that’s available for us to study in a modern day scientific manner.
“The day science begins to study non-physical phenomena, it will make more progress in one decade than in all the previous centuries of its existence.”
– Nikola Tesla
Before getting into how our aura can affect us and those around us, I’d like to mention that human thoughts, intentions, feelings and emotions - ‘factors associated with consciousness’ - have been shown to have a direct effect on and correlation to our physical material world.
"The stream of knowledge is heading toward a non-mechanical reality; the universe begins to look more like a great thought than like a great machine.
Mind no longer appears to be an accidental intruder into the realm of matter, we ought rather hail it as the creator and governor of the realm of matter. Get over it, and accept the inarguable conclusion. The universe is immaterial-mental and spiritual."
- Sir James Jeans (“The Mental Universe” ; Nature 436:29,2005)
To see a more in-depth explanation of how factors associated with consciousness are intertwined with our physical material reality you can read this article:
Work by the brilliant scientists over at the Institute of HeartMath can perhaps best shed light on one aspect of human aura. A large portion of their research has investigated heart and brain interaction.
Researchers have examined how the heart and brain communicate with each other and how that affects our consciousness and the way in which we perceive our world. For example, when a person is feeling really positive emotions like gratitude, love, or appreciation, the heart beats out a certain message.
Because the heart beats out the largest electromagnetic field produced in the body, researchers are able to gather significant data from it. According to Rolin McCratey, Ph.D, and Director of Research at the Institute:
"Emotional information is actually included and modulated into these fields. By learning to shift our emotions, we are changing the information coded into the magnetic fields that are radiated by the heart, and that can impact those around us.
We are fundamentally and deeply connected with each other and the planet itself, and what we do individually really does count and matters."
Did you know that your heart emits electromagnetic fields which change according to your emotions, or that the human heart has a magnetic field that can be measured up to several feet away from the human body?
Did you know that positive emotions create physiological benefits in your body, or that you can boost your immune system by conjuring up positive emotions?
Did you know that negative emotions can create nervous system chaos, and that positive emotions do the complete opposite?
The bottom line is, feelings of love, gratitude, and compassion – any positive feelings whatsoever – have a larger impact than we could have ever imagined.
The Spiritual Heart - is in a way a little like a smart phone, invisibly connecting us to a large network of information. It is through an unseen energy that the heart emits that humans are profoundly connected to all living things. The energy of the heart literally links us to each other. Every person's heart contributes to a 'collective field environment.' This short video explains the importance of this connection and how we each add to this collective energy field. The energetic field of the heart even connects us with the earth itself.
It’s fascinating to consider how the heart’s magnetic field might be interacting with and affecting other people, and it leads me to wonder if perhaps the electromagnetic fields around our bodies are somehow connected to that of the Earth.
What type of effect, if any, might the information coded into our electromagnetic fields have on the information coded into the Earth’s field? It’s all very exciting, and there are so many questions still left to answer.
Below is a video of Dr. Konstantin Korotkov, a professor of physics at St. Petersburg State Technical University, who believes that our positive and negative thoughts each have a different impact on our surrounding environment.
A Russian scientist is trying to convince people they can change the world simply by using their own energy. He claims that thinking in a certain way can have a positive or negative effect on the surrounding environment. "We are developing the idea that our consciousness is part of the material world and that with our consciousness we can directly influence our world," said Dr. Konstantin Korotkov, a professor of physics at St. Petersburg State Technical University. To bridge our understanding of the unseen world of energy, scientific experiments are being carried out using a technique called bioelectrophotography. The assumption is that we are constantly emitting energy. Bioelectrophotography aims to capture these energy fields seen as a light around the body -- or what some people would call your aura.
He has developed a scientific device based on the ancient Chinese system of energy meridians which measures the bio-energy of living organisms, as well as the environment.
The device, called the GDV, uses a completely painless electrical current applied to the fingertips - taking less than one millisecond to work - to highlight potential health (physiological and psycho-emotional) abnormalities.
The body’s response is measured in the form of an “electron cloud” which is composed of light energy photons. The glow of this discharge is invisible to the human eye (humans can only see one percent of the entire electromagnetic spectrum) and is captured by an optical CCD camera system and then translated into a digital computer.
In the GDV software programs, the glow from the different sectors of the finger images is projected onto the shape of a human body in correspondence with the location of the different organs and systems. As a result, it produces energy field images that allow for intuitive analysis of the physiological level of human body functioning.
It has been approved and received registration as a routine medical diagnostic device by the Russian Ministry of Health upon recommendation of the Russian Academy of Sciences.
According to Eastern metaphysical theories of Ayurvedic Indian medicine, there are seven “Chakras,” or integrated energy centers, correlated with physical, mental, emotional, and spiritual well-being.
These energy Chakras are positioned or embedded into the spinal column at various locations beginning with the coccyx, rising all the way to the crown of the head.
Dr. Pradeep B. Deshpande, a Professor Emeritus at the Department of Chemical Engineering at the University of Louisville, explains:
"Each Chakra is considered to resonate at a different frequency level. With new BioWell software, it is now possible to quantitatively estimate the energy of Chakras and graphically display their level of activation, and indicate whether this level of activation is above or below the level found from large numbers of subjects.
The results from a case study he conducted involving over 100 participants in attendance indicate that imbalanced Chakras are easily detectable:
"Each individual sector or portion of the fingertip is connected energetically with specific organs and organ systems such as the respiratory system. When the data of the 10 individual BIO-grams are collated and interpolated, an image of the entire full body energy field is created.
An example of the full body energy field from a healthy and unhealthy/emotionally unbalanced individual are shown above. The gaps and the reduced emissions and out-of-balance Chakras for the unhealthy individual are quite obvious."
Please keep in mind that clinical studies of more than 10,000 patient cases with various health challenges have also been well documented in Russia.
How to See a Human Aura in 5 Minutes
Magnetic Fields Of The Human Body And Their Functions
Manly P. Hall is a philosopher and mystic from the early 20th century. Some view him as a pillar of esoteric knowledge, while others think he was part of a dark cabal that has infiltrated Masonic lodges throughout the globe.
Hall did not work his way up the degrees as most Masons do. Instead, he was given an honorary 33rd degree after establishing himself as a learned scholar in many fields.
While it is all too easy to label someone "evil" purely for an association to a group that has overall been corrupted to a large extent, those who truly seek knowledge and wisdom beyond armchair judgments can see past a book's cover, for the wisdom within its pages.
Those who dismiss what Hall had to say are the ones who miss out on the knowledge he has to offer but if one can look past appearances, then a wealth of information can be claimed.
I think that knowledge is everywhere, even held within the hands of some of the most diabolical people on the planet. But in receiving these gems of wisdom, we need not consider ourselves evil or supporting those who act insidiously.
Knowledge is amoral. When used in the right hands it can be a powerful tool. but in the wrong hands (usually the ignorant), it can be a destructive weapon. But for the one who foolishly dismisses wisdom because of an appearance alone, they will suffer the pitfalls of their own prejudice.
But for the truly discerning, the ability to absorb data from any source is the key to personal growth and evolution. To the discerning mind, wisdom can be found everywhere, but it will remain hidden behind a veil if we never explore it.
As such, if you have prejudices about Manly P. Hall because of his association with Freemasonry, I ask you to set them aside and open your heart and mind to hear what he has to say.
And I will share that the concept of magnetic fields affecting the body is hardly new and has been well established for years. Our energetic body connects directly to the Earth-mother in many ways, earthing and geomagnetic fields are some of them. Both of these play an important role in restoring the health of mind, body, and soul.
Magnetic Fields of the Human Body and Their Functions is the title of an interview with Manly P. Hall, a Freemason who was very knowledgeable in esoteric teachings.
I do not agree with everything that Manly teaches; however, in the interview, he shared a lot of very important information about energy fields and the human body, so if you want to learn some empowering information about energy fields and the human body, I highly encourage you to watch and listen to the interview.
Manly Palmer Hall (March 18, 1901 – August 29, 1990) was a Canadian-born author and mystic. He is perhaps most famous for his work The Secret Teachings of All Ages: An Encyclopedic Outline of Masonic, Hermetic, Qabbalistic and Rosicrucian Symbolical Philosophy, which is widely regarded as his magnum opus, and which he published at the age of 25 (or 27, 1928)
He has been widely recognized as a leading scholar in the fields of religion, mythology, mysticism, and the occult.
Carl Jung, when writing Psychology and Alchemy, borrowed material from Hall’s private collection.
In 1934, Hall founded the Philosophical Research Society (PRS) in Los Angeles, California, dedicating it to an idealistic approach to the solution of human problems.
The PRS claims to be non-sectarian and entirely free from educational, political, or ecclesiastical control, and the Society’s programs stress the need for the integration of philosophy, religion, and science into one system of instruction.
The PRS Library, a public facility devoted to source materials in obscure fields, has many rare and scarce items now impossible to obtain elsewhere.
In 1973 (47 years after writing The Secret Teachings of All Ages), Hall was recognized as a 33º Mason (the highest honor conferred by the Supreme Council of the Scottish Rite), at a ceremony held at PRS on December 8th, despite never being initiated into the physical craft.
In his over 70-year career, Hall delivered approximately 8,000 lectures in the United States and abroad, authored over 150 books and essays, and wrote countless magazine articles.
Manly Hall: Magnetic Fields of the Human Body and Their Functions
13 Signs You Are Experiencing A Spiritual Awakening
Here are 13 crystal clear signs that you’re experiencing a spiritual awakening:
1. You desire less stuff and more simplicity. You realize that the less you possess the more unburdened your psyche is, and instead of wanting to acquire material wealth, you are seeking to find your inner wealth.
2. You are drawn to mind-expanding books. You don’t read books anymore just in order to entertain yourself when you feel like having nothing better to do, and choose to read those books that help you to become the greatest version of yourself.
3. You spend more time alone in silence. You go for solitary walks in nature and meditate in silence so as to reconnect and make peace with yourself.
4. You eat healthier and take better care of your body. You start treating your body like it’s sacred, listening to its wisdom, and keeping it as healthy as you can.
5. You feel more connected to nature and all living beings. You recognize the interconnectedness and interdependence of all beings and feel a sense of oneness with everyone and everything.
6. You feel compassion about the suffering in the world. You become aware of how much pain there is all around you and do your best to alleviate it in any way you can.
7. You take responsibility in your hands. You realize that there’s no point in having a victim’s mentality and blaming others for what’s going wrong in your life, and you take conscious action to shape your destiny.
8. You are mindful of your actions. You’ve discovered the tremendous power of your actions and you make sure to act in ways that don’t negatively affect yourself and the world.
9. The past and the future lose control over your life. You understand that the past and future don’t truly exist, and the only moment that was, is, and will ever be is the present.
10. You have a deep yearning for meaning. You comprehend that living a normal life is empty of meaning and purpose, and you seek to create your own path in your life’s journey.
11. You are more creative. You feel an increased desire to creatively express yourself and turn your dreams into reality.
12. You expose your true self to the world. You’ve dropped your social masks of pretense and you are open to communicate your innermost thoughts and feelings with others without feeling guilty or ashamed.
13. You have a loss of interest in competition. You realize that competition brings conflict and suffering, and that the only way to live in harmony with others is by having a loving and compassionate attitude towards them.
Dangerous Products That We’re Unknowingly Using In Our Day-To-Day Life
+ The Cancer Risk To People Who Drink Chlorinated Water Is 93% Higher Than Those Who Don’t December 14 2020 | From: NewEasternOutlook / EnvirowatchRangitikei / Varous
In today’s highly controversial and aggressive world, virtually anything can present a threat to the life of a human being, not just wars, climate change, or short-sighted and often criminal actions of certain politicians.
As it has been shown by a number of scientific studies, the activities of a number of American corporations present a very real threat the well-being of the population mainly due to the use of genetically modified substances in their products while manufacturing substandard health and beauty aids.
The truth is that it’s the people of developing countries that are being affected by these fraudulent business practices the most, since Western corporations try to suppress any information about the health effects of their products to obtain maximum profit.
At the end of the twentieth century British scientists have come to a sensational conclusion that parabens are capable of penetrating the skin barrier and are being accumulated in the tissues of the body, causing cancer, hormone system failures, endocrine system suppression, and skin diseases.
Research made this finding while studying malignant tumors in breast tissue, all of which contained parabens, Later on, these findings were confirmed by Canadian and French scientists.
Parabens are artificial preservatives that are often used in the pharmaceutical and cosmetic industry by a number of Western corporations.
Even though they are effectively increasing the shelf life of a product, while remaining relatively cheap to use, parabens pose a serious threat to human health and well-being.
From time to time one can come across articles on the harmful effects of parabens in Europe and the United States, forcing certain companies to replace parabens with less harmful preservatives. However, the markets of developing countries, especially those with hot and humid climates, are flooded with Western cosmetic products that contain the dangerous substance.
In order to attract international attention to this danger, the French Le Monde went as far as to publish a list of the 400 Western pharmaceutical products containing parabens and that are, therefore, dangerous for use or consumption.
In this list one may find the baby cream Biafine, such cough medicines as Clarix, Codotussyl, Drill, Hexapneumine, Humex, Pectosan, and Rhinathiol, stomach relief medicine such as Maalox, Gaviscon, Josacine, and antibiotic Zinnat, along with a list of other drugs produced by Western corporations and actively advertised for mass consumption.
As it has been pointed out by French journalists, numerous studies have shown that drugs from this list compromise the functioning of the hormone system, especially the reproductive ability of men and women, and may result in cancer.
At the same time, scientists are stressing the danger of hydro-alcoholic gels which were brought to the market in the wake of the artificially created hysteria around the “danger” of the so-called “bird flu,” the H1N1. These gels are advertised as the ultimate solution for sanitizing hands and body in the absence of soap.
A study carried out by the University of Missouri and published in the Plos ONE journal shows that hydro-alcoholic gels make a person more susceptible to Bisphénol-A.
In 2010, the US Food and Drug Administration (FDA) officially recognized that Bisphénol-A is harmful to human health due to the negative effect it has on brain functions and the reproductive system. It also causes a number of cancers (in both women and men) – in particular, prostate cancer, breast cancer as well as autism, depression, reproductive and endocrine systems failure, delays in brain development, diabetes, obesity, and cardiovascular disease.
Yet another study conducted in Argentina showed that 85% of the women’s hygienic pads presented a serious threat to women since they contain the chemically hazardous substance known as glyphosate.
This fact was revealed by researchers of the National Argentine University of La Plata at a recent congress of physicians in Buenos Aires, upon examining sanitary towels and sanitary pads produced with the use of genetically-modified cotton that was grown using Roundup herbicide of the American company Monsanto-Bayer.
As we learn from this study,after the use of this herbicide, all cotton products contain this carcinogenic substance. For this reason, there’s been a massive movement in many countries through the collection of signatures to force such producers as Tampax or Always to state the composition of their products.
The Cancer Risk To People Who Drink Chlorinated Water Is 93% Higher Than Those Who Don’t
This information is from well known Dr Mercola. If you go to the link you can download his free ebook, an excellent resource that will show you how to protect yourself and your loved ones from health risks by choosing the best water to drink and bathe in.
Need I repeat? We need to be vigilant in what we expose ourselves to today because corporate interests are such that they will focus on profits not on your health. Be vigilant and be informed.
What if that clear, clean-looking liquid you use every day – to quench your thirst, to bathe and shower in, and to wash your dishes and laundry in contributed to dozens of everyday ailments, including…heart attacks, tiredness, sinus problems, sperm count, risk of miscarriage, a weakened immune system and many more.
Truth is, the water we use in and around our homes is far from the fresh, pure resource you might assume. And the worst part is…
Americans are ingesting from 300 to 600 times what the Environmental Protection Agency considers a “safe” amount while chlorine itself is relatively benign, and was created to help keep us free from infectious diarrheas, it reacts with organic materials which already dissolve in water, forming chemicals (known as DBP’s) that are over 100 times more toxic than chlorine…
According to the U.S. Council of Environmental Quality, the cancer risk to people who drink chlorinated water is 93 percent higher than among those whose water does not contain chlorine.
The residents of a small town in Pennsylvania who ate diets rich in saturated animal fats and milk had no heart attacks – until they switched from mountain spring water to fluoridated water.
Research from the University of Nijmegen in the Netherlands discovered that people who swam in chlorinated pools or polluted waters as children had 2.2 to 2.4 times the risk of developing melanoma compared to those who did not swim in chlorinated waters.
Male smokers who drank chlorinated tap water for more than 40 years had double the risk of bladder cancer as smoking males who drank non-chlorinated water.
Newsmax Ratings Surge, Surpass Fox For First Time & Three Ways American [Western] Mainstream Media Resembles Communist Media December 13 2020 | From: Zerohedge / TheEpochTimes / Various
Before November 3, neither OAN nor Newsmax could come anywhere close to matching, or surpassing, the ratings from America's reigning king of cable: Fox News, the conservative - leaning news and opinion network that helped cultivate the base of GOP voters which Trump rallied to victory in 2016, has finally lost its crown.
According to media reports, Newsmax beat Fox News among the coveted 25- to 54-year-old demographic for the first time ever on Monday evening.
The ratings win comes amid a breakthrough in the Trump Administration's push to challenge the election results in the court of public opinion to try and "delegitimize" Biden's presidency (just like how many on the left refused to accept Donald Trump as their president 4 yeas ago).
CNN's Brian Stelter, who clearly likes to think of himself on the de facto "reporter of record" when it comes to covering the American media industry (the eptiome of naval gazing, as far as we can tell), broke the news late Tuesday.
"Before the election, Newsmax was not regarded as a formidable competitor to Fox; it was mostly dismissed as one of a handful of wannabe challengers," CNN's Brian Stelter reports.
"But President Trump's loss on Nov. 3 changed the cable TV calculus. Viewers who were frustrated when Fox admitted the truth of Trump's loss sought other options," and "Newsmax - and Kelly in particular - offered a safe space in which Biden was not called president-elect and Trump was not yet defeated."
Of course, many on the left are blaming Fox's "Fall From Grace'' on the fact that it "stood up to Trump" by calling the vote for Biden, even as supreme court challenges and other questions remian unresolved.
Trump's most loyal followers are likewise repudiating Fox, and embracing Sinclair-owned Newsmax and OAN.
While this is only the first time any Newsmax programming blocks has topped Fox, we imagine it won't be the last, particularly as Newsmax copies more and more of what worked at Fox, while filtering out everything that didn't.
Three Ways American [Western] Mainstream Media Resembles Communist Media
On Thanksgiving Day, President Donald Trump held a press conference, and the media relentlessly pressured him with questions about whether he would leave the White House, in effect repeatedly calling on him to concede.
The scene reminded me of the Cultural Revolution in China and how the media attacked Liu Shaoqi.
Liu, the Chinese regime’s chairman between 1959 to 1968, was attacked by the media day and night after the leader of the Chinese Communist Party (CCP) decided to get rid of him.
Within a few days, he was removed. Abused, he died alone, without even his family being informed.
At the crematorium, he was an anonymous body - the workers didn’t even know this was a former high official. Parades celebrating his downfall were held nationwide.
When I was growing up in China, the communist state-run media were the only voices we were exposed to. We were told that only the CCP could take care of the people. Socialism was the only correct path for human life, and the only way to provide us with a happy life.
As I grew older, immigrated to America, and lived a different life in which I read more and traveled more, I started to understand that the communist media machine is like poison. It poisons minds and plagues society.
They are a machine the communists created to lie. It is made to hide the truth and to use lies to control the people. It is not meant for small lies, but to systematically lead the entire society to believe in its lies.
By pushing a theory, a narrative, an ideology that is against human nature, against human tradition, and against our cultural heritage, they can brainwash the entire country to such an extent that there is no longer any standard of right and wrong.
They actually set up the opposite standard: Evil is treated as right, and good as wrong.
The communist media are not meant to foster mutual understanding. They sow division. The communists destroy human society by driving people into opposite groups, creating hatred and leading people to fight.
Because of communist propaganda, peasants killed landlords, workers killed business owners, and within every small group, people killed each other.
This is why in the Soviet Union, Russians killed Russians, and in communist China, Chinese have killed Chinese. Under communism, 80 million Chinese have been killed, more than the total number of deaths in the two world wars combined.
Communist propaganda can be hard to spot because it disguises its evil intentions with political correctness. The communists claim that they are “serving people,” achieving “equality,” and “helping the poor.”
It sounds like idealism, which is why it has been effective in attracting young people. Before communism took over China, it named itself the “savior” of the people.
Once it took power, communist leaders got busy fighting for power among themselves and enjoyed a comfortable life. The rich became poor, and the poor became poorer.
Here in the United States, we now can see our media acting like those in communist countries.
CNN and The New York Times dress themselves in good intentions by telling us we have a serious problem with racism, just as the communist media claim to be serving the people.
In fact, by pushing this narrative of racism, the mainstream media in the United States are fomenting division. It is no accident that this summer we saw young people rioting and burning in our big cities.
They have been trained to hate, just the communists trained the Chinese people to hate.
But in China, the tool used was class struggle. “Racism” in the United States is for our mainstream media what class struggle was in China.
In reporting on America in the world, the mainstream media portray the United States as evil and say it should feel guilty for its power and prosperity.
This is similar to how the media in communist countries call on the rich to confess their sins.
The mainstream media have told us America is in decline, which is exactly what the propaganda of the Soviet Union said and what the CCP media have been saying.
The communist media have never stopped calling on America, the free world’s leader, to concede.
On Thanksgiving, we saw the mainstream media pressuring Trump to concede. In fact, these media outlets have never accepted Trump as legitimate.
For instance, according to the Media Research Center, in March through May this year, coverage of Trump by ABC, CBS, and NBC was 94 percent negative, with the coverage reaching an unprecedented 99.5 percent negative in May.
Since Trump was elected, the center has regularly found network coverage that was 90 percent or more negative.
This unanimity of perspective is what one expects out of communist media. It is a propagandistic attack.
As with the political correctness employed by communists, behind this unanimity is a conviction that Trump and conservatives simply have no right to their opinions.
Hundreds or even thousands of people have come forward to expose fraud in the 2020 election, but the U.S. mainstream media have not reported what they have to say.
This is a deliberate control - or censorship - of people’s voices.
The nonstop attacks on an opposing leader, the political correctness, the silencing of viewpoints - these are all the hallmarks of a communist-style press.
The Three Trigger Terms Being Used To Stop Critical Thinking December 12 2020 | From: WakingTimes
It’s a strange world of newspeak we live in. What was once a society devoted to logic and progress is now being herded in echo chambers of thought control and anti-critical thinking.
Without the ability to examine an issue impartially and completely there is little hope of maintaining liberty and freedom, as history repeatedly demonstrated.
Today, we find that thinking is a diminishing art, and in its place, sound bites and stop-thought terms are used to put the brakes on the mind. These terms are widely used as signals to prevent minds from looking too deeply at a topic or issue.
""Thinking critically means making reasoned judgments that are logical and well thought out. It is a way of thinking in which one doesn’t simply accept all arguments and conclusions to which one is exposed without questioning the arguments and conclusions.
It requires curiosity, skepticism and humility. People who use critical thinking are the ones who say things such as, “How do you know that?”
“Is this conclusion based on evidence or gut feelings?” and “Are there alternative possibilities when given new pieces of information?""
The three terms most widely used today to this avail are detailed below.
1. Conspiracy Theorist
This term is so overused that it really is devoid of any practical meaning.
If you were to examine it at face value, though, it describes a person who is looking to understand injustices in our world and is willing to look at uncomfortable facts in search of negative influence… of which there is plenty in our world today.
However, ‘conspiracy theorist’ has literally become a derogatory term that is attributed to anyone who refuses to accept mainstream narratives at face value.
It doesn’t matter that there is overwhelming evidence to indicate that mainstream media does not value objectivity or report on important issues thoroughly or truthfully.
Now we find this term applied as a prefix to well-known journalists and media personalities, almost as we use the term Doctor.
It’s an adjective that precedes them everywhere, so that before you even know what issue is being discussed, you know that the issue is coming from someone considered to be fringe and unacceptable.
2. Alt
We see the label ‘alt’ being applied more and more frequently as an adjective for sentiments that supposedly do not fit in with the accepted status quo. Ideas outside of the box.
Alt-Media. Alt-Right. Alt-Left. Alt-News. Alt-Health. And so on.
The signal here is that the mainstream is the safe space, and that any segment of ideas or thought given this prefix is outside of that mainstream, and therefore not something ordinary people would want to associate with.
It takes complex ideas and sensitive issues and benches them, so that when the hive mind stumbles upon something ‘alt’ they immediately react with fear, disdain and feigned outrage.
There is no ‘alt’ in our world. We are one, and any faction of ideas is really just a spinoff of the shared reality we all live in.
If segments of this shared space are off-limits and labeled as so, we all lose.
3. Hate Speech
This term is one of the all-time favorites of politicians and tyrants. After all, what could more dangerous than hate?
Newsflash: Hate speech is not the same thing as a hate crime.
Speech is just that, speech. It is literally vibrating air moving through space, and unless we’re talking about and LRAD crowd control cannon, sound really can’t cause people physical harm.
It is fascinating to watch how people use this term so freely as if speech itself can be criminal.
American [Western] society is founded on the idea of freedom of speech and self-expression, which at its core is the recognition that as human beings we do not and never will all see the world in the same way.
It is an acknowledgement of the fact that different people have different ideas about how the world is and should be. That these differences shouldn’t be used as a basis for discrimination.
The term hate speech is one of the most loaded and ambiguous terms in the political lexicon. Beware.
Final Thoughts
Next time you see or hear these terms being used, ask yourself what it is about the story that you’re not supposed to think too deeply about.
Allow both sides of the argument to share equal time in your mind, and honor the independent, sovereign being within yourself that deserves a chance to make up its own mind about how it wishes to view the world.
From 2018: Remember The Pandemic That Was Going To Wipe Out Humanity? We’re Still Here December 11 2020 / August 22 2018 | From: JonRappoport
Every few years, a new virus shows up that, experts tell us, can wipe out half the world in six months... and then it doesn’t happen.
I could give you several examples. In this piece, let’s harken back to SARS, the vague flu lookalike that suddenly showed up in 2003 and was going to decimate the Earth.
When SARS hit, the World Health Organization (WHO) put the world on notice not to fly into Toronto. The city lost billions of tourism dollars.
The fabled “coronavirus,” touted as the cause of SARS, was evil and covert and unique. So said ten WHO labs, which took over all official research on the “plague.”
But on May 1, 2003, Dr. Frank Plummer, head of the WHO lab in Winnipeg, issued a blockbuster to a SARS summit in Canada. He was now finding the coronavirus in ZERO percent of SARS cases.
Weeks before, Plummer had said eighty percent of patients showed the virus, then that had dropped to sixty, forty, thirty, and now it was ZERO.
You have to understand that even eighty percent is not sufficient to call the virus the cause of any disease condition.
But ZERO?
Yes, they all have the disease, the same disease, and we have the virus behind it all. The virus is present in ZERO percent of cases.
And the doctor saying this is a consummate insider, the chief honcho at Canada’s WHO lab. WHO being the agency, along with the CDC, that is in charge of all research on SARS.
Understand, given the fact that SARS is supposedly composed of a list of vague symptoms - cough, fever, fatigue, lung infection - the coronavirus is the only thing that is tying these cases together - AND WHEN THAT VIRUS PROVED TO BE MEANINGLESS, all the cases were set adrift, so to speak, joining the ranks of regular old flu and lung infection.
And the SARS death rate was low, so low the whole thing turned out to be a dud. A phony dud.
Of course, no one at the CDC or WHO admitted this. These people are experts at “moving on.” And they’re adept at writing history to revise facts and cover their backsides.
But a whole parade of fake pandemics - and attendant dire warnings - does, over time, achieve one objective: it conditions people to accept the lie that vaccines are the best solution to illness.
And that’s no small feat. It’s especially important when you consider the fact that the CDC, which is tasked with overseeing vaccine safety and efficacy, buys and sells $4 billion worth of vaccines a year. This is BUSINESS we’re talking about, and in order to promote business, PR people cook up all sorts of schemes.
Pandemics, even if they don’t pan out, are clever propaganda.
Also, the horror story of GERMS that can cause plagues anywhere in the world at the drop of a hat - the ceaseless drumbeat of germs, germs, and more germs - obscures all sorts of environmental causes of illness and death.
For example, toxic chemicals produced by major and favored corporations.
“It’s the virus”is the greatest cover story on planet Earth.
Don’t forget that one.
Oh - you want to know the official figures on SARS? 8,000 cases worldwide, 774 deaths, between 2002 and 2003. No cases on the record since 2004.
By any standard, that’s a DUD. But go ahead, read the official accounts and histories. See if you can find one clear admission that the whole thing was nonsense. Good luck.
Remember, it’s not the pandemic that’s important. It’s the warning about the pandemic. That’s what moves product off the shelves…
Resetting Politics And The Media December 10 2020 | From: NZPCR / A / Various
It seems a Government with absolute power is not averse to breaking election pledges.
Before the election, Labour was clear – they would not introduce a capital gains tax, nor a wealth tax. The only change in income tax would be an increase to the top rate of tax from 33 cents to 39 cents for those earning over $180,000 a year.
When pressed on whether there might be other tax increases by Newstalk ZB’s Heather du Plessis-Allan, Finance Spokesman Grant Robertson was clear: “there’ll be no other changes to tax beyond what we’ve announced.”
When Heather asked, “What about the bright-line test?” Grant Robertson said, “No”.
“Not the rate, and not the years?” asked Heather. “No”, said Grant, clearly ruling out any increase at all to the bright-line test.
The bright-line test treats gains from the sale of residential property – excluding the family home – as income if the property is sold within the regulated period. When National introduced the test in 2015, the regulated period was set at 2 years. In 2017 Labour extended it to five years, and now Grant Robertson has asked Treasury’s advice on extending it even further.
If they go ahead and extend the test, Labour’s pre-election promises will count for nothing.
This week we also saw our super-hero PM rising in Parliament to address a crisis. It seems we are all in such peril that a ‘climate emergency’ has had to be declared for New Zealand.
But it was all show. There is no real-life climate emergency. The only climate emergency is a political one created by the United Nations’ alarmist climate models.
Any computer model that tries to predict the future climate by only taking into account the impact that the 4 percent of carbon dioxide produced by mankind has on the climate – and not the other 96 percent produced by nature, nor the influence of the sun, the clouds, precipitation, wind, oceans, and the myriad of other factors that significantly influence the climate – is always going to be wrong.
At least when Professor Neil Ferguson of Imperial College in London produced his Covid-19 forecasts that grossly exaggerated the number of deaths, causing governments around the world – including ours – to impose harsh lockdowns, his computer models were quickly discredited.
Not so with the UN’s flawed climate models – in spite of the best efforts of scientists over the years, including 500 who challenged the UN just last year claiming, “The general-circulation models of climate on which international policy is founded are unfit for their purpose”.
Regrettably, nothing changes. Governments continue to squander vast amounts of taxpayers’ money on damaging climate policies based on the UN’s defective models.
The problem is, that for politicians like Jacinda Ardern, who understands better than most that the language of panic and fear is one of the most effective instruments of political control, those climate models are gold – they are creating the alarm that is paving the way for the introduction of extremist policies that will destroy our economy in the name of saving the planet.
This week’s NZCPR Guest Commentator Gideon Rozner, a journalist and Director of Policy at the Australian Institute of Public Affairs, believes that as a result of the election, “New Zealand is in for a dangerous three years” – at the hands of a “brilliant politician” but a “grossly incompetent administrator”:
"New Zealand has been hit particularly hard by the Ardern government’s heavy-handed coronavirus response… According to the OECD, New Zealand’s GDP could fall by 10 percent in 2020. Likewise, unemployment is tipped to rise to just under 9 percent in 2021 as New Zealand’s $14bn corona wage subsidy program ends. Public debt will soar from 19 percent of GDP in 2019 to 56 percent in 2026…
“As for what Ardern has planned for a second term, the details are patchy. Labour ran something of a ‘small target’ strategy during the election, relying on the Prime Minister’s star power and perceived success in warding off the coronavirus.
“But from what we do know about their ‘policy-lite’ platform, Labour will likely exacerbate New Zealand’s economic woes. Hiking income tax, re-regulating the industrial relations system and a bloodcurdling plan for 100 per cent renewable energy by 2030 could turn the corona-induced economic shock into a permanent state of impoverishment for thousands of Kiwis…
“The only hope for New Zealand now is that whatever horrifying plans that Labour has in store, Jacinda Ardern is just as hopeless at actually implementing them in her second term as she was in her first.”
Gideon wrote his article just after the election, saying, “Jacinda Ardern is perhaps the worst person to lead New Zealand through this economic turbulence”, in light of her “hard-left political temperament, a degraded and politicised public sector, and a largely uncritical and compliant media.”
He’s not wrong. And as far as the media is concerned, things are getting a whole lot worse.
Stuff, one of the country’s biggest media businesses, not content with becoming an echo chamber for radical climate activism – to the point where they will not publish anything that challenges the validity of UN’s fabricated climate crisis – has now lost what remaining semblance of credibility they had by becoming a mouthpiece for Maori sovereignty extremism.
Monday’s grovelling front page apology to Maori for racist reporting, left the public gobsmacked. There now appears to be no hope of balanced reports on racial issues in any of their newspapers.
Not only that, but they are now even refusing to publish advertising that promotes democracy – when it involves Maori seats on local councils. Northland Democracy is currently exercising its legal right to petition three of the four local councils that voted to introduce Maori wards.
With one of those – the Northland Regional Council – even writing to the Minister of Local Government requesting a moratorium on petition rights, had Stuff been a media group of merit, it would have reported on those bullying tactics, instead of refusing to publish innocuous advertisements promoting democracy – see the details here.
New Zealand needs an independent Fourth Estate and balanced reporting from the media – not political activism. One wonders how Stuff will reconcile their new position with the principles of the Media Council, which state:
"Publications should be bound at all times by accuracy, fairness and balance, and should not deliberately mislead or misinform readers by commission or omission. In articles of controversy or disagreement, a fair voice must be given to the opposition view.”
How far Stuff will go with its political activism remains to be seen. But without a doubt, never has the need for a strong Fourth Estate been as great as it is now – especially in light of our Prime Minister’s global ambitions.
Jacinda Ardern is already incorporating the UN’s radical socialist Agenda 2030 into New Zealand’s legal and regulatory framework:
"My Government is doing something not many other countries have tried. We have incorporated the principles of the 2030 Agenda into our domestic policy-making in a way that we hope will drive system-level actions.”
But that is not enough.
She’s planning to advance her socialist world-view onto New Zealand using the economic destruction created by the pandemic to ‘reset’ the economy and ‘build back better’.
During the lockdown, Grant Robertson outlined the Government’s plan:
"We must make this the opportunity to reset our economy, to take account of the massive disruption to some sectors, but also to address some of the long standing challenges we face…
This work will require us to develop new ways of working and break down the barriers between partners in our economy. We have formed a core Ministerial Oversight Group for this work with the Prime Minister, the Deputy Prime Minister, myself and Minister Parker.
We will soon be reaching out to both Ministerial colleagues but also the private sector, unions and more to have input into this work.”
“While Covid-19 and climate change provide a shock to the system, they also provide us with an opportunity, a chance to reset our focus and build back better.
Do this right and we end up with a stronger, more profitable and more sustainable economy.”
Earlier this month Jacinda Ardern informed an audience:
"I don’t need to tell you all that any recovery plan for New Zealand cannot, and should not, be a return to the status quo.
It is about taking a crisis and turning it into a once in a life time opportunity to build back better.”
Building back better was also one of the main themes of last week’s ‘Speech from the Throne’, which was delivered by the Governor General at the State Opening of Parliament.
She explained the Prime Minister has three ‘overarching’ objectives – keeping New Zealanders safe from Covid-19, accelerating our economic recovery, and laying the foundations for a better future.
According to the PM, “the recovery offers an opportunity to reshape the way things are done in New Zealand, to innovate and improve our position and our economy”.
She outlined “a broader view of success… New Zealand’s response to COVID would be insufficient if it were to simply return us to the way we were before the virus.”
She wants to use the power of the State to re-shape New Zealand:
"Recovering and rebuilding entails determined and connected action by government.
That action can, and will, be used to reshape the economy to be more productive, more sustainable, and more equitable… The way we choose to govern is also a tool for change.”
British MP the Rt Hon Sir John Redwood, a former Chief Policy Advisor for Margaret Thatcher, could have been responding to our PM’s speech, when he stated:
"I have no problem with the idea of building better or investing in a better future, but I do have problems with some of the agendas drawn up in the name of the Great Reset."
The Great Reset agenda, which lies behind Labour’s ambitions, is clearly being more openly discussed in the UK than it is in New Zealand.
With its plan to replace the free market economic system with a form of progressive socialism, Sir John has serious misgivings:
"Taxing work, enterprise and success more is a bad idea. Many of the great advances in living standards and quality of life have come from the innovation and enterprise of the private sector. It was not government effort that launched billions of smart phones and electronic pads on the world."
“It was not government which provided the cars to liberate many more people with flexible personal transport, or supplied the great entertainments of stage, screen and events.
It is important that as we build back from lock downs these gains are banked and enhanced, with broadening of reach to ever more people."
“When the agenda proposes taxing and regulating the very products of the digital revolution and the transport revolution that have offered to the many the freedoms and advantages that used to be the preserve of the few I worry that build back better just becomes a cover for more state control over our lives."
Britain is one of many countries around the world, including New Zealand, that is being encouraged to embrace the Great Reset – as the Prime Minister of Canada, Justin Trudeau explained:
“This pandemic has provided an opportunity for a reset. This is our chance to accelerate our pre-pandemic efforts to reimagine economic systems that actually address global challenges like extreme poverty, inequality and climate change.”
This agenda to reset the world economy is not something to be ignored.
Driven by an elite group associated with the World Economic Forum, they will roll out the details of their plan for more equal, inclusive, and sustainable economies at their annual gathering in Davos, Switzerland, in January.
For those who support free markets, the Great Reset is alarming – as is the reset that is presently taking place within our media.
The Truth About Addiction And Recovery December 9 2020 | From: Peele / Various
A radical new approach to recovery - using methods proven more effective than medical treatment or twelve-step programs.
Drawing on the latest research and detailed case studies, the authors expose the best-kept secrets in the recovery field:
Addictions - whether to food, cigarettes, sex, alcohol, or drugs - are not diseases, and they’re not necessarily lifelong problems.
Many more people give up addictions on their own than are helped by medical treatment or twelve-step programs.
Developing values, skills, and life resources enables people to quit addictions - and to shed the addict identity altogether.
In their revolutionary “Life Process Program” for overcoming all kinds of addictions, the authors emphasize self-help and treatment through coping with stress and achieving one’s goals. As helpful as it is controversial, The Truth About Addiction and Recovery will forever change the way we view and treat addiction.
“A classic.” - John Norcross, PhD, ABPP, Distinguished Professor of Psychology at the University of Scranton and author of Changing for Good
Addiction
What causes addiction? Easy, right? Drugs cause addiction. But maybe it is not that simple.
This video is adapted from Johann Hari's New York Times best-selling book 'Chasing The Scream: The First and Last Days of the War on Drugs.'
For more information, and to take a quiz to see what you know about addiction, visit chasingthescream.com
Why It Doesn’t Make Sense To Call Addiction A “Disease”
We frequently hear from people who say: “I drink too much sometimes, but I don’t think I’m an alcoholic. And I don’t want to stand up and talk about myself in front of a group. Is there any other way I can change the way I drink?”
“I’m overweight, but I understand that people are born to be fat and there’s not much you can do about it. I know I’ve tried to lose weight a million times and failed. Does this mean I’m doomed to be overweight?”
“I saw an ad saying the only way to lick your addiction to nicotine is by going to a doctor. Is that really true? Don’t people ever quit smoking on their own?”
“My father was an alcoholic. Does that mean I’m likely to become an alcoholic myself? Should I play it safe and quit drinking altogether? A friend of mine joined a ‘Children of Alcoholics’ group, even though she’s never even been drunk. Should I join such a group? And what about my kids?”
“My son was caught smoking marijuana. Now I’m told that, unless I place him in an expensive residential treatment program, he could escalate his drug use and die. I don’t have the money for this but, of course, if I have to save his life I’ll mortgage the house!”
People are much concerned about bad habits (which sometimes reach life-consuming proportions) that they’d like to do something about-drinking, smoking, overeating, taking drugs, gambling, overspending, or even compulsive romancing.
We hear more and more that every one of these things is a disease, and that we must go to treatment centers or join twelve-step support groups like Alcoholics Anonymous in order to change any of these behaviors.
Is there really no other way to change a powerful habit than to enter treatment for a disease? Do personal initiative, willpower, or just maturing and developing a more rewarding life have anything to do with people’s ability to overcome addictive habits?
As children, as spouses, as parents, as employers, as consumers, and as citizens we must struggle to understand and master the destructive potential of drugs, alcohol, and related addictions.
The kinds of questions so many people face today include: What do we do if we discover our children are smoking marijuana, or worse? Should we put them in a treatment center that will teach them they are chemically dependent for life?
How can we tell if co-workers, employees, and friends are secretly addicts or alcoholics? What is the most appropriate way to react to people who drink too much or do anything that harms themselves and others?
Click on the image above to open a larger versioj in a new window
Furthermore, as a society, how should we deal with these problems? Are our incessant wars on drugs really going to have the positive impact the generals in these wars always claim? Or is there some more sensible or direct way to reduce the damage people do to themselves through their uncontrollable habits?
Rather than arrest drug users, can we treat addicts so that they stop using drugs? And if we expand the treatment for all the addictions we have seen - like shopping and smoking and overeating and sexual behavior - who will pay for all this treatment?
Finally, does addiction diminish people’s judgment so that they can’t be held accountable for their behavior, or for crimes and financial excesses they commit while addicted?
This book is for those concerned with such questions. But what you will read here is not the same as what you see and hear in newspapers and magazines, on television, in addiction treatment centers, in twelve-step groups, and in most physicians’ and therapists’ offices or what your children are learning in school.
For in its desperate search for a way out of the convulsions caused by drug abuse and addiction, our society has seized upon a simple, seductive, but false answer that this book disputes. What we say is, indeed, so different from most things you hear that we have provided extensive documentation at the back of the book.
The simple but incorrect answer we constantly hear is expressed by the familiar statement, “Alcoholism is a disease.” In other words, we can treat away these problems in a medical setting.
This viewpoint has proved so appealing that it has been adopted by professional organizations and government agencies as well as by groups like Alcoholics Anonymous. And now the “disease” label is applied not only to alcoholism, drug addiction, cigarette smoking, and overeating, but also to gambling, compulsive shopping, desperate romantic attachments, and even committing rape or killing one’s newborn child!
A.A.’s image of “powerlessness over alcohol” is being extended to everything that people feel they are unable to resist or control.
But what lies behind the claim that alcoholism and other addictions are diseases? How accurate is it? What evidence supports it? Most important, what good does it do us to believe it? Will it really help you or someone you care about to overcome an addiction?
This book will show that the answer is no - that, in fact, it may do more harm than good. What’s wrong with calling a tenacious and destructive habit a disease?
Three things:
1.
It isn’t true.
2.
It doesn’t help most people (even those it does help might succeed just as well in a less costly, less limiting way).
3.
It prevents us from doing things that really would help.
In this chapter we will summarize what the disease model says, why it is wrong, and why it is harmful. As you will see, there is no good reason to label yourself or people you know as forever marked by an addictive “disease.” Challenging this useless folklore is the first step toward understanding addiction and doing something about it.
Then we will present an alternative way of thinking about and dealing with addiction called the Life Process Program. The accompanying table previews the major differences between the Life Process Program and the disease model of addiction.
Myths Versus Reality
To highlight some of the surprising facts we will reveal, here are some common beliefs about various addictions:
A person needs medical treatment or a program like Smokenders to quit smoking.
Attending Alcoholics Anonymous meetings is the most effective way for alcoholics to stop drinking.
Nearly all regular cocaine users become addicted.
Very few people who have a drinking problem can ever drink in a normal, controlled manner.
Drunk drivers who undergo treatment for alcoholism are less likely to repeat the offense than those who receive normal judicial penalties such as license suspension.
Most people with an alcoholic parent become alcoholics themselves.
Most people who are binge drinkers in their twenties go on to become alcoholics.
Most of the American soldiers who were addicted to heroin in Vietnam remained addicted or became addicted again after they returned home.
The fact that alcoholism runs in families means that it is an inherited disease.
Fat children, because they have inherited their obesity, are more likely to be fat in later life than are people who become fat as adults.
Actually, the best scientific evidence available today indicates that none of these statements is true. Such specific misconceptions grow out of a foundation of false assumptions about the nature of addiction generally.
Ten Assumptions that Distinguish the Life Process Program from the Disease Model
DISEASE MODEL
LIFE PROCESS PROGRAM
1. Addiction is inbred and biological.
1. Addiction is a way of coping with yourself and your world.
2. The solution is medical treatment and membership in spiritual groups such as A.A.
2. The solution requires self-awareness, new coping skills, and changing your environment.
3. Addiction is all-or-nothing; you are or you aren’t an addict.
3. Addiction is a continuum; your behavior is more or less addicted.
4. Addiction is permanent and you can relapse at any moment.
4. Addiction can be outgrown.
5. Addicts are “in denial” and must be forced to acknowledge they have a disease.
5. You should identify problems and solutions in ways that work for you.
6. The recovering addict / alcoholic is the expert on addiction.
6. Those without an addiction problem are the best models.
7. Addiction is a “primary” disease.
7. Addiction stems from other life problems you have.
8. Your main associates must be other recovering addicts.
8. You should associate with a normal range of people.
9. You must accept the disease philosophy to recover.
9. Getting better is not a matter of believing a dogma.
10. Surrendering to a higher power is the key to recovery.
10. You must develop your own power to get better.
At first, it seems hard to understand what is meant by saying that something a person regularly does (such as· drinking alcohol) is a disease.
Habitual, voluntary behavior of this sort does not resemble what we normally think of as a disease, like cancer or diabetes. What is more, A.A. - and even hospital programs for alcoholism - don’t actually treat any biological causes of alcoholism.
After all the claims we have heard in the past decade about biological discoveries concerning alcoholism, not one of these findings has been translated into a usable treatment. Instead, the same group discussions and exhortations that have been used for the last fifty years are employed in hospital programs.
Nor is any biological method used to determine whether someone is an alcoholic other than by assessing how much that person drinks and the consequences of this drinking.
And if we have no special biological information about treating or identifying alcoholism, we surely know nothing about the biological causes of “diseases” such as compulsive gambling, shopping, and loving, which have nothing to do with drugs or alcohol.
There is, however, a standard way those who claim addiction is a disease describe addictive diseases. This description has been developed by groups such as Alcoholics Anonymous, by the medical profession, and by various popularizers of the idea that alcoholism is a disease.
What they say is in every regard wrong.
When they tell you that you have the “disease” of alcoholism, “chemical dependency,” obesity, compulsive shopping, or whatever, this is what they mean:
The basis of the disease is inbred and/or biological. There is no need to look for the causes of the disease in your personal problems, the people you spend time with, the situations you find yourself in, or your ethnic or cultural background. Addiction is bred into you from birth or early childhood. Your current experience of life has nothing to do with it; nothing you can do makes you either more or less likely to become addicted.
It involves complete loss of control over your behavior. Once involved in your addiction, you are utterly at its mercy. You cannot choose whether, or how much, to lose yourself in the involvement. No matter how costly it may be in a given situation, you will go all the way. You cannot make reasonable, responsible choices about something to which you are addicted.
Addictions are forever. An addictive disease is like diabetes - it stays with you as long as you live. The mysterious bodily or psychic deficiency that lies at the root of addiction can never be remedied, and you can never safely expose yourself to the substance to which you were addicted. Once an addict, always an addict.
It inevitably expands until it takes over and destroys your life. “Irreversible progression” is a hallmark of addictive diseases as they are conceived today. The addiction grows and grows until it devours you, like AIDS or cancer. No rewards, no punishments, not even the most momentous developments in your life can stay its course, unless you completely swear off the addictive substance or activity.
If you say you don’t have it, that’s when they really know you have it. According to this “Catch22” of the disease theory, anyone suspected of having an addictive disease who insists that he or she doesn’t have the disease is guilty of the added offense of “denial.” In this way, the “disease” label is like a web that traps a person more firmly the harder the person fights to get out of it.
It requires medical and/or “spiritual” treatment. Thinking you can cure your addiction through willpower, changes in your life circumstances, or personal growth is a delusion (like denial), according to disease-theory proponents. Addiction is a disease of the body that can be controlled only by never-ending medical treatments.
It is also a disease of the soul requiring lifetime membership in a support group like Alcoholics Anonymous. Why supposed medical treatment consists mainly of going to group meetings and why people can’t develop their own spiritual approaches to life if they choose are questions disease theory adherents ignore.
Your kids are going to get it, too. Since addiction is an inherited disease, the children of addicts are considered at high risk for developing the same disease - no matter what you or they do or how careful you are. Logical deductions from this viewpoint are that you should have your kids tested for their genetic predisposition to alcoholism or addiction before they start school, or that you should simply teach them never to touch a drop of alcohol or expose themselves to whatever your addiction is.
Obviously, this approach presents special difficulties in dealing with addictions to eating, shopping, and making love. Where did these notions come from - notions that, when examined in the clear light of day, often seem quite bizarre and contrary to common experience?
The disease theory takes a set of precepts that were made up by and about a small group of severe, long-term alcoholics in the 1930s and applies them inappropriately to people with a wide range of drinking and other life problems. The original members of Alcoholics Anonymous, realizing they would soon die if they did not give up alcohol, adopted wholesale the dogma of the nineteenth century temperance movement.
The one major difference was that the A.A. members said drinking was a disease only for them, and not for everyone who drank - therefore not everyone needed to eschew “demon rum,” as temperance advocates had insisted.
When he co-founded Alcoholics Anonymous (AA) to offer a support group for those addicted to alcohol, Bill Wilson made the first major advance in addressing alcoholism.
A fact which is less well-known is that Bill Wilson also made the second major advance when he became aware of, and later promoted the use of niacin vitamin B3 as a treatment for chronic drinkers.
Orthomolecular Medicine and Alcoholism
Even as Alcoholics Anonymous slowly expanded, many of Bill Wilson's personal and financial problems lingered, especially his depression.
Canadian biochemist Dr. Abram Hoffer, M.D., Ph.D., a psychiatrist and physician, writes: "I met Bill in New York in 1960. Humphry Osmond and I introduced him to the concept of megavitamin therapy. Bill was very curious about it and began to take niacin, 3,000 mg daily. Within a few weeks fatigue and depression which had plagued him for years were gone."
Dr. Hoffer, in his foreword to the book "Alcoholism: The Cause and The Cure", describes how he and Bill Wilson investigated together the effect of Niacin vitamin B3 on alcoholics.
Dr Hoffer writes: “Bill understood it first hand, for even though he had been abstinent for many years, he was still unwell. He suffered from immense anxiety, tension, and fatigue, but was able to function in spite of what might have been disabling.
After taking 3 grams of niacin daily for two weeks, his symptoms vanished and he remained free of addiction. This was a peak experience that he never forgot. He became determined to give as many AA members as possible the benefit of the same healing vitamin,”.
Dr. Hoffer further writes: “Without telling me that he was doing so, Bill conducted a trial of niacin on 30 friends and colleagues in New York. Most of them were very productive and sober members of AA, but they all suffered from the common mind and mood afflictions that people formerly addicted to alcohol experience, even when they are not drinking.
After three months he showed me his data. After one month, ten of the subjects were well. After the second month another ten had recovered, and the remaining one-third had shown no improvement after the third month. By this time I had also treated a number of people addicted to alcohol and had seen similar recoveries.”
Beyond AA Meetings
Between 1960 and his death in 1971, Bill Wilson shared this information with physician members of AA in a series of 3 brochures, Communications to Alcoholics Anonymous.
Bill’s findings were unfortunately dismissed by the AA’s International Board, because he was not an "M.D." and the fact that Alcoholics Anonymous is a social support structure, not a medical treatment provider.
The A.A. model has struck a responsive chord among Americans. Obviously, with the rejection of Prohibition, the United States had decided against a national policy that everyone should abstain from drinking.
Yet Westernn society continues even today to show a deep unease about alcohol and about intoxication, which many people seek even while fearing its disturbing effects. Given this national ambivalence, we have been drawn to the “old-time religion” of temperance, as represented by A.A., now cloaked in the modern language of medicine and the neurosciences.
But, as this book will make clear, the operative assumptions about addiction have never arisen directly from biological sciences. Rather, they have been superimposed on scientific research, much of which directly contradicts the assumptions of the disease theory.
Why the Disease Model Is Wrong
Every major tenet of the “disease” view of addiction is refuted both by scientific research and by everyday observation. This is true even for alcoholism and drug addiction, let alone the many other behaviors that plainly have little to do with biology and medicine.
No biological or genetic mechanisms have been identified that account for addictive behavior.
Even for alcoholism, as the following chapter will show, the evidence for genetic inheritance is unconvincing. By now, probably every well-informed reader has heard announcements that scientists have discovered a gene that causes alcoholism.
In fact, as one of us wrote in The Atlantic, this is far from the case, and the study that prompted these claims has already been refuted by another study in the same journal. Moreover, if a gene were found to influence alcoholism, would the same gene cause drug addiction?
Would it be related to smoking? Would it also cause compulsive gambling and overeating? If so, this would mean that everyone with any of these addictions has this genetic inheritance. Indeed, given the ubiquity of the problems described, the person without this inheritance would seem to be the notable exception.
How could an addiction like smoking be genetic? Why are some types of people more likely to smoke than others (about half of waitresses and car salesmen smoke, compared with about a tenth of lawyers and doctors)?
And does believing that an addiction like smoking is genetic help the person quit (are all those smokers who quit not “genetically” addicted)?
Returning to alcohol, are people really predestined biologically to become alcoholics and thus to become A.A. members? Think about the rock group Aerosmith: all five members of this group now belong to A.A., just as they once all drank and took drugs together.
How unlikely a coincidence it is that five unrelated people with the alcoholic / addictive inheritance should run into one another and form a band!
The idea that genes make you become alcoholic cannot possibly help us understand how people develop drinking problems over years, why they choose on so many occasions to go out drinking, how they become members of heavy-drinking groups, and how drinkers are so influenced by the circumstances of their lives.
Genes may make a person unusually sensitive to the physiological effects of alcohol; a person can find drinking extremely relaxing or enjoyable; but this says nothing about how the person drinks over the course of a lifetime.
After all, some people say, “I never have more than one or two drinks at a time, because alcohol goes straight to my head.”
As we document here and in the following chapter, we can actually predict the likelihood of people’s becoming addicted far more reliably from their nationality and social class, from the social groups they join, and from their beliefs and expectations about alcohol or drugs (or other activities), than from their biological makeup.
Often, people who become addicted set themselves up by investing a substance or an experience with magical powers to transform their beings (“Getting drunk is great”; “When I drink I’m really at ease”; “Drinking makes me attractive to people of the opposite sex”).
It is simply not within the chemical properties of alcohol or a drug, or the experience of an activity like shopping, to offer people what they want and seek from an addiction.
People find this in an addiction when they believe they can’t achieve the feelings they need in ordinary ways. Clearly, attitudes, values, and the opportunities available in a person’s environment have much to do with whether the person has a significant risk for a particular addiction.
People do not necessarily lose control of themselves whenever they are exposed to the object of their addiction.
On the contrary, many practice their addictions quite selectively. For example, military and religious personnel are often deprived of tobacco during training or on retreats, and business people realize they can’t smoke in certain rooms.
Orthodox Jews who smoke heavily abstain from smoking on the Sabbath, showing that their religious values mean more to them than nicotine does. Alcoholics in experiments routinely control their drinking when it is in their interest to do so - say, when they must leave a cozy room with television and companionship in order to get more to drink.
These variations occur in real life just as they do in the laboratory - for example, when people avoid drugs or cigarettes when they are with people who won’t tolerate those habits. When something they really care about is jeopardized if they continue to drink, smoke, or whatever, most people will stop or cut down accordingly.
Addiction usually does not last a lifetime. “Once an addict, always an addict” is a pessimistic notion that is both wrong and harmful. It leaves people two choices: either you stay constantly addicted and miserable until you die; or you abstain for life while attending group meetings and viewing yourself as the perpetually “recovering” person.
Sadly, a small number of people do die of their addictions; and another group succeeds in quitting drinking, drug taking, or whatever by maintaining the role of the recovering addict.
But most people are more resilient and resourceful than that. Most people who have addictive habits moderate or eliminate these habits over the course of their lives.
And they do it without having to say “I am an alcoholic” or “I am an overeater” or “I am a sex addict” as long as they live.
Remember that, today, a majority of adults who have ever smoked have quit and nearly all did so without treatment.
Progression is not inevitable - it is the exception. If the majority of people give up addictive habits, then the idea of “inevitable progression” doesn’t hold water. Calling addiction a “progressive disease” comes from looking at the few who have progressed to severe addiction and tracing the path by which they got there.
The progression of addictive problems only seems inevitable after the fact. For example, the great majority of college overdrinkers, even those who black out at fraternity parties, become moderate drinkers in middle age.
When you consider that even most of the people who use narcotics and cocaine do not end up addicted, you can see that drug-and-alcohol use patterns are many and varied, even when a person uses a substance abusively for a time.
Treatment is no panacea. Contrary to all the advertising we hear, treatment for addictions is often no more effective than letting addiction and recovery take their natural course.
The vast majority of people who have given up addictions (beginning with more than 90 percent of the forty-four million Americans who have quit smoking have done so on their own.
This does not mean that treatment for addictions cannot work - research has shown that some forms of treatment are effective. But the ones that are more effective are not the ones that have become popular in the United States.
You can outgrow an addictive habit on your own or in therapy, but either way the principles of the Life Process Program are the same.
What about joining support groups such as Alcoholics Anonymous? Here, too, research reveals the opposite of what we have been led to believe. A.A is a valuable community resource for those who find support in a certain type of religiously oriented group ritual.
But the best we can say about A.A is that it works for those for whom it works. Meanwhile, there are plenty for whom it doesn’t work. There is no scientific evidence that A.A. works better than other approaches when randomly selected alcoholics are assigned to A.A. or other treatments.
In fact, the evidence is that the people who are now often compelled to attend A.A - after being arrested for drunk driving or being sent by a company Employee Assistance Program - do worse than those who are left on their own.
How can we reconcile this finding with the glowing testimonials we hear about A.A.? The people we see in A.A. are the ones who like it, find it helpful, and stick it out. But there are many others who don’t go to A.A. or who don’t like it and drop out.
And as we show below, those who seriously try to stop drinking on their own are more likely to maintain their abstinence than those who attend A.A.
In addition, since many more people try to quit on their own than through therapy or joining a group, the number of self-curers is triple or more the number of successful treatment or A.A cases.
But such self-curers are not very visible, because they are individuals without an organized group to publicize their success.
These, then, are the key fallacies of the popularly held view of addiction. Even generally well-informed people may be astonished that we contradict such widely held beliefs. All of our refutations of conventional wisdom are carefully documented in the notes at the back of the book.
But you don’t need to read scholarly articles and scientific reports to test the accuracy of what we say. Just check it out against your own experience and observation. Don’t you know anyone who used to drink excessively, at times uncontrollably, but who no longer drinks at all or now drinks in a normal, appropriate manner?
Obviously, most people who used to drink excessively but who have now cut back (or even quit) do not attend meetings where they must rise and declare, “I am an alcoholic.”
How many people of all ages do you know who quit smoking? How many of them did it by going through a medical program or joining a support group, and how many finally just decided to quit and made good on that resolve? What happened to all the people you knew who used illegal drugs in college, some quite heavily?
How many of them are “chemically dependent” now? If we simply examine the cases of most of those we are close to personally, we will see how addictions usually do not follow the disease course.
Why the Disease Model Doesn’t Work - Why It Even Does More Harm than Good
The assumption that calling addiction a “disease” actually helps people crumbles when subjected to critical scrutiny. Some people feel comfortable thinking of their addiction as a disease and are able to function better on this basis for a time.
But whatever short-term benefits medical, disease-oriented treatment produces are double-edged even for the individuals who claim it has helped them. Many of the most “successful” recipients of disease treatment might achieve a real breakthrough by learning to think about addiction differently.
Meanwhile, for the majority of people, the disadvantages of the disease approach clearly outweigh the advantages from the start.
The disadvantages of the disease approach are that it:
Attacks people’s feelings of personal control and can thus become a self-fulfilling prophecy;
Makes mountains out of molehills, since it fails to differentiate between the worst alcoholics and addicts and those with minor substance-use dependence;
Stigmatizes people - in their own minds - for life
Iinterrupts normal maturation for the young, for whom this approach is completely inappropriate;
Holds up as models for drinking and drug use the people who have shown the least capacity to manage their lives;
Isolates alcoholism and addiction as problems from the rest of the alcoholic’s or addict’s life;
Limits people’s human contacts primarily to other recovering alcoholics or addicts, who only reinforce their preoccupation with drinking and drug use;
Dispenses a rigid program of therapy that is founded - in the words of the director of the government’s National Institute on Alcohol Abuse and Alcoholism (NIA.A.A) - “on hunch, not evidence, and not on science,” while attacking more effective therapies.
How can therapy that so many people believe in and swear by actually do more harm than good? To illustrate this point, consider the case of a famous psychiatrist who evaluated his hospital’s alcoholism program - one he felt was among the most outstanding in the world.
This program first detoxified the alcoholic in the hospital, then mandated A.A. attendance, and finally actively followed patients’ progress with an outreach counseling program.
When the psychiatrist running the program, Dr. George Vaillant, evaluated how well his patients were doing two years and eight years after treatment, however, he found they had fared about as well as comparable alcoholics who received no treatment at all!
How could Vaillant have been so wrong as to think his patients were doing phenomenally well, when actually they were doing no better than if he had left them alone completely?
Naturally, he wanted to think it worked. But his research prevented his rose-colored views from distorting the actual results of his treatment.
When he counted all his patients, not just his successes, when he scrutinized and verified what they were telling him in order to see exactly how well they were doing, and when he compared them with alcoholics out on their own instead of just assuming that all these people died without the help of treatment like his, Vaillant found that his expensive hospital treatment was close to useless.
Very few people in the treatment industry or in A.A. are as scrupulous as is Vaillant. When we hear from A.A. boosters, they tell us only about those who have stuck with the program and are currently sober. The same is true of treatment programs. They parade their best stars up front.
We don’t hear about all their failures. Yet Vaillant, in a book that is cited as the major source of support for the benefits of treating alcoholics according to the disease model, concluded as follows:
“If treatment as we currently understand it does not seem more effective than the natural healing processes, then we need to understand those healing processes better.”
Indeed, Vaillant repeats another researcher’s conclusion that “it may be easier for improper treatment to retard recovery than for proper treatment to hasten it.”major source of support for the benefits of treating alcoholics according to the disease model
What are the dangers of this kind of disease treatment? Here are explanations of the disadvantages listed at the beginning of this section:
It sets people up for failure. All disease treatments emphasize how much out of control “patients” are, and what a delusion it is for them to feel they can exert any control over their addictions. Is it possible that such a message can do more harm than good?
William Miller and Reid Hester, reviewing all the comparative studies on treatment for alcoholism, made a surprising finding: in the only two studies in which alcoholics were randomly assigned either to A.A., to other forms of treatment, or to no treatment, those assigned to A.A. did no better or actually suffered more relapse than those who received other treatment or who weren’t treated at all!
Intrigued by this outcome, one of us wrote George Vaillant and asked him whether subjects he studied who abstained without entering formal treatment did better if they joined A.A. Again, A.A. members were less likely to maintain their abstinence.
Why would people be more likely to relapse if they entered A.A. than if they quit drinking on their own? There are several reasons. For one, people who enter A.A. are told they cannot succeed on their own. Therefore, if they should stop attending A.A., many are convinced that they will soon resume alcoholic drinking.
A.A. and disease treatments are especially defeatist in dealing with relapse. Accepting the disease-oriented philosophy of inevitable loss of control thus makes it more likely that the alcoholic will binge if he or she ever has a drink. Yet, Vaillant found, nearly all alcoholics will drink again at some time.
It makes matters worse than they are. Can attending A.A. or going into addiction treatment really cause people to develop some of their alcoholism symptoms? In his book Becoming Alcoholic, sociologist David Rudy reports on the time he spent observing A.A. meetings.
Rudy found that most people had to learn their role as alcoholics. An important “rite of passage” is the first time members tell their story for the group, beginning by acknowledging, “I am an alcoholic.” In Rudy’s words;
“The alcoholic’s tale “is made up of two parts: a story about how bad it was before A.A. and a story about how good it is now.”
Narcotics anonymous is the drug users version of AA, although is generally accepting of AA members as well
This presentation is warmly greeted by the member’s sponsor in A.A., and the entire membership responds with enthusiastic acceptance of the convert.
When alcoholics introduce their experiences and symptoms in or treatment, the group or therapist homogenizes them through interpretation and clarification. For example, most people who enter have not had blackouts, which are more typical of long-term alcoholics than of the younger drinkers now flooding into treatment and A.A.
But blackouts are taken as the badge of alcoholism, and according to Rudy, “members learn the importance of blackouts as a behavior that verifies their alcoholism, and an indeterminable number of members who may not have had blackouts report them.” Rudy continues:
"When newcomers to A.A. claim that they cannot remember if they had any blackouts or not, other members use this claim as evidence of the event in question. As one member put it to a newcomer:
The reason you can’t remember is because alcohol fogs your brain. If it fogs your brain now after not drinking for a few days it must have fogged your brain before. See, you must have had blackouts then.”
A large part of alcoholism and drug treatment consists of group meetings where alcoholics or addicts “confront” one another and their problems. Newcomers who don’t report the correct symptoms are treated with knowing condescension or are actively hazed - sometimes quite abusively - until they “get” and repeat the party line.
When Dwight Gooden entered the alcoholism-andcocaine program at the Smithers Alcoholism Center, he described being assailed by his fellow residents there during the constant group-therapy sessions. “My stories weren’t as good as theirs. . . . They said, ‘C’mon, man, you’re lying.’ They didn’t believe me. . . . I cried a lot before I went to bed at night.”
After he left the Betty Ford Center, Chevy Chase reported that he had often been angry at the counselors, who heckled the residents mercilessly, constantly denigrating them and claiming they had been living worthless lives.
Does all this sound like good therapy technique? It is simple common sense that belief in your personal value and your own strength is superior to having these things denigrated for getting your life under control.
It stigmatizes people for life. The disease model puts a label on you that you can never outgrow. Once diseased, always diseased. The effects of this defeatist view are especially tragic - and unjust - in the case of people to whom the “disease” label is most inappropriately applied in the first place: teenage binge drinkers, most drunk drivers, “adult children of alcoholics,” recreational drug users discovered through drug tests, and - in areas not involving drugs or alcohol - overweight adolescents or “hyperactive” or “learning-disabled” children.
It brutalizes and brainwashes the young. The largest single age group of people undergoing hospital treatment today for chemical dependency, eating disorders, depression, and so forth is adolescents. A.A. members are also much younger today, on average, than when the fellowship was founded by a group of men with serious, lifelong drinking problems.
Nonetheless, virtually none of these young people meet clinical standards of alcoholism or drug addiction.
Indeed, numerous cases have been identified in which young people have been hospitalized for smoking marijuana or even for being suspected of using drugs.
When one such case was revealed on national television, an unusually forthright consultant for the National Association for Alcoholism Treatment Programs confessed, “I’m afraid this happens far more than people in the field want to admit; it’s something of a scandal.”
Meanwhile, A.A. and Alateen (for teenage children of alcoholics) groups now pervade high-school and college campuses. What is the impact of treatment that forces teenagers to take on the identity of addicts or alcoholics or children of alcoholics?
Young people are warned that their substance abuse is a permanent trait, even though we have seen that a large majority will outgrow substance-abuse problems as they mature.
Presenting this message to the young can only prolong or exacerbate their substance abuse, since it denies their own capacity for change and forces them to believe that any substance use for the rest of their lives will lead them back to excess, addiction, and drunkenness.
Young treatment grads who constantly relapse and return to treatment are the norm, as in the cases of Carrie Hamilton, Erinn Cosby, Drew Barrymore, and other young “patients” whose stories are less well publicized. Of course, the relapses are then attributed to their “disease” and to their failure to heed the treatment’s warning to abstain forever.
These programs fairly frequently involve emotional abuse. Such “treatments” for children include “refusing to allow them to wear street clothes, keeping them in isolation for prolonged periods, or forcing them to wear self-derogatory signs, engage in other humiliation rituals . . . , or submit to intense and prolonged group confrontation” all of which, psychologists believe, “may destroy the youngsters’ already fragile self-esteem.”
When we describe these experiences, treatment specialists often argue in response, “Well, what if the kids would end up dead if we didn’t do this to them?” In other words, to object to these programs is likened to promoting intoxication leading to death.
Certainly, it is crucial to prevent children from harming themselves, and it can be worthwhile to remove children from a problem home, whether through a residential program or a visit to a sympathetic relative.
But brainwashing, emotional blackmail, denigration, and psychological torture never work, except to make people so unsure of who they are or what they value that they will temporarily consent to the demands of those in charge.
Worst of all, therapies that were devised for the most incorrigible children - though they don’t benefit even these unfortunate kids have been spreading down the ladder to more and more children whose behavior represents typical adolescent exploration and insubordination.
Parents are then confronted over whether they want to “save” their kids or allow them to die, as though the latter were the normal outcome of adolescence. The threat of their children’s dying is then used as emotional blackmail to make parents accept the sacrifices necessary to place their children in expensive residential treatment programs.
It presents the alcoholic or addict as someone to emulate. Prominent graduates of treatment programs, like Drew Barrymore, Betty Ford, Kitty Dukakis, and a host of athletes now lecture to others about chemical dependency. If alcoholics and drug abusers suffer from a disease and are now recovering, then they can educate others about the disease and even about how young people should live and behave.
If, on the other hand, we think of them as people who are tremendously poor at self-management, then it is indeed stupid for the rest of us, who have not been seriously addicted, to ask them for advice and information. Someone like former football star Bob Hayes explains that he took and sold drugs as a result of an inherited disease.
One reviewer’s reaction to Hayes’s book, Run, Bullet, Run, could stand for any and all of these confessional tracts: “Aside from a brief closing statement on personal responsibility, he self-servingly portrays himself as a victim throughout the book.”
Alcoholics and addicts like Hayes regularly come into schools to relay their tortured drinking experiences and to reiterate that alcohol is a dangerous drug. But nearly every child in these schools will drink.
It is as though the schools wished to undermine children’s sense of self-control and to attack their chances of becoming normal drinkers, which in most cases their “nonexpert” parents are.
In treatment itself, “recovering” addicts and alcoholics counsel the drug or alcohol abuser - who usually has not drunk as destructively and hurt himself or herself as much as the counselors! In all types of twelve-step groups, the most severely debilitated person tends to become the leader and model for others, so that the most out-of-control shopping addict tells others about the nature of their problems.
Who should be counseling whom? In the case of drug abuse, a number of reviews have found that informational and scare lectures by recovering addicts produce the worst results of all prevention programs. These programs have never yet been found to reduce drug use; on the contrary, several studies have found increased drug use in their aftermath.
It ignores the rest of the person’s problems in favor of blaming them all on the addiction. When someone like Carrie Hamilton lectures about her youthful drug abuse and delinquency (often alongside her mother, Carol Burnett), she makes drug abuse and family failures sound like mysterious, unavoidable illnesses that some people and their parents “have.”
Of course, this excuses her and her mother from dealing with painful problems they would prefer to avoid. But by adopting the disease identity as her protection through the rest of her life, the youthful convert guarantees that she cannot grow beyond the limitations of her adolescent family life. Can people hope for more than this?
When treatment views alcoholics as being victims of a different body chemistry that forces them to become alcoholics, the treatment process ignores the person’s life problems and the functions drinking serves for the alcoholic.
For example, in family therapy where the alcoholic’s drinking is addressed as simply the result of a disease, the therapist and the family are not able to understand that some people use alcohol to air feelings they cannot express when sober.
Ignoring dynamics like these leaves the drinker unable to cope with the things that led him or her to need to drink - such as doubts about self-worth, a difficult relationship with a spouse, roles (such as homosexuality) that create conflict for the person, and so on.
If the labeling of alcoholism as a disease provides welcome relief from the shame of overdrinking. it also prevents people from confronting the emotional tasks they need to accomplish to attain personal wholeness.
It traps people in a world inhabited by fellow disease-sufferers. Many “recovering” people report that they feel comfortable only with others in exactly the same plight. They find they can’t create intimacy outside of treatment and that they are driven constantly to talk about their alcoholism or addiction.
This is a frequent hang-up for recovering alcoholics who attend A.A. meetings so religiously that they can’t maintain a life outside of the group. The phenomenon of compulsive therapy attendance has made many people ask us, “Is there such a thing as addiction to treatment?”
Indeed there is, when people rely on a twelve step group or therapy to the point where it disables them from conducting outside relationships and activities.
One of us has treated a number of A.A. members or treatment graduates who now fear they can’t deal with normal society. One man, who was regularly asked to head his local A.A. group, had dated a series of women he met at A.A. Unfortunately, all of these relationships had ended in bitterness and mutual recriminations.
But when he tried to date outside the group, he discovered that nonalcoholic women found him overbearing and compulsive.
“I don’t want to be limited for the rest of my life to dealing with alkies - I’d like to think I can advance beyond that; “ he plaintively told us.
This man felt that dealing exclusively with alcoholics was debilitating him, and yet he couldn’t escape A.A.
It excludes other approaches, many of which are more successful. Even if one accepts that many A.A. members are happy and successful, it is simply absurd to discourage people from trying to recover without A.A. The National Council on Alcoholism and Drug Dependence (NCADD) frequently announces statistics about the continually rising costs of alcoholism and the increasing number of alcoholics in our society.
But, then, the NCADD is capable only of calling for more of the standard approach to treating alcoholism that has accompanied these increases, while discouraging all alternative approaches.
Why should things improve all of a sudden if we simply do more of the same? The A.A. approach to people’s drinking problems has shown conclusively that it cannot make a decisive difference for most active problem drinkers, since there are very few alcoholics who aren’t already aware of - or who haven’t already attended - A.A.
Meanwhile, greater numbers of people are being forced to enter private treatment centers and A.A. as a result of court orders, Employee Assistance Programs, or school counseling programs.
Despite the almost universal belief that compelling people to attend standard treatment programs is helpful, these programs regularly demonstrate they are no more effective than self-initiated programs for curing addictions.
Psychologists William Miller and Reid Hester, reviewing all the comparative studies on treatment for alcoholism, made a surprising finding:
“Virtually all of them [the standard treatments] lacked adequate scientific evidence of effectiveness.”
At the same time, they discovered, the “treatment approaches most clearly supported as effective... were very rarely used in American treatment programs.”
What don’t really work in the long run are the conversion-experience type treatments; what do work are therapies that teach people skills at self-management and coping.
Nonetheless, most American treatment personnel seem hell-bent on eliminating any other treatment for alcoholism besides twelve-step programs. In the United States, discredited disease-treatment programs - ones that NIAAA Director Enoch Gordis believes may be “frequently useless and wasteful and sometimes dangerous” - proliferate and spread into whole new areas of behavior.
This issue is important because the United States spends more money on health care than any other country - and the percentage of our gross national product that we spend on health care is growing faster than that in any other country.
The fastest-growing component of the health-care system is substance abuse and related mental-health treatments. According to a hospital trade publication;
“Psychiatric, chemical dependency and rehabilitative hospital care - all largely unregulated by government payment mechanisms - are booming.”
This is one reason so many companies are being forced to cut insurance benefits or are asking employees to pay a greater share. What if your insurance rates were raised to pay for a fellow employee who was undergoing a repeat treatment for cocaine addiction, since he had relapsed one or more times?
How would you feel about sharing the bill for a colleague who entered an expensive hospital eating-disorders clinic?
Do you think that smokers who want to quit should enter treatment programs and be excused from work, with pay, while they concentrate on quitting? And, especially, how would you react if you had quit smoking on your own?
It is morally and economically necessary for us to evaluate the effectiveness of alcoholism and other addiction treatments. For we are wasting limited health-care resources to place people in expensive treatments - treatments that have not shown they do more than inexpensive, straightforward skills counseling or than people accomplish on their own—often more reliably!
Kitty Dukakis: “Chemical Dependency” Reduced to Absurdity
Kitty Dukakis became the paradigm of the addicted person of the 1990s. Kitty Dukakis has been eager all along to accept the “disease” and “chemically dependent” labels. Advertisements for her autobiography, Now You Know, trumpet the opening line of the book, “I’m Kitty Dukakis and I’m a drug addict and an alcoholic.”
Mrs. Dukakis seemingly has been either addicted or in treatment throughout her adult life. Shortly before she joined her husband in his 1988 presidential campaign, she revealed that she had been treated for a twenty-six-year reliance on diet pills, which she began before she married Michael Dukakis.
Soon after her husband’s defeat in the election, she began to drink herself unconscious and underwent a series of treatments for her alcoholism and for a variety of emotional problems.
That treatment did not succeed. Mrs. Dukakis only began getting drunk after the election, for which she first entered the Edgehill Newport hospital.
But soon after this treatment experience, she began having explosive relapses in which she drank rubbing alcohol, nail polish remover, hair spray, and other commercial products containing alcohol.
Moreover, she discovered during the course of writing her book that she suffers from another disease - manic-depressive disorder - and as a result she ends the book with the revelation that she is receiving lithium treatment.
Previously, Mrs. Dukakis had been prescribed Prozac, a drug featured on the cover of Newsweek in 1990 as a new miracle in the treatment of depression, to no avail.
Mrs. Dukakis appears, in the book and on television, a forlorn being. Indeed, syndicated columnist Ellen Goodman, who had known Mrs. Dukakis, wrote a column entitled “Do Our Drug Treatment Programs Label Patients as Losers?” Ms. Goodman wondered aloud how labeling oneself as sick and without hope is helpful.
“What happens when those who wrestle with problems of self-esteem are required to wear such a label? . . . Today, Kitty Dukakis describes herself by diagnosis. Drug addict. Alcoholic. Manic-depressive.”
Ms. Goodman ended her column by wishing that Kitty Dukakis might see the brighter qualities that others have seen in her, and which seem entirely to have disappeared thanks to her various diagnoses and cures.
It seems clear that excessive drinking is only the tip of Mrs. Dukakis’s problems, and that medical treatment will never get to the bottom of them. Labeling Kitty Dukakis as a “sick” person who needs medical treatment is a palliative for her uncomfortable marital and personal problems.
Reviewers have commented about how insensitive and unaware of her problems Michael Dukakis appeared to be, yet Kitty never reflects on the limitations of her spouse or their relationship.
Somehow, her never-ending disease-oriented treatment fails to raise crucial issues for Mrs. Dukakis about a life and marriage she seems to have found intolerable.
Will Kitty Dukakis be writing another book in which she reveals she has discovered she is suffering from one more dis-ease that of codependence?
With Kitty Dukakis as a prominent model of the addict/alcoholic, those who look to her life for answers are being fed yet another self-defeating solution. To call Kitty Dukakis’s and her audiences’ problems diseases is to evade reality, much as Mrs. Dukakis used diet pills and alcohol to do.
Whether the pain Mrs. Dukakis and others feel is temporary or persistent, relatively mild or relatively severe, it does not need to rule the rest of their lives. Kitty Dukakis and the rest of us are more than our misery and problems.
Moreover, what troubles her and those like her are life problems, not diseases. And when we have reduced them to life size, we can begin to deal with them reasonably and hopefully.
The Experience of Addiction
The question is: “If addiction isn’t a disease, then what is it?” An addiction is a habitual response and a source of gratification or security.
It is a way of coping with internal feelings and external pressures that provides the addict with predictable gratifications, but that has concomitant costs.
Eventually these costs may outweigh the subjective benefits the addiction offers the individual. Nonetheless, people continue their addictions as long as they believe the addictions continue to do something for them.
It is important to place addictive habits in their proper context, as part of people’s lives, their personalities, their relationships, their environments, their perspectives. The effort to change an addiction will generally affect all these other facets of a person’s life as well.
An addiction may involve any attachment or sensation that grows to such proportions that it damages a person’s life.
Addictions, no matter to what, follow certain common patterns. We first made clear in Love and Addiction that addiction - the single-minded grasping of a magic-seeming object or involvement; the loss of control, perspective, and priorities - is not limited to drug and alcohol addictions.
When a person becomes addicted, it is not to a chemical but to an experience. Anything that a person finds sufficiently consuming and that seems to remedy deficiencies in the person’s life can serve as an addiction.
The addictive potential of a substance or other involvement lies primarily in the meaning it has for a person.
A person is vulnerable to addiction when that person feels a lack of satisfaction in life, an absence of intimacy or strong connections to other people, a lack of self-confidence or compelling interests, or a loss of hope.
Periods such as adolescence, military service, and times of isolation or grief may for a time make people especially susceptible to an addiction.
Under some circumstances, a harmful involvement can become so important to a person that addiction is very likely, as heroin addiction was for many in Vietnam.
Situations in which people are deprived of family and the usual community supports; where they are denied rewarding or constructive activities; where they are afraid, uncomfortable, and under stress; and where they are out of control of their lives - these are situations especially likely to create addiction.
The relationship between hopelessness, lack of opportunity, and persistent addiction is, of course, a template for lives in ghettos. Recognizing the connection between these situational factors and addiction will explain why our wars on drugs, including the latest, never succeed.
The “hook” of the addiction - the thing that keeps people coming back to it - is that it gives people feelings and gratifying sensations that they are not able to get in other ways. It may block out sensations of pain, uncertainty, or discomfort. It may create powerfully distracting sensations that focus and absorb attention. It may enable a person to forget, or feel “okay” about, insurmountable problems.
It may provide artificial, temporary feelings of security or calm, of self-worth or accomplishment, of power or control, of intimacy or belonging.
These benefits explain why a person keeps coming back to the addictive experience - an addiction accomplishes something for that person, or the person anticipates that it will do so, however illusory these benefits may actually be.
Addiction, drug abuse, alcoholism, obesity, and smoking all involve and are fueled by value choices. Think of people whose lives are “together” - who enjoy strong emotional bonds with others, productive work, satisfying feelings of competence and of fun, and a sense of responsibility toward others.
Will they become addicted to drugs or alcohol because of some physiological susceptibility and allow the addiction to undo the fabric of their lives? For you personally, can you imagine getting so drunk that you would abuse your infant child? It just doesn’t happen that way.
If you have better things to do and value other things more than escape into intoxication, then you won’t make intoxication the center of your life. And if you are addicted, you can best overcome it by creating or re-creating those personal strengths and values.
Whatever the subjective benefits of an addiction or the values that drive an addiction, the person pays a price for an addictive involvement. Addictions make people less aware of and less able to respond to other people, events, and activities. Thus, the addictive experience reinforces and exacerbates the problems the person wanted so badly to get away from in the first place.
In the person’s inner, subjective experience, the addiction may make things seem better. But in the real world, it only makes things worse. With the worst addictions, jobs and relationships fall away; health deteriorates; debts increase; opportunities disappear; the business of life is neglected.
The person is increasingly “out of touch” with nourishing contacts and essential responsibilities. This growing disengagement from the realities of life sets the person up for the trauma of withdrawal. When the addictive experience is removed, the person is deprived of what has become his or her primary source of comfort and reassurance.
Simultaneously, the person “crash-lands” back onto an inhospitable world, a world from which the person has been using the addiction to escape. Compared with these existential torments, the purely physical dislocations of withdrawal are, even for most heroin addicts, not particularly debilitating.
After all, nearly everyone who receives powerful narcotics in the hospital gives them up after returning home or when the illness is over. Consider also that drug addicts and alcoholics indicate that the most unbearable drug withdrawal is from cigarettes.
And if one puts all withdrawal on a scale, probably the worst of all occurs in the case of failed love relationships.
The experience of withdrawal, like that of addiction, is shaped by the way a person interprets it. In therapeutic communities like Daytop Village in New York, addicts are not excused from their normal duties when they undergo withdrawal; as a result, withdrawing addicts - even those who have had several withdrawal episodes previously - continue mopping floors and carrying out other duties.
Cultural beliefs also play a crucial role in addiction - for example, beliefs that are widely propagated about the power of a drug to enslave a person and the difficulty of escaping it actually contribute to the difficulties of withdrawal. Equally important are the person’s readiness to confront withdrawal and belief that he or she can manage it.
If you are convinced that withdrawal will be intolerably painful and that you cannot withstand it, or if you don’t have sufficiently powerful reasons to confront withdrawal experiences, you won’t be prepared to withdraw from your addiction.The addict who feels incapable of existing without a drug can never successfully withdraw, and doesn’t want to try.
Ironically, one of the beliefs that most contribute to the susceptibility to addiction is the belief in the power of addiction itself. Believing that drugs are stronger than you are means you will become addicted more easily and stay addicted longer.
But if you recognize that drugs and alcohol never take away your own responsibilities and capacity to control your destiny - even if you have alcoholic relatives or have had addictive problems in the past - you always stand a better chance of avoiding addiction or dealing with it successfully.
A Commonsense Way of Thinking About Overcoming an Addiction
Although the schematic description above is useful for understanding what addiction is and how it comes about, we need not think of all our troublesome habits or fixations in such dire terms.
In fact, when we overdramatize our addictions, we may do ourselves an injustice and make change more difficult. An addiction may be more or less severe - and a person may be more or less able to give it up - depending on the circumstances of the person’s life.
Addiction is more likely in stressful times, times when gratifications are slim, times when a person is less together or secure.
Likewise, one type of excess may be more stubbornly entrenched in a person’s routine, or more closely linked to a person’s self-doubt and insecurity, than another.
Addiction occurs along a continuum - there is no easy test to tell you whether you have an addiction or just a bad habit. For example, by some estimates, half of all Americans are overweight. Are they all addicted overeaters?
Many people encounter significant health risks because of the way they eat (recall that heart disease is America’s major killer). Are these the addicts? Some people are preoccupied day and night with their eating; they are suffused with guilt over eating too much, yet they are unable to change their eating habits.
Surely, these are the addicts, we think. A still more limited group of people encounter major health problems through their overweight, severely restricting their lives, but are unable to modify their eating habits.
At the furthest extreme of addiction are the minuscule number of people who become so fat they are completely immobile - people we sometimes see on television who may not even be able to fit through their doorways.
If we call only these people - people who have given up all effort to control their eating - true addicts, we end up with a fraction of a percentage of addicted overeaters, and books wouldn’t need to be written for millions of people who fear they have food addictions.
Moreover, for this minuscule group, concepts such as “denial” hardly seem to have meaning - does the twelve-hundred-pound man who hasn’t left his house in years really need to be told that he has an addictive eating problem?
For most people, the exercise of drawing the line that divides “addicted” from “normal” is not very helpful. We need to remember that nearly all people cut back and forth across these categories at different points in their lives and in different situations.
Although letting your urges overcome you to gain total control of your life is a relatively rare phenomenon, everyone has addictive urges and sometimes gives in to them. Addiction characterizes some aspect of everyone’s life - this is one reason why it is so ridiculous to think of it as a disease.
Thin people whom we envy for their self-control will tell us there are some treats they can’t keep in the house because otherwise they would eat them all at once. Remember that people whom we admire for having had the strength to quit smoking used to search ashtrays desperately looking for a butt when they ran out of cigarettes!
What we most need to know is not how bad off or how genuinely addicted we are but, rather, how people learn to resist successfully the addictive or unhealthy urges that come with being human.
How do they construct full lives, develop alternatives to addiction, learn the strength to stop after having started or, when necessary, not to start at all?
Let us start, then, with alcoholism, the addiction most commonly referred to as a disease. There must be - there is - a better way to understand and redirect the paths people take into and out of problem drinking.
What Seven Creepy Patents Reveal About Facebook December 8 2020 | From: NewYorkTimes
Facebook has filed thousands of patent applications since it went public in 2012. One of them describes using forward-facing cameras to analyze your expressions and detect whether you’re bored or surprised by what you see on your feed.
Another contemplates using your phone’s microphone to determine which TV show you’re watching. Others imagine systems to guess whether you’re getting married soon, predict your socioeconomic status and track how much you’re sleeping.
A review of hundreds of Facebook’s patent applications reveals that the company has considered tracking almost every aspect of its users’ lives: where you are, who you spend time with, whether you’re in a romantic relationship, which brands and politicians you’re talking about. The company has even attempted to patent a method for predicting when your friends will die.
Facebook has said repeatedly that its patent applications should not be taken as indications of future product plans.
“Most of the technology outlined in these patents has not been included in any of our products, and never will be,” Allen Lo, a Facebook vice president and deputy general counsel, and the company’s head of intellectual property, said in an email.
Taken together, Facebook’s patents show a commitment to collecting personal information, despite widespread public criticism of the company’s privacy policies and a promise from its chief executive to “do better.”
“A patent portfolio is a map of how a company thinks about where its technology is going,” said Jason M. Schultz, a law professor at New York University.
Here are seven Facebook patent applications that show how the company has contemplated gathering and exploiting your personal information.
Reading Your Relationships
One patent application discusses predicting whether you’re in a romantic relationship using information such as how many times you visit another user’s page, the number of people in your profile picture and the percentage of your friends of a different gender.
Another proposes using your posts and messages to infer personality traits. It describes judging your degree of extroversion, openness or emotional stability, then using those characteristics to select which news stories or ads to display.
U.S. PATENT NO. 9,740,752 Determining user personality characteristics from social networking system communications and characteristics
This patent application describes using your posts and messages, in addition to your credit card transactions and location, to predict when a major life event, such as a birth, death or graduation, is likely to occur.
Another considers analyzing pictures to create a unique camera “signature” using faulty pixels or lens scratches. That signature could be used to figure out that you know someone who uploads pictures taken on your device, even if you weren’t previously connected.
Or it might be used to guess the “affinity” between you and a friend based on how frequently you use the same camera.
This patent application explores using your phone microphone to identify the television shows you watched and whether ads were muted. It also proposes using the electrical interference pattern created by your television power cable to guess which show is playing.
Another patent application discusses tracking your weekly routine and sending notifications to other users of deviations from the routine. In addition, it describes using your phone’s location in the middle of the night to establish where you live.
This patent proposes correlating the location of your phone to locations of your friends’ phones to deduce whom you socialize with most often. It also proposes monitoring when your phone is stationary to track how many hours you sleep.
In some cases, companies file patents defensively, to beat their rivals to a new technology, even if they have no intention of using it.
While that could be the case for some of Facebook’s patents, many of them imagine new ways to collect, analyze and use personal information and package it for advertisers - a process that is essential to the company’s business model. In the first quarter of 2018, almost 99 percent of Facebook’s revenue came from advertising.
As long as Facebook keeps collecting personal information, we should be wary that it could be used for purposes more insidious than targeted advertising, including swaying elections or manipulating users’ emotions, said Jennifer King, the director of consumer privacy at the Center for Internet and Society at Stanford Law School.
“There could be real consequences,” she said.
Other technology companies have filed unsettling patent applications, too. They include Amazon’s wristbands for tracking warehouse employees and the Google teddy bear equipped with a camera and a microphone.
But with more than two billion monthly active users, most of whom share their thoughts and feelings on the platform, Facebook is amassing our personal details on an unprecedented scale.
That isn’t likely to change, said Siva Vaidhyanathan, a professor of media studies at the University of Virginia.
“I’ve seen no indication that Facebook has changed its commitment to watch everything we do, record everything we do and exploit everything we do,” he said.
The Three Varieties Of Money
December 7 2020 | From: FinalWakeupCall
The Illusion of Money: Money and banks are founded on faulty public sentiment. Money should be a symbol of value, the same way a little stone or carved piece of wood is a symbol of God. But, in the modern world, money is a commodity, like beer and cheese.
There are a many different kinds of money in exactly the same way as there are many brands of beer and cheese, and they all present their own national characters and peculiarities.
However, there is a profound difference between money which has a value in-and-of-itself, such as a gold coin that has intrinsic value, and legal tender currencies, like bonds, notes and letters of credit. At the same time there is additionally, a market in other securities, like stocks and commodity futures.
More precisely, todays’ money is valuable only as long as there is not too much of it. The market can absorb a little counterfeited money, but there’s a limit.
And that limit has been greatly exceeded, thanks to, a worldwide overcapacity in output, financed by former lending and a huge excess of cheap labour, largely financed by the credit expansion of the last 30 years.
Without these two unique circumstances, central banks’ irresponsible QE and ZIRP policies would probably have caused inflation to rise into the double-digit range or even higher, much earlier, maybe as far back as a decade ago?
Nowadays there is no further need to worry about how much governments borrow. Central banks buy government bonds – hold them on their balance sheets – return the interest payments – and the whole thing is set up in such a way as to be swiftly forgotten.
And when the bonds expire, central banks can use the repaid principal to buy more government debt!
In effect, today’s central banksters are doing something they previously could only dream of doing: printing money without causing a noticeable inflation. Politicians, too, are enjoying this once-in-a-lifetime opportunity of unaccounted for recklessness.
They are able to do what none could do before: borrow money without paying it back. The public has not read about these malpractices in the press yet, but it should be coming soon.
Regular readers who understood the earlier explained money scam know already that there is in actual fact no need for governments to repay their loans to central bankers, as the money governments borrow from central banks, doesn’t come from taxpayers, it comes from nowhere; from thin air, like the rest of the world’s money.
Three Varieties of Money
Think of the word “money” for a moment. What’s the first picture that comes to mind? Perhaps the folded pieces of paper in your wallet. Or the balance in your bank account.
Or perhaps the investments in your brokerage account. In today’s financial system, where unelected central bankers wield totalitarian control over the financial system, all three of these forms represent money, but the relationship between them is very shaky, and risky.
Physical cash, no matter where you live in the world, is used by every civilised nation on the planet. All nations have some form of physical currency in various denominations.
Dollars, Pounds, Euros, Yen, Renminbi. These pieces of paper are passed around as a medium of exchange. Go to the grocery store, and as long it is the local currency, you can pay for anything with physical cash. It is that simple.
Bank balances make it slightly more complicated. When logged into your bank’s website, you see a balance displayed on the screen. Don’t think for a second that there are a corresponding number of pieces of paper sitting in your bank’s vault. In fact, most banks have very little cash on hand.
Your balance is nothing more than an accounting entry on your bank’s balance sheet, which is likely maintained in a computer database. There’s no physical ‘money’ backing up this bank balance. It’s an annotation in a computer. Each bank customer’s savings is part of this complex system of accounting entries.
When you transfer money, the bank doesn’t send that amount in cash. They merely make an entry in the ledger, reducing your balance and increasing the one you are sending the money to for the same amount.
The same thing happens when a credit card is swiped to pay for something; banks exchange accounting entries that credit the vendor’s account and debit yours.
Nothing physical ever changes hands, it all takes place in digital ledgers. Given that this type of money exceeds physical cash by a factor of at least 10:1, it is correct to conclude that most modern currencies are in effect digital.
Government bonds are another form of money that most people often forget about. Generally, people will keep the majority of their life’s savings in their bank account. But, big banks or companies that have tens of billions don’t keep such vast sums of money in the bank. Certainly not all of it.
Companies, institutions, banks, and even foreign governments around the globe buy government bonds precisely because of their ‘cash equivalent’ status. This means that if the Chinese government is doing a deal with an African government for $1 billion, they can conduct the transaction using US government bonds as payment currency.
Varieties Exchange Rate
But, here is the problem we have as a society: Right now, each of these three types of money is basically considered as the same thing.
They just are different varieties of the same money, i.e. $1 million in government bonds equals a $1 million bank balance, which equals one million pieces of paper. But in actuality, they are three entirely separate currencies: Physical cash, digital cash, and government IOUs.
At this moment in time, these three varieties of money have a 1:1:1 exchange ratio, i.e. they’re freely interchangeable at parity. But this 1:1:1 variety exchange ratio (VER) actually depends on financial stability. And when there are serious problems, the exchange rate breaks down rapidly.
For example; in 2013 when the government of Cyprus froze bank accounts across the entire country. No one could access their bank balances for weeks. Clearly in an instance like this, the value of a bank balance becomes worthless. The only way to conduct a transaction was with physical cash.
So, in the event of a banking crisis, the variety exchange ratio changes quickly. Physical cash becomes much more valuable. It is the same thing in a government debt crisis. It is bizarre to think that the bonds of a bankrupt government are a widely accepted form of ‘risk-free’ savings among institutions.
But what happens when that bankrupt government defaults, or has to restructure its debt? The entire system breaks down. Suddenly the bonds are no longer ‘cash equivalents’, and there is a scramble to dump them and find another safe, reliable investment.
Cash is King
Similarly, the 1:1:1 VER quickly breaks down, just like it did in Greece. This is ultimately why it makes sense to hold some physical cash. You certainly won’t be worse off for holding some physical cash savings in a safe at home, especially since interest rates on bank balances are essentially zero.
Physical cash is by no means a magic bullet; it’s nothing more than a piece of paper printed by a government agency at the behest of an unelected central bank committee. Fundamentally, it has zero intrinsic value and in the long run all paper currencies will ultimately reach their intrinsic value of ZERO.
Future historians will wonder in utter disbelief how people could be so foolish as to assign any value whatsoever to paper and accept it as payment for delivered goods or services. – Nevertheless, in the short term, holding at least some physical cash makes sense as a hedge against financial calamity.
Trust and Debt Money Scam
To further expand on the concept of money, there are two more kinds of money in circulation, namely trust money, created out of people’s energy during the exchange between ordinary individuals, and debt money, created out of thin air by central banks and the banking industry through the fractional reserve scam.
The misuse of energy in the form of energy money causes suffering and death and is in violation with Galactic Law.
By legally equalising trust-money with debt-money, with an exchange rate of 1:1, debt money is given the same value as trust money, resulting in the fact that hardly anyone notices the scam that energy value equals with nothing.
Actually, debt money should have a much lower rating as there is a risk that the issuer could default on the debt!
This aqualisation results in inflation, which in itself is forthright theft; as the increase of the money supply goes far beyond social trust.
The conflict between the two kinds of money – trust versus debt money – must be clear: as a dollar can be spent only once – in principle for private transactions between citizens, but due to this manipulation scheme, it is also promised by governments to pay off the public debt to the central banks.
Through this scheme, governments are engaged in a crime scam, as they allocate and commit people’s money without the consent, nor knowledge and understanding of their citizens.
Government is Our Enemy
To keep it analytically simple: the creditor of the money is to be paid back – which is the Central Bank – with the same money created out of nothing.
This is an abusive scam between the Central Bank and the citizens of the world. By erecting a smoke screen, most people don’t notice the swindle: This is due to the fact that the government REQUIRES that citizens PAY their taxes in the currency of the central bank.
In short this commitment defines the essence of debt money.
As a result of this scheme, Inflation occurs, due to nothing more and nothing less than the injection of fiat money – debt money – into the existing amount of trust money. This is actually an ‘abuse of trust’ with regard to the people, or plainly defined FRAUD.
Everyone knows that debt must always be paid off, so the people collectively continue to pay off a debt to which they never made a commitment. This is a deliberate and blatant SCAM of the government.
This scam results in the following consequences: if all debt were to be repaid, then there would be no money left in circulation. Because the first component of the money supply – trust money – serves as collateral for the second – debt money – while the second is for the purchase of the first, so both shape the illusion of money. In other words,
Public debt is required to create money while the people are told that their money is needed to pay off public debt, which is, of course, complete nonsense and a huge lie!
The pledge of trust money is a promise. The collateral of debt money that arises from “debt” requires collateral for which taxes are created, collected by the government to pay off the ‘never-ending’ or perpetual debt to the Central Banks in the currency that the central bank itself has issued out of thin air.
This is subsequently mixed with the trust money already in circulation, making the SCAM invisible.
The System is Seen for What it Really is
So, the government is obviously our enemy. We have been betrayed. We should be angry and want to cry from frustration. But on the other hand, we must be glad and thankful to finally see through this scheme and see the system for what it really is, one that is physically and financially ruining us.
Let’s stop putting our trust in this impostor, the government, which, under the guise of being our faithful friend and a good provider, has betrayed us in favour of the multinationals and world financiers, the Deep State’s Brotherhood.
Let’s no longer ask for help, assistance, laws, etc., from our enemy. From today on, we should adopt the attitude of automatically being suspicious of all proposals, decisions or gifts coming from government. Always look this gift horse in the mouth.
If it suggests that we go right, we should go left. Even if we don’t know why, we will be sure to make the right decision, because government works against us, moving in the opposite direction should reap victory.
Remember; we do give the Deep State power by staying ignorant of their existence or by remaining angry about what they do without taking the appropriate action!
Read and use the information provided in the book THE GREAT AWAKENING – soon to be released in English – to combat your government, authorities and the evil Elite.
Don’t accept your slavery status any longer. Victory can be attained by simply walking away from it!
Agenda 21: Awareness And Activism + UN 2030 Agenda Decoded: Blueprint For The Global Enslavement Of Humanity Under Corporate Masters December 6 2020 | From: AmericanPolicyCenter / NaturalNews / Various
Sustainable Development: The Transformation of the Western World
Some think that the planet is in danger of global warming and over consumption. They really believe that the only way to fix the problem is to control the flow of resources and wealth, which literally means changing human civilization and the way we live.
This is an immense subject and many more articles are available in the Agenda 21 section of this website. This article is from the US but the principles of Agenda 21 are global - it came from the UN.
The problem is, that requires a forced transformation of our entire society to comply, and that ultimately leads to a thirst for power and topdown control – that will eventually lead to tyranny.
In his book, Earth in the Balance, Al Gore warned that a “wrenching transformation” must take place to lead Western countries away from the “horrors of the Industrial Revolution.”
Click on the image above to open a larger version in a new window
The process to do that is called Sustainable Development and its’ roots can be traced back to a UN policy document called Agenda 21, adopted at the UN’s Earth Summit in 1992.
Sustainable Development calls for changing the very infrastructure of the nation, away from private ownership and control of property to nothing short of central planning of the entire economy – often referred to as top-down control.
Where and when did the term Sustainable Development originate?
The term “sustainable development” was born in the pages of “Our Common Future,” the official report of the 1987 United Nations World Commission on Environment and Development, authored by Gro Harlem Brundtland, Vice President
of the World Socialist Party.
For the first time the environment was tied to the tried and true Socialist goals of international redistribution of wealth. Said the report;
“Poverty is a major cause and effect of global environmental problems. It is therefore futile to attempt to deal with environmental problems without a broader perspective that encompasses the factors underlying world poverty and international inequality.”
The term appeared in full force in 1992, in a United Nations initiative called the U.N. Sustainable Development Agenda 21, or as it has become known around the world, simply Agenda 21. It was unveiled at the 1992 United Nations Conference on Environment and Development (UNCED), ballyhooed as the Earth Summit.
In fact, the Earth Summit was one of the provisions called for in the Brundtland report as a means of implementing Sustainable Development around the world. More than 178 nations adopted Agenda 21 as official policy. President George H.W. Bush was the signatory for the United States.
What is Sustainable Development?
The 1989 Webster’s Dictionary defines “Sustainable Yield” as a requirement that trees cut down in a forest area be replaced by new plantings to ensure future lumber supplies.” That’s what most people think Sustainable Development means.
Proponents of Sustainable Development argue that it is about preserving resources for future generations. What’s wrong with that? Nothing in theory.
That would be sustainable with a small “s.” Just common sense usage of natural resources. The problem is, major forces now promoting it intend for Sustainable Development to be spelled with a capital “S.” They intend for a Socio-economic political movement that probes, invades and changes every aspect of human civilization.
And that’s the problem.
Imagine a world in which a specific “ruling principle” is created to decide proper societal conduct for every citizen.
That principle would be used to consider regulations guiding everything you eat, the kind of home you are allowed to live in, the method of transportation you use to get to work, what kind of work you may have, the way you dispose of waste, perhaps even the number of children you may have, as well as the quality and amount of education your children may receive.
Sustainable development encompasses every aspect of our lives.
According to its authors, the objective of sustainable development is to integrate economic, social, and environmental policies in order to achieve reduced consumption, social equity, and the preservation and restoration of biodiversity.
Top Sustainability Fallacies:
Lie: Sustainability is about protecting the environment
Reality: It is a political movement to replace capitalism with governement control of everything
Lie: Free market capitalism is the principle cause of planetary degradation and is not sustainable
Reality: It is government control of the economy that is not sustainable
Lie: Private property is a source of social injustice, and too valuable to be subject to free markets
Reality: The right to own and use private property is a fundamental source of wealth creation
Lie: Green energy creates jobs
Reality: Green energy is unreliable, uncompetitive and renders industry unable to compete in world parkets
Lie: C02 is a pollutant
Reality: C02 is the gas that all plants and crops breathe. More C02 = better agricultural production
Lie: The sustainability movement isn't trying to take away anyone's property rights or freedoms
Reality: The sustainability movement is relentlessly attacking property rights and freedoms
Lie: Climate change is catastrophic and anthropogenic and must be addressed through C02 abatement schemes
Reality:Man made climate change is a hoax with numerous provable data points and thousands of scientists going on the record - which is ignored by the cabal-controlled mainstream media
Lie: Compact development reduces pollution
Reality:Reality: Dense development is always correlated with intense pollution levels
Lie: Subways and mass transit can replace cars
Reality: They cannot. If they could there would be no cars in Manhattan
Lie: Compact urban development is more affordable for government
Reality: Empirical evidence proves compace development requires higher tax rates. Urbanisation strains police, fire, educational and social services
Lie: Afforable housing for people of all income levels will ensure healthier better balanced neighbourhoods
Reality: Low income housing usually creates more problems than it solves thereby damaging communities
The Sustainablists insist that society be transformed into feudal-like governance by making Nature the central organizing principle for our economy and society, not human need or wants.
This idea essentially elevates nature above Humans [we are all on this planet, their premise is bullshit]. As such, every societal decision would first be questioned as to how it might effect the environment.
To achieve this, Sustainablist policy focuses on three components; land use, education, and population control and population reduction.
Here is a direct quote from the report of the 1976 UN’s Habitat I conference which said:
“Land... cannot be treated as an ordinary asset, controlled by individuals and subject to the pressures and inefficiencies of the market. Private land ownership is also a principle instrument of accumulation and concentration of wealth, therefore, contributes to social injustice.”
Some officials claim that Sustainable Development is just a local effort to protect the environment and contain development -- just your local leaders putting together a local vision for the community.
Yet, the exact language and tactics for implementation of Sustainable Development are being used in nearly every city around the globe from Lewiston, Maine to Singapore.
Local indeed.
In short, Sustainable Development is the process by which the world is being reorganized around a central principle of state collectivism using the environment as bait.
One of the best ways to understand what Sustainable Development actually is can be found by discovering what is NOT sustainable.
According to the UN’s Biodiversity Assessment Report, items for our everyday lives that are NOT sustainable include:
Ski fields
Grazing of livestock
Plowing of soil
Building fences
Industry
Single family homes
Paved and tarred roads
Logging activities
Dams and reservoirs
Power line construction
Economic systems that fail to set proper value on the environment (capitalism, free markets).
Maurice Strong, Secretary General of the UN’s Rio Earth Summit in 1992 said;
“… Current lifestyles and consumption patterns of the affluent middle class – involving high meat intake, use of fossil fuels, appliances, home and work airconditioning, and suburban housing are not sustainable.”
This goal is exactly the policies that are written into such legislation as Cap and Trade, the Clean Air Act, the Clean Water Act.
It is also the policy behind the many corporate commercials seen nightly on television which advocate “Going Green".
They are all part of the efforts to modify consumer behavior to accept less, deal with higher energy prices, restrict water use and place severe limitations on use of private property – all under the environmental excuse.
And one of the most destructive tools used to enforce Sustainable Development policy is something called the “precautionary principle.”
That means that any activities that might threaten human health or the environment should be stopped - even if no clear cause and effect relationship has been established - and even if the potential threat is largely theoretical.
That makes it easy for any activist group to issue concerns or warnings by news release or questionable report against and industry or private activity, and have those warnings quickly turned into public policy – just in case.
Many are now finding non-elected regional governments and governing councils enforcing policy and regulations.
As these policies are implemented, locallyelected officials are actually losing their own power and decision-making ability in their elected offices. More and more decisions are now being made behind the scenes in non-elected “sustainability councils” armed with truckloads of federal regulations, guidelines, and grant money.
According to its authors, the objective of Sustainable Development is to integrate economic, social, and environmental policies in order to achieve reduced consumption, social equity, and the preservation and restoration of biodiversity.
The Sustainable Development logo used in most literature on the subject contains three connecting circles labeled along the lines of Social Equity; Economic Prosperity; and Ecological Integrity (known commonly as the 3 E's).
Social Equity
Sustainable Development’s Social Equity plank is based on a demand for “social justice.” Social Justice is described as the right and opportunity of all people “to benefit equally from the resources afforded us by society and the environment.”
According to Sustainablist doctrine, it is a social injustice for some to have prosperity if others do not. It is a social injustice to keep our borders closed.
It is a social injustice for some to be bosses and others to be merely workers. Social justice is a major premise of Sustainable Development.
Another word for social justice is Socialism or Marxism. Karl Marx was the first to coin the phrase “social justice.”
Most recently the theory of social justice has been used to justify government takeover of health care. Today, the phrase is used throughout Sustainablist literature.
The Sustainablist system is based on the principle that individuals must give up selfish wants for the needs of the common good, or the “community.”
This is the same policy behind the push to eliminate our nation’s borders to allow the “migration” of those from other nations into the United States to share our individually-created wealth and our taxpayers-paid government social programs.
Say the Sustainablists, “Justice and efficiency go hand in hand.” “Borders,” they say, “are unjust.”
Under the Sustainablist system, private property is an evil that is used simply to create wealth for a few. So too, is business ownership. Instead, “every worker / person will be a direct capital owner.”
Property and businesses are to be kept in the name of the owner, keeping them responsible for taxes and other expenses, however control is in the hands of the “community” (government).
Under Sustainable Development individual human wants, needs, and desires are to be conformed to the views and dictates of social planners.
Harvey Ruvin, Vice Chair of the International Council on Local Environmental Initiatives (ICLEI) said:
“Individual rights will have to take a back seat to the collective” in the process of implementing Sustainable Development.
Economic Prosperity
Sustainable Development’s economic policy is based on one overriding premise: That the wealth of the world was made at the expense of the poor.
It dictates that, if the conditions of the poor are to be improved, wealth must first be taken from the rich.
[But this mandate does not apply to not the "elite" of course].
Consequently, Sustainable Development’s economic policy is based, not on private enterprise, but on public / private partnerships.
In the free-market of the past, most businesses were started by individuals who saw a need for a product or service and they set out to fill it. Some businesses prospered to become huge corporations, some remained small “mom and pop” shops, others failed and dissolved.
Most business owners were happy to be left alone to take their chances to run their businesses on their own, not encumbered by a multiplicity of government regulations.
If they failed, most found a way to try again. In the beginning of the American Republic, government’s main involvement was to guarantee they had the opportunity to try.
In order to give themselves an advantage over competition, some businesses -- particularly large corporations – now find a great advantage in dealing directly with government, actively lobbying for legislation that will inundate smaller companies with regulations that they cannot possibly comply with or even keep up with.
This government / big corporation back-scratching has always been a dangerous practice because economic power should be a positive check on government power, and vise versa. If the two should ever become combined, control of such massive power can lead only to tyranny.
One of the best examples of this was the Italian model in the first half of the Twentieth Century under Mussolini’s Fascism.
Together, select business leaders who have agreed to help government impose Sustainablist green positions in their business policies, and officials at all levels of government are indeed merging the power of the economy with the force of
government in Public / Private Partnerships on the local, state and federal levels.
As a result, Sustainable Development policy is redefining free trade to mean centralized global trade “freely” crossing (or eliminating) national borders.
It definitely does not mean people and companies trading freely with each other. Its real effect is to redistribute manufacturing, wealth, and jobs out of our borders and to lock away natural resources.
After the regulations have been put in place, literally destroying whole industries, new “green” industries created with federal grants bring newfound wealth to the “partners.” This is what Sustainablists refer to as economic prosperity.
The Sustainable Development “partnerships” include some corporations both domestic and multination. They in turn are partnered with the politicians who use their legislative and administrative powers to raid the treasury to fund and enforce the scheme.
Of course, as the chosen corporations, which become a new elite, stamp out the need for competition through government power, the real loser is the consumers who no longer count in market decisions. Government grants are now being used by industry to create mandated green products like wind and solar power.
Products are put on the market at little risk to the industry, leaving consumers a more limited selection from which to choose. True free markets are eliminated in favor of controlled economies which dictate the availability and quality of products.
Ecological Integrity
“Nature has an integral set of different values (cultural, spiritual and material) where humans are one strand in nature’s web and all living creatures are considered equal.
Therefore the natural way is the right way and human activities should be molded along nature’s rhythms.” from the UN’s Biodiversity Treaty presented at the 1992 UN Earth Summit.
This quote lays down the ground rules for the entire Sustainable Development agenda.
It says humans are nothing special – just one strand in the nature of things or, put another way, humans are simply biological resources.
Funny that, the Cabal see us as "Human Resources" also. What a coincidence...
Sustainablist policy is to oversee any issue in which man interacts with nature – which, of course, is literally everything.
And because the environment always comes first, there must be great restrictions over private property ownership and control.
This is necessary, Sustainablists say, because humans only defile nature. Under Sustainable Development there can be no concern over individual rights.
Individual human wants, needs, and desires are conformed to the views and dictates of social planners.
The UN’s Commission on Global Governance said in its 1995 report:
“Human activity… combined with unprecedented increases in human numbers… are impinging on the planet’s basic life support system.
Action must be taken now to control the human activities that produce these risks.”
Under Sustainable Development, limited government, as advocated by our Founding Fathers, is impossible because, we are told, the real or perceived environmental crisis is too great.
Only government can be trusted to respond. Maurice Strong, Chairman of the 1992 UN Earth Summit said:
“A shift is necessary toward lifestyles less geared to environmentally-damaging consumption patterns. The shift will require a vast strengthening of the multilateral system, including the United Nations.”
The politically based environmental movement provides Sustainablists camouflage as they work to transform systems of government, justice, and economics.
It is a masterful mixture of socialism (with its top down control of the tools of the economy) and fascism (where property is owned in name only – with no individual owner control).
Sustainable Development is the worst of both the left and the right. It is not liberal, nor is it conservative.
It is a new kind of tyranny that, if not stopped, will surely lead us to a new Dark Ages of pain and misery yet unknown to mankind.
UN Report: Habitat I Conference:
"Land cannot be treated as an ordinary asset, controlled by individuals and subject to the pressures and inefficiencies of the market.
Private land ownership is also a principle instrument of accumulation and concentration of wealth, therefore, contributers to social injustice."
Six months after his inauguration, President Bill Clinton issued Executive Order #12852 which created the President’s Council On Sustainable Development (PCSD) on June 29 1993.
The Council’s Membership included:
Twelve Cabinet-level Federal Officials
Jonathan Lash, Pres. World Resources Institute
John Adams, Ex. Dir. National Resources Defense Council
Dianne Dillon-Ridgley, Pres. Zero Population
Michelle Perrault, International V.P., Sierra Club
John C. Sawhill, Pres. The Nature Conservancy
Jay D. Hair, Pres. World Conservation Union (IUCN)
Kenneth L. Lay, CEO, Enon Corporation
William D. Ruckelshaus, Chm., Browning-Ferris Industries & former EPA Administrator
Some of these members were representatives of the same groups which helped write Agenda 21 at the UN level, now openly serving on the President’s Council to create policy for the implementation of Sustainable Development at the federal level.
With great fanfare the Council issued a comprehensive report containing all the guidelines on how our government was to be reinvented under sustainable development.
Those guidelines were created to direct policy for every single federal agency, state government and local community government. Their purpose was to translate the recommendations set forth in Agenda 21 into public policy administered by the federal government.
They created the American version of Agenda 21 called “Sustainable America - A New Consensus”.
The Four Part Process Leading to Sustainable Development
So how is this “wrenching transformation” being put into place? There are four very specific routes being used. In the rural areas it’s called the “Wildlands Project.”
In the cities it’s called “Smart Growth.” In business it’s called “Public / Private Partnerships.” And in government it’s called “Stakeholder Councils.”
The Wildlands Project
"WE MUST MAKE THIS PLACE AN INSECURE AND INHOSPITABLE PLACEFOR CAPITALISTS AND THEIR PROJECTS... WE MUST RELCAIM THEROADS AND PLOWED LANDS, HALT DAM CONSTRUCTION, TEAR DOWNEXISTING DAMS, FREE SHACKLED RIVERS AND RETURN TO WILDERNESSMILLIONS OF TENS OF MILLIONS OF ACRES OF PRESENTLY SETTLEDLAND.”
- Dave Foremen, Earth First.
The Wildlands Project was the brainchild of Earth First’s Dave Foreman and it literally calls for the “re-wilding” of 50% of all the land in every state – back to the way it was before Christopher Columbus set foot on this land.
It is a diabolical plan to herd humans off the rural lands and into human settlements. Crazy you say! Yes. Impossible? Not so fast. From Foreman, the plan became the blueprint for the UN’s Biodiversity Treaty and quickly became international in scope.
But how do you remove people from the land? One step at a time. Let’s begin with a biosphere reserve. A national park will do. A huge place where there is no human activity.
For example, Yellowstone National Park, devoid of human habitation can serve as its center. Then a buffer zone is established around the reserve.
Inside the buffer only limited human activity is allowed. Slowly, through strict regulations, that area is squeezed until human activity becomes impossible.
Once that is accomplished, the biosphere is extended to the former buffer zone borders – and then a new buffer zone is created around the now-larger biosphere and the process starts again. In that way, the Biosphere Reserve acts like a cancer cell, ever expanding, until all human activity is stopped.
And there are many tools in place to stop human activity and grow the reserve.
Push back livestock’s access to river banks on ranches, many times as much as 300. When the cattle can’t reach the stream, the rancher can’t water them -- he goes out of business. Lock away natural resources by creating national parks.
It shuts down the mines -- and they go out of business. Invent a Spotted Owl shortage and pretend it can’t live in a forest where timber is cut. Shut off the forest.
Then, when no trees are cut, there’s nothing to feed the mills and then there are no jobs, and -- they go out of business.
Locking away land cuts the tax base. Eventually the town dies. Keep it up and there is nothing to keep the people on the land – so they head to the cities. The wilderness grows – just like Dave Foreman planned.
It comes in many names and many programs. Heritage areas, land management,wolf and bear reintroduction, rails to trails, conservation easements,open space, and many more.
Each of these programs is designed to make it just a little harder to live on the land – a little more expensive – a little more hopeless, literally herding people off their land and into designated human habitat areas – cities.
In the West, where vast areas of open space make it easy to impose such polices there are several programs underway to remove humans from the land. Today, there are at least 31 Wildlands projects underway, locking away more than 40
percent of the nation’s land.
The Alaska Wildlands Project seeks to lock away and control almost the entire state.
In Washington State, Oregon, Idaho, Montana parts of North and South Dakota, parts of California, Arizona, Nevada, New Mexico, Wyoming, Texas, Utah, and more, there are at least 22 Wildlands Projects underway.
For example, one project called Yukon to Yellowstone (Y2Y) – creates a 2000 mile no-man’s land corridor from the Arctic to Yellowstone.
East of the Mississippi, there are at least nine Wildlands projects, covering Maine, Pennsylvania, New York, West Virginia, Ohio, Virginia, Tennessee, North and South Carolina, Georgia and Florida. Watch for names of Wildlands Projects like Chesapeake Bay Watershed, Appalachian Restoration Project and Piedmont Wildlands Project.
How Did We Get Here? J. Gary Lawrence - Bill Clinton's Advisor for Sustainable Development:
"Participating in a UN advocated planning process would very likely bring out many... right wing conspiracy groups... who would actively work to defeat any elected official... undertaking Local Agenda 21.
So we call our process something else, such as "Comprehensive Planning", "Growth Management", or "Smart Growth.""
Smart Growth
The second path is called Smart Growth. The process essentially puts a line around a city, locking off any growth outside that line.
Such growth is disdainfully labeled “Urban Sprawl.” The plan then curtails the building of more roads to cut off access to the newly created rural area. Inside the circle, concerted efforts are made to discourage the use of cars in preference to public transportation, restricting mobility.
Because there is a restriction on space inside the controlled city limits, there is a created shortage of land and houses, so prices go up. That means populations will have to be controlled, because now there is no room to contain more people.
Cities are now passing “green” regulations, forcing homeowners to meet strict guidelines for making their homes environmentally compliant, using specific building materials, forcing roof replacements, demanding replacement of appliances, and more.
Those not in compliance will be fined and will not be able to sell their homes. There are now efforts underway to impose so-called “smart meters” which replace thermostats in homes.
Homeowners will not have control of such meters. Instead, the electric company will determine the necessary temperature inside each home.
Government agencies or local policy boards will be tasked with the responsibility to conduct an energy audit in each home to determine the steps necessary to bring the home into energy compliance. In Oakland, California, such restrictions will cost each homeowner an estimated $36,000.
The Cap N Trade bill contains a whole section on such restrictions for the nation, and most local communities are now busy creating development plans that encompass many of the same restrictions.
There is now a new push to control food production under the label of Sustainable Farming. Food sheds are now being advocated.
These are essentially government run farms located just outside the smart growth area circling the city.
Food is to be grown using strict guidelines which dictate what kinds of food is to be produced and the farming practices to be used.
These are essentially based on the blue print of Chinese Agrarian villages that cannot possibly grow enough food to feed the community unless populations are tightly controlled. True Sustainable farming programs discourage importing goods from outside the community.
A Red Agenda Marked With a Pretty Green Name: "Sustainability"
Agenda 21 spread like an INFECTION: UN Agenda 21 > ICLEI > NGO's > Central / Regional Planners
Planning associations provide sample ordinances based on ECLEI doctin that originated in UN Agenda 21
Municipal plans become manifestos
Stake Holder Councils
Inside the cities, government is increasingly controlled by an elite ruling class called stake holder councils. These are mostly Non-governmental organizations, or NGOs, which, like thieves in the night, converge on the community to stake their claim to enforce their own private agendas.
The function of legitimately – elected government within the system votes to create a system of boards, councils and even regional governments to handle every aspect of day-to-day operation of the community.
Once in place, the councils and boards basically replace the power of elected officials with non-elected, appointed rulers answerable to no one.
The councils are controlled by a small minority in the community, but they are all - powerful. They force citizens to seek permission (usually denied) for any changes to private property.
They use such excuses as historic preservation, water use restrictions, energy use, and open space restrictions. They will dictate that homeowners must use special “green” light bulbs and force stores to only use paper bags, for example.
They over-burden or even destroy business, creating stiff regulations on manufacturing and small business in the community. They may dictate the number of outlets a business may have in a community, not matter what the population
demands. For example, in San Francisco there can only be seven McDonalds.
They can dictate the kind of building materials owners can use in their private home – or whether one can build on their property at all.
Then, if they do grant a permit for building, they might not decide to let the property owner acquire water and electricity for the new home – and they may or may not give you a reason for being turned down.
As part of Sustainable health care, they may even dictate that you get the proper exercise – as determined by the government. Again, San Francisco has built a new federal building – the greenest ever built.
The elevators will only stop on every third floor so riders are forced to use stairs – for their own health, of course.
These councils fit almost perfectly the definition of a State Soviet: a system of councils that report to an apex council and then implement a predetermined outcome. Soviets are the operating mechanism of a government-controlled economy.
So Many Things Making So Little Sense: (US)
EPA drives industries overseas where the pollution increases
EPA embraces ethanol while blaming farming for pollution
Master plans across America overtly ignore property rights
Environmental nooses rob property rights and individual freedoms based on unsettled science, distorted statistics and exaggerated predictions
Focus on Social Equity eclipsing life-liberty property (Why?)
Municipal master plans have become manifestos
People in tears across America
Public / Private Partnerships
The fourth path to imposing Sustainable Development is Public/Private Partnerships (PPPs). Unfortunately, today, many Conservative / Libertarian organizations are presenting PPPs as free enterprise and a private answer for keeping taxes down by using business to make a better society.
There are certain areas where private business contracts to do jobs such as running school cafeterias through a competitive bid system. That type of arrangement certain does serve the tax payers and provides better services. That’s not how PPPs are used though Sustainable Development.
In truth, many PPPs are nothing more than government-sanctioned monopolies in which a few businesses are granted special favors like tax breaks, the power of eminent domain, non-compete clauses and specific guarantees for return on their investments.
That means they can fix prices, charge beyond what the market demands, and they can use the power of government to put competition out of business. That is not free enterprise. And it is these global corporations that are pushing the green agenda.
If you can stomach reading this horse shit, click on the image above
PPPs were the driving force behind the Trans Texas Corridor, using eminent domain to take more than 580,000 acres of private land - sanctioned by the partnership with the Texas government. And PPPs are taking over highways and local water treatment plants in communities across the nation.
PPPs in control of the water system can control water consumption – a major part of the Sustainable Development blueprint.
Fueled by federal grant programs through the EPA, the auto industry has produced and forced onto the market “green” cars that no one wants to buy, such as the Chevy Volt.
For its part of the partnership, government passed regulations that keep gas prices high to make them more inviting.
The federal government has entered into many partnerships with alternative energy companies in a move to force wind power and solar power on an uninterested public. Again, such industries only exist though the power and of government determined to enforce a certain political agenda. They would never survive in an honest free market.
Using government to ban its own product, General Electric is forcing the mercury- laden green light bulb, costing 5 times the price of incandescent bulbs. Such is the reality of green industry, which depends more on government subsidy and grants than on customers.
The North American Free Trade Agreement (NAFTA) is the root of the “Free Trade” process and the fuel for PPPs between international corporations and government, thereby creating an “elite” class of “connected” businesses – or what Ayn Rand called “the power of pull.”
Success in the PPP world is not based on quality of product and service, but on who you know in high places.
To play ball in the PPP game means accepting the mantra of Sustainable Development and helping to implement it, even if it means going against your own product. That’s why Home Depot uses its commercials to oppose cutting down trees and British Petroleum advocates reducing the use of oil.
It is not free enterprise, but a Mussolini-type fascism of government and private industry organized in a near impenetrable force of power. And it’s all driven by the Agenda 21 blueprint of Sustainable Development.
ICLEI: Charter 1.7 - Principles
The Association shall promote, and ask its individual members to adopt, the following Earth Charter Principles to guide local action:
6. Prevent harm as the best method of environmental protection and, when knowledge is limited, apply a precautionary approach.
7. Adopt patterns of production, consumption, and reproduction that safeguard Earth’s regenerative capacities, human rights, and community well-being. (Communitarianism with forced sterilization?)
(9) Eradicate poverty as an ethical, social, and environmental imperative.
9. Eradicate poverty as an ethical, social, and environmental imperative.
10. Ensure that economic activities and institutions at all levels promote human development in an equitable and sustainable manner.
11. Affirm gender equality and equity as prerequisites to sustainable development and ensure universal access to education, health care, and economic opportunity.
14. Integrate into formal education and life-long learning the knowledge, values, and skills needed for a sustainable way of life.
What Kinds of Groups Promote this in the U.S.A.?
Many people ask how dangerous international policies can suddenly turn up in state and local government, all seemingly uniform to those in communities across the nation and around the globe.
The answer – meet ICLEI, a non-profit, private foundation, dedicated to helping locally elected representatives fully implement Agenda 21 in the community.
Originally known as the International Council for Local Environmental Initiatives (ICLEI), today the group simply calls itself “ICLEI – Local Governments for Sustainability.”
In 1992, ICLEI was one of the groups instrumental in creating Agenda 21.
The group’s mission is to push local communities to transform the way governments operate, creating a “community plan,” creating a wide range of non-elected planning and councils which then impose severe regulations and oversight policies, affecting every homeowner, every business, every school; literally every aspect of the citizen’s lives.
And it’s having tremendous success.
Currently there are over 600 American cities in which ICLEI is being paid dues with tax dollars from city councils to implement and enforce Sustainable Development. ICLEI is there to assure that the mayors keep their promises and meet their goals. Climate change and the goal to cut the communities carbon footprint is, of course, the ICLEI mantra.
Here’s just some of the programs ICLEI provides cities and towns, in order to spread their own particular political agenda in the name of “community services” and environmental protection, they include:
Software programs to help set the goals for community development – which leads to controlling use of private property;
Access to a network of “Green” experts, newsletters, conferences and workshops – to assure all city employees are in the process;
Toolkits, online resources, case studies, fact sheets, policy and practice manuals, and blueprints used by other communities;
Training workshops for staff and elected officials on how to develop and implement the programs;
And, of course, there’s Notification of relevant grant opportunities – this is the important one – money – with severe strings attached.
ICLEI recommends that the community hire a full time “sustainability manager,” who, even in small towns, can devote 100% of his time to assure that every nook and corner of the government is on message and under control.
Using environmental protection as the excuse, these programs are about reinventing government with a specific political agenda. ICLEI and others are dedicated to transforming every community in the nation to the Agenda 21 blueprint.
In addition to ICLEI, groups like the Sierra Club, Nature Conservancy and Audubon Society, NGOs which also helped write Sustainable Development policy have chapters in nearly every city. They know that Congress has written legislation providing grants for cities that implement Sustainablist policy. They agitate to get the cities to accept the grants.
If a city rejects the plan, they then agitate to the public, telling them that their elected representatives have cost the city millions in “their” tax dollars. In the end, through such tactics, the NGOs usually get their way.
The NGOs are joined in their efforts by professional planning groups and associations such as the American Planning Association (APA), The Renaissance Planning Group, and the International City/County Management association (ICMA). IN fact there are literally hundreds, if not thousands, of non-profits, NGOs and planning groups living off the grant money, working to enforce Sustainable Development policy at every level of government.
The APA - Professional Planners [or Anti-Capitalist Political Advocacy?] APA embraces ICLEI Programmes(s)
1.1 "The built envoronment is a primary contributor to climate change" ...Business as usual will not suffice."
1.3 Social Equity and Climate CHange (&Environmental Justice)
2.4 #6: "Should reduce reliance on coal..."
2.4 #10: Growe food for local consumption(Starve the world?)
2.4 #14: Reduce VMT (Vehicle Miles Travelled)
2.4 #15: Cap & Trade for carbon ...needed.
Land Use #15: Create city-funded housing repair programs
Transportation #4: Increase CAFE standards
Here Are Just a Few to Watch For:
The American Planning Association (APA) is the nation’s leading enforcer of Sustainable policy. It came into being in 1978 and can be found in literally every community in the nation. It doesn’t have the same open ties to the UN as does
ICLEI, but is every bit as involved, if not more so.
The APA’s “Growing Smart Legislative Guide Book” is found in nearly every university, state and county in the country. It is the planning guide preferred by most urban and regional planners.
The American Planning Association is one of many members of the PCSD. They partner with ICLEI & ICMA in the implementation of sustainable development. ICMA, International City / County Management Association, is an organization
of professional local government leaders building sustainable communities worldwide.
Christchurch, New Zealand
ICMA provides technical and management assistance, training, and information resources in the areas of performance measurement, ethics education and training, community and economic development, environmental management, technology, and other topics to its members and the broader local government community.
They are aided in their efforts through such as the U.S. Conference of Mayors, National Governors Association, National League of Cities, the National Association of County Administrators and several more groups that are supposed to
represent elected officials.
The Renaissance Planning Group is an urban planning firm. They played a critical role in Florida’s “Forever Program”. The Forever Program is Florida’s premier conservation and recreation lands acquisition program. Florida Forever is the
largest public land acquisition program of its kind in the United States.
With approximately 9.8 million acres of conservation land in Florida, more than 2.4 million acres were purchased under the Florida Forever and P2000 programs.
Propaganda from idiots for idiots
In 2007, the Virginia state legislature passed HB 3202 mandating that counties with the prescribed growth rate establish high density urban development areas. As a result, to date, 67 counties in the Commonwealth of Virginia are required to establish “urban development areas”.
The process and proposed land use planning that is being implemented, follows the very same policies called for in Agenda 21’s biodiversity plan. This requirement by the state forces local governments to compromise your private property through zoning measures called for in the Smart Growth program for sustainable development.
The American Farmland Trust (AFT) formed in 1980, works to acquire and control farmer development rights and the purchase of Agriculture Easements which drastically reduce, if not eliminate private ownership of the land.
"We believe planning should be a tool for allocating resources... and eliminating the great inequalities of wealth and power in our society... because the free market has proven incapable of doing this."
The Danger is in the “Process”
Sustainable policies are being sold universally to the public as a means to protect the environment and control growth. That is simply the excuse for the policies being implemented in its name.
The real problem is the “PROCESS” through which Sustainable Development is being forced on unsuspecting citizens.
The comprehensive land use plans are being steered by planning groups through manipulation by facilitated stakeholder consensus councils.
Though their meetings are “open” to the public, they are void of any public input.
The predetermined outcome severely restricts land use and compromises private property ownership in an already distressed market.
They answer to no one and they are run by zealots with their own political agenda imposing international laws and regulations.
Local homeowners have no say in the process and in most cases are shut out. Sometimes they are literally thrown out of council meetings because they want to discuss how a regulation is going to affect their property or livelihood.
Communities have dealt with local problems for 200 years. Some use zoning, some don’t. But locally elected town councils and commissioners, which meet and discuss problems with the citizens, are how this nation was built and prospered.
Today, under Sustainable Development, NGOs like ICLEI and the APA move in to establish non-elected boards, councils and regional government bodies.
Despite the Senate’s refusal to ratify the Biodiversity Treaty in 1994, the Agenda 21 policies called for by the convention, are being implemented nationwide. No matter where you live, rest assured Agenda 21 policies are being implemented in your community.
Proponents of Agenda 21 and Sustainable Development attempt to ridicule those who oppose the programs as being paranoid radicals who are spreading conspiracy theories about what they call an “obscure 20 year old UN document.”
Yet, in 2012 the UN sponsored Rio+20, in which 50,000 delegates from around the world to celebrate Agenda 21 and find means to complete its implementation.
Sustainable Development is not about “saving the environment.” It is about a revolutionary coup. It is about establishing global governance and abandoning the principles of Natural Law on which America was founded.
The politically-based environmental movement provides Sustainablists camouflage as they work to transform global systems of government, justice, and economics.
It’s a masterful mixture of Socialism, (with its top-down control of the tools of the economy); fascism (where property is owned in name only – with no private control); and Corporatism, (where partnerships between government and private business create government sanctioned monopolies.)
Sustainable Development is the worst of both the left and the right. It is bad policy pushed by both liberal and conservatives.
It is a new kind of tyranny that, if not stopped, will surely lead all human kind to a new Dark Ages of pain and misery.
What has Sustainability Become? Unfortunately, the environmental movement has been hijacked as a convenient excuse to attack capitalism; blame America; transfer wealth; impinge on Constitutional rights; and install a government-run socio-economic system.
United Nations paradigm:Capitalism and private property rights are not sustainable, and pose the single greatest threat to the world's ecosystem and social equity.
How to Fight Back Against Sustainable Development
Be aware of the world in which your elected officials live.
See below: ICLEI doesn't come with flashing lights that say "ICLEI".
It comes wrapped in a plain green package labelled "Smart Growth" or "Sustainability":
You need to know who the players are and you need to understand the political world your officials are operating in.
This may help you to understand that perhaps they aren’t all evil globalists, but, perhaps, good people who are surrounded by powers that won’t let them see the reality of the policies they are helping to implement.
I’m certainly not making excuses for them, but before you rush in and start yelling about their enforcing UN policies on the community, here are some things you should consider.
In most communities, you mayor, city council members and county commissioners are automatically members of national organizations like the National Conference of Mayors, National League of Cities, and the national associations for city council members, and the same for commissioners.
Those in the state government also have the National Governors Association and state legislators have their national organization.
For the past twenty years or more, each and every one of these national organizations have been promoting Sustainable
Development and related policies. The National Mayors Conference and the National Governors Association have been leaders in this agenda, many times working directly with UN organizations to promote the policy.
That is the message your local elected leaders hear; from the podium; from fellow officials from other communities; from “experts” they’ve been told to respect; in committee meetings; from dinner speakers; from literature they are given at such meetings.
They are told of legislation that will be soon be implemented, and they are even provided sample legislation to introduce in their communities.
Back home, they are surrounded by a horde of “stakeholder” groups, each promoting a piece of the agenda, be it policies for water control, energy control, development control, specific building materials control, historic preservation and control of “downtown” development, conservation easements and development rights for control of rural property.
These groups like ICLEI, the American Planning Association, the Renaissance Planning Group, and many more, are heavily involved with state and federal plans. They arrive in your community with blue prints, state and federal plans, grants and lots of contacts in high places.
There are official programs for “going Green,” Comprehensive land use plans, and lots of programs for the kids in the classrooms.
There is also a second horde involved in the Sustainablist invasion – state and federal agency officials including EPA agents; air and water quality agents; Interior Department officials, HUD officials, energy officials, Commerce Department officials, and on and on – all targeting your locally elected officials with policy, money, regulations, reports, special planning boards, meetings, and conferences, all promoting the exact same agenda.
And don’t forget the news media, both locally and nationally, also promoting the Sustainablist agenda, attacking anyone not going along, ready to quickly use the “extremist” label against them.
The message is clear - Sustainable Development is reality – politically correct, necessary, unquestionable, and it has “consensus.”
Is your head spinning yet? Think of the affect all of this has on a poor local official who just thought he would run for office and serve his community. This is his reality. This is what he thinks government is supposed to be because, after all, everyone he is dealing with says so.
Now, as he is surrounded by all of these important, powerful folks, along comes a local citizen who tells him that some guy named Tom DeWeese says all of these programs are from the UN and are taking away our liberty.
Who? He said what? Come on, I’m not doing that. And I don’t have time to talk about it. I have another meeting to go to.
If we are going to successfully fight Agenda 21, it is vitally important that we all recognize this reality as we plan to deal with it and defeat it. With that in mind, I offer the following ideas.
How to Fight Back
First and foremost, don’t try to fight alone. If you try to attend local meetings by yourself you will be ignored. You will need others to plan and implement strategy.
You have family and friends. Start with them. Ask them to help look into some local policies. Even if they start off skeptical about your concerns, it won’t take them long to see the truth.
Check out of there is a local tea party or even a local Republican group. Churches are a target of such policies. Alert people at your church and ask them to help fight back.
Find people to help you!
Research: Don’t even begin to open up a fight until you know certain details. First, who are the players in your community. What privately funded “stakeholder” groups are there? What is their agenda?
What other communities have they operated in? What projects? What results? Who are their members in your community?
Are they residents or did they come from “out of town?” (That could prove to be valuable information later in the fight). Finding this information may be the hardest of your efforts. They like to operate out of the spotlight.
It’s not likely that the town will carry official documentation of who it is working with. It probably will require that you attend lots of meetings and hearings. Take note of who is there and their role. Do this quietly. Don’t announce to the community what you are doing. Don’t make yourselves a target. You may have to ask questions and that may raise some eyebrows. But stay out of the way as much as possible.
Second, get all the details on the plans your community is working on. Has there already been legislation passed? Most of this information can be found on the town website. Knowing this information will help you put together a plan of action.
Once you have it, you can begin to take your fight public.
With the information you have gathered, begin to examine the effect the policies will have on the community and its residents. Find who the victims of the legislation or regulation may be. This will be of great value as you confront city council. People understand victim stories – especially if it is them. It is the best way to undermine the process – and help get people to join your cause.
You will find that Conservation Easements have raised taxes as much of the county land is removed from the tax rolls – someone has to make up for the lost revenue and the payment of easements. Are “stakeholder” groups helping to get landowners to sign up for the easements – and if so – do they get any kind of kickbacks?
Who are getting the easements? You may find the rich land owners have found a great loophole to cut their own property taxes as the middle class makes up the short fall. This will help bring usually disinterested people to your cause.
Does the community plan call for reduction of energy use? If so, look for calls for energy audits and taxes on energy use. The audits mean that the government has set a goal to reduce energy use. It may follow that government agents are going to come into your home to inspect your energy use.
Then they are going to tell you what must be done in your home to cut usage. That will cost you money. Don’t fall for the line that it is all voluntary – to help you save money.
They haven’t gone to this much trouble to be ignored. Regulations are not voluntary.
These are just a couple of examples of what to look for as you do your research.
There are many more, including meters on wells to control water use, smart meters to take away your control of your thermostat; non elected boards and councils to control local development and implement smart growth, leading to
population growth; Public / Private Partnerships with local and large corporations to “go Green;” creation of open space; pushing back live stock from streams, enforcing sustainable farming methods that restrict energy and water use in farming practices; and much more.
It all leads to higher costs and shortages, in the name of environmental protection and conservation and controlling growth (anti-sprawl, they call it).
Your goal is to stop Sustainable Development in your community. That means a campaign to stop the creation of non-elected regional government councils that are difficult to hold accountable.
It means to stop local governments from taking grants that come with massive strings attached to enforce compliance.
And it means you must succeed in removing outsider organizations and Stakeholder groups that are pressuring your elected officials to do their bidding. Civic Action: Armed with as much information as you can gather (and armed with the ability to coherently discuss its details) you are ready to take your battle to the public.
First, it would be better for you to try to discuss it privately with some of your elected officials, especially if you know them. Tell them what you have found and explain why you are opposed.
First discuss the effects of the policies on the average citizen. Explain why they are bad. Only very slowly should you bring the conversation around to the origin of such polices - Agenda 21 and the UN.
Don’t start there. It is important that you build the case to show that these policies are not local, but part of a national and international agenda. If this conversation does not go well (and it probably won’t) then you have to take it to the next level – to the public.
Begin a two fold campaign. First, write a series of letters to the editor for the local newspaper. Make sure that you are not alone.
Coordinate your letters with others who will also write letters to back up and support what you have written. These will generate more letters from others, some for your position and other against you.
Be prepared to answer those against you as they are probably written by those “Stakeholders” who are implementing the policies in the first place. This may be a useful place for you to use what you’ve learned about these groups to discredit them.
Second, begin to attend Council meetings and ask questions. The response from the council members will determine your next move. If you are ignored and your questions met with silence or hostility, prepare a news release detailing your questions and the background you have as to why you asked those questions.
Pass the news release out to the people at the next meeting as well as the news media. Attend the next meeting and the next demanding answers. Be sure to organize people to come with you.
Don’t try this alone. If necessary, have demonstrators outside city hall carrying signs or handing out flyers with the name and picture of the officials who won’t answer your questions along with the question you asked – including the details you have about the policy.
The point in all of this is to make the issue public. Take away their ability to hide the details from the public. Expose the hoards of outsiders who are dictating policy in your community. Force the people you elected to deal with YOU – not the army of self-appointed “stakeholders” and government officials. Shine a very right spotlight on the roaches under the rock.
If the newspaper is with you, great, but you will probably find it working with the other side. It may be difficult to get a fair shake in the newspaper or on radio.
That’s why you deliver your news releases to both the media and the public. Get signs, and flyers in stores if necessary. And keep it up for as long as it takes. Don’t stop the public demonstration until you had acquired victory, or at least started a public debate.
The final step is to use the energy you have created to run candidates for office against those who have ignored and fought you. Ultimately, that is the office holders worst nightmare and may be the most effective way to get them to respond and serve their constituents.
New Tactic
As mentioned in the beginning, over the past couple of years, as we’ve educated people on Agenda 21 and its UN origins, the natural reaction by concerned citizens and activists has been to rush into city hall and accuse their elected representatives of implementing international policies on the town.
This has, of course, been met with skepticism and ridicule on the part of some of the elected officials (egged on by the NGO stakeholder groups and planning organizations).
Today, the promoters of Agenda 21, including ICLEI and the American Planning Association (APA) have worked overtime to paint our movement as crazed conspiracy theorists wearing tin foil hats and hearing voices.
So, it’s time to change tactics.
Here is an undeniable fact: Agenda 21 / Sustainable Development cannot be enforced without usurping or diminishing private property rights. So, we need to begin to challenge the plans that affect private property rights.
However, as we move in that direction, we must have a clear understanding of what property rights are. Many people today have little or varying ideas of property rights.
Forty years ago people understood things like “No Trespassing,” “My home is my castle,” and “step across that line and suffer the consequences.” Such ideas today seem quaint and antiquated to many, especially with government invading private property at will.
Sometimes, in order to purchase property or to get access to services, we sign documents that say government or utility agents are free to come on our property at will. The idea of “Keep Out” is almost unheard of.
However, to demand that your private property be honored and protected a definition must be established before you start the effort.
As you stand in front of the elected officials at their regular meeting, ask them simply;
“As you bring these planners into our community and begin to implement their programs, what guarantees do I have that you will protect my private property rights?”
At this point you haven’t mentioned Agenda 21, and you haven’t attacked planning. You are simply asking a non-combative question.
They will assure you that they are in full support of protecting private property.
And then you say;
“Well, I’m happy to hear that. But, I would really like to have that in writing.”
And you present the resolution to them. If you can read it aloud to the meeting, so much the better. They may say they need to take it under consideration and will get back to you. Fine.
Make sure you are back at the next meeting to ask about it. If they say “No.” You simply ask “Why?” and take it from there.
Do not attempt this alone. The key to this effort is persistence and organization.
If they have refused to sign it then you need 5 or 10 people to stand up and ask why. You need to escalate this at each meeting until it becomes a public issue -
“Why won’t your elected officials sign a simple document that says they will protect your private property rights? What are they hiding in the plans they are presenting to us?”
This can and will lead to protests, letters to the editor and other media available to you. Put the elected officials’ names on signs carried by protestors who are rallying outside the next council or planning meeting.
Make them the issue. What you are really doing is laying the ground work for a campaign to defeat them in the next election. It is also important to do research into what planning groups, non-governmental organizations (NGO’s) federal grants and agencies may be involved in the process. All of them have a background.
Find out who they are and what they have done in the past in other communities and present that info to your fellow citizens as a warning of what is to come. I recommend that you create a “rapid response team” to be prepared to immediately respond in the media to anything they do. Make them scared to act.
If ICLEI is in your city, the details about Agenda 21 and the UN connection is easier. Your community is paying them dues with your tax dollars. Here is how to handle them:
If your council derides your statements that their policies come from the UNs Agenda 21, simply print out the home page from ICLEI’s web site: www.iclei.org
This will have all of the UN connections you’ve been talking about, in ICLEI’s own words.
Pass out the web page copies to everyone in the chamber audience and say to your elected officials;
“Don’t call me a radical simply for reporting what ICLEI openly admits on its own web site. I’m just the one pointing it out – you are the ones who are paying our tax dollars to them.”
Then demand that those payment stop. You have proven your case.
Stopping Consensus Meetings
Most public meetings are now run by trained and highly paid facilitators whose jobs is to control the meeting and bring it to a preplanned conclusion. If he is good at his job, the facilitator can actually make the audience think the “consensus” they have reached on and issue or proposal is actually their idea.
This is how Sustainable Development is being implemented across the nation, especially in meetings or planning boards that are advertised as open to the public.
They really don’t want you there and the tactic is used to move forward in full view of the public without them knowing what is happening. There is nothing free or open about the consensus process.
It is designed to eliminate debate and close discussion.
To bust up the process you must never participate, even to answer a question.
To do so allows the facilitator to make you part of the process. Instead, you must control the discussion.
Here is a quick suggestion on how to foul up the works:
Never go alone to such a meeting. You will need at least three people – the more the better.
Do not sit together. Instead, fan out in the room in a triangle formation.
Know ahead of time the questions you want to ask: Who is the facilitator?
What is his association with the organizers? Is he being paid?
Where did these programs (being proposed) come from? How are they to be funded?
One question to ask over and over again, both at facilitated meetings and city council meetings, is this:
“With the implementation of this policy, tell me a single right or action I have on my property that doesn’t require your approval or involvement. What are my rights as a property owner?”
Make them name it.
You will quickly see that they too understand there are no property rights left. By asking these questions you are putting his legitimacy in question, building suspicion among the rest of the audience, destroying his authority.
They
will try to counter, either by patronizing and humoring you, at first, or, then becoming hostile, moving to have you removed as a disruptive force.
That’s where the rest of your group comes in. They need to back you up, demand answers to your questions. If you have enough people in the room you can cause a major disruption, making it impossible for the facilitator to move forward with his agenda.
Do not walk out and leave the room to him. Stay to the end and make him shut down the meeting.
In Conclusion
These suggestions on how to fight back are, admittedly, very basic and elementary. They are meant only to be a guideline. You will have to do your homework and adapt these tactics to your local situation.
These tactics are designed to create controversy and debate to force the Agenda 21 issue out of the secret meetings and into public debate where they belong.
Many of these same tactics can be used at all levels of government, right up and into national legislation.
Our plan is to demand answers from elected officials who want to ignore us.
They must be taught that such actions have consequences. As we learn new, successful tactics, I’ll share them with activists across the world.
The American Policy Center is now a partner in a new effort to create tactics and provide education to activists called Sustainable Freedom Lab - and hopefully it can serve as a resource for thw eorld, not just America. Here activists can share their findings, successful tactics and research with the rest of the movement.
The exciting news is that, finally, people are starting to understand that Agenda 21 is destroying our nations and they are beginning to fight back. The UN Agenda 21 house of cards is being exposed and it will fall with continued efforts and exposure by the people, and for the people - not just America - Worldwide.
The battle to stop the UN’s Agenda 21 is ragging on the local level across the world.
This document describes nothing less than a global government takeover of every nation across the planet.
The "goals" of this document are nothing more than code words for a corporate-government fascist agenda that will imprison humanity in a devastating cycle of poverty while enriching the world's most powerful globalist corporations like Monsanto and DuPont.
In the interests of helping wake up humanity, I've decided to translate the 17 points of this 2030 agenda so that readers everywhere can understand what this document is really calling for.
To perform this translation, you have to understand how globalists disguise their monopolistic agendas in "feel good" language.
Here's the point-by-point translation. Notice carefully that nowhere does this document state that "achieving human freedom" is one of its goals.
Nor does it explain HOW these goals are to be achieved. As you'll see here, every single point in this UN agenda is to be achieved through centralized government control and totalitarian mandates that resemble communism.
Translation of the UN's "2030 Agenda Blueprint for Globalist Government" (Controlled by Corporate Interests)
Goal 1. End poverty in all its forms everywhere
Translation: Put everyone on government welfare, food stamps, housing subsidies and handouts that make them obedient slaves to global government. Never allow people upward mobility to help themselves.
Instead, teach mass victimization and obedience to a government that provides monthly "allowance" money for basic essentials like food and medicine. Label it "ending poverty."
Goal 2. End hunger, achieve food security and improved nutrition and promote sustainable agriculture
Translation: Invade the entire planet with GMOs and Monsanto's patented seeds while increasing the use of deadly herbicides under the false claim of "increased output" of food crops.
Engineer genetically modified plants to boost specific vitamin chemicals while having no idea of the long-term consequences of genetic pollution or cross-species genetic experiments carried out openly in a fragile ecosystem.
Goal 3. Ensure healthy lives and promote well-being for all at all ages
Translation: Mandate 100+ vaccines for all children and adults at gunpoint, threatening parents with arrest and imprisonment if they refuse to cooperate. Push heavy medication use on children and teens while rolling out "screening" programs. Call mass medication "prevention" programs and claim they improve the health of citizens.
Goal 4. Ensure inclusive and equitable quality education and promote lifelong learning opportunities for all
Translation: Push a false history and a dumbed-down education under "Common Core" education standards that produce obedient workers rather than independent thinkers. Never let people learn real history, or else they might realize they don't want to repeat it.
Goal 5. Achieve gender equality and empower all women and girls
Translation: Criminalize Christianity, marginalize heterosexuality, demonize males and promote the LGBT agenda everywhere. The real goal is never "equality" but rather the marginalization and shaming of anyone who expresses any male characteristics whatsoever.
The ultimate goal is to feminize society, creating widespread acceptance of "gentle obedience" along with the self-weakening ideas of communal property and "sharing" everything.
Because only male energy has the strength to rise up against oppression and fight for human rights, the suppression of male energy is key to keeping the population in a state of eternal acquiescence.
Goal 6. Ensure availability and sustainable management of water and sanitation for all
Translation: Allow powerful corporations to seize control of the world's water supplies and charge monopoly prices to "build new water delivery infrastructure" that "ensures availability."
Goal 7. Ensure access to affordable, reliable, sustainable and modern energy for all
Translation: Penalize coal, gas and oil while pushing doomed-to-fail "green" energy subsidies to brain-dead startups headed by friends of the White House who all go bankrupt in five years or less.
The green startups make for impressive speeches and media coverage, but because these companies are led by corrupt idiots rather than capable entrepreneurs, they always go broke. (And the media hopes you don't remember all the fanfare surrounding their original launch.)
Goal 8. Promote sustained, inclusive and sustainable economic growth, full and productive employment and decent work for all
Translation: Regulate small business out of existence with government-mandated minimum wages that bankrupt entire sectors of the economy. Force employers to meet hiring quotas of LGBT workers while mandating wage tiers under a centrally planned work economy dictated by the government. Destroy free market economics and deny permits and licenses to those companies that don't obey government dictates.
Goal 9.) Build resilient infrastructure, promote inclusive and sustainable industrialization and foster innovation
Translation: Put nations into extreme debt with the World Bank, spending debt money to hire corrupt American corporations to build large-scale infrastructure projects that trap developing nations in an endless spiral of debt.
See the book Confessions of an Economic Hit Man by John Perkins to understand the details of how this scheme has been repeated countless times over the last several decades.
Goal 10. Reduce inequality within and among countries
Translation: Punish the rich, the entrepreneurs and the innovators, confiscating nearly all gains by those who choose to work and excel. Redistribute the confiscated wealth to the masses of non-working human parasites that feed off a productive economy while contributing nothing to it... all while screaming about "equality!"
Goal 11. Make cities and human settlements inclusive, safe, resilient and sustainable
Translation: Ban all gun ownership by private citizens, concentrating guns into the hands of obedient government enforcers who rule over an unarmed, enslaved class of impoverished workers.
Criminalize living in most rural areas by instituting Hunger Games-style "protected areas" which the government will claim are owned by "the People" even though no people are allowed to live there. Force all humans into densely packed, tightly controlled cities where they are under 24/7 surveillance and subject to easy manipulation by government.
Goal 12. Ensure sustainable consumption and production patterns
Translation: Begin levying punitive taxes on the consumption of fossil fuels and electricity, forcing people to live under conditions of worsening standards of living that increasingly resemble Third World conditions.
Use social influence campaigns in TV, movies and social media to shame people who use gasoline, water or electricity, establishing a social construct of ninnies and tattlers who rat out their neighbors in exchange for food credit rewards.
Goal 13. Take urgent action to combat climate change and its impacts
Translation: Set energy consumption quotas on each human being and start punishing or even criminalizing "lifestyle decisions" that exceed energy usage limits set by governments. Institute total surveillance of individuals in order to track and calculate their energy consumption.
Penalize private vehicle ownership and force the masses onto public transit, where TSA grunts and facial recognition cameras can monitor and record the movement of every person in society, like a scene ripped right out of Minority Report.
Goal 14. Conserve and sustainably use the oceans, seas and marine resources for sustainable development
Translation: Ban most ocean fishing, plunging the food supply into an extreme shortage and causing runaway food price inflation that puts even more people into economic desperation.
Criminalize the operation of private fishing vessels and place all ocean fishing operations under the control of government central planning. Only allow favored corporations to conduct ocean fishing operations (and make this decision based entirely on which corporations give the most campaign contributions to corrupt lawmakers).
Goal 15. Protect, restore and promote sustainable use of terrestrial ecosystems, sustainably manage forests, combat desertification, and halt and reverse land degradation and halt biodiversity loss
Translation: Roll out Agenda 21 and force humans off the land and into controlled cities. Criminalize private land ownership, including ranches and agricultural tracts. Tightly control all agriculture through a corporate-corrupted government bureaucracy whose policies are determined almost entirely by Monsanto while being rubber-stamped by the USDA.
Ban woodstoves, rainwater collection and home gardening in order to criminalize self-reliance and force total dependence on government.
Goal 16. Promote peaceful and inclusive societies for sustainable development, provide access to justice for all and build effective, accountable and inclusive institutions at all levels
Translation: Grant legal immunity to illegal aliens and "protected" minority groups, which will be free to engage in any illegal activity -- including openly calling for the mass murder of police officers -- because they are the new protected class in society. "Inclusive institutions" means granting favorable tax structures and government grants to corporations that hire LGBT workers or whatever groups are currently in favor with the central planners in government.
Use government agencies to selectively punish unfavorable groups with punitive audits and regulatory harassment, all while ignoring the criminal activities of favored corporations that are friends of the political elite.
Goal 17. Strengthen the means of implementation and revitalize the global partnership for sustainable development
Translation: Enact global trade mandates that override national laws while granting unrestricted imperialism powers to companies like Monsanto, Dow Chemical, RJ Reynolds, Coca-Cola and Merck.
Pass global trade pacts that bypass a nation's lawmakers and override intellectual property laws to make sure the world's most powerful corporations maintain total monopolies over drugs, seeds, chemicals and technology. Nullify national laws and demand total global obedience to trade agreements authored by powerful corporations and rubber-stamped by the UN.
Total enslavement of the planet by 2030 As the UN document says, "We commit ourselves to working tirelessly for the full implementation of this Agenda by 2030."
If you read the full document and can read beyond the fluffery and public relations phrases, you'll quickly realize that this UN agenda is going to be forced upon all the citizens of the world through the invocation of government coercion.
Nowhere does this document state that the rights of the individual will be protected.
Nor does it even acknowledge the existence of human rights granted to individuals by the Creator.
Even the so-called "Universal Declaration of Human Rights" utterly denies individuals the right to self defense, the right to medical choice and the right to parental control over their own children.
The UN is planning nothing less than a global government tyranny that enslaves all of humanity while calling the scheme "sustainable development" and "equality."
1984 has finally arrived. And of course it's all being rolled out under the fraudulent label of "progress."
However, it is not too late. Awareness is required before action may be taken.
5G Cell Phone Radiation: How The Telecom Companies Are Losing The Battle To Impose 5G Against The Will Of The People + French NGOs Demand Stop To ‘Out Of Control’ 5G Network
December 5 2020 | From: GlobalResearach / Connexion / Various The telecommunications companies and the mainstream media would have you believe that the race to roll out 5G is unstoppable. That you are nothing and no one in the face of a lethal multi-trillion-dollar agenda imposed by some of the most powerful entities on the planet.
They thought that if they called their new, alleged “communications technology”, adapted from the military Active Denial Technology, “5G” or fifth generation, the public would just assume that it was more of the same as 4G, 3G or 2G.
And if they could characterise the rollout as a race, the public would not have enough time to find out what a killer technology 5G is. How wrong they were!
Not only has the public found out, but now they know how lethal previous generations of wireless technology – to be used concurrently with 5G – are as well.
Below is the evidence from a number of different countries that the pushback is huge and growing.
The telcos have lost the propaganda war, despite their control of the mainstream media, from which not a whisper of the dangers of 5G is heard, and of social media and Youtube, who have been desperately deleting millions of accounts to silence the naysayers.
He asked if algorithms could be trusted with our lives and hopes and whether machines should be allowed to doom us to a cold and heartless future in an Orwellian world designed for censorship, repression and control.
He recalled the Universal Declaration of Human Rights and endorsed its ideals of upholding freedom of opinion and expression, the privacy of home and correspondence, and the right to seek and impart information and ideas.
He exhorted the academic committees, company boards and industry standards groups who are writing the rulebooks of the future, making ethical judgements, and choosing what will or will not be rendered possible to find the right balance between freedom and control, between innovation and regulation, between private enterprise and government oversight.
He insisted that the ethical judgements inherent in the design of new technology must be made transparent to all and that joint efforts must be made to agree a common set of global principles to shape the norms and standards that will guide the development of emerging technology.
What follows is a citizen journalist’s list of the actions taken to halt 5G and reports and complaints that have discredited this Machiavellian attempt to foist a disastrous technology on the world in 2019.
It is not an exhaustive list and I extend my apologies to all those whose efforts I may have overlooked here and much gratitude to all who have contributed to making this pushback so successful.
However, we cannot afford to be complacent and, in particular, we must work to stop the use of the Earth orbits and the stratosphere to beam 5G down to Earth, for this puts the ionosphere and the entire planet at risk.
We must also work to ensure that the use of street lights with blue light for this anti-life agenda is rapidly reversed.
The effort to stop 5G is still gathering momentum and we must continue to work together and tirelessly to protect all life on Earth and the planet itself until this demented plan is relegated to the history books as the most Mephistophelian scheme in the history of humankind.
Congresswomen Eshoo and Speier introduce BillHR530 to block FCC cell tower pre-emption and preserve local government control and invalidate the Federal Communications Commission’s (FCC) 26 September 2018 ruling to accelerate the deployment of 5G small cells throughout the US.
8
USA
14 January
Russia Today (RT) Americaairs the first of 7 reports on the dangers of 5G: 5G Wireless: A Dangerous ‘Experiment on Humanity’. “Is there a catch?”, asks the presenter. “Just a small one”, comes the reply, “It just might kill you”. The segment is viewed 1.8 million times.
9
European Commission
14 January
The Scientific Committee on Health, Environmental and Emerging Risks (SCHEER) rates the potential effects on wildlife of increases in electromagnetic radiation from 5G a maximum 3 in terms of scale, urgency and interactions with other ecosystems and species, stating that “The lack of clear evidence to inform the development of exposure guidelines to 5G technology leaves open the possibility of unintended biological consequences”.
The Illinois Supreme Court rules that a woman can sue Six Flags Great America for fingerprinting her child without telling her how the data would be used in violation of the state’s biometric law. “This is no mere ‘technicality,'” Chief Justice Lloyd Karmeier writes in the opinion. “The injury is real and significant.”
12
Italy
30 January
An Italian Court in the city of Monza rules the acoustic neuroma brain tumour of an airport employee to be an occupational disease caused by exposure to the radiation from a cell phone he used for over 10 years for his work.
Study: Radiation From Smartphones May Impair Memory In Teens. A research team at the Swiss Tropical and Public Health Institute says that radio frequency electromagnetic fields (RF-EMF) may negatively affect an adolescent’s brain from cellphone exposure, causing potentially harmful effects on his or her memory performance. The authors say having the device close to one’s head lead to the greatest amount of radiation exposure.
Eric Van Rongen, Chair of ICNIRP [self-proclaimed international commission on non-ionizing radiation protection, but actually just a German NGO], the organisation whose non-transparent pronouncements on the international limits at which phones can emit radiofrequency are strangely adopted by UN bodies, calls 5G “a public health experiment”, stating that “It will be necessary to gain more information about the exposure and any health problems that might come from an effect of that exposure”.
A class action lawsuit is filed against the FCC by 62 entities and municipalities across the USA. aimed at first slowing down and then vacating the FCC “order and declaratory ruling purporting to streamline the deployment of wireless facilities by pre-empting local government authority”.
Insurers announce premature death trend. British insurer Legal & General CEO says: “There’s been a long discussion about whether this is a blip or a trend, and sadly it’s looking like a trend.”
Florence applies the precautionary principle, refusing permissions for 5G and referring to “the ambiguity and the uncertainty of supranational bodies and private bodies (like ICNIRP)”, which “have very different positions from each other, despite the huge evidence of published studies”.
29
Italy
28 March
One Roman district votes against 5G trials, with others expected to follow. Other motions to Stop 5G are expected in the four regional councils, one provincial council and other municipal councils of Italy.
Belgian Environment Minister announces that Brussels is halting the 5G rollout, saying, “The people of Brussels are not guinea pigs whose health I can sell at a profit.” It turns out that there is now no methodology to effectively measure the radiation of MIMO antennas, which have the characteristic of varying field in time, space and intensity, unlike antennas used for 2G, 3G and 4G, which emit radiation of constant intensity and space. Celine Fremault therefore asserted that, as this technical obstacle was not resolved, she would not go further in the legislative process.
An EU report admits that 5G is a massive experiment, lamenting that “it is not possible to accurately simulate or measure 5G emissions in the real world” and stating that “complex interference effects … may result, especially in dense urban areas.”
The California Supreme Court publishes an opinionsupporting municipal authority to make regulations on so-called ‘small cell’ PROW (public right of way) towers and uses of the public’s right-of-way. This opinion affirms the 2016 appellate court ruling.
New York Congressman Thomas Suozzi sends a letter to the FCC seeking answers about the technology. “Small cell towers are being installed in residential neighborhoods in close proximity to houses throughout my district. ,,, My constituents are worried that should this technology be proven hazardous in the future, the health of their families and value of their properties would be at serious risk.”
44
Switzerland
17 April
The Federal Office for the Environment (FOEN) sends a 7-page information letter to all cantonal governments for the purpose of “calming the situation”. It claims that the new 5G adaptive (directional) antennas would mean much lower exposures for the population: “The beam cone is now aligned directly to the user and in all other radiation directions the radiation is lower [sic].”
French farmers sue the state over mystery cow deaths they blame on electromagnetic fields. A group of French cattle farmers is suing the state over the mysterious death of hundreds of cows, which they believe are the victims of harmful electromagnetic fields. Several studies have shown that livestock, particularly cattle, are affected by even low-level electromagnetic fields
48
Swiss Re
May
Insurance company Swiss Re”s report on New Emerging Risk Insights states that “Existing concerns regarding potential negative health effects from electromagnetic fields (EMF) are only likely to increase. An uptick in liability claims could be a potential long-term consequence. … interruption and subversion of the 5G platform could trigger catastrophic, cumulative damage.”
49
Denmark
4 May
A legal opinion by a Danish law firm states that rolling out 5G is illegal under EU and international law: It is the conclusion of this legal opinion that establishing and activating a 5G-network, as it is currently described, would be in contravention of current human and environmental laws enshrined in the European Convention on Human Rights, the UN Convention on the Rights of the Child, EU regulations, and the Bern- and Bonn-conventions. … This also applies when the radiation remains within the limits recommended by ICNIRP and currently used in Denmark as well as broadly within the EU.
50
Denmark
4 May
Danish group Landsindsamlingen mod5G announces it is suing the Danish state for having planned the implementation of the new 5G mobile network throughout Denmark by the year 2020 without conducting any kind of health test in relation to the long-term exposure of people or consideration of the harmful effects on the unborn, children and nature.
The US National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration (NOAA) and US National Aeronautics and Space Administration (NASA) criticize FCC plans for opening a 24 GHz spectrum band to 5G telecommunications providers, stating that US weather forecasting capabilities would be set back decades. The matter is on the agenda for international treaty negotiations at the International Telecommunication Union’s World Radio Conference (WRC) in the fall of 2019, but with respect to 24 GHz, the Department of State has already submitted the FCC’s out-of-band emission limits as the US position during preliminary negotiations.
A man living in the Tver region saws down a cell tower because he believes the radiation from it is destroying the vegetable, berry and fruit crops growing on his land located nearby.
Glastonbury Town Council opposes the introduction of 5G technology in Glastonbury until further information has been obtained on the health effects on residents, adopting the following motion: “This council has a social responsibility to protect the public and environment from exposure to harm, albeit unpredictable in the current state of scientific knowledge, and therefore opposes the roll-out of 5G in the Parish of Glastonbury – based on the precautionary principle – until further information is revealed from a newly convened 5G advisory committee (working group).”
5G installer discusses the consequences of 5G. Current radiofrequency emitted by cell towers uses relatively low power (1.5-2.8 MHz), which at short range superheats the water molecules in your brain, eyes and testicles. It dissipates over distance as it has a long wave trough. 5G will be up close, in offices, outside homes, everywhere, including in the back of self-driving cars. It broadcasts in GHz not MHz — 30 GHz is 15,000 times more powerful than current previous levels.
68
Ireland
18 June
A motion calling on Clare County Council to oppose the rollout of 5G on health grounds is backed by the elected representatives.
69
USA
18 June
Pennsylvania lawmakers cancel a vote on proposed legislation to facilitate infrastructure next-generation 5G wireless services. It is the third defeat for the Verizon- and AT&T-backed legislation.
70
US
20 June
The Centers for Disease Control and Prevention report that US suicide rates are at the highest level since World War II. Life expectancy, perhaps the broadest measure of a nation’s health, has fallen for three straight years, the first three-year drop since 1915 to 1918.
71
UK
25 June
UK parliamentary committee discusses concerns about the health effects of electromagnetic fields and 5G, especially with regard to electrohypersensitivity Tonia Antoniazzi, MP, asks why the inaccurate and discredited 2012 report of AGNIR is still on the Public Health England website.Transcript. Video (from 16. 35).
US Senator Dianne Feinstein introduces SB 2012, ‘‘Restoring Local Control Over Public Infrastructure Act of 2019’’, to repeal FCC rules that limit state and local government control over telecom infrastructure. The bill is supported by the US Conference of Mayors, National Association of Telecommunications Officers and Advisors, American Public Power Association, Communications Workers of America, National Association of Counties, League of California Cities and American Public Works Association.
75
France
27 June
After victories for “electrohypersenstive” (EHS) people in Toulouse (March) and Bordeaux (May), the Tribunal de grande instance of FOIX issues a decision protecting EHS people who cannot tolerate dirty electricity diffused by “smart” meters.
The European Stop 5G Alliance comprising representatives from 19 European countries is officially founded at an international conference in Mendrisio, Switzerland.
The Ninth Circuit Court of Appeals affirms the City of Berkeley’s right to require cell phone retailers in the city to notify prospective customers about cell phone manufacturers’ safety guidelines to ensure consumer safety, adopted in May 2015.
Prof. Em. Martin L. Pall states that 5G effects will take months, not years, and he expects a breakdown in mental function, sterility, damaged heart function and societal collapse.
83
Italy
4 July
60 regions, autonomous provinces and municipalities question 5G, a moratorium is established in Italy and 14 municipalities approve Stop 5G city council resolutions or motions. The Mayor of Marsaglia issues Italy’s first Stop 5G ordinance: It “has been shown in four studies (Rea 1991, Havas 2006, 2010, McCarty et al. 2011) that it is possible to identify people with electromagnetic hypersensitivity and demonstrate that they can be tested using objective, measurable responses, demonstrating that these subjects truly are hypersensitive when compared with normal controls; that other studies show that there are true and proper physiological changes in subjects with electrosensitivity and that two studies (De Luca, Raskovic, Pacifico, Thai, Korkina 2011 and Irigaray, Caccamo, Belpomme 2018) demonstrated that electrosensitive people have high levels of oxidative stress and a prevalence of certain genetic polymorphisms, which may suggest a genetic predisposition; that the European Parliament in its 2009 Resolution and the Assembly of the Council of Europe with Resolution No. 1815 of 2011 called on member states to recognize electrosensitivity as a disability, in order to give equal opportunities to those affected”. The Mayor of San Gregorio Matese bans the installation of 5G antennas on the municipal territory.
California Assembly Bill 272 asks all school districts, county offices of education, and charter schools to come up with smartphone policies to limit or prohibit student use at school.
President Putin emphasizes the environmental risks of new technologies, saying “Hopes that the new technologies themselves will save the planet from the growing anthropogenic influence turned out to be illusions. Nature and climate degradation continues.”
91
EU
14 July
Galileo, the EU global navigation satellite system, is non-operational for at least four days as of 11 July following a mysterious outage. The Galileo satellite system was launched in 2016 and was funded by the EU as an alternative to the US Air Force’s Global Positioning System (GPS) and the Russian global navigation satellite system GLONASS.
French NGO Alert Phonegate launches class action lawsuit against telco Nokia for selling “smart” phones that were shown by the French National Frequency Agency (ANFR) to exceed the European specific absorption rate (SAR) limit. This deception is facilitated by the entry into force of the new European Directive (2014/53/EU), which has relaxed controls by allowing manufacturers to self-certify their products.
The Green party in Lausanne (Vaud) insists on the precautionary principle, saying that 5G antennas are being installed while the consequences of these new technologies are not known. Green representatives call for a moratorium in Vaud and commit to opposing all new antennas until they receive clear and satisfactory answers relating to the impact of 5G.
The Natural Resources Defense Council, joined by various American Indian tribes, as well as the National Association of Tribal Historic Preservation Officers and the National Trust for Historic Preservation, win a victory when the federal appeals court in D.C. ruled that the FCC illegally eliminated historic-preservation and environmental review—and important opportunities for public participation—for 5G wireless infrastructure projects. Emphasizing the importance of such review, the court held that that the FCC’s attempted explanations for the elimination “did not meet the standard of reasoned decision-making.”
Tesla solar panels are catching fire. Amazon and Walmart have both been burned. Walmart is suing. Installations at all 29 Walmart stores showed signs of gross negligence and many were unsafe.
Cellphone Users Sue Apple and Samsung Over Radiation Exposure. Andrus Anderson in San Francisco is representing 16 plaintiffs against Apple and Samsung in a controversy some in the medical and scientific community are allegedly calling “Phone Gate.”
UK Prime Minister Boris Johnson describes the Internet of Things, “smart” cities and AI as a giant, dark thundercloud lowering oppressively over the human race, threatening a cold and heartless future in an Orwellian world designed for censorship, repression and control. He appeals for joint efforts on agreeing a common set of global principles to shape norms and standards to guide the development of emerging technology.
124
Cyprus
26 Sept
The Parliamentary Committees on Health and Environment in Cyprus hold discussions on the negative aspects of 5G. Proposals are put forward to freeze 5G deployment and keep Cyprus radiation-free as a detoxing zone attractive for tourism.
Journal Municipal Lawyer publishes article entitled Putting the Cart Before the Horse – The FCC’s ‘5G First, Safety Second’ Policy, which states that the FCC should have completed the review of its RF standards before opening the floodgates for the deployment of hundreds of thousands of small cell transmitters for 5G. The rules adopted by the FCC in 1996 were designed to protect only against the thermal effects of RF exposure.
The first IoT privacy study examines the data-sharing activities of 81 different “smart” devices commonly found in people’s homes, finding that 72 of the 81 IoT devices shared data with third parties completely unrelated to the original manufacturer (and not just in the U.S. or UK).
Councillor calls for more debate on use of 5G technologies. Cllr Kevin Murphy raised the motion at a meeting of West Cork local authority last week and said the issue of 5G might not be something that will affect people now, but will do so in the future. Fears over claims that 5G mobile technology may be linked to cancer.
Town of Totnes, Devon bans installation of 5G. Totnes mayor Jacqi Hodgson, a Green Party county councillor, said: “Our concern is that there will be a much higher blanket of radiation all around us.”
Kingsbridge Town Council passes 5G resolution in response to requests for them to stand together with councils from Totnes, Glastonbury, and Frome and adopt a moratorium on 5G infrastructure.
5G drone project over Hawaii halted. Research Corporation of the University of Hawaii (RCUH) withdraws its Use Determination Application from the Lana’i Planning Commission.
Multi-billion-dollar liability action launched against 5G telecom companies. The Nationale Bond tegen Overheidszaken (NBO; National Union Against State Affairs) has launched a liability suit with 4,000 claimants to date. A charge is payable of €1,000 per day on which 5G is active, together with a charge of €2,000 when a 5G antenna is located within a radius of 250 metres of a claimant’s home. Each claimant may be legally entitled to an annual fee of up to €730,000 if the 5G network is activated. The action is based on earlier NBO litigation successes against the health insurance companies. The liability action is operating from 27 September to 31 October 2019.
Note to Readers: Please click the share buttons above or below. Forward this article to your email lists. Crosspost on your blog site, internet forums. etc.
French NGOs Demand Stop To ‘Out Of Control’ 5G Network
A group of French NGOs is calling for a moratorium on the rolling out of new super-fast mobile phone cellular network 5G in France, saying it could cause “out of control” consequences for society.
NGOs including Agir Pour l'Environnement and Priartém-Electrosensibles de Francehave come out againstthe new technology, saying that its use will lead to physical and mental health problems, environmental issues, and could even negatively impact social freedom.
It has been suggested that the 5G network, which is set to allow very large amounts of data to be sent and accessed using mobile devices, will be “revolutionary”.
In future, its super-fast abilities mean it could be linked to new technology such as self-driving cars, surgery done remotely, and a wider Internet of Things (in which homes are connected to the Internet, for example, to control automatic lights, heating, smart fridges, smart TVs etc).
In France, 5G was officially announced on July 15 this year, with businesses in large towns and cities set to receive the coverage by the end of 2020, and two-thirds of individuals expected to be covered by 2026.
But in a statement, the NGOs said that introducing the technology could “push the planet and our society into a world with out-of-control consequences”.
It said:
"Digital wireless communication technology has already had impacts that are not virtual: risks for our physical and mental health, hyperconnection with the world of work, and among young people; impact on the soil, landscapes and ecosystems, a growing energy bill, wasting of resources, risks from big data on our freedoms, lobbying weight on science and public politics…”
The statement said that 5G would “irrefutably aggravate these facts”.
"Developing a system that will cause lasting changes to the electromagnetic environment of our planet, to interactions between people and machines, and the wider workings of our society cannot be possible without deep consideration and debate from citizens.”
The possible impact of 5G on certain health conditions has been acknowledged by health authorities including French health and environmental agency (Agence Nationale de Sécurité Sanitaire de l'Alimentation, de l'Environnement et du Travail) Anses.
In 2016, it found that the radio frequencies of technology such as 5G could cause problems - for certain people - with memory, attention, and coordination. At the time, Anses recommended that young people limit their exposure to portable devices, tablets, and internet-connected toys.
In 2018, the agency also recognised that some people were reporting health problems linked to electromagnetic fields and waves, although it did add that this did not prove that there was a real link.
Electrosmog
The effect of electromagnetic radiation on the human body depends on the type of rays and how long a person is exposed to them. The higher the frequency, the shorter the wavelength and the greater the energy levels.
And this year, a group of 170 scientists raised concerns about the possible effects of 5G - and the higher frequencies it requires to work, which may be up to ten times’ higher than those used now - to the European Union.
Yet, there are already international guidelines in place over the use of maximum frequencies and their impact on health, with the limit currently at 300 GHz, which is much higher than those set to be used for 5G.
In France, tests on 5G have already been rolled out in towns and cities including Bordeaux, Grenoble, Lille, Lyon, Marseille, Nantes, and Toulouse
Operators have said they are aiming to offer 75% 5G coverage across the country by 2022, and across 100% by 2030 - although it is likely to make phone contracts more expensive, with tariffs expected to rise by €10-€20 per month for 5G-connected devices.
"The Fraud Was Executed By Many Means": Sidney Powell "Releases Kraken" With Dual Lawsuits In Michigan, Georgia & The Greatest Electoral Heist In American History December 4 2020 | From: Zerohedge / Breitbart / Various
Sidney Powell has finally released the Kraken - filing two lawsuits in Michigan and Georgia recently alleging massive schemes to rig the election for Joe Biden.
In Georgia, Powell claims in a 104-page complaint filed in the US District Court in Atlanta that the purpose of the scheme was "illegally and fraudulently manipulating the vote count to make certain the election of Joe Biden as president of the United States."
"Old-fashioned ballot-stuffing" has been "amplified and rendered virtually invisible by computer software created and run by domestic and foreign actors for that very purpose," the suit continues, adding that "Mathematical and statistical anomalies rising to the level of impossibilities, as shown by affidavits of multiple witnesses, documentation, and expert testimony evince this scheme across the state of Georgia."
"This scheme and artifice to defraud affected tens of thousands of votes in Georgia alone and 'rigged' the election in Georgia for Joe Biden."
According to Just the News, Powell's allegations include that:
At least 96,600 absentee ballots were requested and counted but were never recorded as being returned to county election boards by the voter. "Thus, at a minimum, 96,600 votes must be disregarded," the suit said.
Kemp and Raffensperger "rushed through the purchase of Dominion voting machines and software in 2019 for the 2020 Presidential Election" without due diligence and disregarded safety concerns.
"There is incontrovertible physical evidence that the standards of physical security of the voting machines and the software were breached, and machines were connected to the internet in violation of professional standards and state and federal laws."
Fulton County election workers used a claim of a water leak to evacuate poll watchers and workers for several hours on Election night, even as "several election workers remained unsupervised and unchallenged working at the computers for the voting tabulation machines until after 1:00 AM.
State officials in a settlement with Democratic parties made changes to election procedures that violated both state law and the U.S. Constitution.
The suit asks for over a dozen remedies, including an injunction blocking the state's certified results - in which Biden 'won' by 12,000 votes - from being transmitted to the Electoral College.
Powell's suit also demands an audit where signatures are matched, the impounding of various election machines and video surveillance from vote-counting areas.
In Michigan, Powell filed a 75-page complaintseeking to set aside the results of the election, claiming that "hundreds of thousands of illegal, ineligible, duplicate, or purely fictitious ballots" enabled by "massive election fraud" facilitated Biden's win in the state.
"The scheme and artifice to defraud was for the purpose of illegally and fraudulently manipulating the vote count to manufacture an election of Joe Biden as president of the United States,"the suit alleges, adding that the most"troubling, insidious, and egregious ploy” involved “systemic adaptation of old-fashioned ‘ballot-stuffing.'"
Evidence of Vote Fraud Enough to Flip States
Significant evidence of vote fraud was revealed through data analysis and investigations by Matt Braynard, executive director of Look Ahead America.
The complaint alleged “an especially egregious range of conduct” in Wayne County and the City of Detroit and similar conduct throughout the state, which it attributed to direction from Michigan state election officials. It noted that the “same pattern of election fraud and voter fraud writ large occurred in all the swing states with only minor variations” in Pennsylvania, Arizona, and Wisconsin.
The complaint cited eyewitness and expert testimony to allege that there were enough ballots identified to overturn and reverse the election results.
It also said results of the election cannot be relied on because the entire election process was “riddled with fraud, illegality, and statistical impossibility.”
The suit claimed that election software and hardware from Dominion Voting Systems used by the Michigan Board of State Canvassers helped facilitate the fraud.
“The Dominion systems derive from the software designed by Smartmatic Corporation, which became Sequoia in the United States,” the complaint reads.
"Smartmatic and Dominion were founded by foreign oligarchs and dictators to ensure computerized ballot-stuffing and vote manipulation to whatever level was needed to make certain Venezuelan dictator Hugo Chavez never lost another election,” it added, citing a whistleblower’s affidavit alleging that the Smartmatic software was used to manipulate Venezuelan elections in favor of Chavez.
"A core requirement of the Smartmatic software design ultimately adopted by Dominion for Michigan’s elections was the software’s ability to hide its manipulation of votes from any audit,”the complaint alleged.
The complaint cited a former electronic intelligence analyst under the 305th Military Intelligence Battalion, who declared that the Dominion software was accessed by agents acting on behalf of China and Iran to monitor and manipulate elections, including the 2020 U.S. general election.
Another part of the complaint said that a former U.S. Military Intelligence expert had analyzed the Dominion software system and concluded that the system and software “were certainly compromised by rogue actors, such as Iran and China.”
"By using servers and employees connected with rogue actors and hostile foreign influences combined with numerous easily discoverable leaked credentials, Dominion neglectfully allowed foreign adversaries to access data and intentionally provided access to their infrastructure in order to monitor and manipulate elections, including the most recent one in 2020,” the filing said.
BREAKING: One of the Affiants in the complaint filed by @SidneyPowell1 explained that she observed a batch of utterly pristine ballots: "Most of the ballots had already been handled; they had been written on by people, and the edges were worn. They showed obvious use. However,
The pieces are finally coming together, and they reveal a masterpiece of electoral larceny involving Big Tech oligarchs, activists, and government officials who prioritize partisanship over patriotism.
The 2020 election was stolen because leftists were able to exploit the coronavirus pandemic to weaken, alter, and eliminate laws that were put in place over the course of decades to preserve the integrity of the ballot box.
But just as importantly, it was stolen because those same leftists had a thoroughly-crafted plan, and because they were rigorous in its implementation and ruthless in its execution.
Let’s not forget that liberals have been consumed by a fixation with removing Donald Trump from office for longer than he’s actually been in office.
The sordid story of the 2020 election heist begins all the way back in January 2017, when Barack Obama’s former campaign manager and senior advisor, David Plouffe, took a job leading the policy and advocacy efforts of the Chan Zuckerberg Initiative, a “charitable” organization established by Facebook founder Mark Zuckerberg and his wife, Priscilla Chan.
Earlier this year, just as it was becoming clear that Joe Biden would be the Democratic Party’s nominee for president, Plouffe published a book outlining his vision for the Democrats’ roadmap to victory in 2020, which involved a “block by block” effort to turn out voters in key Democratic strongholds in the swing states that would ultimately decide the election, such as Philadelphia, Milwaukee, Detroit, and Minneapolis.
The book was titled, A Citizen’s Guide to Defeating Donald Trump, and it turned out that the citizen Plouffe had in mind was none other than his former boss, Mark Zuckerberg. Although Plouffe no longer officially managed Zuckerberg’s policy and advocacy efforts at that point, the political operative’s influence evidently remained a powerful force.
Thanks to the extensive efforts of investigators and attorneys for the Amistad Project of the nonpartisan Thomas More Society, who have been following Zuckerberg’s money for the past 18 months, it is still possible to expose the inner workings of this heist in time to stop it.
Perhaps even more importantly, these unsung heroes of American democracy are dedicated to making sure that such a travesty will not become a permanent feature of our elections.
Under the pretext of assisting election officials conduct “safe and secure” elections in the age of COVID, Zuckerberg donated $400 million - as much money as Congress appropriated for the same general purpose - to nonprofit organizations founded and run by left-wing activists.
The primary recipient was the Center for Tech and Civic Life (CTCL), which received the staggering sum of $350 million. Prior to Zuckerberg’s donations, CTCL’s annual operating expenses averaged less than $1 million per year.
How was Zuckerberg even aware of such a small-potatoes operation, and why did he entrust it with ⅞ of the money he was pouring into this election cycle, despite the fact that it had no prior experience handling such a massive amount of money?
Lt. General Michael Flynn's First Interview Since President Trump's Pardon
Lt. General Michael Flynn's First Interview Since President Trump's Pardon Includes His Talking About the Ongoing Coup w/ Guest Lt. General McInerney and Mary Fanning.
Predictably, given the partisan background of its leading officers, CTCL proceeded to distribute Zuckerberg’s funds to left-leaning counties in battleground states.
The vast majority of the money handed out by CTCL - especially in the early days of its largesse - went to counties that voted overwhelmingly for Hillary Clinton in 2016.
Some of the biggest recipients, in fact, were the very locales Plouffe had identified as the linchpins of the Democrat strategy in 2020.
Zuckerberg and CTCL left nothing to chance, however, writing detailed conditions into their grants that dictated exactly how elections were to be conducted, down to the number of ballot drop boxes and polling places.
The Constitution gives state lawmakers sole authority for managing elections, but these grants put private interests firmly in control.
Amistad Project lawyers tried to prevent this unlawful collusion by filing a flurry of lawsuits in eight states prior to Election Day.
Unfortunately, judges were forced to put those lawsuits aside without consideration of their merits because the plaintiffs had not yet suffered “concrete harm” in the form of fraudulent election results. The law had no remedy to offer because the left’s lawless schemes had not yet reached fruition.
In the meantime, CTCL continued splashing Zuckerberg’s cash - only now, the organization was intent on finding Republican-leaning jurisdictions to give its donations a veneer of bipartisanship.
Of course, the number of votes in play in those counties paled in comparison to those in the liberal counties.
Philadelphia County alone, for instance, projected that the $10 million grant it received from CTCL would enable it to increase turnout by 25-30 percent - translating to well over 200,000 votes.
The left didn’t put all of its eggs into the CTCL basket, though. High-ranking state officials simultaneously took significant steps to weaken ballot security protocols, acting on their own authority without permission or concurrence from the state legislatures that enshrined those protections in the law.
In Wisconsin, Democrat Secretary of State Doug La Follette allowed voters to claim “indefinite confinement” in order to avoid having to provide a photocopy of their ID when requesting an absentee ballot.
The exemption was intended for legitimate invalids, but COVID offered a convenient excuse for circumventing the law, despite the fact that Wisconsin had no pandemic-related lockdown rules that would have rendered anyone “indefinitely confined.”
The impact was far-reaching. About 240,000 voters claimed the exemption in 2020, compared to just 70,000 in 2016.
In Michigan, Democrat Secretary of State Jocelyn Benson unilaterally voided the legal requirement that voters provide a signature when requesting an absentee ballot, establishing an online request form.
She then took things a step further by announcing that she would “allow civic groups and other organizations running voter registration drives to register voters through the state’s online registration website,” granting partisan groups such as Rock The Vote direct access to Michigan’s voter rolls.
In Pennsylvania, election officials in heavily-Democratic counties that received CTCL funding allowed flawed mail-in ballots to be “cured” - that is, altered or replaced - prior to Election Day.
In other counties, officials rightly interpreted this as a flagrant violation of state law. On the night before Election Day, less than 24 hours before polls were due to close, Democrat Secretary of State Kathy Boockvar sought to imbue this illegal practice with the appearance of validity by issuing a statement authorizing counties to contact voters who had cast improper ballots.
Even if Boockvar had the statutory authority to do this, which she did not, the timing of her memo made it impossible for rural counties to take advantage of it to nearly the same extent as urban counties.
In numerous states, officials also absurdly consolidated the vote-counting and ballot-curing process in sporting arenas and other large venues, rather than the ward- and precinct-level offices that normally handle the job.
This made absolutely no sense as a pandemic-related safety measure, but that didn’t stop the officials from citing COVID as their rationale.
Consolidating the vote-counting tied the other efforts together. Instead of a manageable number of ballots being transported to small offices and counted in the immediate presence of observers from both parties, truckloads of ballots were brought to a single location, inevitably resulting in confusion and commingling of ballots from various sources.
Securing those ballots from the time they left voters’ hands to the time they were officially counted should have been the top priority of election workers, but it’s not even clear whether there were logs kept identifying which ballots were delivered by which trucks and when. If such logs even exist, they have not been disclosed.
At the same time, election officials could claim that they were adhering to legal requirements that observers be “in the room” during the counting process while using COVID as an excuse for relegating those observers to the “penalty box,” far from the actual counting and curing.
This was particularly egregious when it came to ballot “curing,” a process that actually involves election workers filling out brand new ballots on behalf of voters whose ballots purportedly could not be read by machine.
This could have been due to something the voter themselves did, such as spilling coffee on the ballot. It also could have been due to something that election workers themselves did, such as crumpling ballots to prevent the machines from receiving them, just as a vending machine rejects crumpled bills.
It’s impossible to know exactly what happened, because Republican observers were denied meaningful access to the process - and in some cases literally locked out of the counting rooms while election workers obscured the windows with cardboard.
These election workers, it should be noted, were paid directly by CTCL’s grants.
These supposedly impartial arbiters of our electoral process are supposed to work for the people, but they were on Zuckerberg’s payroll.
All of this sounds like the stuff of fiction - the sort of thing one would expect from a cinematic thriller or a spy novel.
Sadly, it’s the reality that our country is faced with after years of placidity in the face of increasingly aggressive intervention into our electoral process on the part of Big Tech oligarchs and activists with deep pockets and shallow motivations.
Columbus, Ohio, actually won $50 million in DOT grant money to turn their city into a "Smart City" calling it "SmartColumbus." The city of Columbus will receive an additional $90 million in pledges from public and private sector partners.
"Smart PGH's" tag line at the end of the above video is chilling, "If It's Not For All, It's Not For Us". As "Smart PGH's" documents reveal, 'smart city' surveillance spies on All of Us.
The City of Pittsburgh sees the confluence of transportation and energy as the key to U.S. Department of Transportation’s (USDOT) Smart City Challenge. To meet the challenge, we will develop an open platform and corresponding governance structure to improve the safety, equity, and efficiency of our transportation network and its interaction with the energy and communications networks.
By building on existing technology deployments and increasing fixed and mobile sensors over a number of major “Smart Spine” corridors that connect with primary commercial centers and amenities, Pittsburgh will collect, analyze, visualize, and act on information to improve mobility for residents.
The non-proprietary nature of our platform allows the City of Pittsburgh and its partners to set an open, national standard for a municipal service delivery platform, which enhances industry and supports innovation.
According to the SCC, 'smart spines' use advanced technology like real-time adaptive traffic signals and vehicle-to-vehicle (V2V) communication at intersections.
"Smart PGH" is working with Uber to spy on customers. (see page 4)
It appears that "smart cities" are part of the government's "Vision Zero" program, see page 6 of SCC's 'Enabling Hierarchy' diagram. Also on page 6, under the subject 'Data Collection Network' they mention, "Social Media Assets" otherwise known as social media spying. (more on that below)
In addition, we [Smart PGH] would like to work with Pittsburgh Bike Share, Uber, Lyft, and others to move towards more robust V2V communications that allow Port Authority buses, City fleet, bike share bicycles, ride-sharing services, etc. to become safer by sensing one another on Pittsburgh’s streets. Bicycle tracking has already begun, Ford Motor Company has given Palo Alto, $1.1 million to equip bicycles with GPS devices.
Joshuah Mello, the city’s chief transportation official, said the main draw of the new smart-bike system, operated by Motivate and sponsored by Ford, is that it will be part of a network growing in Bay Area cities from San Jose to San Francisco, “making it one of the largest systems in the entire world.”
What he should say is, this makes it one of the largest bicycle surveillance systems in the entire world! What follows, are some of the most chilling intrusions of government spying to date. Govt spying on social media.
To address Vision Element #9, SmartPGH will deploy our “Citizens as Sensors” effort aimed at extracting relevant data from social media. Scrubbing these sites and app will provide information on what people are doing in different places across Pittsburgh, data that can be used to infer behavior and data that can detect changes in behavior due to physical modifications made by SmartPGH and the City of Pittsburgh.
Pittsburgh can more easily detect if the modifications it is making are producing the desired changes or if they are leading to unanticipated outcomes or unhappy residents.
For example, changes to the number of check-ins citizens make to restaurants and retail establishments following the parking rate change can provide evidence of how much this change has impacted dining and shopping behaviors, providing valuable feedback not just on residents emotional reactions but also the wider economic impact of such decisions.
"At a different level many users volunteer information to Web 2.0 sites as a convenient way of making it available to friends and relations, irrespective of the fact that it becomes available to all."
Govt to spy on staircases, sidewalks, bicycles, trails, buses and trains.
Moreover, residents utilize the city's unique system of 712 public staircases, 40 miles of on-street bike infrastructure, 31 miles of trails, and numerous sidewalksand on a daily basis.
Companies like Sidewalk Labs, make a profit out of spying on pedestrians.
The Port Authority of Allegheny County operates a comprehensive transit network in the city, which includes 18.4 miles of busway, 26.2 miles of light rail, 72 local bus routes and two funiculars.
Power companies and the govt collaborate to spy on everyone.
The City of Pittsburgh is in conversation with Duquesne Light and partner-company DQE Communications regarding the use of their extensive network of dark fiber. Most of the network capacity is currently “dark” and available for use by partners including the City of Pittsburgh.
To make the most of their network, Duquesne Light recently built a wireless communication infrastructure to support the increased data-flow between their electric meters and the company’s centralized operating center.
This effort has evolved into a high-capacity, resilient, wireless network covering the entirety of the City of Pittsburgh and the surrounding 817-square-mile service territory.
The grid of microgirds will spy on everyone's health, electrical and gas usage.
The grid-of-microgrids is designed to connect critical infrastructure like hospitals, universities, and data and telecommunications centers. Other partners in the effort include the UPMC health system, NRG energy, Duquesne Light and People’s natural gas.
Govt spying on Pittsburgh residents is frightening.
PennDOT’s Western Regional Traffic Management Center includes a fully integrated Centralized Software System, a Media Partner room that broadcasts live on-air reports of traffic conditions, and, a state of the art video wall capable of displaying 160 video images.
The center monitors and/or controls ITS devices on 12 freeway corridors, including many within Pittsburgh's limits.
These devices include: 293 CCTV cameras, 37 Highway Advisory Radio transmitter locations, 86 Highway Advisory Radio signs with beacons, 200 Microwave Traffic Detectors, 24 Dedicated Short Range Communication (DSRC) radios, 93 Digital Wave Radar Vehicular Detector units and many more specific ITS-related items.
List of govt agencies spying on residents:
Allegheny County
Penn DOT and the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania
Southwestern Pennsylvania Commission
Port Authority of Allegheny County
Pittsburgh Parking Authority
Port of Pittsburgh Commission
Pittsburgh Bike Share
Utilities including energy distribution, water, and natural gas
University Partners, particularly University of Pittsburgh and Carnegie Mellon University
Major freight operators in Pittsburgh
Representatives of the Business and Philanthropic Communities
Citizens and Community Stakeholders Industry partners
The model for the WPRDC is unique because it is designed to be extensible and inclusive, able to host datasets from any municipality, non-profit, or researcher with data to share. By bringing together various levels of government, civil society, and academia around information resources, we have begun to improve our region’s capacity for innovation and evidence-driven policy-making.
The WPRDC’s web resources provide machine-readable data downloads and APIs of key administrative data on topics such as property assessment, building inspection, public health, crime, and asset management.
Click on the image above to open a larger version in a new window
Seven companies work with Surtrac to spy on everyone.
Surtracs' Econolite specializes in spying on motor vehicles. They also invented 'autoscope' surveillance cameras in the early 1990's. Fyi, Surtrac's Autoscope Vision (AV) also spies on bicyclists.
AV delivers stop bar vehicle and bicycle detection, advanced vehicle detection, bicycle differentiation, traffic data collection, and HD video surveillance.
Surtrac boasts, about they're newly-developed, full-field-of-view object-feature tracking. In other words, the government can track an individual vehicle or bicyclist throughout an entire city!
There are plans to integrate Surtrac with the Port Authority of Allegheny County bus fleets’ using 'Clever Devices'. (more on that below)
2.Citilog, is a mirror image of Econolite but specializes in spying road sensors that are imbedded in every road, highway tunnel and bridge.
4.Wavetronix, can track an individual vehicles speed, even if they change lanes. Wavertronix also knows the type of vehicle you're driving, watch the video below to find out more.
The Corruption Of Evidence Based Medicine - Killing For Profit December 2 2020 | From: Medium
The idea of Evidence Based Medicine (EBM) is great. The reality, though, not so much.
Human perception is often flawed, so the premise of EBM is to formally study medical treatments and there have certainly been some successes.
Consider the procedure of angioplasty. Doctors insert a catheter into the blood vessels of the heart and use a balloon like device to open up the artery and restore blood flow.
In acute heart attacks studies confirm that this is an effective procedure. In chronic heart disease the COURAGE study and more recently the ORBITA study showed that angioplasty is largely useless. EBM helped distinguish the best use of an invasive procedure.
“It is simply no longer possible to believe much of the clinical research that is published, or to rely on the judgment of trusted physicians or authoritative medical guidelines. I take no pleasure in this conclusion, which I reached slowly and reluctantly over my two decades as an editor”
This has huge implications. Evidence based medicine is completely worthless if the evidence base is false or corrupted. It’s like building a wooden house knowing the wood is termite infested.
“The medical profession is being bought by the pharmaceutical industry, not only in terms of the practice of medicine, but also in terms of teaching and research. The academic institutions of this country are allowing themselves to be the paid agents of the pharmaceutical industry. I think it’s disgraceful”
The people in charge of the system - the editors of the most important medical journals in the world, gradually learn over a few decades that their life’s work is being slowly and steadily corrupted.
Physicians and universities have allowed themselves to be bribed.
Trials run by industry are 70% more likely than government funded trials to show a positive result.
Think about that for a second. If EBM says that 2+2 = 5 is correct 70% of the time, would you trust this sort of ‘science’?
Selective Publication - Negative trials (those that show no benefit for the drugs) are likely to be suppressed. For example, in the case of antidepressants, 36/37 studies that were favourable to drugs were published. But of the studies not favorable to drugs, a paltry 3/36 were published.
Selective publication of positive (for the drug company) results means that a review of the literature would suggest that 94% of studies favor drugs where in truth, only 51% were actually positive.
Suppose you know that your stockbroker publishes all his winning trades, but suppresses all his losing trades. Would you trust him with your money? But yet, we trust EBM with our lives, even though the same thing is happening.
Let’s look at the following graph of the number of trials completed versus those that were published. In 2008, the company Sanofi completed 92 studies but only a piddly 14 were published. Who gets to decide which gets published and which does not? Right. Sanofi.
Which ones do you think will be published? The ones that favor its drugs, or the ones that prove their drugs do not work? Right. Keep in mind that this is the only rational course of action for Sanofi, or any other company to pursue. It’s idiotic to publish data that harms yourself.
It’s financial suicide. So this sort of rational behavior will happen now, and it will not stop in the future. But knowing this, why do we still believe the evidence based medicine, when the evidence base is completely biased?
An outside observer, only looking at all published data, will conclude that the drugs are far, far more effective than they are in reality.
Yet, if you point this out in academic circles, people label you a quack, who does not ‘believe the evidence’.
Rigging of Outcomes - Or consider the example of registration of primary outcomes. Prior to year 2000, companies doing trials did not need to declare what end points they measured.
So they measure many different endpoints and simply figured out which one looked best and then declared the trial a success.
Kind of like tossing a coin, looking at which one come up more, and saying that they were backing the winning side. If you measured enough outcomes, something was bound to come up positive.
In 2000, the government moved to stop these shenanigans. They required companies to register what they were measuring ahead of time. Prior to 2000, 57% of trials showed a positive result. After 2000, a paltry 8% showed good results.
More evidence of the evidence base being completely corrupted by commercial interest, and the academic physicians who were getting rich on it tacitly allowing corruption because they know that you don’t bite the hand that feeds you.
‘Advertorials’ - Or this example of a review paper in the NEJM that fracture rates caused by the lucrative bisphosphonate drugs were “very rare”. Not only did the drug companies pay lots of consulting fees to the doctors, three of the authors of this review were full time employees!
To allow an advertorial to be published as the best scientific fact is scandalous. Doctors, trusting the NEJM to publish quality, unbiased advice have no idea that this review article is pure advertising. Yet, we still consider the NEJM to be the very pinnacle of evidence based medicine. Instead, as all the editors of the journals sadly recognize, it has become lucre-based publishing. More money = better results.
Money from Reprints - The reasons for this problem is obvious to all — it’s insanely profitable for journals to take money from Big Pharma. Journals want to be read. So they all try to get a high Impact Factor (IF). To do this, you need to get cited by other authors.
And nothing boosts ratings like a blockbuster produced by Big Pharma. They have the contacts and the sales force to make any study a landmark.
A less obvious benefit is the fees that are generated by Big Pharma purchasing articles for reprint. If a company publishes an article in the NEJM, they may order several hundred thousand copies of the article to be distributed to unsuspecting doctors everywhere.
These fees are not trivial. The NEJM publisher Massachusetts Medical Society gets 23% of its income from reprints. The Lancet - 41%. The American Medical Association - a gut busting 53%. No wonder these journals are ready to sell their readers (ordinary physicians) down the river. It pays.
Who needs journalistic ethics when there’s a Mercedes in the driveway? Mo money, baby. Mo money.
Bribery of Journal Editors - A recent study by Liu et al in the BMJ shed more light on the problem of crooked journals. Crooked journal editors. Editors play a crucial role in determining the scientific dialogue by deciding which manuscripts are published.
They determine who the peer reviewers are. Using the Open Payments database, they looked at how much money the editors of the most influential journals in the world were taking from industry sources. This includes ‘research’ payments, which are largely unregulated.
As mention previously, much ‘research’ consists of going to meetings in exotic locale. It funny how many conferences are held in beautiful European cities like Barcelona, and how few are done in brutally cold Quebec City.
Of all journal editors that could be assessed, 50.6% were on the take. The average payment in 2014 was $27,564. Each. This does not include an average $37, 330 given for ‘research’ payments.
Other particularly corrupt journals include:
This is slightly horrifying. Each editor of the Journal of the American College of Cardiology received, on average $475 072 personally and another $119 407 for ‘research’. With 35 editors, that’s about $15 million in bribes to doctors. No wonder the JACC loves drugs and devices.
It pays the private school bills. Mo money = we’ll publish your crooked studies for you. Mo money, baby, mo money.
Publication Bias - The evidence base that EBM depends upon is completely biased. Some people think I’m really anti-Pharma, but this is not really true. Big Pharma companies have a duty to their shareholders to make money. They have no duty to patients. On the other hand, doctors have a duty to patients. Universities have a duty to remain unbiased.
It is the failure of doctors and universities to keep their greedy paws out of the corrupting influence of Big Pharma money that is the problem. If Big Pharma is allowed to spend lots of $$$ paying off doctors and universities and professors, then it should do so to maximize profits.
That is their mission statement. Doctors love to blame Big Pharma companies because it takes peoples gaze off the real problem - lots of doctors taking $$$ from anybody who will pay. The pharma industry is not the problem.
Bribery of university doctors is the problem - one that is easily fixed if the political will exists.
Consider this study. Looking at studies in the field of neurodegenerative disease, researchers looked at all the studies that were started but never finished or never published.
Approximately 28% of studies never made it to the finish line. That’s a problem.
If all the studies that don’t look promising for drug candidates are not published, then it appears that the drugs are way way more effective than they really are. But the published ‘evidence base’ would falsely support the drug. Indeed, Pharma sponsored trials were 5 times more likely to be unpublished.
Imagine you have a coin flipping contest. Suppose a player call ‘Big Pharma” chooses heads, and also pays the coin flipper. Every time the coin flipper pulls up tails, the results don’t count. Every time it comes up heads, it counts. This happens 28% of the time.
Now, instead of a 50/50 split of heads and tails, it’s more like a 66/34 split of heads/tails. So the ‘evidence based medicine’ lover claims that heads is far more likely to come up than tails, and castigates people who don’t believe the results as ‘anti-science’.
Evidence based medicine depends entirely upon having a reliable base of evidence (studies). If the evidence base is tampered with, and paid for, then EBM as a science is completely useless.
Indeed, the very editors whose entire careers have been EBM have now discovered it to be worthless.
Does the CEO of Phillip Morris (maker of Marlboro cigarettes) smoke? That tells you all you need to know about the health risks.
Do the editors of the NEJM and the Lancet believe EBM anymore? Not at all. So neither should we. We can’t believe evidence based medicine until the evidence has been cleaned up from the corrupting influence of commercial interests.
Financial conflicts of interest (COI), also known as gifts to doctors, is a well accepted practice. A national survey in the New England Journal of Medicine in 2007 shows that 94% of physicians had ties to the pharmaceutical industry. This gravy train only rides in one direction.
Many medical schools have limited exposure of medical students in response, but declined to get off the gravy train themselves. There is a simple relationship between how prominent a physician is (more articles published - almost always academic doctors and professors) and how much money they take from Big Pharma.
What, you thought people teach at prestigious institutions like universities for the good of mankind? Maybe that’s why they went there, but that’s not why they stay. They came for the science.
They stayed for the money.
So here’s a damning list of all the problems of EBM:
1.
Selective Publication
2.
Rigged outcomes
3.
Advertorials
4.
Reprint Revenues
5.
Bribery of Journal Editors
6.
Publication Bias
7.
Financial Conflicts of Interests
When the evidence base of medicine is bought and paid for, people die.
That is how doctors have created this opioid crisis that kills thousands of people. Pharmaceutical companies want to pay off doctors, just as drug lord want to pay off judges and police officers.
Doctors, being human, should put safeguards against this temptation. Unfortunately, doctors and universities have been willing participants in this game of killing for profit. We need to end it now. End the corruption of the universities. Stop the bribery of doctors.
The Secret And Hidden Agenda Of Language: Why Many Words Are Magic Spells December 1 2020 | From: Omnithought
Aoccdrnig to rscheearch at Cmabrigde Uinervtisy, it deosn’t mttaer in waht oredr the ltteers in a wrod are, the olny iprmoetnt tihng is taht the frist and lsat ltteer be at the rghit pclae.
The rset can be a toatl mses and you can sitll raed it wouthit a porbelm. Tihs is bcuseae the huamn mnid deos not raed ervey lteter by istlef, but the wrod as a wlohe.
Spelling: We Spell Words to Pronounce a [Prison] Sentence or Term
The first thing you learn when you go to school is how to spell. Words are spelled to create a sentence of terms. Think of a jail sentence or a prison term.
The Wyrd sisters in Greek mythology were Fates or witches who controlled the fates of man. In our language we use curse words and cursive writing. We cuss and dis-cuss. Words have meaning and (are) mean things especially cross words.
They can be used to make a point. We use a “con” verse to converse in order to keep us off course in our dis-course as a phrase frays. We use catch words. A story is a spiel or a spell. It is all part of the gospel of the Godspell or God’s spell.
Cursive (W)Riting
Books contain chapters. What is a chapter? A chapter is a secret society or religious order, like the Knights Templar.
A chapter contains many pages. What is a page? A page is an understudy and in service to the queen and king, as in pages and squires, a knight who is well versed in magic and is more or less a soldier or trained assassin.
To page someone is to summons them. Pages summon demons to enslave or imprison our souls. After all, a page does contain many sentences. A jail sentence is served in a prison ward.
And indeed a sentence is created by words that are spelled out by using letters. A letter is someone who allows something to happen or someone who does something for some one else, like a bloodletter.
Languid Language
We languish in our languid language. Languid means “weak and lacking spirit or void of animation, lifeless” and languish which means “to lose strength or animation; be or become dull, feeble or spiritless; lackadaisical, listless”.
How are we imprisoned by our language? Think about a book. The word book as a verb means to arrest or detain - “book ’em, Danno”.
In fact, the Latin word for book is “liber”, which is where we get our word “library” and also the word “liberty”. You can book a reservation which means you’re paying for the ownership of something in advance. You can book or place a bet on a game or race with your bookie.
Yes, there is a bet being placed on a race - and it is the human race and the game is the game of life. It is the main bet or the alpha bet. In a group of monkeys, the alpha monkey is the primary monkey or the one in control.
There’s a song called Spirits in the Material World from an album named Ghost in the Machine. The lyrics proclaim, “Our so-called leaders speak. With words they try to jail ya.
They subjugate the meek. Where do the answers lie when we live from day to day? We are spirits in a material world.” The song was performed by a group appropriately named, The Police. The song - and an entire album by Sting, the lead singer, entitled The Soul Cages - refers to how we are spirits imprisoned in an earthly body.
Aoccdrnig to rscheearch at Cmabrigde Uinervtisy, it deosn’t mttaer in waht oredr the ltteers in a wrod are, the olny iprmoetnt tihng is taht the frist and lsat ltteer be at the rghit pclae. The rset can be a toatl mses and you can sitll raed it wouthit a porbelm. Tihs is bcuseae the huamn mnid deos not raed ervey lteter by istlef, but the wrod as a wlohe.
Words Mean Things
Most words have multiple meanings and synonyms not to mention many anagrams which the subconscious mind can recognize. Factor in its homophones such as “there”, “they’re”, and “their” and it can get quite confusing to keep track.
What effect does that have when words with almost opposite meanings are homophones.
Think about “know” and “no”. Knowledge is considered a very positive word yet it is linked phonetically with the most negative word in our language. So when you say “I know this to be true” are you partiallly negating its reality?
Consider the above statement in which the letters of the words have been rearranged, yet you still should be able to read it without problem.
This means your subconscious mind should also relate multiple meanings to words have many anagrams. So it shouldn’t be any problem to associate God as good, the devil as evil. Now consider the following word relationships: live, evil; god, dog; love, evol.
Pronouncing the words has a pronounced effect. The science of cymatics shows how all spoken sounds take on a vibratory geometry or shape like how you can blow smoke rings by forming your mouth into the shape of the ‘O’. The tibetan monks show how sound can be used to form geometric patterns in a plate of sand particles. So the spoken word can indeed create reality.
Also consider the mind’s ability to combine words and sounds. When someone sneezes you feel customarily obligated to say “Bless you”. But if you sound out the syllables does your subconscious mind also make the connection to the phrase “Be less, you”.
So the very act of blessing someone can also be subconsciously telling them to be less. This is spell casting.
How are we being programmed through our language to go to the sun or hell? Hello?!!!! Helios was the Greek name for the sun. The sun in English as well as other languages such as Latin, is called Sol. We are all said to be souls or to have a soul (Sol). We have a solar plexus and our feet have soles.
Sole is sun in Italian. You are called a person (pertaining to the sun). When a male child is born, he is called a son (sun). The word for sun is sonne in German.
Hu was one of the twelve gods in the Egyptian stellar cult which could explain why we are human. Colors and hues originate from the light of the sun. Politicians encourage soldiers or soldiers to go to war for God and country. Of course, when they die they will go to another dimension (die men sun).
Have you ever wondered why we use the word hello to greet each other? After all, the word can be reduced to hell, the fiery place of eternal punishment and the suffix -o which means “associated with”.
In Greek mythology, Helios, which means “sun”, was the God of the Sun. Is it just a coincidence that you have a soul and that our sun is called Sol?
If so, why do we call those who die in battle soldiers or sol diers? Is that why we say “good morning” when the sun rises - because it is good to see the sun because it gives us life, but we are mourning those who sacrificed their souls to make it possible. Why do we call our male offspring sons? You are called a person. Is it because you pertain to the sun?
Words are defined in a dictionary - dick-shun-nary. Two of the three syllables are negative sounds and theother is a derogative slang term. Synonyms and antonyms are listed in a thesaurus.
‘The’, from the greek ‘theos’, is the root of the-ology, the study of ‘god’ and ‘saurus’ means ‘lizard’. A thesaurus literally means ‘lizard god’. How many names for government entities start with a negative prefix. The word nation is nay-shun. The UN, Un-ited nations, NATO, NASI party, NASA, Norad, Unesco, NASCAR, NATAS, and I’m sure you can come up with others.
How to Ruin a Language with Rune Magic
Do some of the letters or building blocks of our language contain within them a blueprint for the control and possession of our spirits? English has Germanic origins and it is likely that the english letters have their roots in the Germanic runes which were used for magic and casting spells.
From Wikipedia on rune magic: “In 1990, Stephan Grundy, a.k.a. Kveldulf Gundarsson, described runic magic as the active principle as opposed to passive interpretations based on runic divination.
He held that runic magic is more active than the allegedly shamanic practice of seid practiced by the Seiðkona. Runic magic, he states, uses the runes to affect the world outside based on the archetypes they represent.
Most of Gundarsson’s runic magic entails being in possession of a physical entity that is engraved with any or all of the individual runes or “staves”, so as to practically work with their energies.
The individual runes are reddened with either blood, dyes, or paints. The act of possessing the stave in its final form serves the purpose of affecting the world of form with “the rune might” of that particular stave. After use, the staves are discarded or destroyed.
Gundarsson holds that each rune has a certain sound to it, to be chanted or sung; the sound has in common the phonetic value by which it is represented. This act of singing or chanting is supposed to have more or less the same effect of using the staves in their physical form.
Many of the letters of the English alphabet come directly from the Germanic Runes which were used for magic and spell casting and for causing ‘ruin’. Look at how many English letters you can identify from the Elder Futhark rune set.
Grammar or Grimoire? Goetia & Cymantics
The word “grammar” comes from grammars which were old Latin books on syntax and diction. The ancient magic books of Europe which contained instructions to summon demons were known as the Grimoires, French word for “grammar”.
A “grimoire” or spellbook is a derivative of the french word “grammaire”. The pronunciation and sound of words affects the matter around us. The science of cymatics is the study of sound vibration on matter and it has been demonstrated with sand on plates that vibration caan cause geometric patterns.
The ancient Goetia spellbooks were used for conjuring up demons and each demon had its own sigil and name.
“IT” & The Creature from the Subconscious “ID”
Stephen King captured the hearts of America with the release of his blockbuster smash hit book, “It”. The video features the menacing face of a clown while the book reveals the clown’s head as a skull with stars in the eye sockets.
The video jacket reads:
“Your every fear – all in the deadly enemy. It can be anything, a fanged monster that won’t stay on the movie screen, something ominous lurking in the basement or around the next corner. No matter what your biggest fear is, no one knows IT better than Stephen King…
The force takes the shape of a clown, but it isn’t clowning around. Instead, it terrorizes youngsters with their innermost fears, bringing them to untimely doom – until a group of wily neighborhood kids fight back. Thirty years later it resurfaces: meaner, angrier. And the friends who vividly remember the terrors of their youth reunite to make a desperate final stand against it.”
In an interview, King admits he was possessed during the writing of the book.
Let “It”Be & Make “It”So
Sigmund Freud, the father of psychology, invented a model of the psyche which contained three parts to the self: the ego (conscious mind), the superego (superconscious mind) and what he termed the “id” or the subconscious mind. This was the realm of our fears: scary monsters and demons.
This id was considered a sort of third person subsistent to the conscious and superconscious mind. Of course, we use the word “it” as a sort of third “person” as well in our use of speech. And, of course, subconsciously we have been programmed to accept the abbreviated “ID” as our identity.
We unknowingly give power to this creature and help create “it” every day with our thought and speech. We watch the horor movie “It” by Stephen King and associate all our deep dark subconscious fears with “IT”.
Likewise with the word “thing” (‘everything’. ‘anything’, and ‘nothing’ or no thing) and the use of ambiguous words such as ‘they’ (THEY live), ‘them’ (“If you can’t beat ’em join them”).
We chant the chorus to the song Let It Be over and over again. And it’s no coincidence that IT is the acronym that has been curently assigned to the Information Technology field, or computers, for IT very well may be an artificial intelligence or computer.
For a detailed analysis and many more examples of “IT” please reference my page on this phenomenon.
We really need to learn to speak with a more conscious language in mind, ever aware of how we think our thoughts in our minds and how we word our sentences!!
“S”- Lang
Consider the English letter ‘S‘. First of all, it looks like a snake or serpent - one that has risen up and is ready to strike or if viewed from overhead it looks like one that is perhaps crawling along. In two-dimensional space, it looks like a sideways wave and in 3-D space it looks like a spiral, both paths that energy follows.
The letter ‘s’ is used in English to denote “possession”, which is Satan’s specialty, by placing it at the end of a word with an apostrophe. Plurality or the concept of multiplication or creation, is achieved by appending an ‘s’ or ‘es’ to a word.
These two facts, coupled with the sheer number of words in our language means the ‘S’ sound is one of the most, if not single most, frequently uttered sounds in our speech.
Although the vowels are used frequently, they have more than one sound associated with them, a long and short sound.
There are probably more esses used in our speech than any other sound. Virtually every sentence we speak contains one or more of these hissing sounds. It would not be accurate to say we sound like hissing snakes when we speak, but our incessant hissing probably reminds us of it at some level subconsciously.
Not only does the letter ‘S’ physically represent the snake or serpent, phonetically it even sounds like a snake!! It sounds exactly like the hissing sound a snake makes – sssssssss – when it “shakes” its tail. The word hiss even ends in a double-s.
And, of course, the words snake and serpent are both s-words as well as Satan, who the Bible says took the form of a snake. He was said to have told mankind a secret - that man would not die if he ate of the fruit.
Of course, when you want to tell someone a secret you say, “pssssssst, come here…” or if you want to keep a secret you say “Shhhhhhhhhhhhh!!“. The dollar sign, $, is the standard symbol for English currency.
Money is said to be the root of all evil. Not only does the ‘S’ look like a snake (Satan), and sound like a snake, which is known for shedding its skin, but nearly all words that begin with the letter ‘s’ have a negative connotation associated with them. That is why they can be considered s-words, or swords, because they can kill and injure like a sword.
These s-words are a seal or stamp associated with Satan, Satan’s Slang or s-lang. The word lang is defined in the dictionary as an abbreviation for the word “language”.
Satan, the snake or serpent also known as Set, slithers about striving to snatch, steal, or strip us of our souls or spirits and is obsessed with possessing or seizing them.
He, or she, is subtle, sly, sneaky, slick, slippery, scaly, secretive, scary, spins, spirals or screws into your soul and possesses you and seizes your spirit.
Speech is his peach and when we speak, Satan is at his peak as far as deception is concerned. The words “possesses”, “obsesses”, “seizes” contain a multiple s-sound and are words pertaining to control.
The word ess, which is defined as the pronunciation for the letter ‘s’, becomes the word esse when a silent ‘e’ is added. The word esse means “to be” which is where we get the word essence and the word essay which is sort of a written speech and comes from the Old French esai which means “to put to a test” which is what Satan did to Jesus in the wilder-ness.
The suffix “-ness” also means a state of being, like loneliness or business. It’s interesting that the Loch Ness in Scotland is said to contain a serpent creature named “Nessie” which nests there.
Yes, Satan certainly is a “Busy Ness” when it comes to the business world and show business. And he specializes in monkey business. One should keep this in mind before wishing for good-ness.
Shit! I, mean, Sheesh! It is not easy to think of positive s-words and double “ss” words are even worse. The swastika resembles two esses and the word ‘swastika’ has two of them in number.
The Nazis had the “SS” and the ‘ss’ logo which looked like lightening bolts.
The far reaching extent in which the spell our language has cast on us can be seen in the every day usage of cliche. Our languages are saturated with what we like to call killer words and phrases because that’s what they do. Englishmen use the word bloody all the time… bloody well right, they do!!! Some women are considered drop deadgorgeous… and when they are dressed to kill, they are to die for. She was a dead ringer for Marilyn Monroe.
If looks could kill they would because she will take your breath away.
Wouldn’t you just kill for a date with her? Sometimes she really gets under my skin and burns me up, but if anyone tries to hurt her, they would have to go“over my dead body because I will punch their lights out if they get near her. I’m serious as a heart attack. I’m dead serious.
She can be as mean as a snake at times, but she really knew how to kill ‘em with kindness. I was dead set for her. I could have just died right there. I mean, I felt like I had just died and gone to heaven.
Eat your heart out. She was a live wire, but at least I would go out in a blaze of glory.
I don’t want to beat a dead horse, but she really took me for a ride. Of course, I wore my heart on my sleeve the whole time, but I was scared to death I might lose her because you really have to keep your eyes peeled to find a good one. Not to be a killjoy, but I’m dead to the world around most women, dead as a doorknob.
Ok, that was overkill and painful to read, but it did make a point. Think about the terms we use when we wish good luck to others. “Break a leg, kid” or “Knock ‘em dead!” Or if someone borrows something from us we say, “Go ahead, knock yourself out.” Even time is not immune to our sadistic ways…”time to kill”, “just killing time”.
Why do Christians conclude their prayers by invoking the name of an Egyptian deity, Amen, who had the body of a man and a ram’s head when Satan is depicted as a horned god having a goat’s head?
Why does the American dollar bill (known as a buck) have an Egyptian pyramid on its reverse side accompanied by the Latin phrase “Anuuit Coeptis Novus Ordo Seclorum” which can be translated “Announcing the Birth of a New World Order”?
Why does the American military wear a chevron as an insignia patch when the word derives from the French word chevre, which means “goat”, and On, the Egyptian City of the Sun?
If the word God traces back to the Indo-European root “ghut-” or the German “gott”, why does the changing of the vowel from a short sound to a long sound render the word “goat”?
Why does Christmas, the birthday of the Son of God, coincide with the birthday of the Sun of God at the winter solstice, the three days when the sun is at its lowest point on the Southern Cross, appears to stand still for three days, and then rises or is born again?
Is this why Easter is celebrated during the Spring Equinox when the East Star, the Sun, has risen? Why is Santa an anagram for Satan? What exactly does Old Nick really mean? And what is a jingle bell?
Why do we have company and product names like Chevron, Capri Sun, Shiner Bock, Star Bucks, and Sears and Roebuck? What is a Sun Kist or a Star Kist? Why are sports contests called ball games and why do we idolize rock stars such as Kid Rock?
The genre of Horror films possesses other “creature features” with “It” in the title. There was “It Lives!”, “It Lives Again”, “It Came From the Sea”, “It Came From Outer Space”, and “It’s Alive!” which is the expression Doctor Frankenstein made famous when he brought his monster to life.
From the time we were young, we have been told over and over again that IT is a scary creature that this association has become deeply embedded within the recesses of our mind.
On the Adamms Family, Cousin Itt was a monster. Itt communicated via a high speed gibberish that only members of the Addams family seemed to understand.
Cousin Itt’s voice was provided by sound-effects engineer Tony Magro, who created Itt’s garbled responses by mouthing gibberish into a tape recorder, with a “ppffft and a thhhhhttt” added for good measure, and then accelerating the tape’s recording speed.
The eyes have it. What do the eyes have? What or who is it? The eyes are the windows to the soul. In Saturday Night Live, Dana Carvey played the Church Lady who asked, “Could IT be… Satan?”
That IT refers to Satan can seen in the phrase “when It rains, It pours.” Satan, the goat God, is also known as Pan, the Piper. The word gote, a variant spelling of goat, means a channel or pipe for water and comes from the Old English word geotan which means “to pour”! So when It reigns, It pours.
When children play hide and seek, someone always has to be “it”. All the other children run and hide from whoever’s “it”. “It” then goes roaming around trying to find and capture whoever’s not “it”. When someone is found they are tagged as the new “it” - “Tag, you’re it!!”
The Beatles’ Paul McCartney said the idea for the song “Let it Be” came to him in a dream. He chants the line over and over and we all sing along almost willing it into existence.
Every time the song is played on the radio, thousands and thousands are sending forth thought and sound vibrations into the air. We use the word “it” in our language over and over all the time. Could it be possible to manifest a creature from the id, or from the subconscious? Think of these songs: Bread’s “Make it with you”,
The Scorpions “Make it Real”:
“…Make it real, not fantasy
Did you ever have a secret yearning?
Don’t you know it could come true?
Now’s the time to set wheels turning
To open up your life for you
As you know there’s always good and evil
Make your choice, Don’t be blind
Open up your mind and don’t be trivial
There’s a whole new world to find
Make it real, not fantasy…”
The Michael Jackson song “Who is it?”
“…(Who is it?)
It is a friend of mine
(Who is it?)
Is it my brother?
(Who is it?)
Somebody hurt my soul
(Who is it?)
I can’t take this stuff no more…”
In this song, Michael explains who IT is:
“Can you feel it in the air
Ghosts be hiding everywhere
I’m gonna be
Exactly what you wanna see
It’s you who’s haunting me
You’re warning me
To be the stranger
In your life
Am I amusing you
Or just confusing you?
Am I the beast
You visualized?
And if you wanna to see
Eccentricities
I’ll be grotesque
Before your eyes
Let them all materialize
Is that scary for you, baby
Am I scary for you, oh
Is it scary for you, baby
Is it scary for you?”
How about songs like Mariah Carey’s Make It Happen or Bread’s Make It with You? Star Trek’s Captain Picard says “Make it so.” Nike inundates us with the “Just Do It” slogan and the swoosh logo.
People do things “just for the hell of it”. Believe it. Keep it real. To hell with it!!! Keep it up. Let it ride. Pass it on. Get with it.
Are you with it? Go for it. Hop to it. Bring it on. Get it together. Play it again, Sam. There’s something to it. Check it out. Figure it out. I love it!! When someone dies, “I guess that was it”. Live it up. Let it go. Do you get it? i get it! How’s it going? It’s going good! How’s it hanging? Don’t let it end. Who can it be now? It’s a wonderful life (the ‘i deal’ life). Let’s make it last. You’ve got it made. Give it a try. Grin and bear it. It just so happens. Leave it alone. Give it a rest. How sweet it is. It’s what you make it. I can see it in your eyes. Get it together. What is it? Get over it. The devil made me do it. Whatever it takes. Now you see it, now you don’t. Cut it out. Whoomp, there it is.
I’m not going to stand for it. Take it away boys. It looks so real. Say it ain’t so. Give it up. It could happen to you. It can’t be true (it always lies). I can feel it in my bones. It’s a mystery. Give it everything you’ve got.
It’s all in your head. I can’t get it out of my head. It’s in the way that you use it. Get it, got it? Good. Could it be? Don’t even try it. Sit on it.
The Energizer bunny took the world by storm in one of the best advertising campaigns in history.
The slogan which was for batteries that create energy was “It keeps going and going…” and became a household phrase for many years. Alka Seltzer encourages us to “Try it, you’ll like it!” Compaq asks the question, “Has it changed your life yet?” And American Express admonishes us to “Don’t Leave Home without It.”
The company Sobe had this ad on their web site encouraging us to “get it up” and to “keep it up”.
The Lexicon of Love
we all “fall” inlove sometimes
blinded by love
from make up to break up
love is the drug
i got a crush on you
i just died in your arms tonight
crazy for you
dying to be with you
hurts so bad
i gave her my heart
smitten
swoon
addicted to love
take my breath away
i’m lost without your love
breaking up is hard to do
you put a spell on me, under her spell, spellbound
love hurts, love bites, love stinks, lovestruck baby
lovefool
lovegame
love is a battlefield
drunk in love
stole/captured my heart/soul
dazed and confused
cupid shoots an arrow through the heart
poison arrow
why do fools fall in love
how can you men a “broken heart”
heartbreak hotel
heartbreaker
unbreak my heart
heart skips a beat
heart attack
killer looks
over the moon
all’s fair in love and war
50% marriages end in divorce
To read more articles on similar and related topics, visit Omnithough.org
Secret Space Program Disclosure: Founders Of Solar Warden SSP With William Tompkins Novermber 30 2020 | From: SphereBeingAlliance
In this episode, we have deeper insights into the Secret Space Program, with the astonishing disclosures of William Tompkins, our 94-year-old aerospace engineer who is clearly one of the founding fathers of the very Solar Warden program which he named - that same code name - that Corey later worked in.
In this first interview that we're going to show you, Tompkins gets into detail about one of the craft designs that he was working on for the Navy. Let's take a look.
William Tompkins: So we talked before about the different types. And this is a two-kilometer long spacecraft carrier, and it's streamlined to a degree.
And so in one of the big design review meetings, one of the managers said, “Wait a minute, Bill, it's a vacuum out there. You don't have to make it pointed. You don't have to have atmosphere to go working through.”
And so I said, Well, that's true, but the electromagnetic protection system, which we still are not sure how we're going to word, may or may not be capable of handling all of the different types of vehicles or weapons that could be . . . being used on us. And also, under certain conditions, we actually can get into the planet's atmosphere and operate. So anyway, we got around that one.
Now, if you can picture here this area down in here [Bill points to the bottom, center of the craft] . . . I'm going to switch these, and you're going to see the lower part of the hull.
Click on the image above top open a larger version in a new window
And what you see there is the different classes of attack and fighter aircraft returning to the mothership, or the spacecraft carrier, and with a vacuum-controlled entry sections. Actually, they would design to fold down so that you're already in support of making inside landing.
Nobody actually flies in these squadrons controlling any of the vehicles. It's all automatic, so you're not going to be hitting the walls or any of this kind of thing.
But very quickly, you can open these hatches on the side. The hatch then becomes sort of a platform to possibly land on if you're too low. And this answers the question of how do we handle the large spaces aboard the ships that are going to be operating on the missions.
So what we had done then was, using the same type of design concepts, we looked at the Marines' missions. We looked at the communication missions. We actually came up with virtually hundreds, then, of missions and sub-missions that we then in the tank [think tank] made recommendations back to the Navy themselves.
And one admiral, when he saw that first illustration, he made the statement that just the shape of that's going to scare them away. They'll turn around and go back, because it is a pretty hot configuration.
Some of the others are not as good and actually some of them are rectangular, depending on what the mission is required to accomplish.
David: So that's a pretty technically detailed diagram. And it's just one of a variety of things that come from this guy who has no financial interest in this. His book didn't sell very much. He's just living on a fixed income. And yet, that degree of precision in the art doesn't seem like it would be coming from somebody who's trying to make something up.
So I'm curious about how similar that looks to anything that you saw?
Corey Goode: That was most likely one of the concept designs that probably got fine-tuned. But there could be a craft that looks like that out there that I hadn't seen. I didn't see all of our vessels out there.
Now, that looked very similar to longer, wedge-shaped vessels that I saw that had areas coming up off the top almost like you see on a Navy vessel on the ocean.
And also, it had stealth edges. The corners were very much like the stealth ships that you see – how they curve.
David: Well, and something kind of caught my eye, which is that in his discussions with his superiors on the design, they said, “Oh, you don't need to worry about aerodynamics. It's not going through an atmosphere.”
But what I'm thinking of is, “Wait a minute. There's all this charge that you've got to move through even in space. There's inertia and there's electromagnetic fields.
So do you think that part of the reason why everything has an aerodynamic shape is that the basic vacuum energy of space itself has some sort of resistance that you have to cut through when you go through it?
Corey: They don't all have the aerodynamic shape.
David: Oh, Okay.
Corey: And as far as moving through charged particles and all this stuff in space, that's what the material on the outside of the craft and the electromagnetic shielding is for.
David: But in a case like this, for that particular mission, if it's also going to go through a planet's atmosphere, it would be good to have some aerodynamic qualities.
Corey: Right. The vessels that travel inside our atmosphere and out are usually going to be somewhat aerodynamic, even though with the propulsion systems they have they are not traveling through the atmosphere per se. They are in a bubble. And inside that bubble, the bubble is traveling.
David: Is there a reason for why stealth technology seems to involve these different flat panels that are kind of arranged at different angles? What's going on there?
Corey: It deflects radar, lidar, different waves, away from the receiver of the radar or lidar. So how it works is if you send it out and it hits a flat surface that is angled right, it's going to come back and you're going to get a report from that wave bouncing back.
If you have sharp angles, then very little of that wave is going to bounce back. The rest of it's going to be dispersed, and the waves will bounce off, but they're not going to hit the detector.
David: Well, I know that my insider Pete Peterson described that when the stealth was rolled out for Gulf War I, that it had in fact been mothballed for 20 years and was a very archaic and almost useless piece of technology by that time. Here he's [Tompkins] doing something in the 1950s that looks like stealth.
Corey: Yeah.
David: So that's pretty darn interesting.
Corey: Stealth goes way back.
David: Really?
Corey: Right. Stealth was being developed soon after the discovery and invention of the radar.
According to insiders the Lockheed SR-71 Blackbird is an example of vastly outdated technology that had been mothballed - but was later hauled out to give the public a glimpse of what their dollars had been used to develop at drastically overcharged rates (with the bulk of the funds being chanelled into the SSP's). By the time the public got to see this - it had been decomissioned junk for decades.
David: Wow! So I noticed in the second image that he showed that you have these very, very large doors, or hatches, as he was calling them, that open up on the side of the craft, and then a lot of little triangular wedges going in.
So what was your feeling when you saw that part of the illustration?
Corey: Well, as far as the doors opening, I had seen elevators that lift aircraft, move aircraft around. But if you have a door opening out, that can cause a lot of logistical problems if you're in battle or if you are traveling at a high rate of speed.
So usually, they have the doors open like this [side to side], up and down, and not protrude out.
David: Right.
Corey: But if there was another purpose and a need for it, I could see why they would develop it.
David: What about the actual shape of all those craft that were going into the larger craft?
Corey: Yes, that was very familiar. And the fact that he mentioned in these newer vessels or carriers, they do fly drones. They have people all inside [buildings or large craft] sitting in long rows flying drones, and they control a number of drones apiece.
David: Really.
Corey: Yeah. Little constellations of drones.
David: So what would this type of craft that he was designing be used for? Is it an attack craft? Is this a support craft?
Corey: It can be offensive and defensive, but usually these craft are designed to be offensive for attacking an enemy.
David: Does the Space Program have any proclivity towards doing an offensive attack on a civilization that they think they could conquer and overwhelm? Or is there also . . . is it mostly going to be defensive when they're out there trying to see what's around and getting attacked?
Corey: Well, it depends on who is in charge of, I guess, the Navy assets at the time. These people follow orders. So if they have a problem with attacking another species, they have to follow orders.
David: Well, in the case of a movie like “Avatar”, we have a clear example of our own government / military-industrial complex, in what would appear to be the future, having developed a space program, going to another planet with people who are tall and have blue skin, but there was something there that they really wanted, which was this unobtainium.
Do you think “Avatar” is describing something that is actually happening? Are there certain cases where planets are invaded for their materials?
Corey: Well, I do know that certain aspects of the ICC, but especially Dark Fleet, are going out on offensive conquering missions. And they're doing this alongside the Reptilians.
David: Well, and I do also remember Pete Peterson telling me that many of the craft that you see in “Avatar” are exactly identical to stuff that he had actually seen or worked on. I'm wondering if any of them look familiar to you when you saw the movie?
Corey: I didn't witness a whole lot of craft that flew inside of an atmosphere.
David: Ah.
Corey: So all of those craft were clearly designed to fly inside of some sort of a dense atmosphere. The craft that I saw were not built to operate in atmosphere.
David: All right. Well, speaking of James Cameron, not only do we have “Avatar”, he also had that movie “The Abyss”, where he describes extraterrestrials underneath the surface of the ocean.
And here we have William Tompkins in a very interesting discussion about undersea bases. Let's take a look.
Under Sea Bases
Tompkins:I did get hired by General Dynamics for a Navy program. And this program was to locate German submarines – anti-submarine warfare program.
And what's interesting about this is that the Navy selected the Lockheed P-3 patrol bombers to be the air vehicles to locate German ships and submarines.
Lockheed P-3 patrol bomber
German "U-Boat" submarine
This is the Cold War now, and so there was roughly 15 other NATO countries who were using the same aircraft, the same electronics, the same sensing systems and the communication system – all of it engineered and designed in US.
And so the United States had 120 of these, and the NATO countries had like another 60 of them, all out looking for German [and/or Russian] submarines.
But that's not quite the numbers. It's more like we had 2,000 of these and NATO had another 1,000 of these – not quite that high. And remember, there were only 11 Soviet submarines operating at that time. There were many of them that were in training operations, but they weren't tactical.
And so here we've got 2,800 P-3 aircraft flying all around the planet 24 hours a day looking for submarines.
Well, gee whiz, that's not exactly what we were doing either. And there's a title to the program, which is the mission ASW – anti-submarine warfare. But there's also one which is ASUW. And so the “U” is for 'unidentified extraterrestrials'.
And so this was the second-largest amount of military money allocated for a program on the planet. It's peacetime, but it's sort of a war condition. And we have all of these airplanes out, and it became necessary for a group, which I then was manager of, working for Data Graphics, which is a subsidiary of General Dynamics.
And later on, I worked for the corporate office on the red team at the corporate level.
And when we look at the size of this program, the number of personnel that have to be trained to fly these aircraft, the upgrading continually of the sensing systems, the underwater systems of the satellite system programs that were required to be on board these aircraft, it's absolutely unreal.
What we were really doing was looking for extraterrestrial vehicles in the ocean and in the large lakes and their bases on the bottom of the ocean.
People don't realize how much money, how much time, and how many people have to be involved in these programs.
And what are you doing? You're looking for extraterrestrials. Do you realize what we're saying? I mean, you're looking for extraterrestrial vehicles and bases. Your Navy is.
David: Well, the first thing that strikes me about the interview footage that we just saw here is the scope of this classified military operation to try to actually identify who is on our planet, where are they, what is their infrastructure, what is their agenda?
It would have to involve a massive amount of effort. So what were your thoughts on that?
Corey: I have heard of operations similar to what he was talking about, of fleets that were combing the ocean looking for submerged bases, and also USOs – unidentified submersible objects, I believe.
Now, from what I understood, very few people in that fleet would know what they were actually looking for. Everyone would go about doing their normal jobs. It'd just be a normal mission or a training mission, they'd be told. But very few intelligence people in that fleet would know exactly what was going on.
David: Well, to have 2,800 P-3 aircraft airborne at all times – this is obviously before the era of accurate geostationary satellites.
Corey: Right.
David: We're talking about a massive, massive operation here. How long do you think this had to have been done for?
Corey: Until they had strong enough sonar that would penetrate to the deepest parts of the ocean, and until we had the satellite coverage we needed. They had some sort of groups of aircraft or Navy vessels that were combing the ocean looking for non-terrestrials.
David: Do you think that there might have been a temptation at some point to tell the public, “Hey, we're aware of this extraterrestrial presence. We're doing the best we can. We're cataloging it now.”
Or was it just really important the whole thing be secret to avoid a panic of some kind?
Corey: Well, just in general, the Navy . . . I mean, you hear “loose lips sink ships”. Information is very compartmentalized to begin with, but this is not long after World War II, so everybody still had a different mindset than we do today.
If the government told you to stick a lit cigar in your ear, you'd say, “Yes, sir. Give me another.” That's just the way people were programmed.
David: So Tompkins is also discussing another point of corroboration with some things that you've said, which is that there were, in fact, underwater bases to be seen.
So could you review for us what your knowledge is about the existence of these bases, and where are they, what do they look like, who's in them, etc., etc.? Are there different types . . .
Corey: Yeah.
David: . . . that would be underground or underwater?
Corey: And there's a number of different types that are underwater. I even read about large underwater bases that were mobile, that moved along the bottom of the ocean and was doing some sort of core sampling or testing of the material that it was passing over.
And if you located where one of these were, you would then have to track it since they now were moving. So they would have ships that would just track a mobile underwater base.
David: Well, before we taped this segment, we were looking at just something like that on the Internet. Let's take a look right now at that little . . . This is an excerpt from a video describing something very similar to what Corey just described – two-and-a-half-mile wide, round object that seems to be tracing patterns on the sea floor.
Images from video on possible undersea ET exploration craft
So do you think that that is an example of one of these craft?
Corey: That very well could be. I mean, a two-mile-wide object is not going to be pushed in that unusual way under the ocean by a current.
David: So what would they be doing in a case like that? What's the objective?
Corey: From what I was told, these were like bases, but also laboratories. They were going around doing core samples, finding out what was at different depths below the surface, below the floor of the ocean.
David: Why would somebody want to have an undersea base if there's a honeycomb Earth and they could just pop into one of those combs underground?
Corey: There's a lot of different regions inside the honeycomb Earth that belong to different groups that they claim as their territory.
Also, under the ocean . . . There are a lot of different beings coming here that could care less about us, could care less about any animals flying in the sky or running around. All they care about is the life forms in the ocean and the ocean itself. They see the ocean as a life form. And a lot of these are aquatic species.
David: So what do you think was going on when James Cameron made “The Abyss”? It seems a very specific idea was being conveyed. We also have reason to believe that some of his other movies had disclosure in them as well, like “Avatar”. What do you think “The Abyss” was intended to get people ready for?
Corey: It was most likely groups within the military-industrial complex starting to seed our consciousness, which is what they've been doing through movies and television shows for a long time.
David: Yeah. That definitely makes sense, because this is an ongoing effort of four generations now of disclosure to get us ready for the truth.
Corey: Right. And as you've already reported, when Sony got hacked, it was proven that DARPA and these other groups were passing on ideas for movies and television shows.
David: Exactly. All right. Well, we have one more really exciting piece of footage for you to see here with our interview with Tompkins. And this time, he is describing his personal experience with one of the most infamous and legendary events in UFO lore – less known up until recently, a lot less known than Roswell, but several years before Roswell.
We're talking about the Battle of Los Angeles. Let's take a look now.
Battle of Los Angeles
Tompkins: February 1942, we were living in a very large home which had been converted to four apartments – two upstairs, two down.
We had a great big enormous deck that ran all the way across this real high-celinged building. So we were four blocks from the ocean, okay? We can't see the ocean, because it's down low and trees are in the way.
So my brother and I are laying on our floor listening to the radio and looking at some papers, and my dad says, “Get out here – out on the deck. Get out here NOW!” And we got up, and we went out to the back deck.
So right above the horizon of all the trees and stuff and buildings is this dot – a white dot. It's just there. And it's got to be some aircraft flying in to come over and land at the airbase, but it's not moving. It's just a bright dot.
And off of this dot, to the left, is a little beam. It's like a pencil beam, but you can see it.
This is out over the ocean, like maybe inside the breakwater, because we couldn't see the ocean, and we don't know how far out it is. It could have been 10 miles out. What in the world was that?
So we're watching it for about five minutes, and then there was a flash – a brilliant flash into our eyes.
It lit up the trees, the back, the side of – everything got lit up.
And it went out.
And we looked and looked and looked, and everything was gone – nothing else. So we went to bed.
12:30 at night, the anti-aircraft guns started firing. What we're talking about is this fantastic situation, the Los Angeles event – the Battle of Los Angeles, okay?
The anti-aircraft guns all started firing.
We go outside. Here's this massive thing right above us this big [Bill holds his hands about 3-ft. apart] – right above us, maybe 7,000 feet.
The anti-aircraft shells are blowing up on the bottom of it all around it. There's eight searchlights all focused on this as they're shooting at it.
And, of course, nothing is happening. And it parks there for an hour and a half. While it's parked, hundreds of different types of vehicles – most of them circular, but some cigar-shaped, large ones – came in underneath, being fired on where they're still trying to shoot this thing down.
They came around him. They came over him – all night long.
Now, it got boring after awhile, so we went to bed at 3:00 a.m. I don't know how it gets boring, okay? We went to bed at 3:00 a.m.
Now, when it started, everybody came outside. All of us are standing there watching this event.
Now, what was not published was that the breakwater is full of Navy ships who used up all of their ammunition that five-hour period – not just the coastal artillery who used up all of their ammunition, okay?
Your whole two Pacific navies, the Eastern Navy and the Western Navy, used up all their ammunition.
They finally quit, of course, just before daylight, and everybody went back inside.
But from the standpoint of all of us out there watching this, nobody got a heart attack. Nobody got sick. Nobody got scared. Nobody got frightened.
On the other side of the planet, London, was being bombed by the Germans. And they're trying to get into shelters.
We had a five-hour war, except they didn't shoot at us. But nobody got sick. The only persons who were actually wounded was from shrapnel. A couple of guys actually were killed.
Almost a million people in California watched an event for five hours of a massive extraterrestrial battle group that came over California with a mission.
David: Well, this is obviously one of the great classic events in UFO lore, something that just can't be covered up. Did you ever hear about or read about this battle on the smart-glass pads or in any of the briefings that you had on the inside?
Corey: I read that it had occurred. The only thing that I saw that wasn't reported here is that during the same time period, we did recover a non-terrestrial craft from the ocean in that general vicinity.
David: Really?
Corey: Yeah. I don't know if that would have been one of these smaller craft that he saw or the large one. To me, it seemed as though they were unaffected by the anti-aircraft.
David: But it is possible that one of them took a stray hit or something and landed in the ocean.
Corey: It could be. Or the Battle of LA craft and these other craft that sound like came out of it could very well have been searching for . . . It might have been a rescue operation.
You know, there's a number of things it could have been. They could have been probing our defenses, or maybe making a point to some of our leaders after a recent meeting.
David: Well, let me run this idea by you. This is something I discussed on “Wisdom Teachings”. It's worth repeating and getting your thoughts.
If you go back to Fatima, Portugal, right after Portugal enters into World War I, which is this horrible, devastating thing where tens of millions of people are dying, ultimately, you have these kids who start to be in contact with what appear to be spiritual beings that ultimately leads to a mass sighting of a silvery disk in which 90,000 people witnessed this thing.
And then they're soaked in rain, but when the whole thing's over they were miraculously dry. The craft appears to shoot rainbow colors all over the sky. 90,000 witnesses . . . That would have been the end of the cover-up if it had happened in our times.
Corey: Right. And a million people seeing this in Los Angeles, and sounds like Long Beach and other areas – today, with everyone having an iPhone, it would – yeah, it would be over.
David: So do you think it's possible that both the Fatima sightings and the Battle of LA could be benevolent groups that are showing us these things as we enter into war, to try to steer us away from warfare perhaps?
Corey: It very well could be, because with their technology, they could have flattened the whole city with very little effort.
So they were obviously not there for some sort of offensive operation – maybe an intelligence operation, rescue recovery operation, or there to make a point. But I really don't know exactly why this incident occurred.
According to what I've heard, there was some treaty signed that this type of open sighting, open mass sighting, is against a treaty.
David: Right.
Corey: So there had to have been a good reason why it happened.
David: Now, we've heard from guys like Benjamin Fulford in some of his disclosures that he was told by Pentagon insiders that 75% of all production money for Hollywood films is coming from the Pentagon through various backdoor firms.
So let me just ask you first if you have ever heard anything like that?
Corey: Oh, yeah. Yeah. A lot of money from the DoD (Department of Defense) and Pentagon is going in for propaganda.
David: So why do you think the Battle of Los Angeles movie would be made? Do you think maybe they're confusing people's Google search so that they're going to find this movie instead of any real information?
Corey: Well, they know that that was a very significant occurrence UFO-wise in American history. Nearly a million people saw it.
David: Right.
Corey: So it was already in our consciousness. So that's a tool for them. And they – they being different military intelligence groups – are trying to spin the narrative that all of these beings coming in are negative, and that they are here to invade. And this one obviously wasn't, because it didn't attack.
David: Do you think maybe creating a movie with the same title blocks people from finding the original incident at all?
Corey: It could do that, or it could just put the whole sci-fi spin on it to where . . . You know, we're already programmed to roll our eyes any time we hear anything alien or UFO. That's probably part of the effort.
David: I was fortunate enough at one of my conferences to have a woman stand up who was a little girl during the time that this happened and witnessed the entire thing. And it was quite fascinating.
We let her speak for some time to the audience. It was quite spontaneous.
The point is, a million people is a lot of witnesses. It's kind of amazing that we still have a UFO cover-up after something like that.
Corey: Yes, but the propaganda and the programming that has come from these intelligence groups has been very effective. So there's a good chance that if something like that happened today and we didn't get photos, a lot the people that witnessed it themselves would, after a few days, be like, “Oh, that didn't happen.” Or just forget about it and move on.
David: Well, another interesting thing regarding the Battle of Los Angeles is the “War of the Worlds” broadcast. The original broadcast with Orson Welles was in 1939. But then when the movie came out, it was after this had happened.
And we have multiple eyewitnesses saying that the craft that you see in the “War of the Worlds” movie is very similar to the one in the Battle of Los Angeles, except that it has a little periscope on the top.
So why do you think they would actually put the real craft into the movie?
Corey: Well, they're always hiding things in plain sight. So if you were to see something similar to “War of the Worlds”, on some level you might be willing to discount it, thinking, “Oh, that's military, or that's some concept that's being used for a movie”.
You're going to jump to that instead of aliens automatically. That's possible.
David: Well, do you think also that putting those exact same craft into “War of the Worlds” where they become hostile attackers . . .
Corey: Oh, yeah.
David: . . . instead of peaceful demonstrators, could be like a form of mass mind control?
Corey: Well, sure. If you see a certain craft design and see it destroying cities in a movie, well, if you see it in real life, what are you programmed to think?
They could be coming down to say, “Hello”, and maybe give you a ride and show you around the solar system, but you've been programmed to run and hide because you think that it's an invasion.
David: Exactly. Do you think it's possible that we could have another mass demonstration like that at some point that there could be another event like that if, for example, this Mohammad Treaty gets overturned?
Corey: Absolutely. If the treaty that's supposed to prevent that is overturned, there are a lot of non-terrestrials that want to be up in the sky and over populated areas to let us know that they're here.
David: Now, you also mentioned in some of your recent briefings that both the SSP Alliance and the Cabal are concerned about the possibility of wreckage crashing into a major American city.
So just real briefly, since we're talking about these battles in the air, what are they thinking would happen, and how would that play out on the world stage?
Corey: Well, they're afraid that some of their weapons platforms that have been up in orbit, and advanced craft, could possibly fall into a populated urban area with all of the activity that's going on up there. There are shootdowns happening.
So they are ready to pounce on any crash. They have cover stories in place saying, “This was a nuclear-powered satellite that crashed. It's contaminated a large area. So stay in your homes or leave the city.”
And then they will focus on cleaning up the debris.
David: So this is something that they're actually very concerned about.
Corey: Absolutely. That is . . . I've heard a number of times that they're worried.
David: Are there more battles happening in our atmosphere now than there were before between these cloaked craft?
Corey: Yes. It's kind of reached a crescendo in recent times. There are human-piloted craft fighting each other, human-piloted craft fighting non-terrestrials and different non-terrestrial groups that are having skirmishes.
David: So what would we expect if they tried to cover this up? What would be the kind of headlines we'd see or the stories we'd hear?
Corey: Just like the example I just gave, that some sort of secret satellite had crashed or something like that. They're not going to say a UFO crashed.
David: Or a nuclear event . . .
Corey: Right.
David: . . . maybe a nuclear waste dump or spill
Corey: Test craft.
David:. . . chemical emission. Something like that.
Corey: Right. Something that's going to scare people.
David: Right.
Corey: Like some sort of disease or any number of things.
David: All right. Well, you saw it here first. This is “Cosmic Disclosure”. I'm your host, David Wilcock, here with Corey Goode. And we're reviewing footage from William Tompkins – absolutely mind-blowing stuff.
Escaping The Matrix: 10 Ways To Deprogram Yourself November 29 2020 | From: TheUnboundedSpirit
Think of the way most people live. They force themselves to wake up in the morning, dress up, drive straight to work, drive back home about 8 hours later, watch TV, and sleep, only to repeat the same routine next day for almost their entire lives.
We consider this kind of living as normal and even healthy, but if you stop and think about it, it’s not healthy at all.
Life is so precious and beautiful, and instead of making the most out of it, we choose to waste it just because we have been programmed to do so. Habits, tradition and belief systems have turned us into mindless automatons who don’t enjoy life and just follow a predetermined path that was handed to us by society.
This programming, however, can be broken, if we realize that the way we live is preventing us from squeezing the juice out of life, and gather the courage to transform how we think and act. Then, life can be turned into a beautiful celebration filled with laughter, play, and love.
How to Deprogram Yourself
Below are 10 tips that will help you to deprogram yourself and escape the matrix you’ve been trapped into since the day you were born:
1. Break Free From the Shackles of Organized Religion.
Dogmatic, organized religion imposes on people what to think and what not to, what is good and what is bad, what is right and what is wrong. Thus religion prevents people from using their critical thinking, seeking the truth, and reaching to their own conclusions.
On the contrary, it teaches them to blindly follow a set of morals and rules. The result? Emotional suppression and suffering. If you want to reclaim your individuality, honestly express yourself and walk on the path of understanding, be sure to break the chains of organized religion and start your own quest for the truth from scratch.
2. Stop Giving Your Power Away to Authority
From a very young age, most of us were taught to doubt ourselves and do only what authority commands us to, even if we didn’t feel like doing so. Now, as adults, we don’t trust ourselves, and so we choose to let others have power over our lives.
We vote for politicians who do nothing but lie to us in order to satisfy their inner hunger, being under the illusion that by voting we are granted the power to choose our future, when in reality the choices we are presented with are very limited and almost exactly the same.
So we allow a small group of people to manipulate us for their own personal gain, foolishly believing that they want to contribute to the betterment of society.
If we truly want to start creating a positive change in the world, we need to stop giving power to a few others and hold them responsible for our lives, and instead start taking responsibility in our own hands so that we can become the creators of our destiny.
3. Question the Current Economic System
Money, in essence, is created out of debt, thus creating the illusion of scarcity of resources, which compels people to compete in the market, who have to waste most of their life working as wage slaves.
This inevitably results in the tremendous suffering and social conflict that prevails all around the world.
In addition, our economic system requires people to consume without end so that money can keep on circulating in the economy, thus urging us to continuously buy things we don’t need and which are going to end up in landfills, poisoning the very environment that we depend on and sustains us.
If you don’t like this kind of living and would like to create a positive change in your life and the world, I’d highly recommend you to research further into the immensely negative consequences of our economy, and educate yourself on alternative, more technically efficient and environmentally sustainable economic systems.
Being brought up in a consumer culture, we believe that money can buy everything we need and will bring happiness into our lives. So we choose to buy more and more things without end, but we always end up feeling dissatisfied and hungry for more stuff.
Having some nice things is fine - but knowing where to draw the line for yourself is key - many people lose their way
The truth is that money can only provide us with substitutes for what we truly need, but not the real deal. What we need is neither possessions nor services, but things such as love, friendship, and creativity. So don’t be concerned about which is the next best thing you can buy, and instead invest your time and efforts in achieving heart-opening and mind-expanding experiences that money can’t buy.
5. Be Mindful of What You Put Into Your Body
Is what you’re eating contributing to your health or is it poisoning your physical organism? Is what you’re eating environmentally sustainable, or is it negatively impacting the natural world? These are some important questions that all people should ask themselves.
Most people choose to eat foods which are filled with sugar, preservatives, and which are empty of nutrients or contain animal-derived products, unaware that their food choices are detrimental to their health, contribute to the suffering and death of tens of billions of animals, and have a tremendously negative impact on the environment.
From now on, be sure to choose carefully what you choose to put into your mouth, and I assure you that this is one of the best things you can do for yourself and the world.
6. Choose Your News Sources Wisely
Knowledge is power, but we are drowning in an ocean of information. Corporate media presents us all the time with biased information so as to fool us into believing the lies they tell us just so that they can manipulate us exactly the way they want.
A true seeker of knowledge does not accept anything on belief but seeks out for facts and tries to develop a spherical understanding of the matter he/she is looking into.
If you don’t like being mislead and desire to better understand what’s going on in the world, do your best to collect information from as many sources as possible and use critical thinking in order to reach to your own conclusions about what’s true or not.
7. Read Eye-Opening, Mind-Empowering Books
There have been many wise persons who’ve written down their thoughts on life’s problems and how they can be overcome. There have been many persons who have criticized the workings of society and offer their insights on how we can help create a more beautiful world.
Books can be immensely helpful to open our eyes and improve the quality of our life, but not many people spend much of their time reading books - or they just choose to read for entertainment reasons alone.
To get the most out of reading books, be sure to not just pick any book and read - read those ones which touch your mind and heart and provide you with new perspectives that help you to better understand yourself and the world.
8. Escape the Herd Mentality
Just as every person alive, you are a unique individual with unique talents and gifts to offer to the world. Unfortunately, society has suppressed our individuality since the day we were born. We’ve been programmed to doubt ourselves and conform to what is considered as normal.
This, however, prevents us from embracing ourselves and creating our own path in life, which is causing us immense emotional pain. From today, distance yourself from the herd mentality and start paying attention to your inner voice - doing so will allow you to follow your calling and live the way you truly want to live.
9. Creatively Express Yourself
A great way to deprogram yourself from the normalcy of modern life is to focus your attention on creativity. We’re all born creative, but slowly slowly our creativity has been suppressed so much that we’ve almost forgotten that we’re creative beings.
To be creative means to think outside the box and see life from different perspectives. Most importantly, to be creative means to find out new ways of living and realize that you have the power to manifest the kind of life you desire.
10. Develop Mindfulness
Lastly, learning how to live in the present moment is the most important way to break free from your conditioning. By being mindful of the here and now, you’ll be able to respond to whatever happens each and every moment spontaneously, without being a victim of your past.
There are many meditation techniques out there that can help you to become mindful, so find the ones that you like most and stick to them until you see positive results in your life.
“The Matrix is a system, Neo. That system is our enemy. But when you’re inside, you look around, what do you see? Businessmen, teachers, lawyers, carpenters. The very minds of the people we are trying to save. But until we do, these people are still a part of that system and that makes them our enemy.
You have to understand, most of these people are not ready to be unplugged. And many of them are so inured, so hopelessly dependent on the system, that they will fight to protect it.”
-
Morpheus, The Matrix
The Truth About Money Is Out & Austerity In 8 Minutes: Why It Does Not Work, Why It Is Still Practised November 28 2020 | From: TheGuardian / Yanis Varoufakis
The truth about money creation and Austerity. Back in the 1930s, Henry Ford is supposed to have remarked that it was a good thing that most Americans didn't know how banking really works, because if they did, "there'd be a revolution before tomorrow morning".
In 2014, something remarkable happened. The Bank of England let the cat out of the bag. In a paper called "Money Creation in the Modern Economy", co-authored by three economists from the Bank's Monetary Analysis Directorate, they stated outright that most common assumptions of how banking works are simply wrong, and that the kind of populist, heterodox positions more ordinarily associated with groups such as Occupy Wall Street are correct.
To get a sense of how radical the Bank's new position is, consider the conventional view, which continues to be the basis of all respectable debate on public policy. People put their money in banks.
Banks then lend that money out at interest – either to consumers, or to entrepreneurs willing to invest it in some profitable enterprise. True, the fractional reserve system does allow banks to lend out considerably more than they hold in reserve, and true, if savings don't suffice, private banks can seek to borrow more from the central bank.
The central bank can print as much money as it wishes. But it is also careful not to print too much. In fact, we are often told this is why independent central banks exist in the first place.
If governments could print money themselves, they would surely put out too much of it, and the resulting inflation would throw the economy into chaos. Institutions such as the Bank of England or US Federal Reserve were created to carefully regulate the money supply to prevent inflation.
This is why they are forbidden to directly fund the government, say, by buying treasury bonds, but instead fund private economic activity that the government merely taxes.
It's this understanding that allows us to continue to talk about money as if it were a limited resource like bauxite or petroleum, to say "there's just not enough money" to fund social programmes, to speak of the immorality of government debt or of public spending "crowding out" the private sector.
The Bank of England has admitted that none of this is really true. To quote from its own initial summary:
“Rather than banks receiving deposits when households save and then lending them out, bank lending creates deposits"… "In normal times, the central bank does not fix the amount of money in circulation, nor is central bank money 'multiplied up' into more loans and deposits."
In other words, everything we know is not just wrong – it's backwards. When banks make loans, they create money. This is because money is really just an IOU.
The role of the central bank is to preside over a legal order that effectively grants banks the exclusive right to create IOUs of a certain kind, ones that the government will recognise as legal tender by its willingness to accept them in payment of taxes.
There's really no limit on how much banks could create, provided they can find someone willing to borrow it. They will never get caught short, for the simple reason that borrowers do not, generally speaking, take the cash and put it under their mattresses; ultimately, any money a bank loans out will just end up back in some bank again.
So for the banking system as a whole, every loan just becomes another deposit.
What's more, insofar as banks do need to acquire funds from the central bank, they can borrow as much as they like; all the latter really does is set the rate of interest, the cost of money, not its quantity.
Since the beginning of the recession, the US and British central banks have reduced that cost to almost nothing. In fact, with "quantitative easing" they've been effectively pumping as much money as they can into the banks, without producing any inflationary effects.
Austerity In 8 Minutes: Why It Does Not Work. Why It Is Still Practised
What this means is that the real limit on the amount of money in circulation is not how much the central bank is willing to lend, but how much government, firms, and ordinary citizens, are willing to borrow.
Government spending is the main driver in all this (and the paper does admit, if you read it carefully, that the central bank does fund the government after all). So there's no question of public spending "crowding out" private investment. It's exactly the opposite.
Why did the Bank of England admit all this? Well, one reason is because it's obviously true.
The Bank's job is to actually run the system, and of late, the system has not been running especially well. It's possible that it decided that maintaining the fantasy-land version of economics that has proved so convenient to the rich is simply a luxury it can no longer afford.
But politically, this is taking an enormous risk.
Just consider what might happen if mortgage holders realised the money the bank lent them is not, really, the life savings of some thrifty pensioner, but something the bank just whisked into existence through its possession of a magic wand which we, the public, handed over to it.
Historically, the Bank of England has tended to be a bellwether, staking out seeming radical positions that ultimately become new orthodoxies. If that's what's happening here, we might soon be in a position to learn if Henry Ford was right.
A Skeptical Look At The ‘Great Reset’: A Technocratic Agenda That Waited Years For A Global Crisis To Exploit & The Global Takeover Is Underway November 27 2020 | From: Sociable / Mercola / Various
How the ‘great reset’ ideology of un-elected bureaucrats would steer society towards massive surveillance & control: perspective.
In the face of a global pandemic, an un-elected body of global bureaucrats based in Davos, Switzerland has asked the world to trust its vision of a technocratic “great reset,” knowing full well the public would never go for such a request had it not been for the golden opportunity they’d all been waiting for.
In fact, he called on the WEF to start the great reset over five years ago (see video below), but this year he’s saying that COVID-19 is the most urgent reason to restructure all of society and the global economy.
WEF Chairman Hopes Forum Will Help Push "Reset" Button on World Economy
The great reset agenda was already in place long before the coronavirus pandemic, and the WEF was just waiting for a crisis to exploit it.
"Prior to this year, implementing worldwide lockdowns that destroy businesses, wreck the economy, and leave people destitute and stripped of their constitutional rights while trying to enact invasive contact tracing, immunity passports, and otherwise massive bio-electronic surveillance apparatuses would never have been accepted by the citizens of a free society."
The so-called great reset is an old ideology touted for decades by globalists like Henry Kissinger, who opined in 2014, “Never before has a new world order had to be assembled from so many different perceptions, or on so global a scale.”
The great reset is the proposed mechanism for setting in motion a new global order, but it wouldn’t be possible to bring forth such a bold plan without a global crisis, be it manufactured or of unfortunate happenstance, that shocks society to its core.
"The pandemic represents a rare but narrow window of opportunity to reflect, reimagine, and reset our world to create a healthier, more equitable, and more prosperous future.”
-
Klaus Schwab, WEF
In this story, I will attempt to dissect:
What types of invasive surveillance technologies will be required by the great reset
Why the great reset is being re-branded and pushed in 2020
Who will be asked to give up their privacy for the common good
How the Davos crowd is trying to sell the great reset Utopia
When humans become hackable
Where you have the power to choose
With the arrival of the coronavirus pandemic, the WEF has the perfect excuse to quickly enact its vision for steering society towards a more invasive and intrusive, technocratic future in the name of serving the common good.
The un-elected architects of the great reset envision a Utopian world of inclusivity, equality, and sustainability that will require trust in emerging technologies like AI, 5G, Blockchain, and robotics, in order to usher in their golden dawn.
WEF Great Reset Agenda:
Click on the image above to view a larger version in a new window
Great Reset Will Require Trust in Invasive Surveillance Tech: WEF Promotes Health Passports & Contact Tracing
In order to bring about the great reset, it will require trust in the technology, and to be more specific, the WEF would like to have greater trust in “crisis-relevant tech,” which includes developing digital health passports and contact tracing, under a new form of internet governance.
"The use of digital technology during the COVID-19 crisis offers clear lessons […] Target mistrust broadly to enable specific crisis-relevant tech."
"The Great Reset will require new institutions and business models, and new digital technologies to build them,” wrote the WEF Head of Corporate Governance and Trust, Daniel Dobrygowski, in a blog post.
“The necessary collaboration, however, is only possible if we solve the digital trust problem.” he added.
- Daniel Dobrygowski, WEF
According to the Dobrygowski, “The use of digital technology during the COVID-19 crisis offers clear lessons,” one of those being, “Target mistrust broadly to enable specific crisis-relevant tech.”
The WEF openly supports the development of so-called “crisis-relevant tech” as evidenced by its backing the development of health passports, which act as digital records of your health status to determine whether or not you are free to travel or even go outside.
Earlier this year the WEF announced it was supporting the development and launch of CommonPass - a platform whose mission is “to develop and launch a standard global model to enable people to securely document and present their COVID-19 status (either as test results or an eventual vaccination status) to facilitate international travel and border crossing while keeping their health information private.”
"Contact tracing apps can be powerful weapons against the virus – but they can also be tools for state surveillance.”
- WEF report
The WEF also lent its support to another health passport initiative called CovidPass, which was built by one of the WEF’s own “Young Global Leaders,” Mustapha Mokass, who used to be an advisor at the World Bank.
CovidPass “uses blockchain technology to store encrypted data from individual blood tests, allowing users to prove that they have tested negative for COVID-19.”
In supporting both CommonPass and CovidPass, the Davos elite have made it clear they want “crisis-relevant tech” like health passports to be part of the great reset solution.
Ask yourself, would the idea of being forced to electronically prove your current health status in order to travel or even leave your own home have been acceptable 10 months ago?
Why is this happening now?
The die was cast years ago, but only now do the Davos elite see a shrinking, yet golden opportunity, to create a new world order out of the coronavirus chaos.
COVID Presents a ‘Shrinking, Golden Opportunity’, Great Reset Is Not a Response to the Coronavirus
In June Prince Charles praised the great reset agenda for its potential to “make people more receptive to big visions of change” after having suffered through “unprecedented schockwaves.”
“We have a golden opportunity to seize something good from this crisis - its unprecedented shockwaves may well make people more receptive to big visions of change,” the prince told the WEF.
"Would the idea of being forced to electronically prove your current health status in order to travel or even leave your own home have been acceptable 10 months ago?"
Prince Charles may have let on more than he cared to share, or thought you would notice. Again, he’s telling you that the great reset was always the plan.
COVID-19 is the excuse.
In other words, the coronavirus crisis presents a golden opportunity for the global establishment to further its agenda upon a frightful and angry population that has been so beaten down by the pandemic and subsequent lockdowns that they will have become more susceptible to giving over their freedoms to the idea of greater centralized power and control.
Prince Charles went on, “As we move from rescue to recovery, we have a unique but rapidly shrinking window of opportunity to learn lessons and reset ourselves on a more sustainable path. It is an opportunity we have never had before and may never have again.”
"We have a golden opportunity to seize something good from this crisis - its unprecedented shockwaves may well make people more receptive to big visions of change.”
- Prince Charles
The British royal’s words echo those of WEF Director Schwab, who said, “The pandemic represents a rare but narrow window of opportunity to reflect, reimagine, and reset our world to create a healthier, more equitable, and more prosperous future.”
Again, why is the window of opportunity so narrow? Could the seeds of their grand strategy only flower while the world was distracted and divided amidst the chaos?
Prince Charles is Now Selling His 'Eco-Fascist Fantasy of the Great Reset'
Prince Charles is now selling his “eco-fascist fantasy of the Great Reset” to the Germans themselves, according to Sky News host Rowan Dean.
A clip was recently released of Prince Charles, speaking in German, about the coronavirus pandemic and climate change issues.
Mr Dean said the “Great Reset” is the “grand plan developed by the World Economic Forum … in cahoots with the United Nations, in league with the International Monetary Fund”.
“And supported by all sorts of prestigious institutions including, apparently, the Crown of England who have yet to disown Prince Charles's ever-increasing and unhinged rantings,” Mr Dean said. Mr Dean said the Great Reset is promised to begin next year to “transform all Western economies including ours,” by transferring the authoritarian tools currently being used to eradicate the coronavirus.
These include lockdowns, enforced business closures and “even stealing your own property rights, to tackle the imaginary climate crisis,” Mr Dean said.
“You won't own anything, and you'll be happy is one of their utopian communist slogans … Prince Charles' decision to throw his lot in with these crazies and now sell this eco-corporate-fascism in the German tongue is unfortunate timing to say the least”.
The Lure of Utopia Has Many Hooks: Giving Up Privacy & Freedom for the Common Good
Prior to this year, implementing worldwide lockdowns that destroy businesses, wreck the economy, and leave people destitute and stripped of their constitutional rights while trying to enact invasive contact tracing, immunity passports, and otherwise massive bio-electronic surveillance apparatuses would never have been accepted by the citizens of a free society.
But the coronavirus pandemic has opened a “narrow window” for a “golden opportunity,” and once this crisis is over, the Davos club fears that the window may be shut forever.
The WEF admits in its own contact tracing governance framework that “Contact tracing apps can be powerful weapons against the virus – but they can also be tools for state surveillance.”
Yet, the WEF believes that people should balance certain freedoms to serve the common good. It is a global vision without a clear end, and it is one that flies in the face of constitutional republics that protect certain unalienable rights.
"This new mindset would balance concerns over privacy and other issues with the potential to create value and improve lives.”
- WEF report
According to the WEF framework, enacting contact tracing technology would “not be easy and will require a new social consensus that embraces the use of technology to resolve problems for the good of all.”
Additionally, “This new mindset would balance concerns over privacy and other issues with the potential to create value and improve lives.”
In order to enact invasive technologies upon the population, citizens of the world will have to realize that it’s for the greater good and that they should change their mindsets to be less concerned about “privacy and other issues” and more excited about “the potential to create value and improve lives.”
"The great reset “will require stronger and more effective governments […] and it will demand private-sector engagement every step of the way.”
- Klaus Schwab, WEF
Just about every proponent of contact tracing and health passports, including the WEF, all declare that technology should be used and governed ethically, but you hardly see any mention of winning the consent of the people.
Instead, they lobby stakeholders and policymakers to carry the torch in imparting the global vision from the top of the capstone and on-down.
"As we move from rescue to recovery, we have a unique but rapidly shrinking window of opportunity to learn lessons and reset ourselves on a more sustainable path. It is an opportunity we have never had before and may never have again.”
- Prince Charles
If the coronavirus were to disappear from the earth today, would the WEF have to wait for a new global crisis, or would it push-on with the same reset agenda, regardless?
According to the WEF director, the great reset “will require stronger and more effective governments […] and it will demand private-sector engagement every step of the way.”
“The world must act jointly and swiftly to revamp all aspects of our societies and economies, from education to social contracts and working conditions,” he added. “We must build entirely new foundations for our economic and social systems.”
In creating order out of the coronavirus chaos, the great reset promises to bring about “a more secure, more equal, and more stable world.”
Is that how they plan to win our trust? By promising us a Utopia if we just go along with it?
We haven’t even gotten into how the great reset would affect the world’s money system and the role of blockchain and digital payments, but when you look at digital health passports and contact tracing apps, you are looking at sophisticated form of bio-electronic surveillance that the world has never been seen before.
"We are no longer mysterious souls; we are now hackable animals.”
- Yuval Harari, WEF
When you combine biological data with advanced computing power, what you get is the ability to hack humans.
“The power to hack human beings can of course be used for good purposes like provided much better healthcare,”said Harari, adding, “but if this power falls into the hands of a 21st Century Stalin, the result will be the worst totalitarian regime in human history, and we already have a number of applicants for the job of 21st Century Stalin.”
“In Stalin’s USSR the State monitored members of the Communist elite more than anyone else. The same will be true of future total surveillance regimes.”
The great reset calls to restructure every aspect of society, and it can only do so if people trust the increasingly invasive, bio-electronic surveillance technology they wish to deploy.
"In Stalin’s USSR the State monitored members of the Communist elite more than anyone else. The same will be true of future total surveillance regimes.”
- Yuval Harari, WEF
The more people know that someone is watching them, the more they will change their behavior. Just being aware that someone is monitoring your every digital transaction, will cause you to conform to certain norms.
As a population grows-up under massive surveillance, it will adapt its behavior to appear normal to society but compliant to authority. Over time, the citizens will police themselves out of fear.
The WEF Wants to Win Your Trust, You Have a Choice
Tyranny arrives in subtle stages. It’s slow at first, but before you realize it even exists, it has already won.
That is what I see happening with the unholy merger of “the great reset” with “the new normal."
Those who pull the strings have been begging for a global crisis to unleash their worldwide restructuring of society and the economy.
This year, in the face of a global pandemic, an un-elected body of global lobbyists based in Davos, Switzerland has asked you to have faith in their vision of a technocratic Utopia, knowing full well they could never issue such a request had it not been for the golden opportunity they had all been waiting for.
And that is where your power lies, dear reader. It’s your choice.
You can believe the WEF vision shared by some of the world’s most influential bureaucrats, or you can be skeptical of the whole establishment agenda that asks you to just trust the plan.
According to the World Economic Forum, by 2030 we will own nothing and be happy about it. Terms like “the Great Reset,” “the Fourth Industrial Revolution” and “Build Back Better” all refer to the same long-term globalist agenda to dismantle democracy and national borders in favor of a global governance by unelected leaders, and the reliance on technological surveillance rather than the rule of law to maintain public order.
For decades, war and the threat of war have enriched the technocratic elite and kept the population going along with their agenda. Today, pandemics and the threat of infectious outbreaks are the new tools of war and social control.
Key globalist players working on the implementation of the technocratic agenda include the United Nations, the World Economic Forum, Bill Gates and foundations such as the Rockefeller Foundation, the UN Foundation and George Soros’ Open Society Foundation, Avanti Communications, 2030 Vision and Frontier 2030, Google, Mastercard and Salesforce.
The World Economic Forum public relations video above, “8 Predictions for the World in 2030,” short as it may be, offers a telling glimpse into what the technocratic elite has in store for the rest of us.
This Includes:
“You’ll own nothing” - And “you’ll be happy about it.” Instead, you’ll rent everything you need, and it’ll be delivered by drone right to your door.
“The U.S. won’t be the world’s leading superpower” - Instead, a handful of countries will dominate together.
“You won’t die waiting for an organ donor” - Rather than transplanting organs from deceased donors, custom organs will be 3D printed on demand.
“You’ll eat much less meat” - Meat will be “an occasional treat, not a staple, for the good of the environment and our health.”
As detailed in many previous articles, this is a foolhardy idea, not just for health reasons but also environmental ones. Integrating livestock is a foundational aspect of successful regenerative farming that can solve both food shortages and environmental concerns at the same time. For a refresher, see “Top 6 Reasons to Support Regenerative Agriculture.”
“A billion people will be displaced by climate change” - As a result, countries will have to prepare to welcome more refugees.
“Polluters will have to pay to emit carbon dioxide” - To eliminate fossil fuels, there will be a global price on carbon. Vandana Shiva, Ph.D., discussed this in a recent interview. Rather than promoting organic and regenerative farming, the technocratic elite are pushing something called zero-budget natural farming. Bill Gates is part of this scheme.
As explained by Shiva, the wholly unnatural setup works something like this: The state takes out large loans, which are then divvied out to farmers to grow food for free. The farmers make their money not by selling their crops, but by trading their soil carbon rate on the global market.
Basically, carbon is being turned into a tradeable commodity, replacing the actual farm output of grains and other crops. Farmers with higher carbon in their soil will make more money than those with carbon-poor soil. Meanwhile, they’ll make nothing from the crops they grow.
“You could be preparing to go to Mars” - Scientists “will have worked out how to keep you healthy in space,” thus opening up the possibility of becoming a space-faring race and colonizing other planets.
“Western values will have been tested to the breaking point.”
For decades, war and the threat of war has enriched the technocratic elite and kept the population going along with their agenda. War and physical attacks have been repeatedly used to foist ever more draconian restrictions upon us and remove our liberties. The Patriot Act, rammed through in the aftermath of 9/11, is just one egregious example.
Today, pandemics and the threat of infectious outbreaks are the new tools of war and social control. For years, Gates has prepared the global psyche for a new enemy: deadly, invisible viruses that can crop up at any time.And the only way to protect ourselves is by giving up old-fashioned notions of privacy, liberty and personal decision-making.
We need to maintain our distance from others, including family members. We need to wear masks, even in our own homes and during sex. We need to close down small businesses and work from home.
We need to vaccinate the entire global population and put stringent travel restrictions into place to prevent the potential for spread.
We must track and trace everyone, every moment of the day and night, and install biometric readers into everyone’s bodies to identify who the potential risk-carriers are. Infected people are the new threat.
This is what the technocratic elite wants you to believe, and they’ve succeeded to convince a shocking ratio of the global population of this in just a few short months.
If you’re unfamiliar with the term “technocracy,” be sure to go back and listen to my interview with Patrick Wood, author of “Technocracy Rising: The Trojan Horse of Global Transformation” and “Technocracy: The Hard Road to World Order.” You can also learn more on Wood’s website, Technocracy.news.
A New Digital Currency System Underway
Two of the last pieces of the totalitarian takeover will be the transition to an all-digital currency linked to digital IDs. With that, enforcement of social rules will be more or less ensured, as your finances, indeed your entire identity, can easily be held hostage if you fail to comply.
Just think how easy it would be to automate it such that if you fail to get your mandated vaccine, or post something undesirable on the internet, your bank account becomes unavailable or your biometric ID won’t allow you entry into your office building.
An August 13, 2020, article3 on the Federal Reserve website discusses the supposed benefits of a central bank digital currency (CBDC). There’s general agreement among experts that most major countries will implement CBDC within the next two to four years.
An all-digital currency system also plays into social engineering, as it can be used to incentivize desired behaviors, very similar to what China is doing with their social credit system. For example, you might get a certain amount of digital currency but you have to buy a certain item or perform a particular task within a certain timeframe.
Many uninformed people will believe that these new CBDCs will be very similar to existing cryptocurrencies like Bitcoin, but they would be seriously mistaken. Bitcoin is decentralized and a rational strategy to opt out of the existing central bank controlled system, while these CBDCs will be centralized and completely controlled by the central banks.
If you have been intrigued about investing in Bitcoin as a safer alternative to the stock market, but just didn’t know how or understand the process, the video below is an excellent introduction on how to do this safely without losing your funds. My favorite crypto exchange is Kraken, which has far lower fees than Coinbase.
The Globalists
While I mention Gates a lot, he’s not acting alone, of course. It just so happens that as you trace the connections between the decision-makers of the world, you’ll find him in an astonishing number of places.
For example, In October 2019, Gates co-hosted a pandemic preparedness simulation for a “novel coronavirus,” known as Event 201, along with the Johns Hopkins Center for Health Security and the World Economic Forum.
The event eerily predicted what would happen just 10 weeks later, when COVID-19 appeared. Gates and the World Economic Forum, in turn, are both partnered4 with the United Nations which, while keeping a relatively low profile, appears to be at the heart of the globalist takeover agenda.
Gates is also the largest funder of the World Health Organization - the medical branch of the U.N., while the World Economic Forum is the social and economic branch of the U.N. Other key partners that play important roles in the implementation of the globalists agenda include:
Foundations such as the Rockefeller Foundation, the Rockefeller Brothers Fund, the Ford Foundation, Bloomberg Philanthropies, the UN Foundation and George Soros’ Open Society Foundation
Avanti Communications, a British provider of satellite technology with global connectivity
2030 Vision, a partnership of technology giants to provide the infrastructure and technology solutions needed to realize the U.N.’s 2030 Sustainable Development Goals. 2030 Vision is also partnered with Frontier 2030, which is a partnership of organizations under the helm of the World Economic Forum
Google, the No. 1 Big Data collector in the world and a leader in AI services
Mastercard, which is leading the globalist charge to develop digital IDs and banking services
Salesforce, a global leader in cloud computing, the “internet of things” and artificial intelligence. Incidentally, Salesforce is led by Marc Benioff, who is also on the World Economic Forum’s board of directors
Psychopathic Dream Comes True with COVID Crisis - Featuring The Club of Rome from 1973
In 1973, Australia's largest computer predicted when and how civilization would end. The prediction, which later appeared on Australian media was made by a program dubbed “World One” - commissioned by globalist think tank, The Club of Rome. 2020 was the first milestone year mentioned, when the quality of life across the planet was supposed to drop dramatically. ABC's This Day Tonight first aired this story on Nov. 9, 1973.
The Fourth Industrial Revolution Is the Technocratic Agenda
In decades past, the technocrats, the global, mostly unelected, elite that steer the management of nations worldwide, called for a “new world order.” Today, the NWO has been largely replaced with terms like “the Great Reset,” “the Fourth Industrial Revolution,” and the slogan “Build Back Better.”
All of these terms and slogans refer to the same long-term globalist agenda to dismantle democracy and national borders in favor of a global governance by unelected leaders, and the reliance on technological surveillance rather than the rule of law to maintain public order.
As expressed by Matt Hancock, the British Minister for Digital, Culture, Media & Sport, during a speech before the All-Party Parliamentary Group on the Fourth Industrial Revolution in 2017:
"One of the roles of Parliament is to cast ahead, to look to the horizon, and tackle the great challenges of our time. So, I applaud the creation of the APPG on the fourth industrial revolution, which surely is one of the greatest challenges we face, as a nation, and as a world.
The nature of the technologies is materially different to what has come before. In the past, we’ve thought of consumption as a one-off, and capital investment as additive. Yet put resources into the networks that now connect half the world, or into AI, and the effects are exponential …
I’m delighted to speak alongside so many impressive colleagues who really understand this, and alongside Professor Klaus Schwab who literally ‘wrote the book’ on the 4th Industrial Revolution. Your work, bringing together as you do all the best minds on the planet, has informed what we are doing …
Our Digital Strategy, embedded within the wider Industrial Strategy, sets out the seven pillars on which we can build our success. And inside that fits our 5G strategy, like a set of Russian Dolls.
Our Strategy covers infrastructure, skills, rules and ethics of big data use, cyber security, supporting the tech sector, the digitization of industry, and digitization of government.”
If you listened to my interview with Wood, you will recognize the technocratic elements of Hancock’s speech: the focus on technology - in particular artificial intelligence, digital surveillance and Big Data collection (which is what 5G is for) - and the digitization of industry (which includes banking) and government, which in turn allows for the automation of social engineering and social rule (although that part is never expressly stated).
"The promised Utopia comes with a price - it sets shackles on our personal freedom.”
Then there’s the direct reference to professor Klaus Schwab, chairman of the World Economic Forum. Schwab is also highlighted in the June 29, 2020, Technocracy.news article, “The Elite Technocrats Behind the Global ‘Great Reset,” which reads, in part:
"The UN Agenda 2030 with its Sustainable Development Goals is claimed to ‘ensure peace and prosperity for people and the planet.’ The actions are said to tackle poverty and hunger, bring better health and education, reduce inequalities, and save the oceans, forests and the climate.
Who can argue against such benevolent goals? But the promised Utopia comes with a price - it sets shackles on our personal freedom …
The leading partners of the United Nations Global Goals project reveal the real technocratic agenda that lies behind the polished feel-good façade - it involves a plan to fully integrate mankind into a technological surveillance apparatus overseen by a powerful AI.
The current pandemic scare has been a perfect trigger to kickstart this nefarious agenda … The current COVID-19 crisis is seen by the World Economic Forum and its chairman Klaus Schwabas the perfect trigger to implement their grandiose technocratic plan. Big Tech will come to ‘rescue’ the world.
In June 2020, Schwab declared … the need of a Great Reset to restore order in a world steeped in panic, conflict and economic turmoil:
‘The COVID-19 crisis has shown us that our old systems are not fit anymore for the 21st century. It has laid bare the fundamental lack of social cohesion, fairness, inclusion and equality. Now is the historical moment in time, not only to fight the real virus but to shape the system for the needs of the Post-Corona era.
We have a choice to remain passive, which would lead to the amplification of many of the trends we see today. Polarization, nationalism, racism, and ultimately increasing social unrest and conflicts.
But we have another choice, we can build a new social contract, particularly integrating the next generation, we can change our behavior to be in harmony with nature again, and we can make sure the technologies of the Fourth Industrial Revolution are best utilized to provide us with better lives.’
This techno-fascist recipe will then, in an utmost non-democratic fashion without any public debate or skeptic inquiry, soon be integrated into the agenda of G20 and the European Union - relabeled as the Great Green Deal …
Unsurprisingly, Klaus Schwab fails to mention his own and his cronies’ role in creating this global economic mess in the first place - as it was ‘foreseen’ with stunning accuracy in World Economic Forum’s and Bill Gate’s Event 201 (October 2019) and in the Rockefeller Foundation report Scenarios for the Future of Technology and International Development (2010).”
The U.N.’s central role in the technocratic agenda is hard to miss once you start looking. As reported by the U.N.’s Department of Global Communications April 22, 2020, in an article about climate change and COVID-19:
"As the world begins planning for a post-pandemic recovery, the United Nations is calling on Governments to seize the opportunity to ‘build back better’ by creating more sustainable, resilient and inclusive societies…
‘With this restart, a window of hope and opportunity opens… an opportunity for nations to green their recovery packages and shape the 21st century economy in ways that are clean, green, healthy, safe and more resilient,’ said UNFCCC Executive Secretary Patricia Espinosa in her International Mother Earth Day message … It is therefore important that post-COVID-19 stimulus packages help the economy ‘grow back greener’ …
As Governments approve stimulus packages to support job creation, poverty reduction and economic growth, UNEP will help Member States ‘build back better,’ and capture opportunities for leap-frogging to green investments in renewable energy, smart housing, green public procurement and public transport - all guided by the principles and standards of sustainable production and consumption. These actions will be critical to fulfilling the Sustainable Development Goals.”
Here too, we see the technocratic agenda shining through.
As described by Wood (see interview hyperlinked above), technocracy is an economic system based on the allocation of energy resources, which necessitates social engineering to control the population and the technological infrastructure to automate this control.
Rather than being driven by supply and demand and free enterprise, this system is one in which companies are told what resources they’re allowed to use, when, and for what, and consumers are told what they are allowed to buy - or rather, rent, judging by the World Economic Forum video above.
If you need something, you’ll be allowed to rent it. You probably won’t even own the clothes on your back.
Everything will be “fair” and “equitable.” There will be no need for hard work, ingenuity or higher-than-average intelligence.
Everyone will be the same - with the exception of the technocrats themselves, of course. And in true social engineering fashion, they tell us we will be “happy” in our 24/7 enslavement to boot.
It’s important to realize that one way by which this globalist plan is being pushed forward is through the creation of new global laws. Gates already wields powerful influence over global food and agriculture policy, in addition to his influence over global health and technology (including banking and digital IDs).
The Great Reset, or the “build back better” plan, specifically calls for all nations to implement “green” regulations as part of the post-COVID recovery effort. It sounds like a worthwhile endeavor - after all, who doesn’t want to protect the environment?
But the end goal is far from what the typical person envisions when they hear these plans. The end goal is to turn us into serfs without rights to privacy, private ownership or anything else.
To get an idea of just how dystopian a future we might be looking at, consider Microsoft’s international patent WO/2020/060606 for a “cryptocurrency system using body activity data.” The international patent was filed June 20, 2019. The U.S. patent office application, 16128518, was filed September 21, 2018. As explained in the abstract:
"Human body activity associated with a task provided to a user may be used in a mining process of a cryptocurrency system. A server may provide a task to a device of a user which is communicatively coupled to the server.
A sensor communicatively coupled to or comprised in the device of the user may sense body activity of the user.
Body activity data may be generated based on the sensed body activity of the user.
The cryptocurrency system communicatively coupled to the device of the user may verify if the body activity data satisfies one or more conditions set by the cryptocurrency system, and award cryptocurrency to the user whose body activity data is verified.”
The U.S. patent application includes the following flow chart summary of the process:
This patent, if implemented, would essentially turn human beings into robots. If you’ve ever wondered how the average person will make a living in the AI tech-driven world of the future, this may be part of your answer.
People will be brought down to the level of mindless drones, spending their days carrying out tasks automatically handed out by, say a cellphone app, in return for a cryptocurrency “award.” I don’t know about you, but I can think of better, more enjoyable ways to spend my time here on Earth.
The World Economic Forum - A Trojan Horse
I’ve mentioned the World Economic Forum multiple times already in this article, and it, along with the U.N., is at the heart of the global takeover agenda.
As noted in the Canadian Truth blog post, “World Economic Forum Wheel of Evil”:
"… this is about two things, the implementation of the UN SDG’s [Sustainable Development Goals] and the WEF [World Economic Forum] Fourth Industrial Revolution. End game: total Technocratic lock-down where they control every aspect of our lives and all resources on the planet.”
The blog post includes the following illustration, created and released by the World Economic Forum, showing the widespread impact of the COVID-19 pandemic and the global response to it. If you go to the original site for the illustration, you’ll also find listings of publications, videos and data relating to all of these facets.
In short, the pandemic is being used to destroy the local economies around the world, which will then allow the World Economic Forum to come in and “rescue” debt-ridden countries.
As mentioned earlier, the price for this salvation is your liberty.
The World Economic Forum will, through its financial bailouts, be able to effectively control most countries in the world. And, again, one of the aspects of the technocratic plan is to eliminate nation borders and nationalism in general.
None of it is pleasant reading, but it’s important to understand where we’re headed. We no longer have the luxury of sticking our heads in the sand and waiting for the bad news to pass.
The COVID-19 pandemic has dramatically widened the economic gap between average people and the wealthy elite, with billionaires raking in trillions of dollars in mere months.
Without the competition from small businesses, large multinational companies have been allowed to gobble up business, expanding both their wealth and their influence, while extreme poverty has risen for the first time in two decades.
If you think the Great Reset and the Green New Deal are going to even out this financial disparity and turn the world into an equitable Utopia, you’re bound to be disappointed.
The globalist plan isn’t about creating a better world for the average person. Microsoft’s patent illustrates what the plan heralds for us.
The medical tyranny and censorship of anti-groupthink that has emerged full-force during this pandemic are also part and parcel of the Great Reset. After all, if they won’t allow you to own anything, and they want to put biosensors into your body to turn you into a cryptocurrency mining minion, do you really think they’re going to let you make medical decisions for yourself?
Over the past several months, Gates has made the media rounds discussing the need to silence dissenting views and information about the virus, it’s treatment and the vaccines being made.
According to a survey cited by RT, less than half of all Americans now say they would not take the COVID-19 vaccine even if they were paid $100 to do it.
There are good reasons for this hesitancy, as trials are starting to reveal serious side effects.
For Gates, who is funding no fewer than six different COVID-19 vaccines, this is no small problem. In an October 2020 interview, Gates urged American health officials to start “thinking about which voices will help reduce the hesitancy, so we can get a level of vaccination that really has a chance of stopping” the pandemic.
Despite the risks associated with these novel mRNA vaccines, which have never before been approved for human use, and despite the fact that children and adolescents have a minuscule risk of serious illness or death from COVID-19, vaccine proponents like Dr. Paul Offit are now calling for children to be added to the COVID-19 trials.
Hopefully, the number of parents willing to offer up their children as guinea pigs will be few.
Orwell's 1984 Summary
Check out George Orwell's 1984 Video SparkNote: Quick and easy 1984 synopsis, analysis, and discussion of major characters and themes in the novel.
In closing, keep in mind that technocracy is inherently a technological society run through social engineering.
This is why there’s such a strong focus on “science.” Anytime someone dissents, they’re therefore accused of being “anti-science,” and any science that conflicts with the status quo is declared “debunked science.”
The only science that matters is whatever the technocrats deem true. Logic, however, will tell you that this cannot be so.
Science is never settled. Science is never one-sided. Science can be wrong. Getting to the truth demands that an issue be looked at from many different angles.
Over the past year in particular, scientific inquiry and inquisitiveness has been censored and stifled to an astonishing degree. If we allow it to continue, the end result will be devastating.
We must keep pushing for transparency and truth. We must insist on medical freedom and personal liberty.
Do not allow yourself to be bullied into silence by those who counter your objections with “anti-science” or “conspiracy-theory” slurs.
The future of mankind is at stake. Be brave. Resist tyranny.
The researchers have found that most of the previous studies into the sweeteners touting their alleged “health advantages” over using sugar as a sweetener, were written or sponsored by the companies that produce the products.
"A trio of researchers from John Hopkins University in Maryland, the University of California San Francisco, and Australia’s University of Sydney took an extensive look at 31 past reviews on the potential weight loss effects of artificial sweeteners.
They found that studies directly funded by sweetener companies or published in industry-funded journals were more likely to find positive health benefits compared to reviews funded independently or by the competing sugar industry.
Similarly, reviews authored by scientists who had a relevant financial conflict of interest were also less likely to shine a harsh light on sweeteners, either directly via positive results or by putting a positive spin on negative results when discussing their conclusions."
"In the 1950s, studies showing a link between coronary heart disease (CHD) and sugar intake started to emerge.
When the sugar industry (which many not-so-affectionately call “Big Sugar”) got wind of this not-so-sweet news, they paid scientists to downplay the link and promote saturated fat as the culprit instead, a new study has revealed.
The research, published in JAMA Internal Medicine, was based on thousands of pages of Sugar Research Foundation (SRF) documents, reports, and statements that Cristin E. Kearns, a postdoctoral fellow at UCSF, discovered in the basement at Harvard University.
The SRF (known today as The Sugar Association) sponsored its first CHD “research project” in 1965 – a literature review published in the New England Journal of Medicine. The review’s objective was established by SRF, and the group contributed articles for inclusion and received drafts. The SRF’s funding and role was not disclosed.
Why is this a big deal?
Big Sugar paid Harvard scientists the equivalent of about $50,000 in today’s dollars to influence the review, and subsequently spent $600, 000 ($5.3 million in 2016 dollars) to teach “people who had never had a course in biochemistry… that sugar is what keeps every human being alive and with energy to face our daily problems.”
For years many industries have delayed the publication of research that may put their products in a bad light, others have simply paid off researchers to point the finger of blame at other products, as did the Sugar Association in 1967.
The revelations over sweeteners come as no surprise, but they should remind us that we need to do our own research rather than taking something at face value just because there was a “study.”
This isn’t new. The FDA upholds these studies all the time, and products that could literally kill us end up on the store shelves marked as safe, false nutritional information that supports the sugar lobby and the grain lobby is touted as the truth, and Americans get sicker and fatter as a result.
Industries and individual companies have paid researchers to lie or distort the truth on their behalf in order to sell more of their products. Not only is this shameful behavior from the companies, but also from the researchers that compromised their science to accommodate them.
The results of such spurious research have an even further effect. Fewer people start to trust medical and scientific research - including well-executed and honest research.
The answer as always it to look behind the headlines, find the counter arguments, track down the source of the funding, and make your decisions accordingly.
PS: The best quality low-carb sweetener we’ve gotten our hands on is Agave 5 – you can find it here.
Like Tobacco And Big Pharma, The Sugar Industry Has Manipulated Research For 50 Years
Don’t you love people who cling to scientific research without ever questioning who sponsored that research? Using archival documents, a new report published by JAMA Internal Medicine examines the sugar industry’s role in heart disease research.
The study suggests that the sugar industry sponsored research to influence the scientific debate to cast doubt on the hazards of sugar and to promote dietary fat as the culprit in heart disease. Governments worldwide agreed just like they did with the tobacco industry and big pharma.
The sugar industry was instrumental in influencing the prevailing thinking about fat, obesity and related diseases holding that quantifying calories should be a principal concern and target for intervention.
Part of this thinking is that consumed calories - regardless of their sources - are equivalent; i.e. ‘a calorie is a calorie’. There needs to be a greater qualitative focus on the sources of calories consumed (i.e. a greater focus on types of foods) and on the metabolic changes that result from consuming foods of different types.
Calorie-focused thinking is inherently biased against high-fat foods, many of which may be protective against obesity and related diseases, and supportive of starchy and sugary replacements, which are likely detrimental.
The intake of dietary fructose increased significantly from 1970 to 2000. There has been a 25% increase in available “added sugars” during this period. The average person has a daily added sugar intake of 79 g (equivalent to 15% of energy intake), approximately half of which was fructose.
A report - authored by Cristin E. Kearns, Laura A. Schmidt, and Stanton A. Glantz of the University of California, San Francisco - examined internal documents from the Sugar Research Foundation (which later evolved into the Sugar Association).
The Sugar Research Foundation started doing research on coronary heart disease research in 1965; its first project was a literature review published in the New England Journal of Medicine in 1967.
The review focused on fat and cholesterol as the dietary causes of coronary heart disease, downplaying sugar consumption as a risk factor.
UCSF researchers have recently claimed sugar should be controlled like alcohol and tobacco to protect public health since it is fueling a global obesity pandemic, contributing to 35 million deaths annually worldwide from non-communicable diseases like diabetes, heart disease and cancer.
Like manufacturers from both Big Tobacco and Big Pharma who denied the presence of any danger in their products and even spent millions of dollars trying to discredit the research that points to problems, the Sugar Industry followed suit.
While the Sugar Research Foundation’s funding and role were not disclosed, internal documents reveal that the organization set the review’s objective, contributed articles to be included, and received drafts - a “smoking gun” linking the industry’s influence over the research it paid for, writes Marion Nestle in a related commentary, also published in JAMA Internal Medicine.
“This 50-year-old incident may seem like ancient history, but it is quite relevant, not least because it answers some questions germane to our current era. Is it really true that food companies deliberately set out to manipulate research in their favor?
Yes, it is, and the practice continues,” writes Nestle, the Paulette Goddard Professor of Nutrition and Food Studies at NYU Steinhardt."
“Industry-sponsored nutrition research, like that of research sponsored by the tobacco, chemical, and pharmaceutical industries, almost invariably produces results that confirm the benefits or lack of harm of the sponsor’s products, even when independently sponsored research comes to opposite conclusions,” Nestle adds.
Nestle says the report should serve as a warning to policymakers, researchers, clinicians, and journalists in carefully interpreting studies funded by food companies with vested interests in the results, and highlights the need to find better ways to fund studies and to prevent and disclose conflicts of interest.
Thirty One Life Lessons I’ve Learned In 31 Years + Twenty Harsh Truths To Help You Get Your Shit Together November 25 2020 | From: TheUnboundedSpirit / EducateInspireChange
Life is, in a sense, like school. Each and every day we are learning from our experiences, and the lessons we acquire allow us to move from one stage of life to the next.
But not all of us are good students. Some people learn fast, and thus can quickly grow in understanding and evolve into higher states of consciousness. Others are slow learners, finding it extremely difficult to pass life's tests, and as a result have to repeat them again and again.
Today I turn 31 years old, so I chose to spend some time reflecting on the most important lessons I've learned in my life so far. If you're wondering what those are, I wrote them down so that you can have the chance to read them and benefit from them as much as I did.
It feels weird to think that 31 years ago I was born in this world. A couple of decades ago, I remember that my thirties seemed incredibly far in the future. But before I realized it, here I am, over 30 and heading toward 40.
So far my life’s journey has been an incredible ride. I’ve gone through tons of ups and downs, both of which have taught me important lessons that allowed me to better understand myself and the world, as well as to build my life the way I want.
In this post I’d like to share with you some of the greatest life lessons I’ve learned during the course of my life, in hopes that you will find them as helpful as I did. Without further ado, here they are:
1. This Moment is all There is
The past is gone and the future is not here yet.
The present moment is everything you have, so be sure to immerse yourself in it.
2. I Don’t Know Everything, and That’s Totally Fine
To learn, you need to admit that you don’t know it all. In fact, not everything can be known, and that’s part of the beauty of life, which is an ongoing learning journey.
3. Pain Isn’t Your Enemy
It’s just a messenger trying to show you that there’s something amiss. So instead of hiding from your pain or suppressing it, face it and pay attention to what it has to show you, so that you can understand why it’s there and how to get rid of it.
Here are a few examples: A deep breath of fresh air, a walk in nature, a conversation with a good friend, and a look into the eye of a beloved partner. Cherish them before someone puts a price tag on them too.
5. Money Isn’t Just Neutral Energy
As it exists today, money is creating artificial scarcity, which results in competition, inequality, poverty, greed, and violence (among other things). Therefore, money is quite a negative force in our world.
Three times a day you can choose peace over violence - that is, with each meal you eat. Is your food cruelty-free or does it involve unnecessary suffering and death?
7. Sitting is Killing You
Walk, run, dance, stretch. Move your body throughout the day.
8. Don’t Trust the Mainstream Media
Most big media companies are owned by people whose main intention is to emotionally manipulate you in order to keep you hypnotized, sell you lies and empty your pockets.
Speak out your mind, express your feelings and let people see who you truly are. Being true to yourself and others is the only way to build genuine relationships and live an authentic life.
10. You Can’t Change Anyone
But your actions can inspire many to change.
11. Mistakes are Part of Learning
Don’t fear making mistakes, for they have important things to teach you. But make sure you don’t repeat them.
12. Failures are Stepping Stones to Success
Each failure leads you one step closer to success, so don’t shy away from it. Try, fail, and then try again for as long as it takes to achieve your goals.
13. Simplicity is the Key to Living Well
To live simply means to let go of what is unimportant and focus on what truly matters to your happiness and well-being.
Casting a vote once every few years alone doesn’t give people much freedom in collective decision-making. Especially if you consider that what they vote for is nothing but power-hungry politicians who are lying to them in order to serve their vested interests.
You must have heard this countless times. But it’s totally true - some books have the power to turn your life upside down, in a tremendously positive way. Just make sure to carefully pick which books to read, otherwise they can be a waste of your time. Click here for a list of books I highly recommend.
18. Use Your Words Wisely
Words can hurt or heal, so always be mindful of how you speak.
To economize means to carefully manage resources and to avoid unnecessary expenditure or waste. Our economy, however, is fundamentally based on consumption - that is, on the mindless and constant extraction of natural resources and production of waste.
Make each moment count, start today to work on something you love. We only have 960 months to live (and that’s if we get to 80). We talk about “one day” but why wait?
2. The People Around You Don’t Live Forever
Kiss the one you love every chance you get. Tell all of the people who mean something to you now whilst you can.
3. What Other People Think is None of Your Business
Everyone is entitled to their own opinion but it doesn’t mean their perception is right, other peoples opinions don’t define you.
Realise happiness starts where you are right now. Looking away and waiting for it separates you from now and wastes time. Live in this moment now, make each moment count.
5. You Can’t Make Everyone Happy
That’s their responsibility, not yours.
6. Accept Your Flaws
Embrace who you are, imperfection is uniqueness.
7. Use Your Feeling to Guide You
You attract what you feel, pay attention to how you feel and use it to guide you to what you want.
You know who will give you everything? Yourself. Don’t wait around for people, take responsibility and take power of your own life.
9. Worrying is a Waste of Time
Worrying is a waste of imagination, 99% of the stuff you worry about doesn’t happen and won’t matter even in 5 years. Remember your time is limited, use your imagination to picture the things you want instead.
10. Express Your Talents
Imagine lying in the bed in hospital, being on the death bed, and standing around you are the ideas, the dreams, the talents that have been given to you by the universe, the talents that you didn’t develop the skills that you never did anything with, standing around you looking at you with large angry eyes saying “We came to you! Only you could have given us life, now we have to die with you forever.” What idea do you have right now that you could be acting on?
Life is hard for everyone and everyone is dealing with their own battles, there is always someone worse off than you. If you don’t like something, change it.
13. Share What You Know
Your knowledge could change someone’s life, no one can take away what is yours, sharing and helping other people will come back to you.
14. Invest in Yourself
Knowledge is power, become obsessed with learning and improving yourself, it will change your life.
So many people quit when they are so close, if everything was easy, everyone would do it, usually when you are right at that very point of winning, life will test you. Embrace the challenges.
16. Express Yourself
People may not know how you feel. You only live once, relationships are important.
17. Always Look at the Bigger Picture
Get curious, learn, ask questions. There is more to everything.
18. No One Can Hurt You Without Your Mental Consent
It’s your choice whether you let something hurt you or not.
19. The Universe Loves Action
When you get inspired by an idea or get an impulse to do it, act upon it. The universe likes speed, don’t doubt or second guess, all you have to do is act when it comes.
20. Time is Everything
Learn to manage time, it’s the only thing you can’t get back.
‘Something Extremely Bogus Is Going On’: Musk Says He’s Positive & Negative For Covid-19 After 4 Tests In 1 Day& 70 Whistleblowers From NSW Police Fed Up With Enforcing Oppressive CV Rules Warn ‘A Global Dictatorship Is Occurring’
+ COVID-19: A Precursor To A ‘New World Order?’ AKA “The Great Reset” & Dispel The “Magical Belief In Authority”: Confront The Greed For Power And Violence; Strengthen Community Feelings November 24 2020 | From: RT / CollectiveEvolution / EnvirowatchRangitikei / GlobalResearch / Various
Futurist entrepreneur Elon Musk has expressed doubts about the accuracy of coronavirus tests, after claiming to have been both diagnosed and cleared of the disease on the same day.
The SpaceX and Tesla founder wrote on Twitter that he had been administered four tests for the virus over a 24-hour period, leading to contradictory results.
[Note: Reference links may be found in the source articles above]
“Two tests came back negative, two came back positive. Same machine, same test, same nurse. Rapid antigen test from BD," Musk said.
Something extremely bogus is going on. Was tested for covid four times today. Two tests came back negative, two came back positive. Same machine, same test, same nurse. Rapid antigen test from BD.
The tweet sparked a heated debate on social media, with some accusing the billionaire businessman of being “irresponsible” by suggesting that Covid-19 tests are unreliable. However, Musk paid no attention to the criticism and expressed further skepticism about the testing process in follow-messages.
One Twitter user speculated that Musk’s apparent false-positive illustrates why countries are seeing “spikes” of the disease, to which the Tesla CEO responded: “If it’s happening to me, it’s happening to others.”
The billionaire also agreed with a comment that noted that “revenues from tests are likely not bogus & very consistent.”
He explained that he had symptoms of a “typical cold” but was otherwise not exhibiting any health problems purportedly linked to Covid-19.
The 49-year-old has been an outspoken critic of government response to the spread of the virus. Previously, he denounced lockdown policies adopted in countries around the world, arguing that only at-risk people should quarantine “until the storm passes.”
He also said that neither he nor his family will likely take future coronavirus vaccines once they become available, saying that the response to the pandemic has “diminished [his] faith in humanity.”
70 Whistleblowers From NSW Police Fed Up With Enforcing Oppressive CV Rules Warn ‘A Global Dictatorship Is Occurring’
An excerpt below from their letter to the NSW Police Commissioner (Copied plus link to full letter below):
“Many members of the force are fed up with the approach to enforce oppressive rules placed upon the population in the name of COVID-19 and the looming mandatory vaccinations. We feel a real calling to do our part to stop this oppression, so we are writing to you to raise the following issues:"
Predictably of course, ‘it’s a conspiracy’. 70 Policeman can’t all be conspiracy theorists surely?
Police Force employees have ‘choice’ as to whether or not to receive vaccines;
The Police believe that all members of the community also have choice around receiving vaccines;
Police do not participate in anyway in the forcing of vaccines upon the population;
That the Police Association start preparing to defend Police employees who choose to not be vaccinated
To raise the alarm that there is a global dictatorship occurring and the Police Force is being used as a tool to push these global and corporate agendas upon the population; and
To warn the Police Force not to simply acquiesce to these requests, rules and laws and to act in the best interest of its population, not tyranny of government”
The video below shows Australian lawyer Peter Little presenting this information at the Police Headquarters in Melbourne.
Live at Police Headquarters at 313 Spencer Street Melbourne Australia:
He questions also the Governemnts failure to monitor influenza and the disappearance of records about the Rain-Making Control Act 1967.
Original Facebook video source is here. The Bitchute version above is a backup in case of censorship.
Key / highlighted points from the pages of the PDF follow:
Page 1:
October 26, 2020
To: Michael Fuller
Police Commissioner of New South Wales
RE: Open Letter Concerning the Police Enforcement of ongoing COVID-19 restrictions.
We are writing to you to raise concerns we have about the use of the police to enforce the ongoing restrictions placed upon our citizens relating to COVID-19, which has seriously eroded community trust in our great police force.
Since the Attorney General Declared a State of Emergency for the novel coronavirus, our governments have acted upon certain powers to impose restrictions on its citizens, using the police to enforce their rules.
Due to the novel nature of the SARS-CoV-2 virus, most people concurred that certain restrictions should be followed, until more was learnt about the virus.
With the initial modelling from the Imperial College in the UK [1] and the Peter Doherty Institute here in Australia, indicating a catastrophic number of cases that would severely burden our hospital system and could result in up to150,000 Australian deaths[2], it is easy to comprehend why our governments would respond as they did and why the vast population would comply.
With these frightening projections it became evident that we needed to find a way to quickly diagnose the disease. Yet the Centre for Disease Control in the US states that “no quantified virus isolates of the 2019-nCoV are currently available”.[3]
So even without the virus being isolated, the RT PCR test was picked to become the gold standard for testing. We note that the modelling was later found to have serious calculation errors,such that experts who later reviewed it have said”no serious scientist gives (it) any validity”. [4, 5]
And now the RT PCR test has been proven to be unreliable at best, with the inventor stating it should “never be used to diagnose infectious disease”,because it cannot tell if what it detected is alive or dead. [6, 7, 8]
This test is still being relied upon to make critical decisions in the interest of public health and safety.In the same way we cannot use an inaccurate speed detection device to proctor a civilian’s speed, the same must be demanded of a faulty RT PCR test and as such, police should not in any way mandate testing for covid-19, or rely on any outcome of the results.
Now that we have almost 12 months of statistical data that can be relied upon, in place of flawed computer modelling, these statistics show a reality that is far from the modelling projections, which were relied upon by National Cabinet in their response.
Page 2:
For example, we now know that around 45% of people who contract the virus are asymptomatic[9] and asymptomatic transmission is between 0-2.2% [10].
We also know that 80% of people who contract the virus will only have mild symptoms [11] and it is overwhelmingly the elderly and immunocompromised who are at risk of severe symptoms that could result in death. [12]
At the time of writing, the world-wide survival rate for covid-19 is 97.3%. [13] The ordinary flu is 99.9%. [14] Furthermore, statistics clearly show that while the confirmed cases may be on the rise, the percentage of deaths is plummeting. Here are some statistics which reflect this reality:
Page 3:
Sweden and Taiwan did not enforce lockdown on its citizens like much of the world did. Although Sweden failed to take better precautions to protect the elderly in the early stages, their death rate is comparable, and Taiwan’s is outstanding:
The statistics show there is a high infection rate across the globe, but very low deaths; regardless of whether there was forced lockdowns or not. What we can derive from analysis of this is that these two distinctly different ways have resulted in much the same outcome.
Page 4:
We note from the recent Federal budget, huge debt and unemployment, is that our lockdowns have created a series of problems that now seem to outweigh the threat this virus poses.In our line of work, we know that the socioeconomical problems created here will transpire into a greater threat down the track, as people struggle to deal with the collateral damage this is causing.
We have been told that the advice from the World Health Organization is a key aspect to the National Cabinet response, yet Dr David Nabarro of the WHO recently stated “We in the World Health Organization do not advocate lockdowns as the primary means of control of this virus,” [15]
So in spite of the facts, as they stand now, it would appear that the National Cabinet has been lagging in its capacity to adapt to the reality ofthe situation and this is causing them to fail in their duty to respond in proportion to the risk.
The risk being overwhelmingly with the elderly and immunocompromised. [16, 17, 18] What is even more concerning is the prohibition on prescribing hydroxychloroquine for COVID-19[19],when over 121 peer reviewed scientific studies have shown it to be effective in treating and preventing the disease [20, 21, 22].
Instead,the federal government has done a vaccine deal with AstraZeneca[23] and Australians told we cannot expect to go back to normal until a vaccine arrives.
AstraZeneca has been found guilty of offences relating to off-label or unapproved promotion of medical products, making false claims,kickbacks and bribery, consumer protection violation, healthcare offences, government-contracting violations and more.
Since 2000 they have been fined over US$1.1billion dollars for these offences and violations. [24] Still, they have been granted protection from future product liability claims relating to its COVID-19 vaccine[25].
Alarmingly, Prime Minister Scott Morrison stated they will make the vaccine “as mandatory as you can possibly make it” [26], in spite of the criminal record of its producer, their exemption from liability claims, the fact we already have at least two approved and extremely safe medications in Ivermectin [27] and hydroxychloroquine; shown to be effective treatments and the reality that the virus does not pose a serious threat to the healthy.
It seems these decisions appear to be corporate interests, not in the best interests of public health and wellbeing as is claimed.
All this indicates that the ongoing restrictions on the healthy population is a disproportionate response, yet the police are still expected to continue to enforce these measures and at risk of being forced to vaccinate against a disease that is showing not to be virulent, with a vaccine that has had no long-term safety studies and then forcing it upon the population.
The evidence would suggest resources are better directed to protect the vulnerable. We are concerned with the legitimacy of the actions we are being told to take against the citizens of Australia. States and territories cannot rise above the commonwealth constitution as well as international treaties we are signatories to, yet this is occurring.
Under the state of emergency, the emergency requirements are qualified and restricted by the significant fact that emergency requirements and directions cannot request an individual to be isolated, detained, tested, vaccinated, medically treated or bodily searched in the absence of a biosecurity control order issued to the individual.
Page 5:
These measures are referred to as biosecurity measures and are captured under Subdivision B of Division 3 of Part 3 of Chapter 2 of the Biosecurity Act 2015. [28] (Emergency and public health powers, at the States and Territories, do not provide a carte blanche to breach an individual’s human rights by isolating them, or detaining them or testing them without the proper required notifications and risk assessments first).
There is an inter-governmental agreement [29] which places the Commonwealth in the lead as well as the Australian Health Sector Emergency Response Plan [30]. This ensures that the States and Territories act to compliment the Federal Legislative Framework.
Article 7 of the international convention of civil and political rights states “no-one shall be subjected to torture or to cruel inhuman, or degrading treatment or punishment, in particular, no-one shall be subjected without his free consent to medical or scientific experimentation.”[31]
Article 27 of the Vienna convention on the law of treatise “A party may not invoke the provision of its internal law as justification of its failure to perform a treaty.” [32]
Article 7 of the Australian human rights commission Act 1986 states “no-one should be subjected to torture or to cruel inhuman or degrading treatment or punishment, in particular, no-one shall be subject without his free consent to medical or scientific experimentation. [33]
Section 109 of the commonwealth of Australia constitution states “when a law of a state is inconsistent with a law of the commonwealth, the latter shall prevail, and the former shall to the extent of the inconsistency be valid.” [34]
With federal and international legislation breaches, it will be taken that we are complicit and consensual in their undertaking on the people of Australia, potentially rendering us criminally liable under the Crimes Act 1914 [35], as well as the Criminal Code Act 1995 [36].
Many members of the force are fed up with the approach to enforce oppressive rules placed upon the population in the name of COVID-19 and the looming mandatory vaccinations.
We feel a real calling to do our part to stop this oppression, so we are writing to you to raise the following issues:
Police Force employees have ‘choice’ as to whether or not to receive vaccines;
The Police believe that all members of the community also have choice around receiving vaccines;
Police do not participate in anyway in the forcing of vaccines upon the population;
That the Police Association start preparing to defend Police employees who choose to not be vaccinated
To raise the alarm that there is a global dictatorship occurring and the Police Force is being used as a tool to push these global and corporate agendas upon the population; and
To warn the Police Force not to simply acquiesce to these requests, rules and laws and to act in the best interest of its population, not tyranny of government. Recently letters have been written to our leaders from the legal fraternity, including high profile Judges and QC’s [37], The Australian Institute for Progress penned by 30 public
Page 6:
intellectuals including 15 professors of relevant disciplines, one of whom is an advisor on health and well-being economics to the UK government[38], Advocate Me’s open letter to all leaders seeking to review disproportionate response to SAR-CoV-2 [39], as well as hundreds of doctors from the medical fraternity [40].
Despite the government continually parroting that they are following the advice of ‘the experts’, all these requests have been ignored and the police used as the enforcers of these senseless rules.
We ask that you consider the information provided herein and the NSW Police Force statement of values: –
Each member of the Police Force is to Act in a manner which:
Places integrity above all;
Upholds the rule of law;
Preserves the rights and freedoms of individuals;
Seeks to improve the quality of life by community involvement in policing;
Strives for citizen and police personal satisfaction;
Capitalises on the wealth of human resources;
Makes efficient and economical use of public resources; and
Ensures that authority is exercised responsibly.
Many of us believe that we are removing our own rights and freedoms by enforcing these rules upon the community, including our family and friends. And the community are confounded by the intensified police enforcement around peaceful freedom protests and how inconsistent this was when compared with the Black Lives Matter protests. This contradiction is further destroying public confidence.
We are reaching out to all our fellow police officers across the country, to write a similar letter to their respective police commissioners, or sign our form to show your support for this stance, which we have called Cops for Covid Truth. With trust in our police force now seriously eroded, we ask you to consider now challenging the necessity of the ongoing restrictions to restore community trust,by being an integral part of returning our State and Country back to normality.
Regards,
Alexander Cooney
Senior Constable Coffs/Clarence Highway Patrol NSW Police Force Grafton Police Station 5 Duke Street Grafton NSW 2460
COVID-19: A Precursor To A ‘New World Order?’ AKA “The Great Reset” & Dispel The “Magical Belief In Authority”: Confront The Greed For Power And Violence; Strengthen Community Feelings
What does the “New World Order” refer to? It refers to the idea that many crises’ are manufactured by powerful groups of people in order to justify a more heightened national security state.
While some might view this as an unfounded conspiracy theory, there are numerous examples and pieces of evidence that show this not to be the case.
Many world leaders have spoken about a ‘new world order’ on multiple occasions, pointing to greater global collaboration, control and surveillance to pull it all off.
In Brief:
The Facts: Global chaos has always been a precursor to big change on our planet, this initiative by 'the powers that be' is now being called "The Great Reset."
Reflect On: Are problems created by those who want to propose the solution? Do naturally occurring issues become hi-jacked to implement greater measures of control? Are we living through an epidemic of ccontrol?
It’s an agenda of greater centralized power for those already in great positions of unelected power, a movement that slowly takes away many of our rights and freedoms under the guise of good will.
A heightened national security state in our current times includes more surveillance and data acquisition, using more methods for tracking the general population, their actions, intentions, and even their currency.
Again, it’s no conspiracy theory, Edward Snowden made it quite clear that the NSA was tracking US citizens all along, illegally, without their permission, and they even denied doing this under oath.
Given that, to think that any government institution or politician will come out and be honest about their real plans would be silly, we already know the lengths some have gone to cover up these projects.
Doctors For Truth - 100,000 Doctors, Scientists Stand Up to Expose the Lies of this Fake Pandemic
This article will examine the use of continuous ‘threats,’ sometimes manufactured to impose more security measures on the population, what the “Great Reset” is, and why it’s important to recognize the measures taken by those who claim this is a step towards more authoritarianism.
It’s time to truly begin having serious conversations about these controversial topics, and learning to empathize with differing positions on them.
The need for collective sensemaking is at an all-time high, and if we are constantly divided and unable to perceive reality from the perspective of anybody else, we are going to struggle to create meaningful change. This is both a time to consume information and to develop ourselves personally to become effective changemakers.
The Focus on Problems or Threats
The justifications used to bring about this new world are often continuous threats such as climate change, disease outbreaks like what we are experiencing with COVID-19, terrorism etc, and measures taken against these things are marketed as necessary for our protection and well being.
As a result of this marketing, we are slowly being conditioned to view our freedom as selfish and harmful to others. This is a whole conversation on it’s own, but for now we’ll stop here.
Many, especially so called “fact-checkers” brush off the idea of some form of ‘increase in centralized power’ or ‘new order’ as a “conspiracy theory,” but the idea has plenty of legitimacy.
This type of legitimacy has gained even more traction thanks to people like Julian Assange, Edward Snowden and William Binney.
Binney and Snowden, both NSA whistleblowers have spoken at large about threat propaganda multiple times.
Obviously, this isn’t covered by mainstream media and anybody who does give a voice to people like Snowden and Binney seem to be subjected to censorship by social media platforms. People like Assange, who is on the brink of death in a UK prison awaiting US extradition, are branded as traitors or a danger to society, while Edward Snowden lives in exile.
A great quote comes to mind from Nils Melzer, Human Rights Chair of the Geneva Academy of Int Humanitarian Law and Human Rights, Prof of Int Law at the University of Glasgow, and UN Rapporteur on Torture and Other Inhumane or Degrading Treatment or Punishment. I’ve used it before.
"How far have we sunk if telling the truth becomes a crime? How far have we sunk if we prosecute people that expose war crimes for exposing war crimes?
How far have we sunk when we no longer prosecute our own war criminals? Because we identify more with them, than we identify with the people that actually expose these crimes. What does that tell about us and about our governments?
In a democracy, the power does not belong to the government, but to the people.
But the people have to claim it. Secrecy disempowers the people because it prevents them from exercising democratic control, which is precisely why governments want secrecy.”
Snowden has spoken about many threats, recently emphasizing that the Coronavirus is being used, like the threat of terrorism, to impose more overreaching control measures on the human population.
William Binney has relayed the idea that the NSA is not interested in protecting us and our freedoms, but rather “total population control.”
This type of censorship happens on all scales at various levels, we here at Collective Evolution have experienced it with demonetization and the loss of our ability to post on our Facebook page of 5.5 million followers, and people like Joe Rogan have experienced it for simply discussing ‘controversial’ topics.
It feels as though Freedom of speech has never been so threatened, and yet we are in a critical time where it is greatly needed.
It’s not just credible whistleblowers we should be listening to, there are actual real world examples, data and evidence.
When it comes to the coronavirus for example, multiple renowned medical doctors and professors from around the world continually relay their strong opinion that we are dealing with something far less dangerous than what is being presented, and that it is perhaps on par with the flu, or no more dangerous than other respiratory viruses that already infect hundreds of millions and kill tens of millions a year.
45,000 doctorsand scientists have now signed The Great Barrington Declaration strongly opposing lockdown measures, and some of the most reputable scientists in the field have been sharing the same information while being completely ignored, censored and “fact-checked.”
Coupled with this type of censorship comes a massive amount of mainstream media coverage around the world, constantly beaming out the exact opposite narrative to alternative media, and ridiculing it along the way. Government scientists are given the spotlight while all others, who seem to be in the majority, seem to be muzzled.
Strange times indeed.
It’s a shame that science has become so politicized, used, and manipulated to possibly help push forth this “New World Order” or greater centralized power and mass surveillance.
As with COVID-19, “false flag terrorism,” the idea that ‘the powers that be’ create, fund, and arm terrorist organizations like ‘ISIS’ and ‘Al-Qaeda’ comes with an abundance of evidence.
That’s why Congresswoman and military veteran Tulsi Gabbard introduced the “Stop Arming Terrorist” act, because this DOES happen. 9/11 was a great example used to justify the invasion of Iraq.
These events seem to be used in an attempt to invade under the guise of good-will. Again, this is a narrative that is threatening to powerful interests, which is why it’s usually ridiculed and downplayed any time it does happen to make its way into the mainstream.
"The truth is, there is no Islamic army or terrorist group called Al-Qaeda, and any informed intelligence officer know this.
But, there is a propaganda campaign to make the public believe in the presence of an intensified entity representing the ‘devil’ only in order to drive TV watchers to accept a unified international leadership for a war against terrorism.”
- Robin Cook, Former British Foreign Secretary. (Source)
"The statesmen will invent cheap lies, putting the blame upon the nation that is attacked, and every man will be glad of those conscience-soothing falsities, and will diligently study them, and refuse to examine any refutations of them; and thus he will by and by convince himself the war is just, and will thank God for the better sleep he enjoys after this process of grotesque self-deception.”
What is “The Great Reset?” It’s an initiative that was started by the World Economic Forum. The House of Windsor, and the UN are prime executive co-producers. Top sponsors include BP, Mastercard and Microsoft. According to them:
"There is an urgent need for global stakeholders to cooperate in simultaneously managing the direct consequences of the COVID-19 crisis. To improve the state of the world, the World Economic Forum is starting The Great Reset initiative."
They go on to explain all of the “disrupts” we are facing is “changing the traditional context for decision making.
The inconsistencies, inadequacies and contradictions of multiple systems – from health and financial to energy and education – are more exposed than ever amidst a global context of concern for lives, livelihoods and the planet.”
"COVID and all other crises’ we face, according to the World Economic Forum,
…shape the recovery, this initiative will offer insights to help inform all those determining the future state of global relations, the direction of national economies, the priorities of societies, the nature of business models and the management of a global commons.
Drawing from the vision and vast expertise of the leaders engaged across the Forum’s communities, the Great Reset initiative has a set of dimensions to build a new social contract that honours the dignity of every human being."
WEF founder and Executive Chairman Klaus Schwab said:
"The world must act jointly and swiftly to revamp all aspects of our societies and economies, from education to social contracts and working conditions… Every country, from the United States to China, must participate, and every industry, from oil and gas to tech, must be transformed.
In short, we need a ‘Great Reset’ of capitalism.”
Schwab’s message was amplified by Prince Charles when he said:
"We have a golden opportunity to seize something good from this [COVID-19] crisis. Its unprecedented shockwaves may well make people more receptive to big visions of change.”
Jennifer Morgan (current head of Greenpeace) stated:
"We set up a new world order after World War II… We’re now in a different world than we were then. We need to ask, what can we be doing differently?
The World Economic Forum has a big responsibility in that as well - to be pushing the reset button and looking at how to create well-being for people and for the Earth.”
All of this requires changes in human behaviour. Behaviour modification, if you will.
This, according to many, is authoritarianism under the guise of good will and will no doubt include measures being placed upon the citizenry at the expense of our freedoms.
We are currently living in it, and we are currently experiencing the beginning of “The Great Reset.”
We are also experiencing a great divide amongst the citizenry, there are many who believe in these pushes for change having been made to believe they are necessary and for the common good, and then there are others who believe it’s simply a step towards a more authoritarian human experience.
The former Apostolic Nuncio to the United States of America and Vatican insider, Carlo Maria Viganò, for example, recently wrote a letter to Donald Trump. In it, he mentions The Great Reset.
"A global plan called the Great Reset is underway. Its architect is a global élite that wants to subdue all of humanity, imposing coercive measures with which to drastically limit individual freedoms and those of entire populations.
In several nations this plan has already been approved and financed; in others it is still in an early stage.
Behind the world leaders who are the accomplices and executors of this infernal project, there are unscrupulous characters who finance the World Economic Forum and Event 201, promoting their agenda.
The purpose of the Great Reset is the imposition of a health dictatorship aiming at the imposition of liberticidal measures, hidden behind tempting promises of ensuring a universal income and cancelling individual debt.
The price of these concessions from the International Monetary Fund will be the renunciation of private property and adherence to a program of vaccination against Covid-19 and Covid-21 promoted by Bill Gates with the collaboration of the main pharmaceutical groups.
Beyond the enormous economic interests that motivate the promoters of the Great Reset, the imposition of the vaccination will be accompanied by the requirement of a health passport and a digital ID, with the consequent contact tracing of the population of the entire world.
Those who do not accept these measures will be confined in detention camps or placed under house arrest, and all their assets will be confiscated.”
According to Ellen Brown, an attorney and chair of the Public Banking Institute:
"No country will be allowed to opt out because it would be endangering the rest…
Who is behind the Great Reset and what it really entails are major questions that need their own article, but suffice it to say here that to escape the trap of the globalist agenda, we need a mass awakening to what is really going on and collective resistance to it while there is still time.
There are hopeful signs that this is happening, including massive protests against economic shutdowns and restrictions, particularly in Europe; a rash of lawsuits challenging the constitutionality of the lockdowns and of police power overreach; and a flood of alternative media exposés despite widespread censorship.
Life as we know it will change. We need to ensure that it changes in ways that serve the people and the productive economy, while preserving our national sovereignty and hard-won personal freedoms.”
The Takeaway: It’s Time To Think More Deeply
Not to oversimplify but, around 50 percent of Americans believe those who voted for Donald Trump are dumb and perhaps racist. The other half who voted for Trump and feel the other side is evil and stealing the election.
Faith in institutions is crumbling, and there is good reason for this.
It isn’t simply the doubt sewn from loud voices like Trump or his supporters, it comes from years of now evidential lies, deceit and a deep calling for meaningful change.
The election is one of many examples, along with COVID-19, that shows how separated people are not only in America, but all over the world. We live in a collective narrative founded on a basic idea that we are separate from one another, and thus our world gives us this reality.
What many of us call authoritarian measures are not really forced upon the population as we might think. There are a great deal of people who see and believe the value of more security, digital currencies, more tracking etc, and they feel they will be safer with it all. Is this story true?
That’s for you to decide, but exploring WHY we agree to these things is the bigger conversation we must have.
There are always justifications in the minds of people who oppose what you or I may believe. This requires dialogue, not ridicule, it requires understanding and it requires people to empathize and understand each other, and where we are all coming from.
These days, it’s not just knowing information and facts that will create change, it’s changing ourselves, how we go about communicating and re-assessing the underlying stories, ideas and beliefs that form our world.
We have to practice these things if we truly want to change. It’s more important than what we know, because ultimately if we can’t treat each other like we want to be treated, we are not going to get anywhere.
As much as we point our finger to the global elite and authoritarian government measures, which are happening, real change comes from educating ourselves, awakening to a deeper understanding as to who we are, treating everybody with respect, and having dialogue with those who disagree with us.
Further, we have to begin asking ourselves why we get so triggered the way we do.
The deep change we all know is possible on this planet will be created from a different state of consciousness. One we must foster and develop.
Playing the blame game, at a deeper level, doesn’t do much.
That being said, it’s an important step to ask why our world is the way it is and identify issues we face, especially ones that are put in place by governments that do not resonate with a lot of people.
It doesn’t matter so much whether or not we agree that something like The Great Reset is planned conspiracy, it’s more important to deeply ask ‘is this the world we truly want to create? Is this what we are limited to creating, and if not, what holds us back? What power would we have if as a collective to come together and do something?
If we don’t want people who don’t truly represent us to have tremendous amounts of power, then we have to wake up and realize that it’s not them who has to change, it’s us.
Dispel The “Magical Belief In Authority”: Confront The Greed For Power And Violence; Strengthen Community Feelings
Hand Over Power to No One! According to the findings of the human sciences of anthropology, sociology and psychology, human beings have a healthy mind and natural powers of judgement by nature.
This common sense works empirically, i.e. it makes concrete judgements based on everyday life experience and observation. Man is also autonomous. Autonomy is the state and attitude to life of self-determination, independence and self-administration.
Philosophically, it is the ability to see oneself as a being of freedom and to act from this freedom. Equipped with these special abilities, however, man always hands over to another person the power to decide on his life and his future.
In the democracies of the Western world, for example, corrupt politicians are elected to high government offices and are regarded as respectable authorities.
With this attribution, politicians immediately associate claims to power, create a relationship of superiority and subordination and enforce the instructions of their clients – the global “power elite” – on the citizens.
In doing so, they pursue policies at the expense of the working population that enable a nefarious “billionaire clique” to steal together so many billions of dollars that they can buy almost anyone: from corrupt politicians to the World Health Organisation (WHO).
Many adults react to these politicians like children or like primitive man reacted: in the form of a “magical belief in authority”:
Uncritical and clouded by moods, feelings and promises of happiness. And that has consequences: The belief in authority inevitably leads to a sense of belonging to authority, which usually triggers the reflex of absolute spiritual obedience and paralysis of the mind.
Hand over power to no one! To no other human being, but also to no supernatural being. After all, we are embedded in the community of conspecifics on whose support and solidarity we could build.
However, the majority of adult humans cling to an imaginary supernatural power and try to influence it favourably. Is this an expression of human helplessness and lack of self-confidence?
Not only is the intelligence of full-minded adults intimidated and degraded, but also their will and self-confidence. In many cases this leads to fatalism, feelings of guilt, depression and the inability to connect with fellow citizens.
For this reason, all possible motivations of the deplored human reaction patterns must be explored – in particular authoritarian and religious education at home and school and the influence of society.
All those involved in the education of children and young people should do their utmost to avoid using authoritarian education methods to make the adolescent generation “obedient” and “compliant” on its way into adult life.
Nor should they burden them with the mind-numbing “ballast” of religion. Only in this way can the young people, as free thinking, courageous and compassionate citizens, one day steer the world in a different direction.
Fostering and Strengthening Community Feelings Rather than Violence and Greed for Power
Human Nature
It is an incontrovertible insight of scientific psychology that man is a naturally social being, oriented towards the community of his fellow human beings and endowed with a rational faculty, with a natural inclination towards the good, the knowledge of truth and community life.
This characteristic helps him to better recognise the laws of nature or what is right in nature. “Natural law” says that there is something that is right by nature. It differs from the so-called “positive right” established by man in that man is entitled to it simply because he is human.
Coronavirus: From Pathogen to Profit - Dr. David E. Martin
Since it is not created by any ruler or majority decision of any kind, it is pre-state law. This means that the laws of a state must be measured critically against natural law.
Knowing what is right by nature makes it possible to confront totalitarian ideologies and dictatorships from a firm human standpoint and to feel a sense of outrage against injustice and inhumanity. (1)
People also always strive for a better life. The desire for peace and freedom is at the forefront. All people want to be free and live in peace, without war and without violence.
But the reality is different. As long as people remain silent, we have democracy. As long as they remain silent, pay taxes and join the military at the right time, we have democracy. But this democracy is nothing more than a “silent dictatorship”.
The Clandestine “Transformation” of the “Silent” Into the “Open” Dictatorship
Not only the events of the past 120 years, with two World Wars and countless other wars, but also the events surrounding the corona pandemic declared by the World Health Organisation (WHO) in early 2020 have given us a thorough lesson in the historical significance of power and violence.
In the following months, the “transformation” of the form of government of democracy or “silent dictatorship” into the form of “open dictatorship” was initiated in countless countries on behalf and for the benefit of the global “billionaire and power elite”.
The fear of the supposedly highly infectious virus led to many people being paralysed, public life in several states being shut down, at the same time fundamental civil liberties were “honed” and the military was also brought into readiness.
It seemed as if “time had gone out of joint” (Shakespeare). (2) However, some alert contemporaries suspected even then that something was “rotten in the state of Denmark”. But there was no public social discourse about the narratives of the ruling class.
Dissenters are either not listened to at all or discredited by the media and society.
But gradually it became clear what sinister plans the self-appointed “elite” was pursuing: For example, all citizens of the world are to be vaccinated and, in addition, controlled by implanted nano-chips.
This “mass protection vaccination” may well lead to a population decline. Two of these “world citizens” who have been pursuing such plans for a long time are former US Secretary of State Henry Kissinger and the wealthy US entrepreneur William “Bill” Henry Gates III. (3) On 1 April 2020 the “Washington Post” published an article by Gates to this effect. (4)
But Kissinger and Gates are not the only elite figureheads. All the others also command and use a whole range of controlling, disease-causing or even deadly “tools” for their diabolical plans: One of them is a technology for mind control, the “mind control technology”.
These include microwaves, artificial intelligence, quantum computers, robotics, 5 G and 6 G, nanotechnology, identification chips and much more. It is also worth mentioning the philosophical line of thought they favour, “transhumanism”, one of the most dangerous ideas in the world.
Transhumanism seeks to expand the limits of human possibilities intellectually, physically or psychologically by using technological processes.
“(They) don’t rob banks, they become bank executives.”
If one sifts through the biographies of the “elite” in politics, business, the military and also in science and art, it reads in places like pure “psychopathology”, the doctrine of pathological changes in the life of the soul.
The Canadian criminal psychologist Robert D. Hare lists a total of 20 criteria for this in his Psychopathology Checklist (PCL-R). (5)
People with this personality disorder are not only overrepresented among criminals and in prisons, but also in leading positions. But with one difference, the founder of psychopathology research said: “(They) do not rob a bank, they become bank directors.” (6)
The Call for “Social Distancing” Also Has Hidden Aims
“Social Distancing” is not proven to be an effective protection and is highly controversial among medical and psychological experts because the relationship with conspecifics is as important to us humans as the air we breathe. The restriction of social contacts is therefore an attack on human nature and leads to serious consequential damage for young and old.
We must also be concerned about school children and young people.
Due to the increasing digitalisation of the entire education system and the lack of relationships with teachers and classmates through homeschooling, socially disadvantaged children are deprived of educational opportunities and stand out due to hyperactivity, emotional problems and behavioural disorders.
The isolation also leads to isolation of the young people. Despite countless virtual contacts with their peers, a large number of them live alone in their own “Facebook world”, where internet addiction is on the rise.
This development has been consciously driven forward for years. Because the isolated young person, isolated from his peers, whose family and community roots are cut off, can be better controlled, manipulated and instrumentalised for violent excesses and wars. (7)
Fomenting Irrational Fears as a Means of Discipline and Domination
When citizens get their fears and panic under control, they see through the lies of the rulers and their diabolical plans.
This is why people’s natural fears of illness and death are constantly being fuelled by the mass media. This leads to a “flooding of reality by the imaginary” (Klaus-Jürgen Bruder), to a “high level of aggressive emotionality” and a “return of the block-keeper mentality and denunciation”. (8)
Fear and anxiety are part of human life. But when unscrupulous despots – whether medieval popes, modern dictators or supposed “philanthropists” – deliberately fuel this everyday fear from the outside, they want to satisfy their greed for power and discipline and dominate peoples.
In doing so they are doing the work of the devil and not the work of God (F. J. Strauß).
Most people react to this diabolical “game” of the ruling class with a reflex of obedience.
Dr. Roger Hodkinson on How Governments Responded to COVID
Dr. Roger Hodkinson, Chairman of the Royal College of Physicians and Surgeons committee in Ottawa, CEO of a large private medical laboratory in Edmonton, Alberta and Chairman of a Medical Biotechnology company selling the COVID-19 test:
"There is utterly unfounded public hysteria driven by the media and politicians. This is the biggest hoax ever perpetrated on an unsuspected public.
There is absolutely nothing that can be done to contain this virus. This is nothing more than a bad flu season.
It's politics playing medicine and that's a very dangerous game.
There is no action needed... .Masks are utterly useless. There is no evidence whatsoever they are even effective.
It is utterly ridiculous seeing these unfortunate, uneducated people walking around like lemmings obeying without any evidence. Social distancing is also useless...
Positive testing results do NOT indicate clinical infection.
It is simply driving public hysteria and ALL testing should STOP immediately.... using the province's own statistics the risk of death under 65 is 1 in 300,000.
The scale of the response is utterly ridiculous... all kinds of business closures, suicides.... you're being led down the garden path."
Large parts of the population are like confused and paralysed because of the “hysterisation of the pandemic fear” (K.-J. Brother).
Very quickly they declare themselves willing to accept the drastic and questionable restrictions of basic rights guaranteed by the state without contradiction as necessary and without alternative – such as the fundamental right of personal freedom and the right to physical integrity. (9)
If one looks at the worldwide horror scenario and the shock paralysis of the citizens, one is reminded of Naomi Klein’s bestseller “The Shock Strategy”.
In it, she demonstrates that neo-liberal governments have single-mindedly exploited the confusion and paralysis of the people after political and economic crises or natural disasters to quickly crack the capitalist economic system in its purest form.
It was a “shock treatment” before the population had the strength to resist again. This geopolitical operation of the “global elite” with its diabolical agenda is a crime against humanity.
The Pitiful and Sinister Role of the “Journaille” (Press Rabble)
The mass media could make an important contribution to educating and encouraging people, as they are committed under international agreements to providing truthful information to citizens and to peace. But the opposite is the case. In 1883, John Swinton, the former veteran of the New York Press Corps, gave a speech to fellow journalists on the occasion of his retirement.
This honest and sharp reckoning with his own guild is highly topical and does not only concern America:
"There is no such thing as an independent press in America, (…) You are all slaves. You know it and I know it. Not one of you dares to express an honest opinion. If you expressed it, you would know in advance that it would never appear in print. (…)
The journalist’s business in New York is to twist the truth, to lie bluntly, to pervert, to revile, to grovel at the feet of mammon, and to sell his own country and people for his daily bread, or, which is the same thing, for his salary. (…) We are tools and servants of rich men backstage. We are jumping jacks.
They pull the strings and we dance. Our time, our skills, our life, our possibilities are all the property of other people. We are intellectual prostitutes.”(10)
From “Great Reset” to the “Great Transformation”
On 3 June 2020, the World Economic Forum WEF in Geneva announced a “unique twin summit” in Davos as a consequence of the “global health crisis” for 2021. The theme is to be “The Great Reset”.
The WEF defines the “Great Reset” as “a commitment to jointly and urgently build the foundations of our economic and social system for a fairer, more sustainable and resilient future”. (11) Klaus Schwab, founder and Chairman of the World Economic Forum, writes:
"We can bring a better world out of this crisis, (…). To achieve a better outcome (than the 1930s Depression, R.H.),the world must act together and quickly to renew all aspects of our societies and economies, from education to social contracts and working conditions.
Every country, from the United States to China, must participate, and every industry, from oil and gas to technology, must be transformed. In short, we need a ‘major reset’ of capitalism”.(12)
Despite many promises of salvation made by the Kabbalistic World Economic Forum and the predatory International Monetary Fund IMF, it is not to be expected that there will be a de-globalisation and a turning away from inhuman neo-liberalism.
The ruling “elite” will use the meeting in Davos to further advance the global control of citizens by destroying nation states.
The announcement of a “Great Reset” is now complemented by the call for a “Great Transformation”, a shift of power in the global political and economic sector that goes hand in hand with the pandemic.
What is meant is a “great transformation” of the global industrial society towards a society of sustainability. (13)
According to this, a “One World Government” is planned under the UN umbrella – and, since China’s totalitarian regime serves as a model, a socialist “One World Government”.
“Have the courage to use your own intellect!” (Sapere aude!)
The worldwide exceptional situation requires us to be wise, to distinguish between truth and lie and to act accordingly.
But it is not only the “simple” people who are failing in their resistance against the emerging totalitarianism and fascism. The academic circles are also failing to live up to their responsibility. Immanuel Kant defined “Enlightenment” (image below) in 1784 as follows:
"Enlightenment is man’s exit from his self-inflicted immaturity. Immaturity is the inability to use one’s intellect without the guidance of another.” (14)
According to Kant, human immaturity is self-inflicted when it is not a lack of understanding that is the reason, but the fear of using one’s own understanding without the guidance of another. Kant coined the motto of the Enlightenment: “Have the courage to use your own intellect!”
Enlightenment is thus the maxim to think for oneself at all times.
According to Kant, one reason for immaturity is laziness and cowardice. Being underage is comfortable and independent thinking is a “grumpy business”. In this way it becomes easy for others, says Kant, to become “guardians” of these underage people. These guardians would also do everything possible to ensure that the underage people would not only find the step to maturity arduous, but also dangerous.
Reducing Greed for Power and Violence by Fostering and Strengthening Community Feelings
Since politics is being prepared in people’s minds and hearts and people tomorrow will act as they think today, a priority task for the future will be to educate our fellow citizens: The purpose of enlightenment efforts is to purify human consciousness from individual and collective prejudices.
More important than the Enlightenment, however, is education. Deep psychological insight has made clear the immense importance of education.
We know today that man is the product of his education to such an extent that one can hope to educate people through better, i.e. psychological, methods of education who will be immune to the entanglements of the power madness.
Thus, pedagogy at home and at school must renounce the authoritarian principle and the use of violence. Educators must adapt to the child’s spiritual life with true understanding, respect the child’s personality and turn to him or her in a friendly manner. Such an education will produce a type of person who has no “subject mentality” and will therefore no longer be a docile tool for those in power in our world.
In today’s violent culture, however, the path of the individual inevitably comes under the influence of the desire for power and domination. All models and ideals under which the child of our culture grows up are coloured by the will to power.
The illusion of violence takes possession of the soul of the individual at a time when he or she has neither conscious insight nor a developed sense of justice. Our task for the future is therefore above all to nurture and strengthen community feelings.
Common Sense Instead of Belief in Authority and Magic Worldview
Religious and authoritarian education – and the reflex of absolute spiritual obedience
A vivid example of the psychological problem of absolute obedience is provided by the autobiographical notes of Rudolf Höß, the former commander of Auschwitz. In his childhood, Höß underwent an upbringing based on strictly religious and military principles and therefore reacted as an adult with unrestricted obedience, a “cadaver obedience”. (15)
Ignatius of Loyola, the founder of the Jesuit order, wrote an illuminating text in the middle of the 16th century, to which the German word “Kadavergehorsam” is derived. In the version published by the Congregation of the Order in 1558 it reads:
"We should be aware that each one of those who live in obedience must be guided and directed by Divine Providence through the Superior, as if he were a dead body that can be taken anywhere and treated in any way, or like an old man’s staff that serves wherever and for whatever purpose he wishes to use it.”(16)
In the following critical thoughts about religion and its effect on human feeling, thinking and acting, the author draws on the science of psychology. A further basis are the works of the French enlightener and encyclopaedist Baron Paul-Henri Thiry d’Holbach and other critics of religion.
Holbach’s religion-critical book “System of nature or of the limits of the physical and moral world” was published in 1770 under fictitious authorship and caused a scandalous stir. (17) A short excerpt from the author’s foreword gives an idea of this:
"Man is unhappy only because he misjudges nature. His mind is so polluted by prejudice that one might think he was condemned to error forever: it is so firmly bound up with the veil of opinion that has been spread over him since childhood that it can only be removed with the greatest difficulty.
A dangerous ferment has been added to all his knowledge, making it necessarily wavering, unclear and false; to his misfortune he wanted to cross the boundaries of his sphere and tried to rise above the visible world; (…).”(18)
Two years after the publication of “System of Nature”, the religion-critical book “Common Sense” appeared. To escape persecution by the “holy inquisition”, Holbach published his thoughts under the name of the already deceased free-thinking priest Jean Meslier. (19)
1878 a German translation was published. Orthography, punctuation and sentence order are adopted unchanged in the following quotations. Already in the introduction Holbach writes:
"It is a wasted effort to want to heal people from their vices, if one does not begin with the healing of their prejudices. One must show them the truth so that they may know their most expensive interests and the true motives which lead them to virtue and their true happiness. (…)
Let us tell people to be righteous, charitable, moderate and sociable, not because their gods demand it, but because one must seek to please one’s neighbours; let us tell them to abstain from sin and vice, not because one is punished in another world, but because evil punishes itself already in this life. (…).”(20)
The term “religion” encompasses a multitude of different world views, the basis of which is the respective belief in certain supernatural, supernatural or extrasensory powers.
The teachings of a religion about the sacred and transcendental are based on the belief in communications of certain mediators. They are not provable in the sense of the theory of science. Sceptics and critics of religion, on the other hand, seek only controllable knowledge through rational explanations.
For example, there is the question of the doubling of human existence in body and soul and the corresponding doubling of nature into a this world and a hereafter. These “doublings” are an “original sin” of religion. Common sense assumes the unity of body and soul. Therefore man does not have to strive for a reunification beyond earthly life. There are also no double truths, one historical and one religious.
In contrast to the worldview and science based on causality, religion is a magical worldview.
Religious belief places a magical illusory world next to reason and knowledge, to which scientific analysis does not have to come too close. Religions consider themselves to be something above all else, something that cannot – and should not – be the subject of empirical-rationalist investigation.
They are of the opinion that science is not at all capable of grasping the field of religion, which is of divine origin, in its totality. Of course, it remains the inalienable right of religious man to draw revelations of the highest religious truths from the words of the Bible. But it is also the unconditional duty of the researcher to infer historical truths only from absolutely perfect testimonies.
The religious willingness to believe is supported to a large extent by the more or less great suggestibility of almost all people. “Suggestibility” is a personality trait that expresses the extent of “receptivity” to suggestions.
Thoughts, feelings, perceptions or ideas are taken over from outside which do not correspond to reality and which are supposed to influence the person mentally and psychologically in a manipulative way.
Suggestibility in children is very high, which is why young people are particularly susceptible to manipulative influence. In addition, children can tend to confuse suggested information with what they have experienced. (21)
Through religious suggestion not only the intelligence is intimidated, but also the will and the self-confidence, because apostasy and leaving the church has been considered a grave sin since apostolic times and as infidelity and Judas’ deed. The healthy person, who is not mentally or psychologically manipulated, only expresses judgements after he has checked them against experience and recognised them as not contrary to reason.
The Influence of Society on People’s Religious Attitudes
Man is not only a natural being, but also a socialised being. This means that his so-called metaphysical need to believe in a supernatural being is also influenced and directed by social factors: by class factors, especially economic factors. Religion will therefore continue to exist as long as material and thus spiritual and mental need exists.
Every form of society has at all times its specific religious-philosophical-ethical ideologies. It is the thought structures of the respective ruling class that serve to spiritually legitimise their rule – ultimately their political and economic power over the minds of the people.
This power is founded on the ideological concept of “authority”. And this in turn is supported by the idea of the “absolute”, which eludes any possibility of control through experience. In the sense of the ruling class, the highest power of such an ideology is “God” – as “unrecognisable”, “ultimate” cause and ethical legislator.
According to Karl Marx the metaphysical need of man is only a protest against the misery of this world. He came to the conclusion that man could not change until the structure of society had changed. As long as not everyone could live in this world with dignity and without fear, there would be a belief in a better hereafter, in a balancing justice. (22)
Sigmund Freud (1856-1939), the founder of psychoanalysis, was also a critic of religion. He taught that religious ideas were so effective because they were illusions, arising from very old, fierce human desires: the desire for a just world order, for freedom from want, and the desire for eternity of personal existence.
The Intimidation of Reason and Reason Begins in Childhood
Man is born neither religious nor believing in God. The mentally healthy child, however, is born into a society where delusional ideas and illusions predominate. As soon as the little child shows the first emotional impulses and learns to speak, it is “taken into care” by society, i.e. by its parents and the church. It is made clear to him that his nature must not develop freely with regard to his feeling for nature and his world view.
If the consciousness of the “I” then forms in the 3rd year of life, God and the devil of the religion concerned already intervene and teach the child not to trust in itself, but to let itself be led and dominated by supernatural powers and to pray fervently so as not to fall prey to their revenge.
The child gets to know the fear of demons. The “virtues” of submissiveness, obedience and humility are imprinted. The belief in demons taught to the child finds its crystallisation point in the ideas of devil and hell.
Fear generates emotional reactions in the child which are directed against the human being: it is afraid of the human being. The young person grows up and as an adult is not able to cooperate and live together.
One uses the years of man’s strongest suggestibility to inoculate him with mystical ideas, to make him immune to the use of reason in religious and ideological matters and to bind him to a certain religious institution. The child must not be allowed to develop naturally and without force. This puts very strong and paralysing pressure on the child’s souls.
Outlook
The church’s religious doctrine presupposes the world view of primitive man. This prerequisite is no longer given by modern science.
We find the “divine”, the ideal in nature, in the lawful, no longer in the mystical. We must no longer allow ourselves to be distracted by wonderful fables from a vague transcendent and must work for the real here and now.
From the very beginning, we must impart to young people in education values that correspond to our present day and that are still valid in adulthood.
The school has the task of putting morality on an earthly basis. The pupil must be shown that there is a high level of ethics even without beliefs and that it has existed in various countries for thousands of years.
It must be shown to him that the justification of ethical teachings from an inner drive and the social coexistence of people is at least as understandable and compelling as the religious justification.
We should help the young person to express his or her own being without being restricted by a denomination. This person will generally also be moral, because since he lives in harmony with himself, he also lives in harmony with his environment.
And also vice versa: whoever lives in harmony with his environment is usually also balanced himself and lives according to the ethical “commandments”.
The school also has to strengthen the young people’s own strength and self-confidence and distract them from their own beloved salvation of soul to the salvation of the general public, to the necessity of helpfulness, to an ideal which no longer sees the highest moral strength in the religious but in the social idea, in the creation of a “paradise” of humanity on earth.
Propaganda Is The Art Of Overwhelming Logic November 23 2020 | From: JonRappoport
One type of mind control involves defeating logic as a method of thinking.
Modern formulations of basic logic begin with the statement: You can’t have A and not-A. Which is a way of saying contradictions are unacceptable.
But if the vaccinated person is protected and immune, then coming into contact with an unvaccinated person will bring no danger.
Therefore, the notion that vaccinated people are A) protected but not - A) in danger is absurd, a contradiction.
The easiest way to defeat logic is through deficient education. Never teach logic. Ignore it. Instead, teach specific values. Teach anything except logic. Don’t teach children how to spot contradictions.
Here is another example of non-logic: A ballot initiative passed by the voters of Maui County is illegal, because it set up a new law regarding commercial agriculture, when in fact commercial agriculture is regulated by state and federal laws, which trump county laws.
There are several ways of attacking this proposition, but the most basic way is:
Science doesn’t operate according to what officially favored scientists claim. It doesn’t operate according to consensus at all.
It operates according to what is true and valid - and the best way to ascertain that is through the broadest possible analysis accomplished by a wide variety of independent researchers, who attempt to replicate prior experimental results.
Even then, there is always room for reasoned dissent.
For instance: what are the full tacit implications of the statement found at the end of every television drug ad - “ask your doctor if X is right for you.”
For instance (at a more sophisticated level): when the press reports a new outbreak of disease, claiming it is caused by a particular virus…how was that assertion determined?
On what grounds do scientists say they have found the virus that causes the disease?
I ran headlong into that one while writing my first book, AIDS Inc.: Scandal of the Century, and the further I investigated HIV as “the cause of AIDS,” the more I was stunned by the lack of logic present in the argument.
Logic is a sword.
Learning its many uses, while still young, creates formidable students and citizens.
Austrian Supreme Court Has Ruled Against COVID Restrictions
Get Organized
Us for Them, a group campaigning for reopening schools and protecting children's rights in the U.K. 
First Glitches Emerge In COVID-Vax Rollout; Alaska Health Worker Suffers 'Serious Allergic Reaction'
The Awakening Mind
The Experiment
Social Engineering - The War On The Higher Mind Of Humans: Here’s Why You Should Consider Converting Your Music To A=432 Hz
“You’ll own nothing” - And “you’ll be happy about it.” Instead, you’ll rent everything you need, and it’ll be delivered by drone right to your door.
Common Sense Versus Magic Worldview
CURRENT AFFAIRS
DNA (deoxyribonucleic acid)
Cycle 1: target x 2 (2 copies)
The lower the Ct used to detect the virus fragment, the higher the viral load is considered to be (high).
How to Deprogram Yourself
Fostering and Strengthening Community Feelings Rather than Violence and Greed for Power 
